As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on June 11, 2012

Registration No. 333-179141

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

Amendment No. 3

to

FORM S-1

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, LLC

(to be converted into Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc.)

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Delaware   5812   20-8453116

(State or other jurisdiction of

incorporation or organization)

 

(Primary Standard Industrial

Classification Code Number)

 

(I.R.S. Employer

Identification Number)

930 S. Kimball Ave., Suite 100

Southlake, TX 76092

(817) 601-3421

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number,

including area code, of registrant’s principal executive offices)

Mark S. Mednansky

Chief Executive Officer

Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC

930 S. Kimball Ave., Suite 100

Southlake, TX 76092

(817) 601-3421

(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agent for service)

Copies to:

 

Jeffrey A. Chapman

Peter W. Wardle

Gibson, Dunn & Crutcher LLP

2100 McKinney Ave., Suite 1100

Dallas, TX 75201

tel: (214) 698-3100

fax: (214) 571-2900

 

Colin J. Diamond

White & Case LLP

1155 Avenue of the Americas

New York, NY 10036

tel: (212) 819-8200

fax: (212) 354-8113

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon as practicable after the effective date of this registration statement.

If any of the securities being registered on this form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box:     ¨

If this form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering:     ¨

If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.     ¨

If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering:     ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

 

Large accelerated filer   ¨   Accelerated filer   ¨   Non-accelerated filer   x   Smaller reporting company   ¨

(Do not check if a smaller reporting company)

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

 

 

Title of Each Class

of Securities to be Registered

 

Proposed Maximum

Aggregate Offering

Price(1)(2)

 

Amount of

Registration Fee

Common Stock, no par value per share

  $100,000,000   $11,460(3)

 

 

 

(1) Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee under Rule 457(o) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
(2) Includes offering price of additional shares that the underwriters have the option to purchase. See “Underwriting.”
(3) Previously paid.

The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.


EXPLANATORY NOTE

Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC, the registrant whose name appears on the cover of this registration statement, is a Delaware limited liability company. Immediately prior to the effectiveness of this registration statement, Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC will be converted into a Delaware corporation and renamed Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. Shares of the common stock of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. are being offered by the prospectus.


LOGO


LOGO

 

BOSTON HOUSTON ANCHORAGE DENVER OMAHA DALLAS

250 Northern Avenue 5061 Westheimer Road 320 West 5th Avenue 1745 Wazee Street 222 South 15th Street 3232 McKinney Avenue Boston, MA 02210 Houston, TX 77056 Anchorage, AK 99501 Denver, CO 80202 Omaha, NE 68102 Dallas, TX 75204

CHARLOTTE LAS VEGAS AUSTiN HOUSTON PALM DESERT NEW YORK

4725 Piedmont Row Drive 3925 Paradise Road 300 Colorado Street 4608 Westheimer Road 73505 El Paseo 50 Rockefeller Plaza Charlotte, NC 28210 Las Vegas, NV 89169 Austin, TX 78701 Houston, TX 77027 Palm Desert, CA 92260 New York, NY 10020

DALLAS NEW YORK BALTi MORE iNDiANAPOLiS RALEiGH PHOENiX

5251 Spring Valley Road 1221 Avenue One East Pratt Street 3316 East 86th Street 414 Glenwood Avenue 2425 E. Camelback Road, Dallas, TX 75254 of the Americas Baltimore, MD 21202 Indianapolis, IN 46240 Raleigh, NC 27603 Phoenix, AZ 85016 New York, NY 10020

DENVER BATON ROUGE KiNG OF PRUSSi A SEATTLE WASHiNGTON D.C.

8100 East Orchard Road PHi LADELPHiA 5252 Corporate Blvd. 700 West Dekalb Pike 621 Union Street COMING SOON Greenwood Village 1426 Chestnut Street Baton Rouge, LA 70808 King of Prussia, PA 19406 Seattle, WA 98101 CO, 80111 Philadelphia, PA 19102 ATLANTA

CHARLOTTE LEAWOOD TUCSON COMING SOON

FORT WORTH CHiCAGO 1928 South Boulevard 4501 West 119th Street 1785 East River Road 812 Main Street COMING SOON Charlotte, NC 28203 Leawood, KS 66209 Tucson, AZ 85718 Fort Worth, TX 76102

CHiCAGO LiNCOLNSHi RE WiLMi NGTON

415 North Dearborn Street 250 Marriott Drive 5525 Concord Pike Chicago, IL 60654 Lincolnshire, IL 60069 Wilmington, DE 19803

DALLAS NAPERViLLE

17795 North Dallas Pkwy. 244 South Main Street Dallas, TX 75287 Naperville, IL 60540


LOGO


LOGO


Market and Industry Data and Forecasts

Industry, market and demographic data appearing throughout this prospectus, including information relating to our relative position in the restaurant industry, the projected growth of sales in the U.S. restaurant industry, projected changes in food expenditures and projected changes in the U.S. population, are derived principally from publicly available information, industry publications, U.S. government data, data made available by market research firms, our own data and similar sources, which we believe to be reasonable. None of the independent industry publications used in this prospectus was prepared on our or our affiliates’ behalf. Information in this prospectus concerning the average check at our restaurants is calculated on a per entrée basis and excludes tax and tip.


PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus. This summary does not contain all of the information that may be important to you. You should carefully read this prospectus in its entirety before making an investment decision. In particular, you should read the section entitled “Risk Factors” and the consolidated and combined financial statements and notes related to those statements included elsewhere in this prospectus.

As used in this prospectus, unless the context otherwise indicates, the references to “DFRG,” “Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group,” “our company,” “the Company,” “us,” “we” and “our” refer to Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC together with its subsidiaries prior to the reorganization date and Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries on and after the reorganization date. Unless otherwise indicated or the context otherwise requires, financial and operating data in this prospectus reflects the consolidated business and operations of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC and its wholly-owned subsidiaries prior to the reorganization date and Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. and its wholly-owned subsidiaries on and after the reorganization date.

Our Company

We develop, own and operate three contemporary, high-end, complementary restaurants: Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House, or Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s Steakhouse, or Sullivan’s, and Del Frisco’s Grille, or the Grille. We are a leader in the full-service steakhouse industry based on average unit volume, or AUV, EBITDA margin and comparable restaurant sales growth. We currently operate 32 restaurants in 18 states. Each of our three restaurant concepts offers steaks as well as other menu selections, such as chops and fresh seafood. These menu selections are complemented by an extensive, award-winning wine list. Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille are positioned within the fine dining segment and are designed to appeal to both business and local dining customers. Our Del Frisco’s restaurants are sited in urban locations to target customers seeking a “destination dining” experience while our Sullivan’s and Grille restaurants are intended to appeal to a broader demographic, allowing them to be located either in urban areas or in close proximity to affluent residential neighborhoods. We believe our success reflects consistent execution across all aspects of the dining experience, from the formulation of proprietary recipes to the procurement and presentation of high quality menu items and delivery of a positive customer experience.

We generated revenues of $201.6 million for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011, representing 21.8% total revenue growth and 11.2% comparable restaurant sales growth over 2010. We recorded net income of $9.1 million and adjusted EBITDA of $36.5 million for 2011, representing 2.8% net income growth and 20.8% adjusted EBITDA growth over 2010. Our 2011 operating income and adjusted EBITDA margins were 10.8% and 18.1%, respectively. For the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, we generated revenues of $53.7 million, representing 23.8% total revenue growth and 6.7% comparable restaurant sales growth over the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011. We recorded net income of $5.0 million and adjusted EBITDA of $10.9 million for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, representing 100.7% net income growth and 45.8% adjusted EBITDA growth over the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011. Our operating income and adjusted EBITDA margins for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012 were 15.6% and 20.3%, respectively. For a reconciliation of adjusted EBITDA and adjusted EBITDA margin and a discussion of why we consider them useful, see “—Summary Historical Consolidated Financial and Operating Data.”

 

 

1


Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House

We believe Del Frisco’s is one of the premier steakhouse concepts in the United States. The Del Frisco’s brand is defined by its menu, which includes USDA Prime grade, wet-aged steaks hand-cut at the time of order and a range of other high-quality offerings, including prime lamb, fresh seafood, and signature side dishes and desserts. It is also distinguished by its “swarming service,” whereby customers are served simultaneously by multiple servers. Each restaurant has a sommelier to guide diners through an extensive, award-winning wine list and our bartenders specialize in hand-shaken martinis and crafted cocktails. Del Frisco’s restaurants target customers seeking a full-service, fine dining steakhouse experience. We believe the décor and ambiance, with both contemporary and classic designs, enhance our customers’ experience and differentiate Del Frisco’s from other upscale steakhouse concepts. We currently operate nine Del Frisco’s steakhouses in seven states. These restaurants range in size from 11,000 to 24,000 square feet with seating capacity for at least 300 people. Annual AUVs per comparable Del Frisco’s restaurant were $12.5 million for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011. During the same period, the average check at Del Frisco’s was $100.

Sullivan’s Steakhouse

Sullivan’s was created in the mid-1990’s as a complementary concept to Del Frisco’s. The Sullivan’s brand is defined by a fine dining experience at a more accessible price point, along with a vibrant atmosphere created by an open kitchen, live music and a bar area designed to be a center for social gathering and entertainment. Each Sullivan’s features fine hand-selected aged steaks, fresh seafood and a broad list of custom cocktails, along with an extensive selection of award-winning wines. We currently operate 20 Sullivan’s steakhouses in 15 states. These restaurants range in size from 7,000 to 11,000 square feet with seating capacity for at least 250 people. Annual AUVs per comparable Sullivan’s restaurant were $4.3 million for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011. During the same period, the average check at Sullivan’s was $59.

Del Frisco’s Grille

We developed the Grille, our newest concept, to take advantage of the positioning of the Del Frisco’s brand and to provide greater potential for expansion due to its smaller size, lower build out cost and more diverse menu. The Grille’s menu is designed to appeal more broadly to both business and casual diners and features a variety of Del Frisco’s prime aged steaks, top selling signature menu items and a broad selection of the same quality wines. The Grille also offers an assortment of relatively less expensive entrees, such as flatbread pizzas, sandwiches and salads, all prepared with the same signature flavors, high quality ingredients and presentation associated with the Del Frisco’s brand. We believe the ambiance of the concept appeals to a wide range of customers seeking a less formal atmosphere for their dining occasions. Our first Grille opened in August 2011 at Rockefeller Center in New York City, and we opened a second location in November 2011 in Dallas, Texas. Additional Grille openings are planned over the next year and we anticipate they will range in size from 6,500 to 8,500 square feet with seating capacity for at least 200 people. We are targeting annual AUVs per comparable Grille restaurant between $4.0 million and $6.0 million with an average check of between $45 and $55.

Our Business Strengths

We believe the following are key strengths of our business and serve to differentiate us from our competitors:

Multiple Top Performing Concepts with an Expanding National Platform.     We are one of the nation’s leading fine dining restaurant operators. We currently have 32 restaurants in 26 cities in

 

 

2


18 states in a wide variety of geographic and demographic markets. Our locations that were operating throughout the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011 had AUVs of $6.7 million per location across all concepts, $12.5 million at our Del Frisco’s locations ($9.1 million excluding our New York location) and $4.3 million at our Sullivan’s locations. We believe our New York Del Frisco’s location was the highest grossing restaurant in the steakhouse industry in 2010 and 2011. We base this belief on the fact that our New York location grossed more than the highest grossing restaurant in a 2010 report published by Restaurants & Institutions listing the top 100 grossing individual restaurants in 2009 excluding chains with more than five restaurants. See “Business—Our Business Strengths—Multiple Top Performing Concepts with an Expanding National Platform” for additional information regarding the basis for this belief. Further, we believe we appeal to landlords with desirable locations by offering three complementary concepts adaptable to a variety of areas and venues. In 2011, we expanded our national platform by opening a Del Frisco’s in Boston, Massachusetts and our first two Grille restaurants in New York City and Dallas, Texas.

Operating Model Driving Higher Margins.     Our AUVs and high average check per person, combined with our operating efficiencies, enable us to achieve industry-leading operating margins based on 2011 public company data for U.S. based full-service dining restaurants that generate a majority of their revenues from restaurant operations and excluding companies with a majority of franchised operations. We believe that our success is driven by our consistent execution across all aspects of the dining experience, from the formulation of proprietary recipes to the procurement and presentation of high quality menu items and our focus on providing a positive customer experience. Our entrepreneurial culture and bonus incentives empower and motivate the general manager at each restaurant to act as the owner of his or her restaurant. These general managers meet weekly as a group with senior management to share best practices. Chefs and kitchen staff at each restaurant are responsible for maintaining and ordering their own food inventory, thereby increasing efficiency and reducing waste and the need for additional headcount at the corporate level. We believe we achieve significant cost, quality and availability advantages through centralized sourcing from our primary suppliers of beef, wine and other products. In fiscal 2011, our revenues were comprised 66% of food and 34% of alcohol. We had operating income and restaurant-level EBITDA margins of 10.8% and 23.5% and 15.6% and 25.2% in fiscal 2011 and the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, respectively.

Fine Dining Concepts with Complementary Market Positions.     Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille are fine dining concepts that share a focus on high quality food, individualized interior design and attentive service. The concepts were designed to coexist with one another, each maintaining its own identity and price point. Average checks at Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s were $100 and $59, respectively, for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011, and the targeted average check at the Grille is between $45 and $55. Currently, we operate multiple concepts in close proximity to each other in six of our markets. We believe our complementary positioning will continue to allow us to develop our concepts in a single metropolitan area without competing for customers. We have secured prominent locations for our restaurants and a number of unique sites not typically used for steakhouse locations, including a historic bank building, a redeveloped wharf and former retail space in Rockefeller Center. We believe the locations of our restaurants distinguish us from our competitors, add to the strength of our brands and help drive our AUVs. Furthermore, we believe many landlords and developers seek out our concepts to be restaurant anchors for their developments as our concepts are complementary to upscale national retailers with similar target demographics.

 

 

3


Focus on Innovation.     We have developed and created three concepts in the full-service steakhouse industry. As we have grown our concepts, we have evolved each to incorporate proprietary recipes with bold and flavorful seasonings that reflect our heritage in the Southern United States, extensive wine lists, prominent bar scenes and our “swarming service.” We have positioned the Del Frisco’s brand as a contemporary alternative to the traditional fine dining steakhouse dining concept. We developed Sullivan’s in the mid-1990’s, featuring lower price points and live music to attract a broader clientele. The Grille, opened in 2011, leverages and broadens Del Frisco’s appeal in a less formal and smaller format. We remain committed to evolving our existing concepts to remain relevant to a range of customers.

High Quality Menu Offerings with a Focus on Social Experience and Customer Service.     We believe we provide our customers with a true fine dining steakhouse experience by combining high quality food, atmosphere and service. We offer high quality cuisine across all menu items, with an emphasis on aged beef, fresh seafood and locally sourced ingredients. These offerings are complemented by an extensive, award-winning wine list and a broad cocktail selection. The dining experience is enhanced by our commitment to providing a social atmosphere and décor that includes carefully-selected artwork, private dining rooms and separate bar areas. To further enhance our customers’ dining experience we have a staff of highly-trained employees who undergo an extensive training program and are evaluated regularly by management. These employees provide our “swarming service,” which creates frequent interactions with our customers.

Experienced Executive and Restaurant Management Teams.     Our executive team has extensive experience with an average of over 16 years in the restaurant industry, including significant tenure with our company as well as other high-end restaurant concepts. Our restaurant-level managers are also very experienced, with average tenure at Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s of nine and four years, respectively, and additional experience at other fine dining establishments. Our management team, which includes senior management, regional managers and general managers, meets on a weekly basis to review financial and operating results as well as receive feedback from both senior management and their peers to collaborate on best practices. We believe this management process fosters a commitment to operational excellence focused on producing a positive customer experience and strong financial performance.

Our Growth Strategy

We believe there are significant opportunities to grow our business, strengthen our competitive position and enhance our concepts through the continued implementation of the following strategies:

Pursue Disciplined New Unit Expansion.     We believe our concepts have significant room to grow. We have an established growth pipeline and a disciplined strategy for opening new restaurants. Our growth strategy includes entering new markets and expanding our presence in existing markets. We believe our concepts’ market positioning, broad range of average checks and menu offerings, coupled with the flexibility of our restaurant models across a range of trade areas and square footage layouts will allow us to expand each of our three concepts into a greater number of locations. We have successfully opened new restaurants in a number of diverse markets and we continued to grow in 2011, opening three new restaurants in Boston, New York City and Dallas. We target a cash-on-cash return beginning in the third operating year of at least 25% for new restaurants across all of our concepts. We believe there are opportunities to open three to five restaurants annually, generally composed of one Del Frisco’s and two to four Sullivan’s and/or Grilles, with new openings of our Grille concept likely serving

 

 

4


as the primary driver of new unit growth in the near term. In 2012, we have opened a Grille in Phoenix, Arizona, and we expect to open three additional restaurants, including a Del Frisco’s in Chicago, Illinois, and Grilles in Washington D.C. and Atlanta, Georgia. Beyond domestic new unit growth, although we have no current intention to do so, we believe our concepts have the potential for expansion in select international markets through franchising, licensing, Company-owned restaurants or a combination of the foregoing. While we do not have a specific global expansion strategy and we have no current intention to expand into international markets, we believe there is a long-term opportunity for our concepts beyond the U.S. market.

Grow Our Existing Restaurant Sales.     Our concepts achieve strong sales and customer count growth, with comparable restaurant sales increasing by 12.1%, 12.3%, 11.8% and 9.5% for the four quarters of fiscal 2011 as compared to the respective prior year periods, and 6.7% for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012 versus the prior year period. The first quarter of 2012 marked our eighth consecutive quarter of comparable restaurant sales increases. We believe there are significant opportunities to continue to increase our sales and average check through maintaining our focus on tableside up-selling and salesmanship by our servers and by strategically adjusting menu prices and enhancing our concepts’ brand awareness through increased marketing efforts. In addition, we are adding seating to select locations, which we believe will increase sales at these restaurants.

Further Grow Our Private Dining Business.     We believe we are well-positioned to grow our private dining business due to our commitment to our customers’ dining experience, our unique locations and our plans to invest in improving our private dining facilities at select locations. All of our restaurants can serve large and small groups for private dining events, including corporate events, sales meetings, presentations, charity events and private parties. We are focused on growing our private dining business as it typically has a higher average check per customer and higher overall margins than regular dining room business. Private dining represented approximately 14.1% of our total sales in the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011. We intend to drive growth by enhancing our private dining capacity and increasing awareness of our private dining services. To help drive this growth, we are creating additional private dining space at select locations by expanding or reconfiguring existing space. In addition, each location currently dedicates a staff member to increasing its private dining business. At the beginning of 2011, we hired a corporate-wide private dining executive who meets weekly with each restaurant’s private dining coordinator regarding upcoming events and sales initiatives.

Our Equity Sponsor

Lone Star Fund V (U.S.), L.P., which we refer to in this prospectus, along with its affiliates and associates (excluding us and other companies that it or they own as a result of their investment activities), as Lone Star Fund, is a leading U.S. private equity firm. Since 1995, the principals of Lone Star Fund have organized private equity funds totaling approximately $33.4 billion to invest globally in corporate secured and unsecured debt instruments, real estate-related assets and select corporate acquisitions. Lone Star Fund has affiliate offices in Dallas, New York, London, Tokyo, Dublin, Brussels, Luxembourg, Frankfurt, France, Montreal and Bermuda. Immediately prior to this offering, Lone Star Fund owned all of our outstanding equity interests, and it will own approximately     % of our common stock immediately following the consummation of this offering, assuming no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option.

 

 

5


Conflicts of Interest

Certain conflicts of interest may arise in connection with this offering. Specifically, Lone Star Fund, an affiliate of our sole stockholder, will beneficially own a majority of our outstanding common stock immediately after this offering. Therefore, we will be a “controlled company” and Lone Star Fund will have sufficient voting power to effectively control all matters submitted to our stockholders, including a merger, consolidation or other business combination. In addition, the interests of Lone Star Fund and its principals, members, directors, managers, partners, stockholders, officers, employees and other representatives, some of whom may serve as our directors, may not always coincide with our interests as a company or the interests of our other stockholders. Neither Lone Star Fund nor these individuals will have any duty to refrain from engaging in business that conflicts with ours or to communicate business opportunities to us. As a result, Lone Star Fund may from time to time acquire and hold interests in businesses that compete directly or indirectly with us or pursue acquisition opportunities that may be complementary to our business resulting in those acquisition opportunities not being available to us. See “Risk Factors—Risks Related to this Offering.” We also guarantee five leases for affiliates of Lone Star Fund that are not controlled or managed by our company. At March 20, 2012, the maximum potential amount of future lease payments we could be required to make as a result of the guarantees was $2.4 million. We also intend to use $3.0 million of the proceeds from this offering to make a one-time payment to Lone Star Fund in consideration for the termination of our asset advisory agreement upon consummation of this offering. As a result, upon consummation of the offering, we will enter into a transition services agreement with affiliates of Lone Star Fund pursuant to which we will be provided certain insurance management, legal and benefits administration services. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement.” Finally, we expect that Mr. Mark S. Mednansky, our Chief Executive Officer, and Mr. Thomas J. Pennison, Jr., our Chief Financial Officer, will be paid a transaction bonus of $             and $            , respectively, by our parent company in connection with this offering, as discussed in greater detail under “Executive Compensation—Payments in Connection with the Offering—Transaction Bonuses.”

Corporate Information

Our corporate headquarters is located at 930 S. Kimball Avenue, Suite 100, Southlake, TX 76092, and our telephone number is (817) 601-3421. Our website address is www.dfrg.com, and we also host www.delfriscos.com, www.sullivanssteakhouse.com and www.delfriscosgrille.com. Information contained on our websites or connected thereto does not constitute a part of this prospectus or the registration statement of which it forms a part. DEL FRISCO’S ® , SULLIVAN’S ® , DEL FRISCO’S GRILLE™ and DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP™, and other trademarks or service marks of ours appearing in this prospectus are the property of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC. Other trademarks and service marks appearing in this prospectus are the property of their respective holders.

Summary Risk Factors

An investment in our common stock involves various risks. You should consider carefully the risks discussed below and under “Risk Factors” before purchasing our common stock. If any of these risks actually occur, our business, financial condition or results of operations may be materially adversely affected. In such case, the trading price of our shares of common stock

 

 

6


would likely decline and you may lose all or part of your investment. The following is a summary of some of the principal risks we face:

 

   

Changes in general economic conditions, including the recent economic downturn and its continuing effects, have adversely impacted our business and results of operations and may continue to do so.

 

   

If our restaurants are not able to compete successfully with other restaurants, our business and results of operations may be adversely affected.

 

   

Our future growth depends on our ability to open new restaurants and operate them profitably, and if we are unable to successfully execute this strategy, our results of operations could be adversely affected.

 

   

If we are unable to increase our sales or improve our margins at existing restaurants, our profitability and overall results of operations may be adversely affected.

 

   

The failure to successfully develop our new Grille concept may have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

 

   

Our growth, including the development of the Grille, may strain our infrastructure and resources, which could delay the opening of new restaurants and adversely affect our ability to manage our existing restaurants.

 

   

Our New York Del Frisco’s location represents a significant portion of our revenues, and any significant downturn in its business or disruption in the operation of this location could harm our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

   

Negative customer experiences or negative publicity surrounding our restaurants or other restaurants could adversely affect sales in one or more of our restaurants and make our brands less valuable.

 

   

Negative publicity relating to the consumption of beef, including in connection with food-borne illness, could result in reduced consumer demand for our menu offerings, which could reduce sales.

 

 

7


The Offering

 

Common stock offered by us

            shares (or             shares if the underwriters exercise in full their over-allotment option)

 

Common stock offered by the selling stockholder

            shares (or             shares if the underwriters exercise in full their over-allotment option)

 

Common stock to be outstanding immediately after this offering

            shares (or             shares if the underwriters exercise in full their over-allotment option)

 

Use of proceeds

We estimate our net proceeds from this offering will be approximately $             million (or approximately $             million if the underwriters exercise in full their over-allotment option), based on the midpoint of the estimated initial public offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 

  We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering as follows:

 

   

$             million to repay outstanding borrowings under our credit facility, including accrued interest;

 

   

$3.0 million to make a one-time payment to Lone Star Fund, an affiliate of our controlling stockholder, in consideration for the termination of our asset advisory agreement upon consummation of this offering as described under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement;” and

 

   

the remainder of the net proceeds for working capital and other general corporate purposes.

 

  We will not receive any of the proceeds from the sale of shares of common stock by the selling stockholder. See “Use of Proceeds,” “Principal and Selling Stockholders” and “Underwriting.”

 

NASDAQ symbol

“DFRG”

 

Risk factors

Investment in our common stock involves substantial risks. You should read this prospectus carefully, including the section entitled “Risk Factors” and the consolidated financial statements and the related notes to those statements included elsewhere in this prospectus before investing in our common stock.

 

 

8


The number of shares of our common stock to be outstanding immediately after this offering as set forth above is based on the number of shares outstanding as of                     , 2012 and excludes             shares reserved for issuance under our equity incentive plan (of which no options to purchase shares had been granted as of such date) of which we intend to grant options to purchase             shares to our executive officers and certain director nominees under our equity incentive plan at the time of the pricing this offering with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price.

Unless otherwise indicated, this prospectus:

 

   

assumes the completion of the reorganization, as a result of which all membership interests of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC will be converted into shares of common stock of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc.;

 

   

assumes an initial public offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the estimated initial public offering price range, set forth on the cover page of this prospectus; and

 

   

assumes no exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase up to an additional              shares of our common stock.

 

 

9


Summary Historical Consolidated Financial and Operating Data

The following table sets forth, for the periods and dates indicated, our summary historical consolidated financial and operating data. We have derived the summary income statement data for the fiscal years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011 from our audited consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the summary income statement data for each of the 12 weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012 and the summary balance sheet data as of March 20, 2012 from our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this prospectus. In the opinion of management, these unaudited interim consolidated financial statements include all adjustments, consisting of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair presentation of our financial position and operating results for these periods. Results from interim periods are not necessarily indicative of results that may be expected for the entire year and historical results are not indicative of the results to be expected in the future. The summary financial data presented below represent portions of our financial statements and are not complete. You should read this information in conjunction with “Use of Proceeds,” “Capitalization,” “Selected Consolidated and Combined Financial Data,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes to those statements included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

    Fiscal Year Ended(1)     12 Weeks Ended  
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
    (in thousands, except per share data)  

Income Statement Data:

         

Revenues

  $ 160,177      $ 165,575      $ 201,629      $ 43,352      $ 53,678   

Costs and expenses:

         

Costs of sales

    47,593        50,339        61,647        13,445        16,579   

Restaurant operating expenses

    69,209        73,404        88,210        19,331        22,673   

Marketing and advertising costs

    3,523        2,825        4,359        727        874   

Pre-opening costs

    493        798        3,018        354        70   

General and administrative

    8,236        7,512        10,640        2,190        2,646   

Management and accounting fees paid to related party

    2,878        3,345        3,399        469        744   

Non-cash impairment charges

                  1,400                 

Depreciation and amortization

    6,422        6,624        7,146        1,525        1,713   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

    21,823        20,728        21,810        5,311        8,379   

Other income (expense), net:

         

Interest expense—affiliates

    (2,281     (1,775                     

Interest expense—other

    (5,942     (9,906     (8,856     (1,764     (1,221

Other, net

    36        (249     (114     2        (3
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from continuing operations before income taxes

    13,636        8,798        12,840        3,549        7,155   

Provision for (benefit from) income taxes

    3,616        (44     3,751     

 

1,064

  

    2,170   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

  $ 10,020      $ 8,842      $ 9,089      $ 2,485      $ 4,985   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Pro forma net income per common share(2):

         

Basic and diluted

  $        $        $        $        $     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Shares used in computing pro forma net income per share(2):

         

Basic and diluted

         
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

10


     March 20, 2012  
                 Actual                   Pro Forma,
As Adjusted(3)
 
     (in thousands)  

Balance Sheet Data (at end of period):

     

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 8,672       $     

Working capital(4)

     1,408      

Total assets

     232,399      

Total debt

     65,000      

Total stockholders’ equity

     102,441      

 

     Fiscal Year Ended(1)     12 Weeks Ended  
     December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
     (in thousands, except restaurant and percentage amounts)  

Other Financial Data:

          

Net cash provided by operating activities

   $ 18,916      $ 12,278      $ 28,079      $ 7,629      $ 4,107   

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities

     (28,538     (1,489     (6,727     8,048        (4,554

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

     15,587        (19,889     (11,390     (11,156     (5,000

Capital expenditures

     7,755        5,550        20,063        4,749        3,773   

Adjusted EBITDA(5)

     30,373        30,220        36,503        7,476        10,900   

Adjusted EBITDA margin(6)

     18.9     18.3     18.1     17.2     20.3

Restaurant-level EBITDA(5)

     39,852        39,007        47,413        9,848        13,546   

Restaurant-level EBITDA margin(7)

     24.9     23.6     23.5     22.7     25.2

Operating Data:

          

Total restaurants (at end of period)

     27        28        31        28        31   

Total comparable restaurants (at end of period)(8)

     23        27        27        27        28   

Average sales per comparable restaurant

   $ 6,049      $ 6,107      $ 6,668      $ 1,597      $ 1,669   

Percentage change in comparable restaurant sales(8)

     (18.7 )%      4.3     11.2     12.1     6.7

 

(1) We utilize a 52- or 53-week accounting period which ends on the last Tuesday of December. The fiscal years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011 each had 52 weeks.
(2) Unaudited pro forma basic and diluted income per share will be computed by dividing net income for each period by the shares of common stock to be issued following our conversion from a limited liability company to a corporation immediately prior to the effectiveness of the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part. Such shares will be assumed to be outstanding for all periods presented. There will be no potentially dilutive securities. There is no other impact to the financial statements as a result of converting from a limited liability company to a corporation, because our historical financial statements have included a provision for income taxes and related deferred income taxes.
(3) Pro forma as adjusted to reflect (i) the receipt of $             in net proceeds from the issuance of              shares of common stock by us in this offering and (ii) the application of the net proceeds from this offering as set forth under “Use of Proceeds,” including to make a one-time payment to Lone Star Fund, an affiliate of our controlling shareholder, in the aggregate amount of $3.0 million, in consideration for the termination of our asset advisory agreement upon consummation of this offering as described under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement.”
(4) Defined as total current assets minus total current liabilities.
(5) Adjusted EBITDA and restaurant-level EBITDA are metrics used by management to measure operating performance. Adjusted EBITDA represents net income before interest, taxes, and depreciation and amortization, plus the sum of certain non-operating expenses, including pre-opening costs, abandoned registration costs and management fees and expenses. Restaurant-level EBITDA represents net income before interest, taxes and depreciation and amortization, plus the sum of certain non-operating expenses, including pre-opening costs, abandoned registration costs, management fees and expenses and general and administrative expenses.

 

 

11


The following table presents a reconciliation of adjusted EBITDA and restaurant-level EBITDA to net income:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended     12 Weeks Ended  
     December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
     (in thousands)  

Net income

   $ 10,020      $ 8,842      $ 9,089      $ 2,485      $ 4,985   

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     3,616        (44     3,751        1,064        2,170   

Interest income

     (36     (75     (16     (2     (3

Interest expense—other

     5,942        9,906        8,856        1,764        1,221   

Interest expense—affiliate

     2,281        1,775                        

Non-cash impairment charges

                   1,400                 

Depreciation and amortization

     6,422        6,624        7,146        1,525        1,713   

Lease guarantee payments

            324        130                 

Pre-opening costs

     493        798        3,018        354        70   

Management fees and expenses(a)

     1,635        2,070        3,129        286        744   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

   $ 30,373      $ 30,220      $ 36,503      $ 7,476      $ 10,900   

General and administrative

     8,236        7,512        10,640        2,190        2,646   

Related party shared services fee

     1,243        1,275        270        182          
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Restaurant-level EBITDA

   $ 39,852      $ 39,007      $ 47,413      $ 9,848      $ 13,546   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

  (a) Includes asset management fees and expenses paid to an affiliate of Lone Star Fund pursuant to our asset advisory agreement, but excludes amounts paid to another affiliate of Lone Star Fund for accounting, administrative and management services under our shared services agreement, which is referred to as the related party shared services fee. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Key Financial Definitions—Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party” and “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement.”

We present adjusted EBITDA and restaurant-level EBITDA as supplemental performance measures because we believe they facilitate a comparative assessment of our operating performance relative to our performance based on our results under generally accepted accounting principles in the United States, or GAAP, while isolating the effects of some items that vary from period to period without any correlation to core operating performance. Specifically, adjusted EBITDA allows for an assessment of our operating performance without the effect of non-cash depreciation and amortization expenses or our ability to service or incur indebtedness. Restaurant-level EBITDA allows for further assessment of our operating performance by eliminating the effect of general and administrative expenses incurred at the corporate level. These measures also function as a benchmark to evaluate our operating performance or compare our performance to that of our competitors because companies within our industry exhibit significant variations with respect to capital structures and cost of capital (which affect interest expense and tax rates) and differences in book depreciation of facilities and equipment (which affect relative depreciation expense), including significant differences in the depreciable lives of similar assets among various companies.

This prospectus also includes information concerning adjusted EBITDA margin, which is defined as the ratio of adjusted EBITDA to revenues, and restaurant-level EBITDA margin, which is defined as the ratio of restaurant-level EBITDA to revenues. We present adjusted EBITDA margin and restaurant-level EBITDA margin because they are used by management as a performance measurement to judge the level of adjusted EBITDA and restaurant-level EBITDA, respectively, generated from revenues. We believe their inclusion is appropriate to provide additional information to investors and other external users of our financial statements.

Adjusted EBITDA, restaurant-level EBITDA, adjusted EBITDA margin and restaurant-level EBITDA margin are not measurements of our financial performance under GAAP and should not be considered in isolation or as an alternative to net income, net cash provided by operating, investing or financing activities or any other financial statement data presented as indicators of financial performance or liquidity, each as presented in accordance with GAAP. We understand that although adjusted EBITDA is frequently used by securities analysts, lenders and others in their evaluation of companies, it and restaurant-level EBITDA have limitations as analytical tools, and you should

 

 

12


not consider them in isolation, or as substitutes for analysis of our results as reported under GAAP, as adjusted EBITDA and restaurant-level EBITDA do not reflect:

 

   

discretionary cash available to us to invest in the growth of our business;

 

   

changes in, or cash requirements for, our working capital needs;

 

   

our capital expenditures or future requirements for capital expenditures;

 

   

the interest expense, or the cash requirements necessary to service interest or principal payments, associated with our indebtedness; or

 

   

depreciation and amortization, which are non-cash charges, although the assets being depreciated and amortized will likely have to be replaced in the future, and adjusted EBITDA does not reflect any cash requirements for such replacements.

 

(6) Adjusted EBITDA margin is the ratio of adjusted EBITDA to revenues.
(7) Restaurant-level EBITDA margin is the ratio of restaurant-level EBITDA to revenues.
(8) We consider a restaurant to be comparable in the first full period following the eighteenth month of operations. Changes in comparable restaurant sales reflect changes in sales for the comparable group of restaurants over a specified period of time.

 

 

13


RISK FACTORS

Investing in our common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should carefully consider the following risk factors and all other information contained in this prospectus before purchasing our common stock. If any of the following risks occur, our business, financial condition or results of operations could be materially and adversely affected. In that case, the trading price of our common stock could decline and you may lose some or all of your investment.

Risks Related to Our Business

Changes in general economic conditions, including the recent economic downturn and its continuing effects, have adversely impacted our business and results of operations and may continue to do so.

Purchases at our restaurants are discretionary for consumers and we are therefore susceptible to economic slowdowns. We believe that consumers generally are more willing to make discretionary purchases, including high-end restaurant meals, during favorable economic conditions. The recent economic downturn, continuing disruptions in the overall economy, including the ongoing impacts of the housing crisis, high unemployment, and financial market volatility and unpredictability, and the related reduction in consumer confidence negatively affected customer traffic and sales throughout our industry, including our segment. For example, our revenues decreased 10.2% in fiscal 2009 as compared to fiscal 2008. If the economy experiences a further downturn, our customers, including our business clientele, may further reduce their level of discretionary spending, impacting the frequency with which they choose to dine out or the amount they spend on meals while dining out. We believe the majority of our weekday revenues are derived from business customers using expense accounts and our business therefore may be affected by reduced expense account or other business-related dining by our business clientele. If business clientele were to dine less frequently at our restaurants, our business and results of operations would be adversely affected as a result of a reduction in customer traffic or average revenues per customer.

There is also a risk that if the current negative economic conditions persist for an extended period of time or worsen, consumers might make long-lasting changes to their discretionary spending behavior, including dining out less frequently. The ability of the U.S. economy to recover from this downturn is likely to be affected by many national and international factors that are beyond our control, including current economic trends in Europe. These factors, including national, regional and local politics and economic conditions, disposable consumer income and consumer confidence, also affect discretionary consumer spending. Continued weakness in or a further worsening of the economy, generally or in a number of our markets, and our customers’ reactions to these trends could adversely affect our business and cause us to, among other things, reduce the number and frequency of new restaurant openings, close restaurants and delay our re-modeling of existing locations.

If our restaurants are not able to compete successfully with other restaurants, our business and results of operations may be adversely affected.

Our industry is intensely competitive with respect to price, quality of service, restaurant location, ambiance of facilities and type and quality of food. A substantial number of national and regional restaurant chains and independently owned restaurants compete with us for customers, restaurant locations and qualified management and other restaurant staff. The principal competitors for our concepts are other upscale steakhouse chains such as Fleming’s Prime Steakhouse and Wine Bar, The Capital Grille, Smith & Wollensky, The Palm, Ruth’s Chris Steak House and Morton’s The Steakhouse. Our concepts also compete with additional restaurants in the broader upscale dining segment. Some of our competitors have greater

 

14


financial and other resources, have been in business longer, have greater name recognition and are better established in the markets where our restaurants are located or where we may expand. Our inability to compete successfully with other restaurants may harm our ability to maintain acceptable levels of revenue growth, limit or otherwise inhibit our ability to grow one or more of our concepts, or force us to close one or more of our restaurants. We may also need to evolve our concepts in order to compete with popular new restaurant formats or concepts that emerge from time to time, and we cannot provide any assurance that we will be successful in doing so or that any changes we make to any of our concepts in response will be successful or not adversely affect our profitability. In addition, with improving product offerings at fast casual restaurants and quick-service restaurants combined with the effects of negative economic conditions and other factors, consumers may choose less expensive alternatives, which could also negatively affect customer traffic at our restaurants. Any unanticipated slowdown in demand at any of our restaurants due to industry competition may adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Our future growth depends in part on our ability to open new restaurants and operate them profitably, and if we are unable to successfully execute this strategy, our results of operations could be adversely affected.

Our financial success depends in part on management’s ability to execute our growth strategy. One key element of our growth strategy is opening new restaurants. We believe there are opportunities to open three to five new restaurants annually, generally composed of one Del Frisco’s and two to four Sullivan’s and/or Grilles, with new openings of our Grille concept likely serving as the primary driver of new unit growth in the near term. In 2012 we have opened a Grille in Phoenix, Arizona, and we expect to open three additional restaurants, each of which will be leased, including a Del Frisco’s in Chicago, Illinois, and Grilles in Washington, D.C. and Atlanta, Georgia. For the opening of a new restaurant, we measure our cash investment costs net of landlord contributions and equipment financing, but including pre-opening costs. We target average cash investment costs of $7.0 million to $9.0 million for a new Del Frisco’s and $3.0 million to $4.5 million for a new Sullivan’s or Grille.

Our ability to open new restaurants and operate them profitably is dependent upon a number of factors, many of which are beyond our control, including:

 

   

finding quality site locations, competing effectively to obtain quality site locations and reaching acceptable agreements to lease or purchase sites;

 

   

complying with applicable zoning, land use and environmental regulations and obtaining, for an acceptable cost, required permits and approvals;

 

   

having adequate capital for construction and opening costs and efficiently managing the time and resources committed to building and opening each new restaurant;

 

   

timely hiring and training and retaining the skilled management and other employees necessary to meet staffing needs;

 

   

successfully promoting our new locations and competing in their markets;

 

   

acquiring food and other supplies for new restaurants from local suppliers; and

 

   

addressing unanticipated problems or risks that may arise during the development or opening of a new restaurant or entering a new market.

A new restaurant typically experiences a “ramp-up” period of approximately 18 months before it achieves our targeted level of performance. This is due to the costs associated with opening a new restaurant, as well as higher operating costs caused by start-up and other temporary inefficiencies associated with opening new restaurants. For example, there are a

 

15


number of factors which may impact the amount of time and money we commit to the construction and development of new restaurants, including landlord delays, shortages of skilled labor, labor disputes, shortages of materials, delays in obtaining necessary permits, local government regulations and weather interference. Once the restaurant is open, how quickly it achieves a desired level of profitability is impacted by many factors, including the level of market familiarity and acceptance when we enter new markets, as well as the availability of experienced staff and the time required to negotiate reasonable prices for food and other supplies from local suppliers. Our business and profitability may be adversely affected if the “ramp-up” period for a new restaurant lasts longer than we expect.

If we are unable to increase our sales or improve our margins at existing restaurants, our profitability and overall results of operations may be adversely affected.

Another key aspect of our growth strategy is increasing comparable restaurant sales and improving restaurant-level margins. Improving comparable restaurant sales and restaurant-level margins depends in part on whether we achieve revenue growth through increases in the average check and further expand our private dining business at each restaurant. We believe there are opportunities to increase the average check at our restaurants through, for example, selective introduction of higher priced items and increases in menu pricing. We also believe that expanding and enhancing our private dining capacity will also increase our restaurant sales, as our private dining business typically has a higher average check and higher overall margins than regular dining room business. However, these strategies may prove unsuccessful, especially in times of economic hardship, as customers may not order or enjoy higher priced items and discretionary spending on private dining events may decrease. Select price increases have not historically adversely impacted customer traffic; however, we expect that there is a price level at which point customer traffic would be adversely affected. It is also possible that these changes could cause our sales volume to decrease. If we are not able to increase our sales at existing restaurants for any reason, our profitability and results of operations could be adversely affected.

The failure to successfully develop our new Grille concept could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

We launched our new concept, the Grille, in the third quarter of 2011 with the opening of our New York location. We also opened a second location in Dallas in the fourth quarter of 2011. We believe that new openings of the Grille are likely to serve as the primary driver of new unit growth in the near term. Our ability to succeed with this new concept will require significant capital expenditures and management attention and is subject to certain risks in addition to those of opening a new restaurant under one of our existing concepts, including customer acceptance of and competition to that concept. If the “ramp-up” period for our Grille restaurants and for our development of concepts in general does not meet our expectations, our operating results may be adversely affected. In addition, we are targeting restaurant-level EBITDA margins of between 20% and 25% for the Grille. However, because we face new challenges at the Grille, such as predicting demand for new menu selections that are not offered at our other concepts, we cannot provide any assurance that our operating margins will achieve these levels. As a result, we may need to adjust our pricing and menu offering strategies. We may not be successful enough to recoup our investments in the concept. There can be no assurance that we will be able to successfully develop and grow the Grille or any other new concept to a point where it will become profitable or generate positive cash flow or that it will prove to be a platform for future expansion. We may not be able to attract enough customers to meet targeted levels of performance at new restaurants because potential customers may be unfamiliar with our concepts or the atmosphere or menu might not appeal to them. The Grille may even operate at a loss, which could have a material adverse effect on our overall operating results. In addition, opening a new restaurant concept such as a Grille in an existing market

 

16


could reduce the revenue of our existing restaurants in that market. If we cannot successfully execute our growth strategies for the Grille, or if customer traffic generated by the Grille results in a decline in customer traffic at one of our other restaurants in the same market, our business and results of operations may be adversely affected.

Our growth, including the development of the Grille, may strain our infrastructure and resources, which could delay the opening of new restaurants and adversely affect our ability to manage our existing restaurants.

Following this offering, we plan to continue our current pace of new restaurant growth, including the development and promotion of the Grille. We believe there are opportunities to open three to five restaurants annually, generally composed of one Del Frisco’s and two to four Sullivan’s and/or Grilles, with new openings of our Grille concept likely serving as the primary driver of new unit growth in the near term. We typically target an average cash investment of approximately $7.0 million to $9.0 million per restaurant for a Del Frisco’s restaurant and $3.0 million to $4.5 million for a Sullivan’s or a Grille, in each case net of landlord contributions and equipment financing and including pre-opening costs. We are also “refreshing” a number of our Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s locations to, among other things, add additional seating, further grow our private dining business and add patio seating. During 2012, we expect to complete refreshes of four to five Del Frisco’s and four to five Sullivan’s at an average cost of $0.3 million per location. Thereafter, we expect to complete one to two refreshes each year at an approximate cost of $0.5 million per location. This growth and these investments will increase our operating complexity and place increased demands on our management as well as our human resources, purchasing and site management teams. While we have committed significant resources to expanding our current restaurant management systems, financial and management controls and information systems in connection with our recent growth, if this infrastructure is insufficient to support this expansion, our ability to open new restaurants, including the development and promotion of the Grille, and to manage our existing restaurants, including the expansion of our private dining business, would be adversely affected. If we fail to continue to improve our infrastructure or if our improved infrastructure fails, we may be unable to implement our growth strategy or maintain current levels of operating performance in our existing restaurants.

Our New York Del Frisco’s location represents a significant portion of our revenues, and any significant downturn in its business or disruption in the operation of this location could harm our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our New York Del Frisco’s location represented approximately 19%, 20% and 18% of our revenues in 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. Accordingly, we are susceptible to any fluctuations in the business at our New York Del Frisco’s location, whether as a result of adverse economic conditions, negative publicity, changes in customer preferences or for other reasons. In addition, any natural disaster, prolonged inclement weather, act of terrorism or national emergency, accident, system failure or other unforeseen event in or around New York City could result in a temporary or permanent closing of this location, could influence potential customers to avoid this geographic region or this location in particular or otherwise lead to a decrease in revenues. Any significant interruption in the operation of this location or other reduction in sales could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Negative customer experiences or negative publicity surrounding our restaurants or other restaurants could adversely affect sales in one or more of our restaurants and make our brands less valuable.

The quality of our food and our restaurant facilities are two of our competitive strengths. Therefore, adverse publicity, whether or not accurate, relating to food quality, public health

 

17


concerns, illness, safety, injury or government or industry findings concerning our restaurants, restaurants operated by other foodservice providers or others across the food industry supply chain could affect us more than it would other restaurants that compete primarily on price or other factors. A restaurant in Louisville, Kentucky has the right to use, and uses, a specific registration of the Del Frisco’s name pursuant to a concurrent use agreement and we license the use of the Del Frisco’s name to one restaurant in Orlando, Florida, as described in greater detail in “Business—Intellectual Property.” We do not own or control either of these restaurants and any adverse publicity relating to those operations could negatively affect us. In addition, although we would not be legally liable for any such failure, because the Louisville and Orlando restaurants operate under one of our brand names, we may be subject to litigation as a result of either restaurant’s failure to comply with food quality, preparation or other applicable rules and regulations. If customers perceive or experience a reduction in our food quality, service or ambiance or in any way believe we have failed to deliver a consistently positive experience, the value and popularity of one or more of our concepts could suffer. Any shifts in consumer preferences away from the kinds of food we offer, particularly beef, whether because of dietary or other health concerns or otherwise, would make our restaurants less appealing and could reduce customer traffic and/or impose practical limits on pricing.

Negative publicity relating to the consumption of beef, including in connection with food-borne illness, could result in reduced consumer demand for our menu offerings, which could reduce sales.

Instances of food-borne illness, including Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy, which is also known as BSE or mad cow disease, aphthous fever, which is also known as hoof and mouth disease, as well as hepatitis A, lysteria, salmonella and e-coli, whether or not found the United States or traced directly to one of our suppliers or our restaurants, could reduce demand for our menu offerings. Any negative publicity relating to these and other health-related matters, such as the recent confirmation of a case of mad cow disease in a dairy cow in California, may affect consumers’ perceptions of our restaurants and the food that we offer, reduce customer visits to our restaurants and negatively impact demand for our menu offerings. Adverse publicity relating to any of these matters, beef in general or other similar concerns could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Increases in the prices of, and/or reductions in the availability of commodities, primarily beef, could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Our profitability depends in part on our ability to anticipate and react to changes in commodity costs, which have a substantial effect on our total costs. For example, we purchase large quantities of beef, particularly USDA prime beef and premium choice beef. Our beef costs represented approximately 30%, 32% and 33% of our food and beverage costs during 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively, and we currently do not purchase beef pursuant to any long-term contractual arrangements with fixed pricing or use futures contracts or other financial risk management strategies to reduce our exposure to potential price fluctuations. The market for USDA prime beef and premium choice beef is particularly volatile and is subject to extreme price fluctuations due to seasonal shifts, climate conditions, the price of feed, industry demand, energy demand and other factors. For example, during 2011, beef costs were impacted by (i) the summer drought in Texas and Oklahoma, (ii) the price of corn, (iii) the entrance of major supermarkets into the USDA choice beef market and (iv) new free trade agreements increasing exports. According to the U.S. Department of Agriculture, average weekly prices for USDA prime beef and premium choice beef increased 15.9% and 11.3%, respectively, in 2011. Due in part to seasonality, purchasing relationships and management of our menu mix, we experienced slightly lower beef cost increases during 2011. Prices may continue to increase through 2012 and beyond. Although we currently do not engage in futures contracts or other

 

18


financial risk management strategies with respect to potential price fluctuations, from time to time, we may opportunistically enter into fixed price beef supply contracts or contracts for other food products or consider other risk management strategies with regard to our meat and other food costs to minimize the impact of potential price fluctuations. This practice could help stabilize our food costs during times of fluctuating prices, although there can be no assurances that this will occur. However, because our restaurants feature USDA prime beef and premium choice beef, we generally expect to purchase these types of beef even if we have not entered into any such arrangements and the price increased significantly. The prices of other commodities can affect our costs as well, including corn and other grains, which are ingredients we use regularly and are also used as cattle feed and therefore affect the price of beef. Energy prices can also affect our bottom line, as increased energy prices may cause increased transportation costs for beef and other supplies, as well as increased costs for the utilities required to run each restaurant. Historically we have passed increased commodity and other costs on to our customers by increasing the prices of our menu items. While we believe these price increases did not historically affect our customer traffic, there can be no assurance additional price increases would not affect future customer traffic. If prices increase in the future and we are unable to anticipate or mitigate these increases, or if there are shortages for USDA Prime beef and premium choice beef, our business and results of operations would be adversely affected.

We depend upon frequent deliveries of food and other supplies, in most cases from a limited number of suppliers, which subjects us to the possible risks of shortages, interruptions and price fluctuations.

Our ability to maintain consistent quality throughout our restaurants depends in part upon our ability to acquire fresh products, including USDA prime beef and premium choice beef, fresh seafood, quality produce and related items from reliable sources in accordance with our specifications. In addition, we rely on one or a limited number of suppliers for certain ingredients. For example, U.S. Foodservice supplies all of the beef for our restaurants and has done so since June of 2009. This contract expires in June 2015 and can be terminated by either party for any reason upon 90 days advanced notice. This dependence on one or a limited number of suppliers, as well as the limited number of alternative suppliers of USDA prime beef and premium choice beef and quality seafood, subjects us to the possible risks of shortages, interruptions and price fluctuations in beef and seafood. If any of our suppliers is unable to obtain financing necessary to operate its business or is otherwise adversely affected by the economic downturn, does not perform adequately or otherwise fails to distribute products or supplies to our restaurants, or terminates or refuses to renew any contract with us, particularly with respect to one of the suppliers on which we rely heavily for specific ingredients, we may be unable to find an alternative supplier in a short period of time or if we can, it may not be on acceptable terms. Our inability to replace our suppliers in a short period of time on acceptable terms could increase our costs or cause shortages at our restaurants that may cause us to remove certain items from a menu, increase the price of certain offerings or temporarily close a restaurant, which could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

We depend on the services of key executives, and our business and growth strategy could be materially harmed if we were to lose these and executives and were unable to replace them with executives of equal experience and capabilities.

Some of our senior executives, such as Mark S. Mednansky, our Chief Executive Officer, are particularly important to our success because they have been instrumental in setting our strategic direction, operating our business, identifying, recruiting and training key personnel, identifying expansion opportunities and arranging necessary financing. We have employment agreements with all members of senior management; however, we cannot prevent our

 

19


executives from terminating their employment with us. Losing the services of any of these individuals could adversely affect our business until a suitable replacement could be found. We also believe that they could not quickly be replaced with executives of equal experience and capabilities and their successors may not be as effective. We do not maintain key person life insurance policies on any of our executives. See “Management.”

Changes in consumer preferences and discretionary spending patterns could adversely impact our business and results of operations.

The restaurant industry is characterized by the continual introduction of new concepts and is subject to rapidly changing consumer preferences, tastes and eating and purchasing habits. Our success depends in part on our ability to anticipate and respond quickly to changing consumer preferences, as well as other factors affecting the restaurant industry, including new market entrants and demographic changes. Shifts in consumer preferences away from upscale steakhouses or beef, which is a significant component of our concepts’ menus and appeal, whether as a result of economic, competitive or other factors, could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Restaurant companies, including ours, have been the target of class action lawsuits and other proceedings alleging, among other things, violations of federal and state workplace and employment laws. Proceedings of this nature, if successful, could result in our payment of substantial damages.

In recent years, we and other restaurant companies have been subject to lawsuits, including class action lawsuits, alleging violations of federal and state laws regarding workplace and employment matters, discrimination and similar matters. A number of these lawsuits have resulted in the payment of substantial damages by the defendants. Similar lawsuits have been instituted from time to time alleging violations of various federal and state wage and hour laws regarding, among other things, employee meal deductions, the sharing of tips amongst certain employees, overtime eligibility of assistant managers and failure to pay for all hours worked. Although we maintain what we believe to be adequate levels of insurance, insurance may not be available at all or in sufficient amounts to cover any liabilities with respect to these matters. Accordingly, if we are required to pay substantial damages and expenses as a result of these types or other lawsuits our business and results of operations would be adversely affected.

Occasionally, our customers file complaints or lawsuits against us alleging that we are responsible for some illness or injury they suffered at or after a visit to one of our restaurants, including actions seeking damages resulting from food borne illness and relating to notices with respect to chemicals contained in food products required under state law. We are also subject to a variety of other claims from third parties arising in the ordinary course of our business, including personal injury claims, contract claims and claims alleging violations of federal and state laws. In addition, our restaurants are subject to state “dram shop” or similar laws which generally allow a person to sue us if that person was injured by a legally intoxicated person who was wrongfully served alcoholic beverages at one of our restaurants. The restaurant industry has also been subject to a growing number of claims that the menus and actions of restaurant chains have led to the obesity of certain of their customers. In addition, we may also be subject to lawsuits from our employees or others alleging violations of federal and state laws regarding workplace and employment matters, discrimination and similar matters. A number of these lawsuits have resulted in the payment of substantial damages by the defendants.

Regardless of whether any claims against us are valid or whether we are liable, claims may be expensive to defend and may divert time and money away from our operations. In addition, they may generate negative publicity, which could reduce customer traffic and sales. Although

 

20


we maintain what we believe to be adequate levels of insurance, insurance may not be available at all or in sufficient amounts to cover any liabilities with respect to these or other matters. A judgment or other liability in excess of our insurance coverage for any claims or any adverse publicity resulting from claims could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Our business is subject to substantial government regulation.

Our business is subject to extensive federal, state and local government regulation, including regulations related to the preparation and sale of food, the sale of alcoholic beverages, the sale and use of tobacco, zoning and building codes, land use and employee, health, sanitation and safety matters. For example, the preparation, storing and serving of food and the use of certain ingredients is subject to heavy regulation. Alcoholic beverage control regulations govern various aspects of our restaurants’ daily operations, including the minimum age of patrons and employees, hours of operation, advertising, wholesale purchasing and inventory control, handling and storage. Typically our restaurants’ licenses to sell alcoholic beverages must be renewed annually and may be suspended or revoked at any time for cause. In addition, because we operate in a number of different states, we are also required to comply with a number of different laws covering the same topics. The failure of any of our restaurants to timely obtain and maintain necessary governmental approvals, including liquor or other licenses, permits or approvals required to serve alcoholic beverages or food could delay or prevent the opening of a new restaurant or prevent regular day-to-day operations, including the sale of alcoholic beverages, at a restaurant that is already operating, any of which would adversely affect our business and results of operations.

In addition, the costs of operating our restaurants may increase if there are changes in laws governing minimum hourly wages, working conditions, overtime and tip credits, health care, workers’ compensation insurance rates, unemployment tax rates, sales taxes or other laws and regulations such as those governing access for the disabled, including the Americans with Disabilities Act. For example, the Federal Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act, or PPACA, which was enacted on March 23, 2010, among other things, includes guaranteed coverage requirements and imposes new taxes on health insurers and health care benefits that could increase the costs of providing health benefits to employees. In addition, because we have a significant number of restaurants located in certain states, regulatory changes in these states could have a disproportionate impact on our business. If any of the foregoing increased costs and we were unable to offset the change by increasing our menu prices or by other means, our business and results of operations could be adversely affected.

Government regulation can also affect customer traffic at our restaurants. A number of states, counties and cities have enacted menu labeling laws requiring multi-unit restaurant operators to disclose certain nutritional information. For example, the PPACA establishes a uniform, federal requirement for restaurant chains with 20 or more locations operating under the same trade name and offering substantially the same menus to post nutritional information on their menus, including the total number of calories. The law also requires such restaurants to provide to consumers, upon request, a written summary of detailed nutritional information, including total calories and calories from fat, total fat, saturated fat, cholesterol, sodium, total carbohydrates, complex carbohydrates, sugars, dietary fiber, and total protein in each serving size or other unit of measure, for each standard menu item. The FDA is also permitted to require additional nutrient disclosures, such as trans fat content. We are not currently subject to requirements to post nutritional information on our menus or in our restaurants, but because we currently operate 20 Sullivan’s locations, we would be subject to the rules established by the FDA under the PPACA were they effective today. The final rules are expected to be published in November 2012. Our compliance with the PPACA or other similar laws to which we may become subject could reduce demand for our menu offerings, reduce customer traffic and/or reduce average revenue per

 

21


customer, which would have an adverse effect on our revenue. Also, further government regulation restricting smoking in restaurants and bars, may reduce customer traffic. Any reduction in customer traffic related to these or other government regulations could affect revenues and adversely affect our business and results of operations.

To the extent that governmental regulations impose new or additional obligations on our suppliers, including, without limitation, regulations relating to the inspection or preparation of meat, food and other products used in our business, product availability could be limited and the prices that our suppliers charge us could increase. We may not be able to offset these costs through increased menu prices, which could have a material adverse effect on our business. If any of our restaurants were unable to serve particular food products, even for a short period of time, or if we are unable to offset increased costs, our business and results of operations could be adversely affected.

Changes to minimum wage laws could increase our labor costs substantially.

Under the minimum wage laws in most jurisdictions, we are permitted to pay certain hourly employees a wage that is less than the base minimum wage for general employees because these employees receive tips as a substantial part of their income. As of March 20, 2012, approximately 48.4% of our employees earn this lower minimum wage in their respective locations since tips constitute a substantial part of their income. If cities, states or the federal government change their laws to require all employees to be paid the general employee minimum base wage regardless of supplemental tip income, our labor costs would increase substantially. In addition, any increase in the minimum wage, such as the increase in the minimum wage on July 24, 2009 to $7.25 per hour under the Federal Minimum Wage Act of 2007, would increase our costs. Certain states in which we operate restaurants have adopted or are considering adopting minimum wage statutes that exceed the federal minimum wage as well. We may be unable or unwilling to increase our prices in order to pass these increased labor costs on to our customers, in which case, our business and results of operations could be adversely affected.

We occupy most of our restaurants under long-term non-cancelable leases for which we may remain obligated to perform under even after a restaurant closes, and we may be unable to renew leases at the end of their terms. We also guarantee five leases with third parties for affiliates of Lone Star Fund.

All but two of our restaurants are located in leased premises. Many of our current leases are non-cancelable and typically have terms ranging from five to 15 years with renewal options for terms ranging from five to 10 years. We believe that leases that we enter into in the future will be on substantially similar terms. If we were to close or fail to open a restaurant at a location we lease, we would generally remain committed to perform our obligations under the applicable lease, which could include, among other things, payment of the base rent for the balance of the lease term. Our obligation to continue making rental payments and fulfilling other lease obligations in respect of leases for closed or unopened restaurants could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations. Alternatively, at the end of the lease term and any renewal period for a restaurant, we may be unable to renew the lease without substantial additional cost, if at all. If we cannot renew such a lease we may be forced to close or relocate a restaurant, which could subject us to construction and other costs and risks. We also guarantee five leases entered into by various operating subsidiaries of Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon that were entered into by certain of the Casual Dining Companies prior to the acquisition of Lone Star Steakhouse and Saloon by Lone Star Fund. At March 20, 2012, the maximum potential amount of future lease payments we could be required to make as a result of the guarantees was $2.4 million. The entities that are party to these leases are not controlled or managed by us. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and

 

22


Results of Operations—Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements.” If we are required to make payments under one of our leases after a restaurant closes or one of the leases that we guarantee, or if we are unable to renew our restaurant leases, our business and results of operations could be adversely affected.

The impact of negative economic factors, including the availability of credit, on our landlords and other retail center tenants could negatively affect our financial results.

Negative effects on our existing and potential landlords due to the inaccessibility of credit and other unfavorable economic factors may, in turn, adversely affect our business and results of operations. If our landlords are unable to obtain financing or remain in good standing under their existing financing arrangements, they may be unable to provide construction contributions or satisfy other lease covenants to us. If any landlord files for bankruptcy protection, the landlord may be able to reject our lease in the bankruptcy proceedings. While we would have the option to retain our rights under the lease, we could not compel the landlord to perform any of its obligations and would be left with damages as our sole recourse. In addition, if our landlords are unable to obtain sufficient credit to continue to properly manage their retail sites, we may experience a drop in the level of quality of such retail centers. Our development of new restaurants may also be adversely affected by the negative financial situations of developers and potential landlords. Many landlords have delayed or cancelled recent development projects (as well as renovations of existing projects) due to the instability in the credit markets and recent declines in consumer spending, which has reduced the number of high-quality locations available that we would consider for our new restaurants. In addition, several other tenants at retail centers in which we are located or where we have executed leases have ceased operations or, in some cases, have deferred openings or failed to open after committing to do so. These failures may lead to reduced customer traffic and a general deterioration in the surrounding retail centers in which our restaurants are located and may contribute to lower customer traffic at our restaurants. If any of the foregoing affect any of our landlords or their other retail tenants our business and results of operations may be adversely affected.

Fixed rental payments account for a significant portion of our operating expenses, which increases our vulnerability to general adverse economic and industry conditions and could limit our operating and financing flexibility.

Payments under our operating leases account for a significant portion of our operating expenses and we expect the new restaurants we open in the future will similarly be leased by us. Specifically, payments under our operating leases accounted for 11.1%, 11.1% and 13.0% of our restaurant operating expenses in 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. Our substantial operating lease obligations could have significant negative consequences, including:

 

   

increasing our vulnerability to general adverse economic and industry conditions;

 

   

limiting our ability to obtain additional financing;

 

   

requiring a substantial portion of our available cash flow to be applied to our rental obligations, thus reducing cash available for other purposes;

 

   

limiting our flexibility in planning for or reacting to changes in our business or the industry in which we compete; and

 

   

placing us at a disadvantage with respect to some of our competitors.

We depend on cash flow from operations to pay our lease obligations and to fulfill our other cash needs. If our business does not generate sufficient cash flow from operating activities and sufficient funds are not otherwise available to us from borrowings under our credit facility or

 

23


other sources, we may not be able to meet our operating lease obligations, grow our business, respond to competitive challenges or fund our other liquidity and capital needs, which could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Our level of indebtedness and any future indebtedness we may incur may limit our operational and financing flexibility and negatively impact our business.

We currently have a credit facility that provides for a term loan of $70.0 million and a revolving loan of up to $10.0 million. On an as adjusted basis giving effect to this offering and the application of the proceeds, as of March 20, 2012, we would have had approximately $            million of total indebtedness. In particular, we expect to have approximately $            million and $            million of outstanding indebtedness under our term loan facility and revolving credit facility, respectively, after giving effect to this offering and the application of the proceeds. See “Use of Proceeds.” For the years ended December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, our net principal repayments on indebtedness were $26.4 million and $80.7 million, respectively, and cash interest expenses for such periods were $10.1 million and $5.6 million, respectively. In addition, we may incur substantial additional indebtedness in the future. Our credit facility, and other debt instruments we may enter into in the future, may have important consequences to you, including the following:

 

   

our ability to obtain additional financing for working capital, capital expenditures, acquisitions or general corporate purposes may be impaired;

 

   

we are required to use a significant portion of our cash flows from operations to pay interest on our indebtedness, which will reduce the funds available to us for operations and other purposes;

 

   

our level of indebtedness could place us at a competitive disadvantage compared to our competitors that may have proportionately less debt;

 

   

our flexibility in planning for, or reacting to, changes in our business and the industry in which we operate may be limited; and

 

   

our level of indebtedness may make us more vulnerable to economic downturns and adverse developments in our business.

Following this offering we expect that we will depend primarily on cash generated by our operations for funds to pay our expenses and any amounts due under our credit facility and any other indebtedness we may incur. Our ability to make these payments depends on our future performance, which will be affected by financial, business, economic and other factors, many of which we cannot control. Our business may not generate sufficient cash flows from operations in the future and our currently anticipated growth in revenues and cash flows may not be realized, either or both of which could result in our being unable to repay indebtedness or to fund other liquidity needs. If we do not have enough money, we may be required to refinance all or part of our then existing debt, sell assets or borrow more money, in each case on terms that are not acceptable to us, or at all. In addition, the terms of existing or future debt agreements, including our existing credit facility, may restrict us from adopting any of these alternatives. Our ability to recapitalize and incur additional debt in the future could also delay or prevent a change in control of our company, make some transactions more difficult and impose additional financial or other covenants on us. Our current indebtedness and any inability to pay our debt obligations as they come do or inability to incur additional debt could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

 

24


The terms of our credit facility impose operating and financial restrictions on us.

Our credit facility contains a number of significant restrictions and covenants that generally limit our ability to, among other things:

 

   

pay dividends or purchase stock or make other restricted payments to our equityholders;

 

   

incur additional indebtedness;

 

   

issue guarantees;

 

   

make investments;

 

   

use assets as security in other transactions;

 

   

sell assets or merge with or into other companies;

 

   

make capital expenditures;

 

   

enter into transactions with affiliates;

 

   

sell equity or other ownership interests in our subsidiaries; and

 

   

create or permit restrictions on our subsidiaries’ ability to make payments to us.

Our credit facility limits our ability to engage in these types of transactions even if we believed that a specific transaction would contribute to our future growth or improve our operating results. Our credit facility also requires us to achieve specified financial and operating results and maintain compliance with specified financial ratios. Specifically, these covenants require that we have a fixed charge coverage ratio of greater than 1.50, a leverage ratio of less than 3.25, consolidated liquidity of greater than or equal to $3.0 million and adjusted restaurant-level EBITDA (as defined in the credit facility on a rolling four fiscal quarter basis) of greater than or equal to $30.0 million. As of March 20, 2012, we were in compliance with each of these tests. Specifically, as of March 20, 2012, the fixed charge coverage ratio was 2.29, the leverage ratio was 1.43, our consolidated liquidity was approximately $18.7 million and our adjusted restaurant-level EBITDA was approximately $51.2 million. Our ability to comply with these provisions may be affected by events beyond our control. A breach of any of these provisions or our inability to comply with required financial ratios in our credit facility could result in a default under the credit facility in which case the lenders will have the right to declare all borrowings to be immediately due and payable. In addition, the lenders will have the right to declare all borrowings to be immediately due and payable upon the occurrence of certain change of control events relating to us. If we are unable to repay all borrowings when due, whether at maturity or if declared due and payable following a default or change of control event, the lenders would have the right to proceed against the collateral granted to secure the indebtedness. If we breach these covenants or fail to comply with the terms of the credit facility, or a change of control event occurs, and the lenders accelerate the amounts outstanding under the credit facility our business and results of operations would be adversely affected.

Our credit facility carries floating interest rates, thereby exposing us to market risk related to changes in interest rates. Accordingly, our business and results of operations may be adversely affected by changes in interest rates. Assuming a 100 basis point increase on our base interest rate on our credit facility and a full drawdown on the term loan and revolving credit facility, our interest expense would increase by approximately $0.8 million over the course of 12 months. As of March 20, 2012, the balance outstanding under the $70.0 million term loan was $65.0 million, and we had no borrowings outstanding under the $10.0 million revolving credit facility.

 

25


We could face labor shortages that could slow our growth and adversely impact our ability to operate our restaurants.

Our success depends in part upon our ability to attract, motivate and retain a sufficient number of qualified employees, including restaurant managers, kitchen staff and servers, necessary to keep pace with our anticipated expansion schedule and meet the needs of our existing restaurants. A sufficient number of qualified individuals of the requisite caliber to fill these positions may be in short supply in some communities. Competition in these communities for qualified staff could require us to pay higher wages and provide greater benefits. Any inability to recruit and retain qualified individuals may also delay the planned openings of new restaurants and could adversely impact our existing restaurants. Any such inability to retain or recruit qualified employees, increased costs of attracting qualified employees or delays in restaurant openings could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

The failure to enforce and maintain our intellectual property rights could enable others to use names confusingly similar to the names and marks used by our restaurants, which could adversely affect the value of our brands.

We have registered, or have applications pending to register, the names Del Frisco’s, Double Eagle Steak House, Sullivan’s, Del Frisco’s Grille and certain other names and logos used by our restaurants as trade names, trademarks or service marks with the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in certain foreign countries. We have the exclusive right to use these trademarks throughout the United States, other than with respect to one location in Louisville, Kentucky, including the 50 mile surrounding area, where an unrelated third party has the right to use a specific registration of the Del Frisco’s name in Jefferson and Fayette Counties in Kentucky, Marion County in Indiana and Hamilton County in Ohio, and one location in Orlando, Florida, where an unrelated third party has a license to use the Del Frisco’s name in Orange, Seminole and Ocala counties through June 1, 2013, as described in greater detail in “Business—Intellectual Property.” The success of our business depends in part on our continued ability to utilize our existing trade names, trademarks and service marks as currently used in order to increase our brand awareness. In that regard, we believe that our trade names, trademarks and service marks are valuable assets that are critical to our success. The unauthorized use or other misappropriation of our trade names, trademarks or service marks could diminish the value of our brands and restaurant concepts and may cause a decline in our revenues and force us to incur costs related to enforcing our rights. In addition, the use of trade names, trademarks or service marks similar to ours in some markets may keep us from entering those markets. While we may take protective actions with respect to our intellectual property, these actions may not be sufficient to prevent, and we may not be aware of all incidents of, unauthorized usage or imitation by others. Any such unauthorized usage or imitation of our intellectual property, including the costs related to enforcing our rights, could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Information technology system failures or breaches of our network security, including with respect to confidential information, could interrupt our operations and adversely affect our business.

We rely on our computer systems and network infrastructure across our operations, including point-of-sale processing at our restaurants. Our operations depend upon our ability to protect our computer equipment and systems against damage from physical theft, fire, power loss, telecommunications failure or other catastrophic events, as well as from internal and external security breaches, viruses, worms and other disruptive problems. Any damage or failure of our computer systems or network infrastructure that causes an interruption in our operations could and subject us to litigation or actions by regulatory authorities. In addition, the

 

26


majority of our restaurant sales are by credit or debit cards. Other restaurants and retailers have experienced security breaches in which credit and debit card information of their customers has been stolen. If this or another type of breach occurs at one of our restaurants, we may become subject to lawsuits or other proceedings for purportedly fraudulent transactions arising out of the actual or alleged theft of our customers’ credit or debit card information. Although we employ both internal resources and external consultants to conduct auditing and testing for weaknesses in our systems, controls, firewalls and encryption and intend to maintain and upgrade our security technology and operational procedures to prevent such damage, breaches or other disruptive problems, there can be no assurance that these security measures will be successful. Any such claim, proceeding or action by a regulatory authority, or any adverse publicity resulting from these allegations, could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Risks Related to This Offering

There is no existing market for our common stock and we do not know if one will develop to provide you with adequate liquidity.

Prior to this offering, there has not been a public market for our common stock. We cannot predict the extent to which investor interest in our company will lead to the development of an active trading market, and if developed, may not be sustained, or how liquid any trading market might become. The initial public offering price for our common stock was determined by negotiations between us and the underwriters and does not purport to be indicative of prices that will prevail in the open market following this offering. The lack of an active market may also reduce the fair market value of your shares. An inactive market may also impair our ability to raise capital by selling shares of capital stock and may impair our ability to acquire other companies by using our shares as consideration. If an active trading market does not develop, you may have difficulty selling any of our common stock that you buy at the time you wish to sell them or at a price that you consider reasonable.

Our stock price may be volatile, the market price of our common stock may decline and you could lose all or a significant part of your investment.

Even if an active trading market for our common stock develops, the market price of our common stock could be subject to wide fluctuations in response to many factors, some of which are beyond our control, including:

 

   

our quarterly or annual earnings or those of other companies in our industry;

 

   

the failure of securities analysts to cover our common stock after this offering or changes in financial estimates by analysts who cover us, our competitors or the restaurant industry in general and the fine dining segment in particular;

 

   

announcements by us or our competitors of new locations or menu items, capacity changes, strategic investments or acquisitions;

 

   

actual or anticipated variations in our or our competitors’ operating results, and our and our competitors’ growth rates;

 

   

failure by us or our competitors to meet analysts’ projections or guidance that we or our competitors may give the market;

 

   

general or regional economic conditions;

 

   

fluctuations in operating results;

 

   

additions or departures of our senior management personnel;

 

   

terrorist acts;

 

27


   

changes in laws or regulations, or new interpretations or applications of laws and regulations, that are applicable to our business;

 

   

changes in accounting standards, policies, guidance, interpretations or principles;

 

   

short sales, hedging and other derivative transactions in the shares of our common stock;

 

   

future sales or issuances of our common stock, including sales or issuances by us, our directors or executive officers and our significant stockholders;

 

   

our dividend policy; and

 

   

investor perceptions of us, our competitors and our industry.

Furthermore, the stock markets recently have experienced extreme price and volume fluctuations that have affected and continue to affect the market prices of equity securities of many companies. These fluctuations have often been unrelated or disproportionate to the operating performance of those companies. These broad market and restaurant industry fluctuations, as well as general economic, political and market conditions such as recessions or interest rate changes may cause the market price of our common stock to decline. If the market price of our common stock after this offering does not exceed the initial public offering price, you may not realize any return on your investment in us and may lose some or all of your investment.

In addition, in the past, companies that have experienced volatility in the market price of their stock have been subject to securities class action litigation. We may be the target of this type of litigation in the future. Securities litigation against us could result in substantial costs and divert our management’s attention from other business concerns, which could seriously harm our business.

If securities or industry analysts do not publish research or reports about our business, or if they change their recommendations regarding our stock adversely, our stock price and trading volume could decline.

The trading market for our common stock will be influenced in part by the research and other reports that industry or securities analysts may publish about us or our business. We do not currently have any and may never obtain research coverage by industry or financial analysts. If no or few analysts commence coverage of us, the trading price of our stock would likely decrease. Even if we do obtain analyst coverage, if one or more of the analysts who cover us downgrade our stock or if analysts issue other unfavorable commentary, our stock price would likely decline. If one or more of these analysts cease coverage of our company or fail to regularly publish reports on us, we could lose visibility in the financial markets, which in turn could cause our stock price or trading volume to decline.

Lone Star Fund owns a substantial portion of our common stock, it may have conflicts of interest with other stockholders in the future and its significant ownership will limit your ability to influence corporate matters.

Immediately after this offering, Lone Star Fund will beneficially own approximately     % (or     % if the underwriters’ over-allotment option is exercised in full) of our outstanding common stock. As a result of this concentration of stock ownership, Lone Star Fund acting on its own has sufficient voting power to effectively control all matters submitted to our stockholders for approval that do not require a super majority, including director elections and proposed amendments to our bylaws.

 

28


In addition, this concentration of ownership may delay or prevent a merger, consolidation or other business combination or change in control of our company and make some transactions that might otherwise give you the opportunity to realize a premium over the then-prevailing market price of our common stock more difficult or impossible without the support of Lone Star Fund. The interests of Lone Star Fund may not always coincide with our interests as a company or the interests of other stockholders. Accordingly, Lone Star Fund could cause us to enter into transactions or agreements of which you would not approve or make decisions with which you would disagree. This concentration of ownership may also adversely affect our share price.

Additionally, Lone Star Fund is in the business of making investments in companies and may from time to time acquire and hold interests in businesses that compete directly or indirectly with us. Lone Star Fund may also pursue acquisition opportunities that may be complementary to our business, and as a result, those acquisition opportunities may not be available to us. In recognition that principals, members, directors, managers, partners, stockholders, officers, employees and other representatives of Lone Star Fund and its affiliates and investment funds may serve as our directors or officers, our certificate of incorporation to be adopted in connection with this offering will provide, among other things, that none of Lone Star Fund or any principal, member, director, manager, partner, stockholder, officer, employee or other representative of Lone Star Fund has any duty to refrain from engaging directly or indirectly in the same or similar business activities or lines of business that we do. In the event that any of these persons or entities acquires knowledge of a potential transaction or matter which may be a corporate opportunity for itself and us, we will not have any expectancy in such corporate opportunity, and these persons and entities will not have any duty to communicate or offer such corporate opportunity to us and may pursue or acquire such corporate opportunity for itself or direct such opportunity to another person. These potential conflicts of interest could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or prospects if, among other things, attractive corporate opportunities are allocated by the sponsors to themselves or their other affiliates. The terms of our certificate of incorporation to be adopted are more fully described in “Description of Capital Stock—Corporate Opportunities and Transactions with Lone Star Fund.”

Certain of our executive officers will have personal interests in the Offering.

Certain of our executive officers may receive payments, equity or both in connection with this offering. Specifically, we expect that Mr. Mednansky, our Chief Executive Officer, and Mr. Pennison, our Chief Financial Officer, will be paid a transaction bonus of $         and $        , respectively, by our parent company in connection with this offering, as discussed in greater detail under “Executive Compensation—Payments in Connection with the Offering—Transaction Bonuses.” In addition, we intend to grant options to purchase shares of common stock to our executive officers under our equity incentive plan at the time of the pricing this offering with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price, none of which will be vested at the time of the offering.

We are a “controlled company” within the meaning of the NASDAQ rules and, as a result, will qualify for, and intend to rely on, exemptions from certain corporate governance requirements.

Upon completion of this offering, Lone Star Fund will continue to control a majority of the voting power of our outstanding common stock. As a result, we are a “controlled company” within the meaning of the NASDAQ corporate governance standards. Under the NASDAQ rules, a company of which more than 50% of the voting power is held by another company is a “controlled company” and need not comply with certain requirements, including the requirement that a majority of the board of directors consist of independent directors and the requirements that our compensation and nominating and corporate governance committees be

 

29


comprised entirely of independent directors. Following this offering, we intend to utilize these exemptions. As a result, we will not have a majority of independent directors nor will our nominating and compensation committees consist entirely of independent directors. Accordingly, you will not have the same protections afforded to stockholders of companies that are subject to all of the NASDAQ corporate governance requirements.

Future sales of our common stock in the public market could cause our stock price to fall.

If our existing stockholder sells substantial amounts of our common stock in the public market following this offering, the market price of our common stock could decrease significantly. The perception in the public market that our existing stockholder might sell substantial amounts of our common stock could also depress the market price of our common stock. Any such sale or perception could also impair our ability to raise capital or pay for acquisitions using our equity securities.

Immediately after completion of this offering, we will have             shares of common stock outstanding, including             shares that will be beneficially owned by Lone Star Fund. Of our issued and outstanding shares, all of the shares sold in this offering will be freely transferable without restriction or additional registration other than shares held by our “affiliates,” as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or the Securities Act. Following completion of this offering, Lone Star Fund will beneficially own approximately    % of our outstanding shares of common stock (or    % if the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full) and, unless such shares are registered under the Securities Act, may only be resold into the public markets in accordance with the requirements of Rule 144, including the volume limitations, manner of sale requirements and notice requirements thereof. See “Shares Eligible for Future Sale.” In addition, the remaining shares of our common stock that will be outstanding immediately after completion of this offering will become eligible for sale in the public markets from time to time, subject to Securities Act restrictions, following the expiration of lock-up agreements. We, Lone Star Fund, and our officers and directors have signed lock-up agreements with the underwriters that will, subject to certain exceptions, restrict the sale of shares of our common stock held by them for 180 days following the date of this prospectus, subject to extension in the case of an earnings release or material news or a material event relating to us. Deutsche Bank Securities, Inc. and Piper Jaffray & Co. may, without notice except in certain limited circumstances, release all or any portion of the shares of common stock subject to lock-up agreements. See “Underwriting” for a description of these lock-up agreements. Upon the expiration of the lock-up agreements described above, all of such shares will be eligible for resale in the public market, subject in the case of shares held by our affiliates, to the volume, manner of sale and other limitations under Rule 144. We expect that Lone Star Fund will be considered an affiliate of us 180 days after this offering based on their expected share ownership following this offering.

After completion of this offering, Lone Star Fund will have the right to demand that we file a registration statement with respect to the shares of our common stock held by it, and will have the right to include its shares in any registration statement that we file with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or SEC, subject to certain exceptions. See “Shares Eligible for Future Sale.” Any registration of the shares owned by Lone Star Fund would enable those shares to be sold in the public market, subject to certain restrictions in our registration rights agreement and the restrictions under the lock-up agreements referred to above.

The market price for shares of our common stock may drop significantly when the restrictions on resale by our existing stockholders lapse or if those restrictions on resale are waived. A decline in the price of shares of our common stock might impede our ability to raise capital through the issuance of additional shares of our common stock or other equity

 

30


securities. In addition, following this offering, we intend to file a registration statement on Form S-8 under the Securities Act registering shares under our stock incentive plan. Subject to the terms of the awards granting the shares included in this registration statement and except for shares held by affiliates who will have certain restrictions on their ability to sell, the shares will be available for sale in the public market immediately after the registration statement is filed. We expect that the initial registration statement on Form S-8 will cover            shares of our common stock. See “Shares Eligible for Future Sale.”

If you purchase shares of common stock sold in this offering, you will experience immediate and substantial dilution.

If you purchase shares in this offering, the value of your shares based on our actual book value will immediately be less than the price you paid. This reduction in the value of your equity is known as dilution. This dilution occurs in large part because our earlier investors paid substantially less than the initial public offering price when they purchased their shares of our common stock. If you purchase shares in this offering, you will suffer, as of March 20, 2012, immediate dilution of $             per share (or $             if the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full), in the net tangible book value after giving effect to the sale of common stock in this offering at an initial public offering price of $             per share less underwriting discounts and commissions and the estimated expenses payable by us, and the application of the net proceeds as described in “Use of Proceeds.” If outstanding options to purchase our shares of common stock are exercised in the future you will experience additional dilution. In addition, if we raise funds by issuing additional securities, the newly issued shares will further dilute your percentage ownership of our company.

We plan to grant options in connection with this offering, and in the future expect to issue options, restricted stock and other forms of stock-based compensation, which have the potential to dilute stockholder value and cause the price of our common stock to decline.

We intend to grant options to purchase shares of common stock under our equity incentive plan at the time of the pricing of this offering with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price, none of which will be vested at the time of this offering. In addition, we expect to offer stock options, restricted stock and other forms of stock-based compensation to our directors, officers and employees in the future. If the options that we issue are exercised, or any restricted stock that we may issue vests, and those shares are sold into the public market, the market price of our common stock may decline. In addition, the availability of shares of common stock for award under our equity incentive plan, or the grant of stock options, restricted stock or other forms of stock-based compensation, may adversely affect the market price of our common stock.

Our ability to raise capital in the future may be limited.

Our business and operations may consume resources faster than we anticipate. In the future, we may need to raise additional funds through the issuance of new equity securities, debt or a combination of both. Additional financing may not be available on favorable terms, or at all. If adequate funds are not available on acceptable terms, we may be unable to fund our capital requirements. If we issue new debt securities, the debt holders would have rights senior to common shareholders to make claims on our assets, and the terms of any debt could restrict our operations, including our ability to pay dividends on our common stock. If we issue additional equity securities, existing shareholders will experience dilution, and the new equity securities could have rights senior to those of our common stock. Because our decision to issue securities in any future offering will depend on market conditions and other factors beyond our control, we

 

31


cannot predict or estimate the amount, timing or nature of our future offerings. Thus, our shareholders bear the risk of our future securities offerings reducing the market price of our common stock and diluting their interest.

We are a holding company and depend on the cash flow of our subsidiaries.

We are a holding company with no material assets other than the equity interests of our subsidiaries. Our subsidiaries conduct substantially all of our operations and own substantially all of our assets and intellectual property. Consequently, our cash flow and our ability to meet our obligations and pay any future dividends to our stockholders depends upon the cash flow of our subsidiaries and the payment of funds by our subsidiaries directly or indirectly to us in the form of dividends, distributions and other payments. Any inability on the part of our subsidiaries to make payments to us could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Provisions of our charter documents, Delaware law and other documents could discourage, delay or prevent a merger or acquisition at a premium price.

Provisions in our certificate of incorporation and bylaws that we intend to adopt prior to the consummation of this offering may have the effect of delaying or preventing a change of control or changes in our management. For example, our certificate of incorporation and bylaws include provisions that:

 

   

permit us to issue without stockholder approval preferred stock in one or more series and, with respect to each series, fix the number of shares constituting the series and the designation of the series, the voting powers, if any, of the shares of the series and the preferences and other special rights, if any, and any qualifications, limitations or restrictions, of the shares of the series;

 

   

prevent stockholders from calling special meetings;

 

   

restrict the ability of stockholders to act by written consent after such time as Lone Star Fund owns less than a majority of our common stock;

 

   

limit the ability of stockholders to amend our certificate of incorporation and bylaws;

 

   

require advance notice for nominations for election to the board of directors and for stockholder proposals;

 

   

do not permit cumulative voting in the election of our directors, which means that the holders of a majority of our common stock may elect all of the directors standing for election; and

 

   

establish a classified board of directors with staggered three-year terms.

These provisions may discourage, delay or prevent a merger or acquisition of our company, including a transaction in which the acquiror may offer a premium price for our common stock.

We are also subject to Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, or the DGCL, which, subject to certain exceptions, prohibits us from engaging in any business combination with any interested stockholder, as defined in that section, for a period of three years following the date on which that stockholder became an interested stockholder. In addition, our equity incentive plan will permit vesting of stock options and restricted stock, and payments to be made to the employees thereunder in certain circumstances, in connection with a change of control of our company, which could discourage, delay or prevent a merger or acquisition at a premium price. In addition, our credit facility includes, and other debt instruments we may enter into in the future may include, provisions entitling the lenders to demand immediate repayment of all borrowings upon the occurrence of certain change of control events relating to our

 

32


company, which also could discourage, delay or prevent a business combination transaction. See “Description of Capital Stock—Provisions of Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws to be Adopted and Delaware Law That May Have an Anti-Takeover Effect.”

We are an “emerging growth company” and we cannot be certain if we will be able to maintain such status or if the reduced disclosure requirements applicable to emerging growth companies will make our common stock less attractive to investors.

We are an “emerging growth company,” as defined in the Jumpstart our Business Startups Act of 2012, or JOBS Act, and we intend to adopt certain exemptions from various reporting requirements that are applicable to other public companies that are not “emerging growth companies.” These exemptions include, but are not limited to, not being required to comply with the auditor attestation requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, reduced disclosure obligations regarding executive compensation in our periodic reports and proxy statements, and exemptions from the requirements of holding a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation and stockholder approval of any golden parachute payments not previously approved. We may take advantage of these reporting exemptions until we are no longer an “emerging growth company.” We may remain as an “emerging growth company” for up to five full fiscal years following our initial public offering. We would cease to be an “emerging growth company,” and therefore not be able to rely upon the above exemptions, if we have more than $1 billion in annual revenues in a fiscal year, we issue more than $1 billion of non-convertible debt over a three-year period or we have more than $700 million in market value of our common stock held by non-affiliates as of any June 30 before the end of the five full fiscal years.

Additionally, because the JOBS Act has only recently been enacted, it is not yet clear whether investors will accept the more limited disclosure requirements that we may be entitled to follow so long as we qualify as an “emerging growth company.” Therefore, we cannot predict if investors will find our common stock less attractive because we will rely on any of the exemptions discussed above. If some investors find our common stock less attractive as a result, there may be a less active trading market for our common stock and our stock price may be more volatile.

If we are unable to implement and maintain the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting, our independent registered public accounting firm may not be able to provide an unqualified report on our internal controls, which could adversely affect our stock price.

Pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and the related rules adopted by the SEC and the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board, starting with the second annual report that we file with the SEC after the consummation of this offering, our management will be required to report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting. In addition, once we no longer qualify as an “emerging growth company” under the JOBS Act and lose the ability to rely on the exemptions related thereto discussed above, our independent registered public accounting firm will also need to attest to the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting under Section 404. We may encounter problems or delays in completing the implementation of any changes necessary to our internal control over financial reporting to conclude such controls are effective. If we conclude and, once we no longer qualify as an “emerging growth company” under the JOBS Act, our independent registered public accounting firm concludes, that our internal control over financial reporting is not effective, investor confidence and our stock price could decline.

Matters impacting our internal controls may cause us to be unable to report our financial information on a timely basis and thereby subject us to adverse regulatory consequences,

 

33


including sanctions by the SEC or violations of NASDAQ listing rules, and result in a breach of the covenants under our financing arrangements. There also could be a negative reaction in the financial markets due to a loss of investor confidence in us and the reliability of our financial statements. Confidence in the reliability of our financial statements also could suffer if we or our independent registered public accounting firm were to report a material weakness in our internal controls over financial reporting. This could materially adversely affect us and lead to a decline in the price of our common stock.

Because we do not anticipate paying any dividends for the foreseeable future, you may not receive any return on your investment unless you sell your common stock for a price greater than that which you paid for it.

Although the agreements governing our indebtedness do not directly restrict our ability to do so, we do not anticipate paying any dividends to our stockholders for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, you may have to sell some or all of your common stock in order to generate cash flow from your investment. You may not receive a gain on your investment when you sell our common stock and may lose some or the entire amount of your investment. Any determination to pay dividends in the future will be at the discretion of our board of directors and will depend upon our financial condition, operating results, contractual restrictions, restrictions imposed by applicable law and other factors our board of directors deems relevant.

We could incur increased costs as a result of being a publicly-traded company.

As a company with publicly-traded securities, we could incur significant legal, accounting and other expenses not presently incurred, both before and after we cease to qualify as an “emerging growth company.” In addition, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as well as rules promulgated by the SEC and NASDAQ, require us to adopt corporate governance practices applicable to U.S. public companies. These rules and regulations may increase our legal and financial compliance costs and may place a strain on our systems and resources. The Exchange Act requires that we file annual, quarterly and current reports with respect to our business and financial condition. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires that we maintain effective disclosure controls and procedures and internal controls over financial reporting. To maintain and improve the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures, we will need to commit significant resources, hire additional staff and provide additional management oversight. We will be implementing additional procedures and processes for the purpose of addressing the standards and requirements applicable to public companies. Although we will benefit from some of the disclosure and attestation exemptions under the JOBS Act discussed above for the period in which we qualify as an “emerging growth company,” we do not expect the deferrals to materially alter the costs and burdens we will experience as a public company.

In addition, sustaining our growth also will require us to commit additional management, operational and financial resources to identify new professionals to join our firm and to maintain appropriate operational and financial systems to adequately support expansion. We have also been transitioning certain services previously provided to us by affiliates of Lone Star Fund, our controlling shareholder, to internal or third party providers in preparation for the termination of our Asset Advisory Agreement with them upon the completion of this offering. These services include, among other things, real estate management and legal advisory services. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement.” These activities and the related transitions may not be successful and may divert management’s attention from other business concerns, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows. We expect to incur significant additional annual

 

34


expenses related to these steps and, among other things, additional directors and officers liability insurance, director fees, reporting requirements, transfer agent fees, hiring additional accounting, legal and administrative personnel, increased auditing and legal fees and similar expenses.

Our reported financial results may be adversely affected by changes in accounting principles applicable to us.

Generally accepted accounting principles in the U.S. are subject to interpretation by the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or FASB, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, the SEC and various bodies formed to promulgate and interpret appropriate accounting principles. A change in these principles or interpretations could have a significant effect on our reported financial results, and could affect the reporting of transactions completed before the announcement of a change. In addition, the SEC has announced a multi-year plan that could ultimately lead to the use of International Financial Reporting Standards by U.S. issuers in their SEC filings. Any such change could have a significant effect on our reported financial results.

 

35


CAUTIONARY STATEMENT REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This prospectus includes “forward-looking statements.” Forward-looking statements are those that do not relate solely to historical fact. They include, but are not limited to, any statement that may predict, forecast, indicate or imply future results, performance, achievements or events. They may contain words such as “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “estimate,” “intend,” “plan,” “target,” “project,” “likely,” “will,” “would,” “could” and words or phrases of similar meaning. Forward-looking statements may relate to, among other things:

 

   

our ability to successfully adjust to changes in consumer preferences, discretionary spending patterns and general economic conditions, including recent economic events;

 

   

our restaurants’ ability to successfully compete;

 

   

our expectations regarding future growth, including our ability to open new restaurants and operate them profitably;

 

   

our ability to develop the Grille and any other new concepts;

 

   

our ability to maintain and grow our reputation and the acceptance of our brands;

 

   

our expectations regarding higher operating costs, including labor costs;

 

   

our ability to obtain our principal food products and manage related costs;

 

   

our expectations regarding the seasonality of our business;

 

   

our expectations regarding litigation or other legal proceedings;

 

   

the impact of federal, state or local government statutes, rules and regulations;

 

   

our expectations regarding the loss of key members of our management team or employees;

 

   

our expectations regarding our liquidity and capital resources, including our ability to meet our lease obligations;

 

   

our expectations regarding the amount and terms of our existing or future indebtedness;

 

   

our ability to maintain adequate protection of our intellectual property; and

 

   

the other matters described in “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations,” and “Business.”

Given these risks and uncertainties, we urge you to read this prospectus completely with the understanding that actual future results may be materially different from what we plan or expect. These factors and the other risk factors described in this prospectus are not necessarily all of the important factors that could cause actual results or developments to differ materially from those expressed in any of our forward-looking statements. Consequently, there can be no assurance that actual results or developments anticipated by us will be realized or, even if substantially realized, that they will have the expected consequences to, or effects on, us. Given these uncertainties, prospective investors are cautioned not to place undue reliance on forward-looking statements.

All future written and verbal forward-looking statements attributable to us or any person acting on our behalf are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. In light of these risks, uncertainties and assumptions, the forward-looking statements made in this prospectus may not prove to be correct.

 

36


USE OF PROCEEDS

Our net proceeds from this offering will be approximately $             million (or approximately $             million if the underwriters exercise in full their over-allotment option to purchase up to             additional shares of our common stock), based on an assumed initial public offering price of $             per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated price range appearing on the cover of this prospectus, after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering as follows:

 

   

$             million to repay outstanding borrowings under our credit facility, including accrued interest;

 

   

$3.0 million to make a one-time payment to Lone Star Fund, an affiliate of our controlling shareholder, in consideration for the termination of our asset advisory agreement upon consummation of this offering as described under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement;” and

 

   

the remainder of the net proceeds for working capital and other general corporate purposes.

The terms of our credit facility require us to use at least 50% of the net proceeds from all equity offerings, including this offering, to repay outstanding indebtedness under the facility. As of June 8, 2012, the balance outstanding under our credit facility was $61.5 million. Our credit facility matures in July 2016 and bears interest at an amount between LIBOR plus 4.75% and LIBOR plus 5.75%, depending on our leverage ratio. For additional information regarding our liquidity and outstanding indebtedness, see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Liquidity and Capital Resources.”

The selling stockholder will receive approximately $             million (or approximately $             million if the underwriters exercise in full their over-allotment option) from this offering. We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of shares by the selling stockholder.

 

37


DIVIDEND POLICY

We have never declared or paid any cash dividends on our common stock and do not anticipate paying cash dividends on our common stock for the foreseeable future. We anticipate that we will retain all of our future earnings, if any, for use in the development and expansion of our business and for general corporate purposes. Any determination to pay dividends in the future will be at the discretion of our board of directors and will depend upon our financial condition, operating results and other factors our board of directors deems relevant.

Our credit facility contains, and debt instruments that we enter into in the future may contain, covenants that place limitations on the amount of dividends we may pay. In addition, under Delaware law, our board of directors may declare dividends only to the extent of our surplus, which is defined as total assets at fair market value minus total liabilities, minus statutory capital, or, if there is no surplus, out of our net profits for the then current and immediately preceding year.

 

38


CAPITALIZATION

The table below sets forth our cash and cash equivalents and capitalization as of March 20, 2012:

 

   

on a consolidated basis;

 

   

on a pro forma basis to reflect the completion of our corporate reorganization where Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC is converted into a Delaware corporation and renamed Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc.; and

 

   

on a pro forma as adjusted basis to give effect to the issuance and sale of             shares of our common stock offered by us in this offering at an assumed offering price of $             per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated price range appearing on the cover of this prospectus, after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us and the application of such proceeds as described in “Use of Proceeds,” including the use of $             million of the proceeds received by us to repay outstanding borrowings under our credit facility, including accrued interest.

You should read this table together with the information in this prospectus under “Use of Proceeds,” “Selected Consolidated and Combined Financial Data,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Description of Capital Stock,” and with the consolidated financial statements and the related notes to those statements included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

     As of March 20, 2012  
     Actual      Pro Forma      Pro Forma As
Adjusted
 
            (Unaudited)         
     (in thousands, except share amounts)  

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 8,672       $                    $                
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Credit facility, including current portion

   $ 65,000       $         $     

Advances due affiliate

             

Stockholders’ equity:

        

Membership units

     51,359         

Undesignated preferred stock, no par value per share: no shares authorized, issued or outstanding actual,             shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

             

Common stock, no par value per share: no shares authorized, issued or outstanding actual,             shares authorized,             shares issued and outstanding pro forma and             shares issued and outstanding pro forma as         adjusted

             

Additional paid-in capital

             

Retained earnings

   $ 51,082       $         $     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total stockholders’ equity

   $ 102,441       $         $     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total capitalization

   $ 176,113       $         $     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $             per share (the midpoint of the initial public offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) would increase (decrease) the pro forma as adjusted amount of each of cash and cash equivalents, additional paid-in capital, total stockholders’ equity and total capitalization by approximately $             million, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 

39


DILUTION

Dilution represents the difference between the amount per share paid by investors in this offering and the as adjusted net tangible book value per share of our common stock immediately after this offering. The data in this section have been derived from our consolidated balance sheet as of March 20, 2012. Net tangible book value per share is equal to our total tangible assets less the amount of our total liabilities, divided by the sum of the number of our shares of common stock outstanding. Our net tangible book value as of March 20, 2012 was $            million, or $            per share of common stock.

After giving effect to our receipt of the estimated net proceeds from our sale of common stock in this offering at an assumed offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the estimated price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and other estimated offering expenses payable by us and the application of such proceeds as described in “Use of Proceeds,” our net tangible book value, as adjusted, as of March 20, 2012 would have been $            million, or $             per share of common stock. This represents an immediate decrease in net tangible book value to our existing stockholders of $            per share and an immediate dilution to new investors in this offering of $            per share. The following table illustrates this per share dilution:

 

Assumed initial public offering price per share

      $                
     

 

 

 

Net tangible book value per share of common stock as of March 20, 2012

   $                   

Pro forma increase in net tangible book value per share attributable to new investors

     
  

 

 

    

Pro forma net tangible book value per share after the offering

     
     

 

 

 

Dilution per share to new investors

      $     
     

 

 

 

The following table shows on a pro forma basis at March 20, 2012, after giving effect to the completion of our corporate reorganization, the total cash consideration paid to us and the average price per share paid by existing stockholders and by new investors in this offering before deducting underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 

     Shares Purchased       Total Consideration       Average Price
Per Share
 
       Number    %         Amount              %        

Existing stockholders

                   $                                 $                

New investors

            
  

 

  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

Total

        100   $           100  

This discussion of dilution, and the table quantifying it, assumes no exercise of any outstanding stock options after March 20, 2012. Before we complete our public offering, we will have outstanding options to purchase approximately            shares of common stock at an exercise price equal to the offering price set forth on the cover of this prospectus.

The information in the preceding table has been calculated using an assumed initial public offering price of $             per share. A $1.00 increase or decrease in the assumed initial public offering price per share would increase or decrease, respectively, the as adjusted net tangible book value per share of common stock after this offering by $            per share and increase or decrease, respectively, the dilution per share of common stock to new investors in this offering by $             per share, in each case calculated as described above and assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same.

 

40


If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, our existing stockholders would own approximately    % and our new investors would own approximately    % of the total number of shares of our common stock outstanding immediately after this offering, based on shares outstanding as of March 20, 2012, and the total consideration paid by our existing common stockholders and new investors would be approximately $            (or    %) and $            (or    %), respectively.

An aggregate of            additional shares of our common stock will initially be available for future awards under the equity incentive plan that we intend to implement in connection with this offering. To the extent that we grant awards in the future with exercise prices below the initial public offering price in this offering, investors purchasing in this offering will incur additional dilution.

 

41


SELECTED CONSOLIDATED AND COMBINED FINANCIAL DATA

The selected consolidated and combined financial data below are derived from our consolidated financial statements for 2007 through 2011 which have been audited by an independent registered public accounting firm. Our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements for the 12 weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012, which in the opinion of management reflect all adjustments necessary to present fairly in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States the information for interim periods presented. The operating results of the interim periods are not necessarily indicative of results for a full year. The consolidated financial data for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2007 and December 30, 2008 and as of the fiscal years then ended are derived from our historical financial statements not included elsewhere in this prospectus. The selected consolidated financial data as of December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011 and for the fiscal years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this prospectus. The selected consolidated financial data as of and for the 12 weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012 are derived from our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

The selected consolidated financial data below represent portions of our financial statements and are not complete. Additionally, the financial and operating data set forth below may not reflect the many significant changes that will occur in the operations and capitalization of our company as a result of the reorganization. You should read this information together with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes to those statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. Historical results are not necessarily indicative of future performance.

 

42


    Fiscal Year Ended(1)     12 Weeks Ended  
  December 31,
2007
    December 30,
2008
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
    (in thousands, except per share amounts)  

Income Statement Data :

             

Revenues

  $ 163,868      $ 178,386      $ 160,177      $ 165,575      $ 201,629      $ 43,352      $ 53,678   

Costs and expenses:

             

Costs of sales

    56,850        58,587        47,593        50,339        61,647        13,445        16,579   

Restaurant operating expenses

    67,290        73,718        69,209        73,404        88,210        19,331        22,673   

Marketing and advertising costs

    3,293        3,473        3,523        2,825        4,359        727        874   

Pre-opening costs

    2,124        2,469        493        798        3,018        354        70   

General and administrative

    4,719        6,354        8,236        7,512        10,640        2,190        2,646   

Abandoned registration costs

           2,379                                      

Costs associated with strategic alternatives and merger expense

    223                                             

Management and accounting fees paid to related party

    2,907        2,104        2,878        3,345        3,399        469        744   

Non-cash impairment charges

                                1,400                 

Depreciation and amortization

    3,333        4,555        6,422        6,624        7,146        1,525        1,713   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

    23,129        24,747        21,823        20,728        21,810        5,311        8,379   

Other income (expense), net:

             

Interest expense— affiliates

    (4,533     (2,295     (2,281     (1,775                     

Interest expense— other

    (4,355     (10,147     (5,942     (9,906     (8,856     (1,764     (1,221

Other, net

    290        (182     36        (249     (114     2        (3
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from continuing operations before income taxes

    14,531        12,123        13,636        8,798        12,840        3,549        7,155   

Provision for (benefit from) income taxes

    4,407        4,924        3,616        (44     3,751        1,064        2,170   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from continuing operations

    10,124        7,199        10,020        8,842        9,089        2,485        4,985   

Discontinued operations:

             

Loss from operations of discontinued restaurant

    (309     (68                                   

Income tax benefit

    116        24                                      
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss on discontinued operations

    (193     (44                                   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

  $ 9,931      $ 7,155      $ 10,020      $ 8,842      $ 9,089      $ 2,485      $ 4,985   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Pro forma net income per common share(2):

             

Basic and diluted

  $        $        $        $        $        $        $     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Shares used in computing pro forma unaudited net income per share(2):

             

Basic and diluted

             
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

43


    December 31,
2007
    December 30,
2008
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
    (in thousands)  

Balance Sheet Data (at end of period):

             

Cash and cash equivalents.

  $ 8,205      $ 7,292      $ 13,257      $ 4,157      $ 14,119      $ 8,678      $ 8,672   

Working capital (deficit)

    (34,063     (34,229     1,061        (2,276     3,773        (3,616     1,408   

Total assets

    214,482        225,033        236,424        218,834        235,858        220,265        232,399   

Total debt

    151,004        151,706        150,544        78,922        70,000        67,766        65,000   

Total member’s equity (deficit)

    (18,674     (10,154     32,741        89,100        97,456        91,624        102,441   

 

    Fiscal Year Ended(1)     12 Weeks Ended  
    December 31,
2007
    December 30,
2008
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
    (in thousands, except restaurant and percentage amounts)  

Other Financial Data :

             

Net cash provided by operating activities

  $ 20,625      $ 16,003      $ 18,916      $ 12,278      $ 28,079      $ 7,629      $ 4,107   

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities

    (5,491     (16,947     (28,538     (1,489     (6,727     8,048        (4,554

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

    (15,669     75        15,587        (19,889     (11,390     (11,156     (5,000

Capital expenditures

    16,878        21,422        7,755        5,550        20,063        4,749        3,773   

Adjusted EBITDA(3)

    29,129        34,281        30,373        30,220        36,503        7,476        10,900   

Adjusted EBITDA margin(4)

    17.7     19.2     18.9     18.3     18.1     17.2     20.3

Restaurant-level EBITDA(3)

    36,212        42,256        39,852        39,007        47,413        9,848        13,546   

Restaurant-level EBITDA margin(5)

    22.1     23.7     24.9     23.6     23.5     22.7     25.2
             

Operating Data:

             

Total restaurants (at end of period)

    23        26        27        28        31        28        31   

Total comparable restaurants (at end of period)(6)

    20        21        23        27        27        27        28   

Average sales per comparable restaurant

  $ 7,762      $ 7,539      $ 6,049      $ 6,107      $ 6,668      $ 1,597      $ 1,669   

Percentage Change in comparable restaurant sales(6)

    2.6     (2.3 )%      (18.7 )%      4.3     11.2     12.1     6.7

 

(1) We utilize a 52- or 53-week accounting period which ends on the last Tuesday of December. The fiscal year ended December 30, 2008 had 53 weeks. The fiscal years ended December 31, 2007 December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011 each had 52 weeks.
(2) Unaudited pro forma basic and diluted income per share will be computed by dividing net income for each period by the shares of common stock to be issued following our conversion from a limited liability company to a corporation immediately prior to the effectiveness of the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part. Such shares will be assumed to be outstanding for all periods presented. There will be no potentially dilutive securities. There is no other impact to the financial statements as a result of converting from a limited liability company to a corporation, because our historical financial statements have included a provision for income taxes and related deferred income taxes.
(3) For our definition of adjusted EBITDA and restaurant-level EBITDA and a discussion of why we consider them useful, see “Summary Historical Consolidated Financial and Operating Data.”

 

44


The following table presents a reconciliation of adjusted EBITDA and restaurant-level EBITDA to net income:

 

    Fiscal Year Ended     12 Weeks Ended  
  December 31,
2007
    December 30,
2008
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
    (in thousands)  

Income from continuing operations

  $ 10,124      $ 7,199      $ 10,020      $ 8,842      $ 9,089      $ 2,485      $ 4,985   

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

    4,407        4,924        3,616        (44     3,751        1,064        2,170   

Interest income

    (290     (170     (36     (75     (16     (2     (3

Interest expense—other

    4,355        10,147        5,942        9,906        8,856        1,764        1,221   

Interest expense—affiliate

    4,533        2,295        2,281        1,775                        

Non-cash impairment charges

                                1,400                 

Depreciation and amortization

    3,333        4,555        6,422        6,624        7,146        1,525        1,713   

Lease guarantee payments

                         324        130                 

Pre-opening costs

    2,124        2,469        493        798        3,018        354        70   

Abandoned registration costs

           2,379                                      

Management fees and expenses(a)

    543        483        1,635        2,070        3,129        286        744   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

  $ 29,129      $ 34,281      $ 30,373      $ 30,220      $ 36,503      $ 7,476      $ 10,900   

General and administrative.

    4,719        6,354        8,236        7,512        10,640        2,190        2,646   

Related party shared services fees

    2,364        1,621        1,243        1,275        270        182          
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Restaurant-level EBITDA

  $ 36,212      $ 42,256      $ 39,852      $ 39,007      $ 47,413      $ 9,848      $ 13,546   

 

  (a) Includes asset management fees and expenses paid to an affiliate of Lone Star Fund pursuant to our asset advisory agreement, but excludes amounts paid to another affiliate of Lone Star Fund for accounting, administrative and management services under our shared services agreement, which is referred to as the related party shared services fee. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Key Financial Definitions—Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party” and “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement.”

 

(4) Adjusted EBITDA margin is the ratio of adjusted EBITDA to revenues.
(5) Restaurant-level EBITDA margin is the ratio of restaurant-level EBITDA to revenues.
(6) We consider a restaurant to be comparable in the first full period following the eighteenth month of operations. Changes in comparable restaurant sales reflect changes in sales for the comparable group of restaurants over a specified period of time.

 

45


MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF

FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The following discussion and analysis of our consolidated financial condition and results of operations for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012 and March 22, 2011 and for fiscal years ended December 27, 2011, December 28, 2010 and December 29, 2009 should be read in conjunction with “Selected Consolidated and Combined Financial Data” and the consolidated and combined financial statements and related notes to those statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. Some of the information contained in this discussion and analysis or set forth elsewhere in this prospectus, including information with respect to our plans and strategies for our business, includes forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. You should review the section entitled “Risk Factors” for a discussion of important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from the results described in, or implied by, the forward-looking statements contained in this prospectus.

Overview

We develop, own and operate three contemporary, high-end, complementary restaurants: Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House, Sullivan’s Steakhouse, and Del Frisco’s Grille. We are a leader in the full-service steakhouse industry based on average unit volume, or AUV, EBITDA margin and comparable restaurant sales growth. We currently operate 32 restaurants in 18 states. Each of our three restaurant concepts offers steaks as well as other menu selections, such as chops and fresh seafood. These menu selections are complemented by an extensive, award-winning wine list. Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille are positioned within the fine dining segment and are designed to appeal to both business and local dining customers. Our Del Frisco’s restaurants are sited in urban locations to target customers seeking a “destination dining” experience while our Sullivan’s and Grille restaurants are intended to appeal to a broader demographic, allowing them to be located either in urban areas or in close proximity to affluent residential neighborhoods. We believe our success reflects consistent execution across all aspects of the dining experience, from the formulation of proprietary recipes to the procurement and presentation of high quality menu items and delivery of a positive customer experience.

We believe we have an attractive unit economic model that enables us to generate high AUV and adjusted EBITDA margins. We generated revenues of $201.6 million for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011, representing 21.8% total revenue growth and 11.2% comparable restaurant sales growth over 2010. We recorded net income of $9.1 million and adjusted EBITDA of $36.5 million for 2011, representing 2.8% net income growth and 20.8% adjusted EBITDA growth over 2010. Our 2011 operating income and adjusted EBITDA margins were 10.8% and 18.1%, respectively. For the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, we generated revenues of $53.7 million, representing 23.8% total revenue growth and 6.7% comparable restaurant sales growth over the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011. We recorded net income of $5.0 million and adjusted EBITDA of $10.9 million for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, representing 100.7% net income growth and 45.8% adjusted EBITDA growth over the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011. Our operating income and adjusted EBITDA margins for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012 were 15.6% and 20.3%, respectively. For a reconciliation of adjusted EBITDA and adjusted EBITDA margin and a discussion of why we consider them useful, see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Historical Consolidated Financial and Operating Data.”

Our Growth Strategies and Outlook

Our growth model is comprised of the following three primary drivers:

 

   

Pursue Disciplined Restaurant Growth.     We believe that there are significant opportunities to grow our brands on a nationwide basis in both existing and new

 

46


 

markets where we believe we can generate attractive unit-level economics. We are presented with many opportunities to grow our restaurant base, and we carefully evaluate each opportunity to determine that each site selected for development has a high probability of meeting our return on investment targets. Our disciplined growth strategy includes accepting only those sites that we believe present attractive rent and tenant allowance structures as well as reasonable construction costs given the sales potential of the site. We believe our concepts’ complementary market positioning and ability to coexist in the same markets, coupled with our flexible unit models, will allow us to expand each of our three concepts into a greater number of locations.

 

   

Grow Existing Revenue.     We will continue to pursue opportunities to increase the sales and average check at our existing restaurants, pursue targeted local marketing efforts and evaluate operational initiatives, including growth in private dining, designed to increase restaurant unit volumes.

 

   

Maintain Margins Throughout Our Growth.     We will continue to aggressively protect our margins using economies of scale, including marketing and purchasing synergies between our concepts and leveraging our corporate infrastructure as we continue to open new restaurants.

In 2011, we expanded our national platform by opening a Del Frisco’s in Boston, Massachusetts and our first two Grille restaurants in New York City and Dallas, Texas. We believe there are opportunities to open three to five restaurants annually, generally composed of one Del Frisco’s and two to four Sullivan’s and/or Grilles, with new openings of our Grille concept likely serving as the primary driver of new unit growth in the near term. In 2012 we have opened a Grille in Phoenix, Arizona, and we expect to open three additional restaurants, each of which will be leased, including a Del Frisco’s in Chicago, Illinois, and Grilles in Washington, D.C. and Atlanta, Georgia. See “Business—Site Selection and Development” for a discussion of our targeted average cash investment for each concept and other information regarding the opening of a new location.

Performance Indicators

We use the following key metrics in evaluating the performance of our restaurants:

 

   

Comparable Restaurant Sales .    We consider a restaurant to be comparable during the first full quarter following the eighteenth month of operations. Changes in comparable restaurant sales reflect changes in sales for the comparable group of restaurants over a specified period of time. Changes in comparable sales reflect changes in customer count trends as well as changes in average check. Our comparable restaurant base consisted of 23, 27, 27 and 28 restaurants at December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010, December 27, 2011 and March 20, 2012, respectively.

 

   

Average Check.     Average check is calculated by dividing total restaurant sales by customer counts for a given time period. Average check is influenced by menu prices and menu mix. Management uses this indicator to analyze trends in customers’ preferences, the effectiveness of menu changes and price increases and per customer expenditures.

 

   

Average Unit Volume.     Average unit volume, or AUV, consists of the average sales of our restaurants over a certain period of time. This measure is calculated by dividing total restaurant sales within a period by the number of restaurants operating during the relevant period. This indicator assists management in measuring changes in customer traffic, pricing and development of our concepts.

 

   

Customer Counts .    Customer counts are measured by the number of entrees ordered at our restaurants over a given time period.

 

47


   

Cost of Sales.  Cost of sales, as defined below, is an important metric to management because it is the only true variable component of cost relative to the sales volume while other components of cost can vary significantly due to the ability to leverage fixed costs at higher sales volumes.

 

   

Restaurant Operating Expenses. Restaurant operating expenses, as defined below, have both a variable and fixed component that when viewed as a percentage of sales vary more as a result of sales volume of a specific restaurant location and, at higher sales volumes, can be leveraged.

 

   

Adjusted EBITDA Margin .    Adjusted EBITDA margin represents net income before interest, taxes and depreciation and amortization plus the sum of certain non-operating expenses, including pre-opening costs, abandoned registration costs and management fees and expenses, as a percentage of our revenues. By monitoring and controlling our adjusted EBITDA margins, we can gauge the overall profitability of our company.

 

   

Restaurant-Level EBITDA Margin .    Restaurant-level EBITDA margin represents net income before interest, taxes and depreciation and amortization plus the sum of certain non-operating expenses, including pre-opening costs, abandoned registration costs, management fees and expenses and general and administrative expenses, as a percentage of our revenues. By monitoring and controlling our restaurant-level EBITDA margins, we can gauge the overall profitability of our core restaurant operations.

We operate on a 52/53-week fiscal year ending the last Tuesday of each December. Our fiscal quarters consist of 12, 12, 12, and 16 or 17 weeks, respectively.

Key Financial Definitions

Revenues .    Revenues consist primarily of food and beverage sales at our restaurants, net of any discounts, such as management meals and employee meals, associated with each sale. Additionally, revenues are net of the cost of rewards associated with our loyalty program. In 2011, food comprised 66% of food and beverage sales with beverage comprising the remaining 34%. Revenues are directly influenced by the number of operating weeks in the relevant period and comparable restaurant sales growth. Comparable restaurant sales growth reflects the change in year-over-year sales for the comparable restaurant base. Comparable restaurant sales growth is primarily influenced by the number of customers eating in our restaurants, which is influenced by the popularity of our menu items, competition with other restaurants in each market, our customer mix and our ability to deliver a high quality dining experience, and the average check, which is driven by menu mix and pricing.

Cost of Sales .    Cost of sales is comprised primarily of food and beverage expenses. We measure food and beverage costs by tracking cost of sales as a percentage of revenues. Food and beverage expenses are generally influenced by the cost of food and beverage items, distribution costs and menu mix. The components of cost of sales are variable in nature, increase with revenues, are subject to increases or decreases based on fluctuations in commodity costs, including beef prices, and depend in part on the controls we have in place to manage costs of sales at our restaurants.

Restaurant Operating Expenses .    We measure restaurant operating expenses as a percentage of revenue. Restaurant operating expenses include the following:

 

   

Labor expenses, which comprise restaurant management salaries, hourly staff payroll and other payroll-related expenses, including management bonus expenses, vacation pay, payroll taxes, fringe benefits and health insurance expenses and are measured by tracking hourly and total labor as a percentage of revenues;

 

48


   

Occupancy expenses, which comprise all occupancy costs, consisting of both fixed and variable portions of rent, common area maintenance charges, real estate property taxes and other related occupancy costs and are measured by tracking occupancy as a percentage of revenues; and

 

   

Other operating expenses, which comprise repairs and maintenance, utilities, operating supplies and other restaurant-level related operating expenses and are measured by tracking other operating expenses as a percentage of revenues.

Marketing and Advertising Costs .    Marketing and advertising costs include all media, production and related costs for both local restaurant advertising and national marketing. We measure the efficiency of our marketing and advertising expenditures by tracking these costs as a percentage of total revenues. We have historically spent approximately 1.5% to 2.5% of total revenues on marketing and advertising and expect to maintain this level in the near term.

Pre-opening Costs .    Pre-opening costs are costs incurred prior to opening a restaurant, and primarily consist of manager salaries, relocation costs, recruiting expenses, employee payroll and related training costs for new employees, including rehearsal of service activities, as well as lease costs incurred prior to opening. In addition, pre-opening expenses include marketing costs incurred prior to opening as well as meal expenses for entertaining local dignitaries, families and friends. We currently target pre-opening costs per restaurant at $0.8 million for a Del Frisco’s and a Grille and $0.6 million for a Sullivan’s.

General and Administrative Expenses.     General and administrative expenses are comprised of costs related to certain corporate and administrative functions that support development and restaurant operations and provide an infrastructure to support future company growth. These expenses reflect management, supervisory and staff salaries and employee benefits, travel, information systems, training, corporate rent, professional and consulting fees, technology and market research. We measure general and administrative costs by tracking general and administrative expenses as a percentage of revenues. These expenses are expected to increase as a result of costs associated with being a public company as well as costs related to our anticipated growth, including substantial training costs and significant investments in infrastructure. As we are able to leverage these investments made in our people and systems, we expect these expenses to decrease as a percentage of total revenues over time.

Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party .    In December 2006, Lone Star Fund acquired Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc., which owned the Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s concepts, as well as others, including the Texas Land & Cattle and Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon. We refer to this transaction in this prospectus as the Acquisition. Following the Acquisition, Lone Star Fund restructured the company to separate the concepts by, among other things, spinning off to one of its affiliates the subsidiaries that operated the Texas Land & Cattle and Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon concepts. The subsidiaries of Lone Star Fund that operated these concepts were spun-off as part of the restructuring. These entities, which along with their affiliate companies, are referred to in this prospectus as the Casual Dining Companies, are wholly-owned by Lone Star Fund and are therefore considered related parties of us. We do not have any ownership interest in them and they do not have any ownership interest in us.

From December 13, 2006 to December 28, 2010, we were provided with certain accounting, administrative and management services by LS Management, Inc., one of the Casual Dining Companies, which we refer to in this prospectus as the Shared Services Provider, under a shared services agreement, or the Shared Services Agreement. The Shared Services Provider provided similar services to each of the other Casual Dining Companies. In exchange for these services, we were charged an accounting fee of $1,800 per restaurant per four-week accounting

 

49


period, except for the New York City Del Frisco’s, which was charged $5,400 per four-week accounting period, plus a management fee equal to 19.5% of certain agreed upon expenses, as defined in the Shared Services Agreement, which totaled $1.2 million, $1.3 million and $0.3 million in 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. Effective January 1, 2011, we ended this relationship and InfoSync Services, LLC, a business process outsourcing provider focused exclusively on the restaurant industry, began providing similar services under a three-year agreement. We incurred expenses from InfoSync of $0.6 million and $0.2 million for services provided during 2011 and the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, respectively, which is included in general and administrative expenses.

Additionally, since December 13, 2006, we have incurred an asset management fee from an affiliate of Lone Star Fund. This fee is billed monthly based upon the actual direct costs incurred by this affiliate in providing support to us. In 2009, 2010, 2011 and the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, we paid this affiliate of Lone Star Fund approximately $1.6 million, $2.1 million, $3.1 million and $0.7 million, respectively, for these services. Concurrent with this offering, this arrangement will be terminated in exchange for a lump sum $3.0 million payment from the proceeds to the Company of this offering. As a result, upon consummation of this offering, we will enter into a transition services agreement with affiliates of Lone Star Fund pursuant to which we will be provided certain insurance management, legal and benefits administration services. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement.” Lone Star Fund will beneficially own approximately     % of our outstanding common stock immediately after this offering. Therefore, Lone Star will continue to control the Company.

We measure management and accounting fees paid as a percentage of revenue.

Depreciation and Amortization .    Depreciation and amortization includes depreciation of fixed assets and certain definite life intangible assets. We depreciate capitalized leasehold improvements over the shorter of the total expected lease term or their estimated useful life. As we accelerate our restaurant openings, depreciation and amortization is expected to increase as a result of our increased capital expenditures.

 

50


Results of Operations

The following table sets forth certain statements of income data for the periods indicated:

 

    Fiscal Year Ended     12 Weeks Ended  
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
    (in thousands)  

Revenues

  $ 160,177      $ 165,575      $ 201,629      $ 43,352      $ 53,678   

Costs and expenses:

         

Cost of sales

    47,593        50,339        61,647        13,445        16,579   

Restaurant operating expenses

    69,209        73,404        88,210        19,331        22,673   

Marketing and advertising costs

    3,523        2,825        4,359        727        874   

Pre-opening costs

    493        798        3,018        354        70   

General and administrative expenses

    8,236        7,512        10,640        2,190        2,646   

Management and accounting fees paid to related party

    2,878        3,345        3,399        469        744   

Non-cash impairment charges

                  1,400                 

Depreciation and amortization

    6,422        6,624        7,146        1,525        1,713   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

    21,823        20,728        21,810        5,311        8,379   

Other income (expense), net:

         

Interest expense—affiliates

    (2,281     (1,775                     

Interest expense—other

    (5,942     (9,906     (8,856     (1,764     (1,221

Other, net

    36        (249     (114     2        (3
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from continuing operations before income taxes

    13,636        8,798        12,840        3,549        7,155   

Provision for income taxes

    3,616        (44     3,751        1,064        2,170   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from continuing operations

  $ 10,020      $ 8,842      $ 9,089      $ 2,485      $ 4,985   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

51


The following table sets forth certain statements of income data expressed as a percentage of revenues for the periods indicated:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended     12 Weeks Ended  
     December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 

Revenues

     100.0     100.0     100.0     100.0     100.0

Costs and expenses:

          

Cost of sales

     29.7     30.4     30.6     31.0     30.9

Restaurant operating expenses

     43.2     44.3     43.7     44.6     42.2

Marketing and advertising costs

     2.2     1.7     2.2     1.7     1.6

Pre-opening costs

     0.3     0.5     1.5     0.8     0.2

General and administrative expenses

     5.1     4.5     5.3     5.0     4.9

Management and accounting fees paid to related party

     1.8     2.0     1.7     1.1     1.4

Non-cash impairment charges

                   0.7     —       —  

Depreciation and amortization

     4.0     4.0     3.5     3.5     3.2
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

     13.7     12.6     10.8     12.3     15.6

Other income (expense), net:

          

Interest expense—affiliates

     (1.4 %)      (1.1 %)                      

Interest expense—other

     (3.7 %)      (6.0 %)      (4.4 %)      (4.1 %)      (2.3 %) 

Other, net

     0.0     (0.2 %)      (0.1 %)      0.0     0.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from continuing operations before income taxes

     8.6     5.3     6.4     8.2     13.3

Provision for income taxes

     2.3     0.0     1.9     2.5     4.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from continuing operations

     6.3     5.3     4.5     5.7     9.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Fiscal Quarter Ended March 20, 2012 (12 weeks) Compared to the Fiscal Quarter Ended March 22, 2011 (12 weeks)

Revenues.     Revenues increased $10.3 million, or 23.7%, to $53.7 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $43.4 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. This increase was due to a 6.7% increase in total comparable restaurant sales comprised of an increase in comparable sales of 7.9% at Del Frisco’s restaurants and an increase in comparable sales of 5.3% at Sullivan’s restaurants. The overall comparable increase was comprised of a 1.2% increase in guest counts and a 5.5% increase in average check. The increase in average check was impacted by combined menu price increases of approximately 2% implemented in April and December 2011, with the remainder resulting from the menu mix shifting to higher priced items and special offerings. An additional $7.5 million was provided by 36 additional operating weeks resulting from one Del Frisco’s opening in April 2011 and two Grille openings in August and November 2011.

Cost of Sales .    Cost of sales increased $3.2 million, or 23.9%, to $16.6 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $13.4 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. The increase in cost of sales was primarily a result of the growth in comparable restaurant sales and to additional restaurants opened during 2011. As a percentage of revenues, cost of sales decreased slightly to 30.9% during the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from 31.0% in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. The decrease in cost of sales, as a percentage of revenues, was due primarily to lower cost of sales

 

52


at the newly developed Grille concept related to its broad menu mix, partially offset by higher beef costs.

Restaurant Operating Expenses.     Restaurant operating expenses increased $3.4 million, or 17.6%, to $22.7 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $19.3 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. This increase was primarily due to an additional 36 operating weeks in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 as compared to the first quarter of fiscal 2011 from three restaurants opened in 2011. As a percentage of revenues, restaurant operating expenses decreased to 42.2% in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from 44.6% in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. The decrease in restaurant operating expenses, as a percentage of revenues, was primarily due to lower labor costs, accounting for 17.6% of the decrease, lower other operating expenses, accounting for 47.9% of the decrease and lower occupancy accounting for the remaining 34.4% of the decrease. This decrease was also due in part to the leveraging of increased comparable restaurant revenues on certain fixed costs.

Marketing and Advertising Costs .    Marketing and advertising costs increased $0.2 million, or 28.6%, to $0.9 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $0.7 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. As a percentage of revenues, marketing and advertising costs decreased slightly to 1.6% in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from 1.7% in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. The decrease in marketing and advertising costs, as a percentage of revenues, was primarily due to the leveraging of increased comparable restaurant revenues on certain fixed public relations costs.

Pre-opening Costs .    Pre-opening costs decreased by $0.3 million to $0.1 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $0.4 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011 due to higher pre-opening costs incurred during the first quarter of fiscal 2011 related to the opening of one location during April 2011.

General and Administrative Expenses .    General and administrative expenses increased $0.4 million, or 18.2%, to $2.6 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $2.2 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. Of this increase, $0.2 million was due to compensation costs related to growth in the number of corporate and regional management-level personnel to support recent and anticipated growth with the remaining $0.2 million net increase relating primarily to higher professional fees. As a percentage of revenues, general and administrative expenses decreased to 4.9% in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from 5.0% in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. General and administrative expenses are expected to increase as a result of costs associated with being a public company as well as costs related to our anticipated growth, including further investments in our infrastructure. As we are able to leverage these investments made in our people and systems, we expect these expenses to decrease as a percentage of total revenues over time.

Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party .    Management and accounting fees paid to related party increased $0.2 million, or 40.0%, to $0.7 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $0.5 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. The increase was due to a $0.4 million increase in asset management fees paid to an affiliate of Lone Star Fund and was partially offset by the elimination in 2011 of fees paid to the Shared Services Provider for certain accounting, administrative and management services for which a $0.2 million transition fee was incurred in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. On December 29, 2010, these accounting, administrative and management services were transferred to a third-party outsourcing firm or performed by Company personnel, and therefore these costs are reflected in general and administrative expenses in the first quarter of each of fiscal 2012 and 2011. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement” and “—Key Financial Definitions—Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party.”

 

53


Depreciation and Amortization .    Depreciation and amortization increased $0.2 million, or 13.3%, to $1.7 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $1.5 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. The increase in depreciation and amortization expense primarily resulted from new assets placed in service during 2011 upon the opening of three new restaurants as well as for existing restaurants that were remodeled during 2011 and the first quarter of fiscal 2012.

Interest Expense. Interest expense-other decreased $0.6 million to $1.2 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 from $1.8 million in the first quarter of fiscal 2011. This decrease was due primarily to a lower average credit facility balance and a lower average interest rate under the new credit facility entered into in July 2011.

Provision for Income Taxes .    The effective income tax rate was 30.3% and 30.0% in the first quarter of fiscal 2012 and the first quarter of fiscal 2011, respectively. The factors that cause the effective tax rates to vary from the federal statutory rate of 35% include the impact of FICA tip and other credits, partially offset by state income taxes and certain non-deductible expenses.

Fiscal Year Ended December 27, 2011 (52 weeks) Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 28, 2010 (52 weeks)

Revenues .    Revenues increased $36.0 million, or 21.7%, to $201.6 million in 2011 from $165.6 million in 2010. This increase was due primarily to an 11.2% increase in total comparable restaurant sales comprised of an increase in comparable sales of 13.3% at Del Frisco’s restaurants and an increase in comparable sales of 8.8% at Sullivan’s restaurants. The overall comparable increase was comprised of a 5.1% increase in customer counts and a 6.1% increase in average check. The increase in average check was impacted by combined menu price increases of approximately 2% implemented in April and December 2011, with the remainder the result of the menu mix shifting to higher priced items and special offerings. An additional $17.5 million was provided by 84 additional operating weeks resulting from one Del Frisco’s and two Grille openings during 2011 and the full-year impact of one Sullivan’s that opened in the second quarter of 2010.

Cost of Sales .    Cost of sales increased $11.3 million, or 22.5%, to $61.6 million in 2011 from $50.3 million in 2010. The increase in costs of sales was primarily related to the growth in comparable restaurant sales and to additional restaurants opened during 2010 and 2011. As a percentage of revenues, cost of sales increased to 30.6% during 2011 from 30.4% in 2010. The increase in cost of sales, as a percentage of revenues, was due to higher commodity costs, primarily for our meat, accounting for 37.6% of the increase, and seafood, accounting for 45.2% of the increase, which were partially offset by favorable wine and beverage costs.

Restaurant Operating Expenses .    Restaurant operating expenses increased $14.8 million, or 20.2%, to $88.2 million in 2011 from $73.4 million in 2010. This increase was primarily due to an additional 84 operating weeks in 2011 as compared to 2010 from one restaurant opened in 2010 and three restaurants opened in 2011. As a percentage of revenues, restaurant operating expenses decreased to 43.7% in 2011 from 44.3% in 2010. The decrease in restaurant operating expenses, as a percentage of revenues, was primarily due to lower labor costs, accounting for 16.7% of the decrease, and lower other operating expenses, accounting for the remaining 83.3% of the decrease. This decrease was also due in part to the leveraging of increased comparable restaurant revenues on certain fixed costs. This decrease was partially offset by higher occupancy costs, due in part to two sale-leaseback transactions during 2011.

Marketing and Advertising Costs .    Marketing and advertising costs increased $1.6 million, or 57.1%, to $4.4 million in 2011 from $2.8 million in 2010. As a percentage of revenues,

 

54


marketing and advertising costs increased to 2.2% in 2011 from 1.7% in 2010. The increase in marketing and advertising costs, as a percentage of revenues, was primarily due to higher in-store advertising expenses, accounting for 74.6% of the increase, and higher print and broadcast media advertising, accounting for 21.0% of the increase.

Pre-opening Costs .    Pre-opening costs increased by $2.2 million to $3.0 million in 2011 from $0.8 million in 2010. This change related to the opening of three new restaurants during 2011 versus one opening during 2010.

General and Administrative Expenses .    General and administrative expenses increased by $3.1 million, or 41.3%, to $10.6 million in 2011 from $7.5 million in 2010. Approximately 20.7%, or $0.6 million, of this increase relates to accounting services provided by a third-party service provider. These services, along with certain administrative and management services were performed by the Shared Services Provider in 2010 and reflected in management fees to the related party, as described above under “—Key Financial Definitions—Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party.” Additionally, 34.8%, or $1.1 million, of this increase relates to compensation costs related to growth in the number of corporate and regional management-level personnel to support recent and anticipated growth, 24.7%, or $0.8 million, of this increase relates to other corporate infrastructure costs to support growth, and 19.7%, or $0.6 million, of this increase relates to higher costs associated with training restaurant management. As a percentage of revenues, general and administrative expenses increased to 5.3% in 2011 from 4.5% in 2010.

Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party .    Management and accounting fees paid to related party increased by $0.1 million, or 3.0%, to $3.4 million in 2011 from $3.3 million in 2010. The increase was due to increased asset management fees paid to an affiliate of Lone Star Fund, partially offset by the elimination in 2011 of fees paid to the Shared Services Provider for certain accounting, administrative, and management services in 2010. On December 29, 2010, these accounting, administrative, and management services were transferred to a third-party outsourcing firm or performed by Company personnel, and therefore these costs are reflected in general and administrative expenses in 2011. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement” and “—Key Financial Definitions—Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party.”

Non-Cash Impairment Charges .    We recognized non-cash impairment charges of long-lived assets of $1.4 million in 2011. This impairment charge was related to our determination that the carrying amount of long-lived assets at one Sullivan’s exceeded its estimated future cash flows.

Depreciation and Amortization .    Depreciation and amortization increased $0.5 million, or 7.6%, to $7.1 million in 2011 from $6.6 million in 2010. The increase in depreciation and amortization expense primarily resulted from new assets placed in service during 2011 upon the opening of the three new restaurants, partially offset by a decrease in depreciable assets related to the sale-leaseback of two restaurants in the first quarter of 2011.

Interest Expense .    Interest expense-affiliates was zero in 2011 compared to $1.8 million in 2010 due to the payoff of the advances due to affiliates in November 2010. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with the Casual Dining Companies—Note Payable to Casual Dining Company.” Interest expense-other decreased $1.0 million to $8.9 million in 2011 from $9.9 million in 2010. This decrease was due primarily to a lower average credit facility balance and a lower average interest rate. This decrease was partially offset by the write-off of approximately $2.5 million of deferred loan costs relating to

 

55


the prior credit facility, which was terminated in July 2011 as discussed below under “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Facility.”

Other, Net .    Other, net, which consists primarily of payments made to extinguish certain pre-Acquisition lease guarantees we made on behalf of affiliates, was $0.1 million in 2011 compared to $0.2 million in 2010. See “—Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements” and “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with the Casual Dining Companies—Lease Guarantees and Reimbursement Agreement.”

Provision for Income Taxes .    The effective income tax rate was 29.2% and -0.5% in 2011 and 2010, respectively. The factors that cause the effective tax rates to vary from the federal statutory rate of 35% include the impact of FICA tip and other credits, partially offset by state income taxes and certain non-deductible expenses. The change in the effective tax rate from 2010 to 2011 primarily relates to a 2010 tax benefit for the reversal of previously unrecognized tax benefits of approximately $3.7 million resulting primarily from the expiration of the statute of limitations in 2010 relating to various uncertain tax positions, partially offset by an additional provision of $1.5 million resulting from income tax accruals provided for various uncertain state tax positions.

Fiscal Year Ended December 28, 2010 (52 weeks) Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 29, 2009 (52 weeks)

Revenues.     Revenues increased $5.4 million, or 3.4%, to $165.6 million in 2010, from $160.2 million in 2009. The increase was due to a 4.3% increase in total comparable restaurant sales comprised of an increase in comparable sales of 7.0% at Del Frisco’s restaurants and an increase in comparable sales of 1.4% at Sullivan’s restaurants. This overall increase was driven primarily by an increase in customer counts of 5.3%, partially offset by a decrease in average check of 1.0%. The decrease in average check was impacted by the menu mix shifting to lower priced items. Additionally, there was approximately $2.1 million in revenues related to an additional 33 operating weeks provided by one Sullivan’s that opened in the second quarter of 2010 and one Sullivan’s that opened in the first quarter of 2009.

Cost of Sales.     Cost of sales increased $2.7 million, or 5.8%, to $50.3 million in 2010, from $47.6 million in 2009. The increase in costs of sales is primarily related to the growth in comparable restaurant sales and to the growth in total restaurants in 2010 as compared to 2009. As a percentage of revenues, cost of sales increased to 30.4% in 2010 from 29.7% in 2009. The increase in cost of sales, as a percentage of revenues, was due to higher commodity costs, primarily for our meat, accounting for 53.2% of the increase, seafood, accounting for 22.5% of the increase, and dairy, accounting for 10.3% of the increase, which were partially offset by favorable wine and beverage costs.

Restaurant Operating Expenses.     Restaurant operating expenses increased $4.2 million, or 6.1%, to $73.4 million in 2010, from $69.2 million in 2009. This increase was primarily due to an additional 33 operating weeks in 2010 as compared to 2009 from the Sullivan’s opened in 2010 and the Sullivan’s opened in 2009. As a percentage of revenues, restaurant operating expenses increased to 44.3% in 2010 from 43.2% in the prior year period. The increase in restaurant operating expenses, as a percentage of revenues, was primarily due to higher labor costs, accounting for 96.7% of the increase, and costs resulting from increased restaurant-level performance incentives, as well as increased post-opening staffing related to the opening of a Sullivan’s in 2010.

Marketing and Advertising Costs .    Marketing and advertising costs decreased $0.7 million, or 19.8%, to $2.8 million in 2010, from $3.5 million in 2009. As a percentage of revenues,

 

56


marketing and advertising costs decreased to 1.7% in 2010 from 2.2% in the prior year period. The decrease in marketing and advertising costs, as a percentage of revenues, was primarily due to decreased print and broadcast media advertising, accounting for 89.9% of the decrease.

Pre-opening Costs.     Pre-opening costs increased by $0.3 million to $0.8 million in 2010, from $0.5 million in 2009 as a result of increased travel, labor, and occupancy costs associated with the Sullivan’s opening in 2010 as compared to the opening activities in 2009.

General and Administrative Expenses.     General and administrative expenses decreased by $0.7 million, or 8.8%, to $7.5 million in 2010, from $8.2 million in 2009. Approximately $1.7 million of this decrease was attributable to a decrease in legal and professional costs related to the 2009 settlement of a dispute related to lien filings in the construction of one of our restaurants opened in 2008 and the 2009 settlement of a dissenting shareholder lawsuit related to the Acquisition. This decrease was partially offset by a $1.1 million increase in incentive compensation costs and increases in staffing costs at the regional management-level to provide for infrastructure enhancements. As a percentage of revenues, general and administrative expenses decreased to 4.5% in 2010 from 5.1% in 2009.

Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party.     Management and accounting fees paid to related party increased $0.4 million, or 16.2%, to $3.3 million in 2010, from $2.9 million in 2009. For 2010 and 2009, these fees consisted of asset management fees paid to an affiliate of Lone Star Fund as well as fees paid to a related party for certain accounting, administrative, and management services. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates—Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement” and “—Key Financial Definitions—Management and Accounting Fees Paid to Related Party.”

Depreciation and Amortization.     Depreciation and amortization increased $0.2 million, or 3.1%, to $6.6 million in 2010, from $6.4 million in 2009. The increase in depreciation and amortization expense primarily resulted from new assets placed in service during 2010 upon the opening of the one new Sullivan’s restaurant, partially offset by a decrease in depreciable assets related to the sale-leaseback of one restaurant in 2010.

Interest Expense.     Interest expense-affiliates decreased $0.5 million, or 22.2%, to $1.8 million for 2010, from $2.3 million in 2009 due to the payoff of the advances due to affiliates in November 2010. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with the Casual Dining Companies—Note Payable to Casual Dining Company.” Interest expense-other increased $4.0 million to $9.9 million in 2010 from $5.9 million in 2009. This increase was due primarily to the increase in the effective interest rate resulting from the October 2009 amendment to the Company’s prior credit facility. Additionally, there was a credit to interest expense in 2009 of $1.2 million for the reversal of interest accrued resulting from the dissenting shareholder litigation relating to the Acquisition prior to its settlement in 2009.

Other, Net.     Other, net, consisted primarily of payments made to extinguish certain pre-acquisition lease guarantees we made on behalf of affiliates in 2010. See “—Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements” and “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with the Casual Dining Companies—Lease Guarantees and Reimbursement Agreement.” In 2009, other income (expense), net, consisted primarily of interest income.

Provision for Income Taxes.     The effective income tax rate was -0.5% and 26.5% for 2010 and 2009, respectively. The factors that caused the effective tax rates to vary from the federal statutory rate of 35% include the impact of FICA tip and other credits, the impact of state income taxes and the impact of certain nondeductible or nontaxable insurance expenses or income. In addition,

 

57


2010 includes a tax benefit for the reversal of previously unrecognized tax benefits of approximately $3.7 million resulting primarily from the expiration of the statute of limitations in 2010 relating to various uncertain tax positions, partially offset by an additional provision of $1.5 million resulting from income tax accruals provided for various uncertain state tax positions.

Potential Fluctuations in Quarterly Results and Seasonality

Our business is subject to seasonal fluctuations. Historically, the percentage of our annual revenues earned during the first and fourth fiscal quarters has been higher due, in part, to increased gift card redemptions and increased private dining during the year-end holiday season, respectively. In addition, our first, second and third quarters each contain 12 operating weeks with the fourth quarter containing 16 or 17 operating weeks. As many of our operating expenses have a fixed component, our operating income and operating income margin have historically varied significantly from quarter to quarter. Accordingly, results for any one quarter are not necessarily indicative of results to be expected for any other quarter or for any year. See “Risk Factors—Risks Related to Our Business,” which discloses material risks that could cause our quarterly operating results to change.

The following table presents quarterly measures of seasonality for 2010 and 2011:

 

    Quarter Ended  
    March 23,
2010
    June 15,
2010
    September 7,
2010
    December 28,
2010
    March 22,
2011
    June 14,
2011
    September 6,
2011
    December 27,
2011
 

Quarterly revenues as a percentage of annual revenues

    23.1     21.9     20.2     34.8     21.5     21.6     20.8     36.1

Quarterly operating income as a percentage of annual operating income

    28.8     19.4     5.5     46.3     24.4     14.9     8.0     52.7

Operating income margin(1)

    15.7     11.0     3.3     16.7     12.3     7.5     4.2     15.8

 

(1) Our measure of operating income margin consists of operating income for a period divided by the revenues for such period. Operating margin is used by our management and investors to determine our ability to control expenses in relation to our revenues. We believe it is useful to our management and investors when presented on a quarterly basis because it allows our management and investors to accurately view seasonal fluctuations in these operating results related to the fixed components of our costs and expenses.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Upon the consummation of this offering, our principal liquidity requirements will be to meet our lease obligations and our working capital and capital expenditure needs and to pay principal and interest on our debt. Subject to our operating performance, which, if significantly adversely affected, would adversely affect the availability of funds, we expect to finance our operations for at least the next several years, including costs of opening currently planned new restaurants, through cash provided by operations and existing borrowings available under our credit facility discussed below. We cannot be sure that these sources will be sufficient to finance our operations, however, and we may seek additional financing in the future. As of March 20, 2012, we had cash and cash equivalents of approximately $8.7 million.

Our operations have not required significant working capital and, like many restaurant companies, we may at times have negative working capital. Revenues are received primarily in cash or by credit card, and restaurant operations do not require significant receivables or inventories, other than our wine inventory. In addition, we receive trade credit for the purchase of food, beverages and supplies, thereby reducing the need for incremental working capital to support growth.

 

58


Cash Flows

The following table summarizes the statement of cash flows for the 12 weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended  
     March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
    

(in thousands)

 

Net cash provided by (used in):

    

Operating activities

   $ 7,629      $ 4,107   

Investing activities

     8,048        (4,554

Financing activities

     (11,156     (5,000

Discontinued Operations

              
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

   $ 4,521      $ (5,447
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating Activities .    Cash flows provided by operating activities was $4.1 million for the 12 weeks ended March 20, 2012, consisting primarily of net income of $5.0 million, adjustments for depreciation, amortization and other non-cash charges totaling $1.8 million, and a net increase in cash of $2.1 million resulting from a decrease in inventories, other current assets and income taxes payable. These cash inflows were partially offset by decreases in accounts payable of $1.8 million, other liabilities of $2.5 million and deferred income taxes $0.5 million. Cash flows provided by operating activities was $7.6 million for the 12 weeks ended March 22, 2011, consisting primarily of net income of $2.5 million, adjustments for depreciation, amortization and other non-cash charges totaling $1.7 million, and a net increase in cash of $6.9 million resulting from a decrease in inventory and other current assets and increases in accounts payable, income taxes payable and other liabilities. These cash inflows were partially offset by a decrease of $3.5 million in net deferred income taxes.

Investing Activities .    Net cash used in investing activities for the 12 weeks ended March 20, 2012 was $4.6 million, consisting primarily of purchases of property and equipment of $3.8 million. These purchases primarily related to construction in progress of new Grille restaurants during the period and remodel activity of existing restaurants. Net cash provided by investing activities for the 12 weeks ended March 22, 2011 was $8.0 million, consisting primarily of net proceeds of $13.2 million received from the sale and leaseback of two restaurant properties during the period and partially offset by purchases of property and equipment of $4.7 million, primarily related to construction in progress of a new Del Frisco’s during the period.

Financing Activities .    Net cash used in financing activities for the 12 weeks ended March 20, 2012 was $5.0 million, consisting of principal payments made on our credit facility. Net cash used in financing activities for the 12 weeks ended March 22, 2011 was $11.2 million consisting of principal payments made on our previous credit facility prior to its termination in July 2011.

The following table summarizes the statement of cash flows for the fiscal years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended  
     December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
 
     (in thousands)  

Net cash provided by (used in):

      

Operating activities

   $ 18,916      $ 12,278      $ 28,079   

Investing activities

     (28,538     (1,489     (6,727

Financing activities

     15,587        (19,889     (11,390

Discontinued Operations

                     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

   $ 5,965      $ (9,100   $ 9,962   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

59


Operating Activities .    Cash flows provided by operating activities was $28.1 million in 2011, consisting primarily of net income of $9.1 million, adjustments for depreciation, amortization and other non-cash charges of $11.6 million, a $10.2 million increase in accounts payable and other liabilities and a $0.5 million increase in income taxes payable. These cash inflows were partially offset by an increase of $1.0 million in restricted cash and an increase in other assets and inventories of $2.3 million. Cash flows provided by operating activities was $12.3 million in 2010, consisting primarily of net income of $8.8 million, adjustments for depreciation, amortization and other non-cash charges of $9.3 million and a $4.1 million increase in income taxes payable and other liabilities. These cash inflows were partially offset by $6.5 million in payments attributable to accrued interest associated with the payoff of advances due to one of the Casual Dining Companies, as discussed under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with the Casual Dining Companies—Note Payable to Casual Dining Company,” as well as a decrease in accounts payable of $2.4 million and an increase in other assets and inventories of $1.2 million. Cash flows provided by operating activities was $18.9 million in 2009 consisting primarily of net income of $10.0 million, adjustments for depreciation, amortization and other non-cash charges of $9.1 million, a net increase in cash of $4.2 million resulting from a decrease in inventory and an increase in income taxes payable, partially offset by a decrease of $3.2 million in accounts payable and other liabilities and an increase of $1.2 million in other assets during the period.

Investing Activities .    Net cash used in investing activities in 2011 was $6.7 million, consisting primarily of purchases of property and equipment of $20.1 million, primarily related to the construction of the new Del Frisco’s and Grille restaurants during the period, partially offset by net proceeds of $13.2 million received from the sale and leaseback of two restaurant properties during the year. Net cash used in investing activities in 2010 was $1.5 million, consisting primarily of net proceeds of $4.3 million received from the sale and leaseback of one restaurant property during the period, partially offset by purchases of property and equipment of $5.6 million, primarily related to the construction of a Del Frisco’s and a Sullivan’s restaurant during the period. Net cash used in investing activities in 2009 was $28.5 million, consisting primarily of $19.8 million in payments related to settling a dissenting shareholder lawsuit related to the Acquisition as discussed in greater detail in note 10 in the notes to the consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus (offset by a $19.8 million member contribution referenced under “—Financing Activities” below) and $7.8 million in purchases of property and equipment, mainly related to the construction of a Del Frisco’s and a Sullivan’s restaurant during the period.

Financing Activities .    Net cash used in financing activities in 2011 was $11.4 million, consisting primarily of $11.9 million in principal payments made on our previous credit facility prior to its termination in July 2011, in addition to the payment of $2.0 million in loan costs associated with entering into the new credit facility. See “—Credit Facility” below. These payments were partially offset by $3.0 million in incremental financing under the new credit facility over the prior credit facility. Net cash used in financing activities in 2010 was $19.9 million, consisting primarily of $26.4 million in principal payments made on our previous credit facility and $40.7 million in payments made to pay off advances due to one of the Casual Dining Companies, as discussed under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Relationships with the Casual Dining Companies—Note Payable to Casual Dining Company.” These cash outflows were partially offset by a $47.1 million member contribution made to fund the principal and accrued interest due to one of the Casual Dining Companies. Net cash provided by financing activities in 2009 was $15.6 million, consisting primarily of a $19.8 million member contribution to fund the settlement of a dissenting shareholder lawsuit related to the Acquisition as discussed in greater detail in note 10 in the notes to the consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus, partially offset by $3.1 million in principal payments made on our previous credit facility and $1.1 million in payments made associated with the amendment made to the credit facility in October 2009.

 

60


Capital Expenditures

To the extent we open new restaurants, we anticipate capital expenditures in the future will increase from the amounts described in “—Investing Activities” above. We typically target an average cash investment of approximately $7.0 million to $9.0 million per restaurant for a Del Frisco’s restaurant and $3.0 million to $4.5 million for a Sullivan’s or a Grille, in each case net of landlord contributions and equipment financing and including pre-opening costs. In addition, we are currently “refreshing” a number of our Sullivan’s and Del Frisco’s locations to, among other things, add additional seating, private dining space and patio seating. During 2012, we expect to complete refreshes of four to five Del Frisco’s and four to five Sullivan’s at an average cost of $0.3 million per location. Thereafter, we expect to complete one to two refreshes each year at an approximate cost of $0.5 million per location. These capital expenditures will primarily be funded by cash flows from operations and, if necessary, by the use of our credit facility, depending upon the timing of expenditures.

Credit Facility

We entered into a new credit facility in July 2011 and terminated our prior credit facility that consisted of a seven-year $110 million term loan and six-year revolving credit facility of up to $20.0 million. Our new credit facility provides for a five-year term loan of $70.0 million and a five-year revolving credit facility of up to $10.0 million. We used the net proceeds of the borrowings under our new credit facility to retire our prior credit facility, which at the time we entered into this new credit facility had a balance of approximately $67.0 million. The remaining proceeds were used to pay related fees and expenses and for working capital.

Borrowings under the new credit facility bear interest at a rate between LIBOR plus 4.75% and LIBOR plus 5.75%, depending on our leverage ratio. Our obligations under our new credit facility are guaranteed by each of our existing and future subsidiaries and are secured by substantially all of our assets and the capital stock of our subsidiaries.

Our new credit facility contains various financial covenants, including a maximum ratio of total indebtedness to EBITDA, a minimum amount of EBITDA plus corporate general and administrative expenses, a minimum ratio of EBITDA plus certain non-recurring items to fixed charges (including consolidated capital expenses) and a minimum level of liquidity. Specifically, these covenants require that we have a fixed charge coverage ratio of greater than 1.50, a leverage ratio of less than 3.25, consolidated liquidity of greater than or equal to $3.0 million and adjusted restaurant-level EBITDA (as defined in the credit facility on a rolling four fiscal quarter basis) of greater than or equal to $30.0 million. As of March 20, 2012, we were in compliance with each of these tests. Specifically, as of March 20, 2012, the fixed charge coverage ratio was 2.29, the leverage ratio was 1.43, our consolidated liquidity was approximately $18.7 million and our adjusted restaurant-level EBITDA was approximately $51.2 million. Our new credit facility also contains covenants restricting certain corporate actions, including asset dispositions, acquisitions, the payment of dividends, changes of control, the incurrence of indebtedness and providing financing or other transactions with affiliates. Our new credit facility also contains customary events of default. We were in compliance with all of our debt covenants as of March 20, 2012.

Our new credit facility requires us to use at least 50% of the net proceeds from all equity offerings, including this offering, to repay indebtedness under the facility. Therefore, $            million of the proceeds received by us in this offering will be used to pay down long-term debt. See “Use of Proceeds.”

We believe that net cash provided by operating activities, net proceeds to be received by us from this offering and existing available borrowings under our new credit facility will be sufficient

 

61


to fund currently anticipated working capital, planned capital expenditures and debt service requirements for the next 24 months. We regularly review acquisitions and other strategic opportunities, which may require additional debt or equity financing. We currently do not have any pending agreements or understandings with respect to any acquisition or other strategic opportunities.

Contractual Obligations

The following table summarizes our contractual obligations as of December 27, 2011:

 

     Total      Less than 1
year
     1-3 years      3-5 years      More than 5
years
 
     (in thousands)  

Long-term debt(1)

   $ 70,000       $       $ 4,375       $ 65,625       $   

Operating leases

     158,678         9,389         20,028         20,380         108,881   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 228,678       $ 9,389       $ 24,403       $ 86,005       $ 108,881   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(1) We intend to use $         of the net proceeds of this offering to repay a portion of the outstanding borrowings under our credit facility. See “Use of Proceeds.”

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

Prior to the acquisition of Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc. by Lone Star Fund, the Predecessor guaranteed certain lease payments of certain of the Casual Dining Companies in connection with the leasing of real estate for restaurant locations. As of March 20, 2012, we continue to be a guarantor for five of these leases. The leases expire at various times through 2016. These guarantees would require payment by us only in an event of default by the Casual Dining Company tenant where it failed to make the required lease payments or perform other obligations under a lease. We believe that the likelihood is remote that material payments will be required under these guarantees. At March 20, 2012, the maximum potential amount of future lease payments we could be required to make as a result of the guarantees was $2.4 million.

Equity Awards

In connection with this offering, we intend to adopt a long-term equity incentive plan to promote our interests by providing eligible persons with the opportunity to share in the appreciation of our stock. The plan will allow the Board of Directors to grant stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock units, deferred stock units and other equity-based awards to employees, officers, non-employee directors and other service providers. The plan will also provide that the exercise price for any option granted under the plan may not be less than the fair value of the stock subject to the option on the date of grant other than in limited circumstances in the context of a substitute or replacement grant made in connection with a merger or other acquisition. See “Executive Compensation—2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan” for a more detailed discussion of the terms of options and other equity awards that may be granted under the plan. We intend to grant options to purchase              shares to our officers and certain director nominees under this plan at the time of the pricing of this offering with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price. We will record estimated stock-based compensation expenses related to these grants of approximately $             million in 2012 and $             million per year over the remainder of the vesting period based on an assumed initial public offering price of $             per share, the mid-point of the initial public offering price range on the cover of this prospectus.

 

62


Transaction Bonuses

We expect that Mr. Mednansky, our Chief Executive Officer, and Mr. Pennison, our Chief Financial Officer, will be paid a transaction bonus of $             and $             , respectively, by our parent company in connection with this offering, as discussed in greater detail under “Executive Compensation—Payments in Connection with the Offering—Transaction Bonuses.” Although these transaction bonuses will be paid by our parent company, they will result in an expense recognized to the company’s consolidated statement of income and a deemed capital contribution.

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

Our discussion and analysis of results of operations and financial condition are based upon our audited consolidated financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. The preparation of these financial statements is based on our critical accounting policies that require us to make estimates and judgments that affect the amounts reported in those financial statements. Our significant accounting policies, which may be affected by our estimates and assumptions, are more fully described in note 2 in the notes to the consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. Critical accounting policies are those that we believe are most important to portraying our financial condition and results of operations and also require the greatest amount of subjective or complex judgments by management. Judgments or uncertainties regarding the application of these policies may result in materially different amounts being reported under different conditions or using different assumptions. We consider the following policies to be the most critical in understanding the judgments that are involved in preparing the consolidated financial statements.

Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets

We account for our goodwill and intangible assets in accordance with Accounting Standards Codification, or ASC, Topic 350, Intangibles—Goodwill and Other . In accordance with ASC 350, goodwill and intangible assets, primarily trade names, which have indefinite useful lives, are not being amortized. However, both goodwill and trade names are subject to annual impairment testing in accordance with ASC Topic 350.

The impairment evaluation for goodwill is conducted annually using a two-step process. In the first step, the fair value of each reporting unit is compared with the carrying amount of the reporting unit, including goodwill. The estimated fair value of the reporting unit is generally determined on the basis of discounted future cash flows. If the estimated fair value of the reporting unit is less than the carrying amount of the reporting unit, then a second step must be completed in order to determine the amount of the goodwill impairment that should be recorded. In the second step, the implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill is determined by allocating the reporting unit’s fair value to all of its assets and liabilities other than goodwill in a manner similar to a purchase price allocation. The resulting implied fair value of the goodwill that results from the application of this second step is then compared to the carrying amount of the goodwill and an impairment charge is recorded for the difference.

The evaluation of the carrying amount of other intangible assets with indefinite lives is made annually by comparing the carrying amount of these assets to their estimated fair value. The estimated fair value is generally determined on the basis of discounted future cash flows of the restaurant concepts. We make assumptions regarding future profits and cash flows, expected growth rates, terminal value, and other factors which could significantly impact the fair value calculations. If the estimated fair value is less than the carrying amount of the other

 

63


intangible assets with indefinite lives, then an impairment charge is recorded to reduce the asset to its estimated fair value.

The assumptions used in the estimate of fair value are generally consistent with the past performance of each reporting unit and other intangible assets and are also consistent with the projections and assumptions that are used in current operating plans. These assumptions are subject to change as a result of changing economic and competitive conditions.

The fair value of our restaurant concepts were substantially in excess of the carrying value as of our 2011 goodwill impairment test that was performed at year-end.

Property and Equipment

We assess recoverability of property and equipment in accordance with ASC Topic 360, Property, Plant and Equipment . Our assessment of recoverability of property and equipment is performed on a restaurant-by-restaurant basis. Certain events or changes in circumstances may indicate that the recoverability of the carrying amount of property and equipment should be assessed. These events or changes may include a significant decrease in market value, a significant change in the business climate in a particular market, or a current-period operating or cash flow loss combined with historical losses or projected future losses. If an event occurs or changes in circumstances are present, we estimate the future cash flows expected to result from the use of the asset and its eventual disposition. If the sum of the expected future cash flows (undiscounted and without interest charges) is less than the carrying amount, we recognize an impairment loss. The impairment loss recognized is the amount by which the carrying amount exceeds the fair value. Additionally, we periodically review assets for changes in circumstances which may impact their useful lives.

Our assessments of cash flows represent our best estimate as of the time of the impairment review and are consistent with our internal planning. If different cash flows had been estimated in the current period, the property and equipment balances could have been materially impacted. Furthermore, our accounting estimates may change from period to period as conditions change, and this could materially impact our results in future periods. Factors that we must estimate when performing impairment tests include sales volume, prices, inflation, marketing expense, and capital expenses.

We recognized non-cash impairment charges of long-lived assets of $1.4 million in 2011. This impairment charge was related to our determination that the carrying amount of long-lived assets at one Sullivan’s exceeded its estimated future cash flows. The estimated fair value was based on an estimated sales price for this location.

Leases

We currently lease all but two of our restaurant locations. We evaluate each lease to determine its appropriate classification as an operating or capital lease for financial reporting purposes. All of our leases are classified as operating leases. We record the minimum lease payments for our operating leases on a straight-line basis over the lease term, including option periods which in the judgment of management are reasonably assured of renewal. The lease term commences on the date that the lessee obtains control of the property, which is normally when the property is ready for tenant improvements. Contingent rent expense is recognized as incurred and is usually based on either a percentage of restaurant sales or as a percentage of restaurant sales in excess of a defined amount. Our lease costs will change based on the lease terms of our lease renewals as well as leases that we enter into with respect to our new restaurants.

 

64


Leasehold improvements financed by the landlord through tenant improvement allowances are capitalized as leasehold improvements with the tenant improvement allowances recorded as deferred lease incentives. Deferred lease incentives are amortized on a straight-line basis over the lesser of the life of the asset or the lease term, including option periods which in the judgment of management are reasonably assured of renewal (same term that is used for related leasehold improvements) and are recorded as a reduction of occupancy expense. As part of the initial lease terms, we negotiate with our landlords to secure these tenant improvement allowances. There is no guarantee that we will receive tenant improvement allowances for any of our future locations, which would result in additional occupancy expenses.

Income Taxes

We have accounted for, and currently account for, income taxes in accordance with ASC Topic 740, Accounting for Income Taxes . This statement requires an asset and liability approach for financial accounting and reporting of income taxes. Under ASC Topic 740, income taxes are accounted for based upon the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax basis and operating loss and tax credit carry-forwards. Income taxes are one of our critical accounting policies and estimates and therefore involve a certain degree of judgment. We use an estimate of our annual effective tax rate at each interim period based on the facts and circumstances available at that time while the actual effective tax rate is calculated at year-end.

The realization of tax benefits of deductible temporary differences will depend on whether we will have sufficient taxable income of an appropriate character to allow for utilization of the deductible amounts.

We record a liability for unrecognized tax benefits resulting from tax positions taken, or expected to be taken, in an income tax return. We recognize any interest and penalties related to unrecognized tax benefits in income tax expense. Significant judgment is required in assessing, among other things, the timing and amounts of deductible and taxable items. Tax reserves are evaluated and adjusted as appropriate, while taking into account the progress of audits of various taxing jurisdictions.

Self-Insurance Reserves

We maintain various insurance policies including workers’ compensation and general liability. Pursuant to those policies, we are responsible for losses up to certain limits and are required to estimate a liability that represents our ultimate exposure for aggregate losses below those limits. This liability is based on management’s estimates of the ultimate costs to be incurred to settle known claims and claims not reported as of the balance sheet date. Our estimated liability is not discounted and is based on a number of assumptions and factors, including historical trends, actuarial assumptions, and economic conditions. If actual trends, including the severity or frequency of claims, differ from our estimates, our financial results could be impacted.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

In May 2011, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update, or ASU, 2011-04, Fair value Measurement (Topic 820), Amendments to Achieve Common Fair Value Measurement and Disclosure Requirements in U.S. GAAP and IFRS . Many of the amendments in this update change the wording used in the existing guidance to better align GAAP with International Financial Reporting Standards and to clarify the FASB’s intent on various aspects of the fair value guidance. The update also requires increased disclosure of quantitative information about

 

65


unobservable inputs used in a fair value measurement that is categorized within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy. The update is effective for us beginning in fiscal 2012 and should be applied prospectively. Other than requiring additional disclosures, the new guidance did not have a significant impact on our consolidated financial statements upon adoption in the interim period ending March 20, 2012.

In June 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-05, Comprehensive Income (Topic 220), Presentation of Comprehensive Income, which requires us to present the total of comprehensive income, the components of net income, and the components of other comprehensive income either in a single continuous statement of comprehensive income or in two separate but consecutive statements. The update eliminates the option to present the components of other comprehensive income as part of the statement of equity. In December 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-12, Comprehensive Income (Topic 220), Deferral of Effective Date for Amendments to the Presentation of Reclassifications of Items Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income in ASU 2011-05, to defer the effective date of the specific requirement to present items that are reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income to net income alongside their respective components of net income and other comprehensive income. All other provisions of the update are effective for us in fiscal 2012 and have been applied retrospectively.

In September 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-08, Intangible-Goodwill and Other (Topic 350), Testing Goodwill for Impairment, which permits an entity to make a qualitative assessment of whether it is more likely than not that a reporting unit’s fair value is less than its carrying value before applying the two-step goodwill impairment model that is currently in place. If it is determined through qualitative assessment that a reporting unit’s fair value is more likely than not greater than its carrying value, the remaining impairment steps would be unnecessary. The qualitative assessment is optional, allowing us to go directly to the quantitative assessment. The update is effective in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2011, which for us will require adoption in fiscal 2012, however early adoption is permitted. We do not believe the new guidance will have a significant impact on our consolidated financial statements.

New and Revised Financial Accounting Standards

We qualify as an “emerging growth company” pursuant to the provisions of the JOBS Act. Section 102 of the JOBS Act provides that an “emerging growth company” can take advantage of the extended transition period provided in Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act for complying with new or revised accounting standards. However, we are choosing to “opt out” of this extended transition period, and as a result, we will comply with new or revised accounting standards on the relevant dates on which adoption of such standards is required for non-”emerging growth companies.” Our decision to opt out of the extended transition period is irrevocable.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

Interest Rate Risk

The inherent risk in market risk sensitive instruments and positions primarily relates to potential losses arising from adverse changes in interest rates.

We are exposed to market risk from fluctuations in interest rates. For fixed rate debt, interest rate changes affect the fair market value of the debt but do not impact earnings or cash flows. Conversely for variable rate debt, including borrowings under our new credit facility,

 

66


interest rate changes generally do not affect the fair market value of the debt, but do impact future earnings and cash flows, assuming other factors are held constant. At March 20, 2012, we had $65.0 million of variable rate debt. Holding other variables constant, such as foreign exchange rates and debt levels, a hypothetical immediate one percentage point change in interest rates would be expected to have an impact on pre-tax earnings and cash flows for 2011 of approximately $0.7 million. After giving effect to this offering and the application of net proceeds therefrom, we would have had $            million of variable rate debt at March 20, 2012, and, holding other variables constant, a hypothetical immediate one percentage point change in interest rates would be expected to have an estimated impact on pre-tax earnings and cash flows for 2012 of approximately $            million.

Commodity Price Risk

We are exposed to market price fluctuations in beef, seafood, produce and other food product prices. Given the historical volatility of beef, seafood, produce and other food product prices, these fluctuations can materially impact our food and beverage costs. While we have taken steps to qualify multiple suppliers who meet our standards as suppliers for our restaurants and enter into agreements with suppliers for some of the commodities used in our restaurant operations, there can be no assurance that future supplies and costs for such commodities will not fluctuate due to weather and other market conditions outside of our control. We are currently unable to contract for some of our commodities, such as fresh seafood and certain produce, for periods longer than one week. Consequently, such commodities can be subject to unforeseen supply and cost fluctuations. Dairy costs can also fluctuate due to government regulation. Because we typically set our menu prices in advance of our food product prices, our menu prices cannot immediately take into account changing costs of food items. To the extent that we are unable to pass the increased costs on to our customers through price increases, our results of operations would be adversely affected. We do not use financial instruments to hedge our risk to market price fluctuations in beef, seafood, produce and other food product prices at this time.

Inflation

Over the past five years, inflation has not significantly affected our operations. However, the impact of inflation on labor, food and occupancy costs could, in the future, significantly affect our operations. We pay many of our employees hourly rates related to the applicable federal or state minimum wage. Food costs as a percentage of revenues have been somewhat stable due to procurement efficiencies and menu price adjustments, although no assurance can be made that our procurement will continue to be efficient or that we will be able to raise menu prices in the future. Costs for construction, taxes, repairs, maintenance and insurance all impact our occupancy costs. We believe that our current strategy, which is to seek to maintain operating margins through a combination of menu price increases, cost controls, careful evaluation of property and equipment needs, and efficient purchasing practices, has been an effective tool for dealing with inflation. There can be no assurance, however, that future inflationary or other cost pressure will be effectively offset by this strategy.

 

67


BUSINESS

Our Company

We develop, own and operate three contemporary, high-end, complementary restaurants: Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House, or Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s Steakhouse, or Sullivan’s, and Del Frisco’s Grille, or the Grille. We are a leader in the full-service steakhouse industry based on average unit volume, or AUV, EBITDA margin and comparable restaurant sales growth. We currently operate 32 restaurants in 18 states. Each of our three restaurant concepts offers steaks as well as other menu selections, such as chops and fresh seafood. These menu selections are complemented by an extensive, award-winning wine list. Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille are positioned within the fine dining segment and are designed to appeal to both business and local dining customers. Our Del Frisco’s restaurants are sited in urban locations to target customers seeking a “destination dining” experience while our Sullivan’s and Grille restaurants are intended to appeal to a broader demographic, allowing them to be located either in urban areas or in close proximity to affluent residential neighborhoods. We believe our success reflects consistent execution across all aspects of the dining experience, from the formulation of proprietary recipes to the procurement and presentation of high quality menu items and delivery of a positive customer experience.

We generated revenues of $201.6 million for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011, representing 21.8% total revenue growth and 11.2% comparable restaurant sales growth over 2010. We recorded net income of $9.1 million and adjusted EBITDA of $36.5 million for 2011, representing 2.8% net income growth and 20.8% adjusted EBITDA growth over 2010. Our 2011 operating income and adjusted EBITDA margins were 10.8% and 18.1%, respectively. For the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, we generated revenues of $53.7 million, representing 23.8% total revenue growth and 6.7% comparable restaurant sales growth over the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011. We recorded net income of $5.0 million and adjusted EBITDA of $10.9 million for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, representing 100.7% net income growth and 45.8% adjusted EBITDA growth over the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011. Our operating income and adjusted EBITDA margins for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012 were 15.6% and 20.3%, respectively. For a reconciliation of adjusted EBITDA and adjusted EBITDA margin and a discussion of why we consider them useful, see “—Summary Historical Consolidated Financial and Operating Data.”

Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House

We believe Del Frisco’s is one of the premier steakhouse concepts in the United States. The Del Frisco’s brand is defined by its menu, which includes USDA Prime grade, wet-aged steaks hand-cut at the time of order and a range of other high-quality offerings, including prime lamb, fresh seafood, and signature side dishes and desserts. It is also distinguished by its “swarming service,” whereby customers are served simultaneously by multiple servers. Each restaurant has a sommelier to guide diners through an extensive, award-winning wine list and our bartenders specialize in hand-shaken martinis and crafted cocktails. Del Frisco’s restaurants target customers seeking a full-service, fine dining steakhouse experience. We believe the décor and ambiance, with both contemporary and classic designs, enhance our customers’ experience and differentiate Del Frisco’s from other upscale steakhouse concepts. We currently operate nine Del Frisco’s steakhouses in seven states. These restaurants range in size from 11,000 to 24,000 square feet with seating capacity for at least 300 people. Annual AUVs per comparable Del Frisco’s restaurant were $12.5 million for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011. During the same period, the average check at Del Frisco’s was $100.

 

68


Sullivan’s Steakhouse

Sullivan’s was created in the mid-1990’s as a complementary concept to Del Frisco’s. The Sullivan’s brand is defined by a fine dining experience at a more accessible price point, along with a vibrant atmosphere created by an open kitchen, live music and a bar area designed to be a center for social gathering and entertainment. Each Sullivan’s features fine hand-selected aged steaks, fresh seafood and a broad list of custom cocktails, along with an extensive selection of award-winning wines. We currently operate 20 Sullivan’s steakhouses in 15 states. These restaurants range in size from 7,000 to 11,000 square feet with seating capacity for at least 250 people. Annual AUVs per comparable Sullivan’s restaurant were $4.3 million for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011. During the same period, the average check at Sullivan’s was $59.

Del Frisco’s Grille

We developed the Grille, our newest concept, to take advantage of the positioning of the Del Frisco’s brand and to provide greater potential for expansion due to its smaller size, lower build out cost and more diverse menu. The Grille’s menu is designed to appeal more broadly to both business and casual diners and features a variety of Del Frisco’s prime aged steaks, top selling signature menu items and a broad selection of the same quality wines. The Grille also offers an assortment of relatively less expensive entrees, such as flatbread pizzas, sandwiches and salads, all prepared with the same signature flavors, high quality ingredients and presentation associated with the Del Frisco’s brand. We believe the ambiance of the concept appeals to a wide range of customers seeking a less formal atmosphere for their dining occasions. Our first Grille opened in August 2011 at Rockefeller Center in New York City, and we opened a second location in November 2011 in Dallas, Texas. Additional Grille openings are planned over the next year and we anticipate they will range in size from 6,500 to 8,500 square feet with seating capacity for at least 200 people. We are targeting annual AUVs per comparable Grille restaurant between $4.0 million and $6.0 million with an average check of between $45 and $55.

Our Business Strengths

We believe the following are key strengths of our business and serve to differentiate us from our competitors:

Multiple Top Performing Concepts with an Expanding National Platform.     We are one of the nation’s leading fine dining restaurant operators. We currently have 32 restaurants in 26 cities in 18 states in a wide variety of geographic and demographic markets. Our locations that were operating throughout the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011 had AUVs of $6.7 million per location across all concepts, $12.5 million at our Del Frisco’s locations ($9.1 million excluding our New York location) and $4.3 million at our Sullivan’s locations. We believe our New York Del Frisco’s location was the highest grossing restaurant in the steakhouse industry in 2010 and 2011. We base this belief on the fact that our New York location grossed more than the highest grossing restaurant in a 2010 report published by Restaurants & Institutions listing the top 100 grossing individual restaurants in 2009 excluding chains with more than five restaurants. Furthermore, there was only marginal growth in revenues at our fine dining peers in 2010 and 2011, and our management, which has significant experience in the industry, is not aware of any other location of a steakhouse chain with more than five locations that would otherwise exceed sales at our New York Del Frisco’s location. Further, we believe we appeal to landlords with desirable locations by offering three complementary concepts adaptable to a variety of areas and venues. In 2011, we expanded our national platform by opening a Del Frisco’s in Boston, Massachusetts and our first two Grille restaurants in New York City and Dallas, Texas.

 

69


Operating Model Driving Higher Margins.     Our AUVs and high average check per person, combined with our operating efficiencies, enable us to achieve industry-leading operating margins based on 2011 public company data for U.S. based full-service dining restaurants that generate a majority of their revenues from restaurant operations and excluding companies with a majority of franchised operations. We believe that our success is driven by our consistent execution across all aspects of the dining experience, from the formulation of proprietary recipes to the procurement and presentation of high quality menu items and our focus on providing a positive customer experience. Our entrepreneurial culture and bonus incentives empower and motivate the general manager at each restaurant to act as the owner of his or her restaurant. These general managers meet weekly as a group with senior management to share best practices. Chefs and kitchen staff at each restaurant are responsible for maintaining and ordering their own food inventory, thereby increasing efficiency and reducing waste and the need for additional headcount at the corporate level. We believe we achieve significant cost, quality and availability advantages through centralized sourcing from our primary suppliers of beef, wine and other products. In fiscal 2011, our revenues were comprised 66% of food and 34% of alcohol. We had operating income and restaurant-level EBITDA margins of 10.8% and 23.5% and 15.6% and 25.2% in fiscal 2011 and the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, respectively.

Fine Dining Concepts with Complementary Market Positions.     Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille are fine dining concepts that share a focus on high quality food, individualized interior design and attentive service. The concepts were designed to coexist with one another, each maintaining its own identity and price point. Average checks at Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s were $100 and $59, respectively, for the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011, and the targeted average check at the Grille is between $45 and $55. Currently, we operate multiple concepts in close proximity to each other in six of our markets. We believe our complementary positioning will continue to allow us to develop our concepts in a single metropolitan area without competing for customers. We have secured prominent locations for our restaurants and a number of unique sites not typically used for steakhouse locations, including a historic bank building, a redeveloped wharf and former retail space in Rockefeller Center. We believe the locations of our restaurants distinguish us from our competitors, add to the strength of our brands and help drive our AUVs. Furthermore, we believe many landlords and developers seek out our concepts to be restaurant anchors for their developments as our concepts are complementary to upscale national retailers with similar target demographics.

Focus on Innovation.     We have developed and created three concepts in the full-service steakhouse industry. As we have grown our concepts, we have evolved each to incorporate proprietary recipes with bold and flavorful seasonings that reflect our heritage in the Southern United States, extensive wine lists, prominent bar scenes and our “swarming service.” We have positioned the Del Frisco’s brand as a contemporary alternative to the traditional fine dining steakhouse dining concept. We developed Sullivan’s in the mid-1990’s, featuring lower price points and live music to attract a broader clientele. The Grille, opened in 2011, leverages and broadens Del Frisco’s appeal in a less formal and smaller format. We remain committed to evolving our existing concepts to remain relevant to a range of customers.

High Quality Menu Offerings with a Focus on Social Experience and Customer Service.     We believe we provide our customers with a true fine dining steakhouse experience by combining high quality food, atmosphere and service. We offer high quality cuisine across all menu items, with an emphasis on aged beef, fresh seafood and locally sourced ingredients. These offerings are complemented by an extensive, award-winning wine list and a broad cocktail selection. The dining experience is enhanced by our commitment to providing a social atmosphere and décor that includes carefully-selected artwork, private dining rooms and separate bar areas. To further enhance our customers’ dining experience we have a staff of

 

70


highly-trained employees who undergo an extensive training program and are evaluated regularly by management. These employees provide our “swarming service,” which creates frequent interactions with our customers.

Experienced Executive and Restaurant Management Teams.     Our executive team has extensive experience with an average of over 16 years in the restaurant industry, including significant tenure with our company as well as other high-end restaurant concepts. Our restaurant-level managers are also very experienced, with average tenure at Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s of nine and four years, respectively, and additional experience at other fine dining establishments. Our management team, which includes senior management, regional managers and general managers, meets on a weekly basis to review financial and operating results as well as receive feedback from both senior management and their peers to collaborate on best practices. We believe this management process fosters a commitment to operational excellence focused on producing a positive customer experience and strong financial performance.

Our Growth Strategy

We believe there are significant opportunities to grow our business, strengthen our competitive position and enhance our concepts through the continued implementation of the following strategies:

Pursue Disciplined New Unit Expansion.     We believe our concepts have significant room to grow. We have an established growth pipeline and a disciplined strategy for opening new restaurants. Our growth strategy includes entering new markets and expanding our presence in existing markets. We believe our concepts’ market positioning, broad range of average checks and menu offerings, coupled with the flexibility of our restaurant models across a range of trade areas and square footage will allow us to expand each of our three concepts into a greater number of locations. We have successfully opened new restaurants in a number of diverse markets and we continued to grow in 2011, opening three new restaurants in Boston, New York City and Dallas. We target a cash-on-cash return beginning in the third operating year of at least 25% for new restaurants across all of our concepts. We believe there are opportunities to open three to five restaurants annually, generally composed of one Del Frisco’s and two to four Sullivan’s and/or Grilles, with new openings of our Grille concept likely serving as the primary driver of new unit growth in the near term. In 2012, we have opened a Grille in Phoenix, Arizona, and we expect to open three additional restaurants, including a Del Frisco’s in Chicago, Illinois, and Grilles in Washington D.C. and Atlanta, Georgia. Beyond domestic new unit growth, although we have no current intention to do so, we believe our concepts have the potential for expansion in select international markets through franchising, licensing, Company-owned restaurants or a combination of the foregoing. While we do not have a specific global expansion strategy and we have no current intention to expand into international markets, we believe there is a long-term opportunity for our concepts beyond the U.S. market.

Grow Our Existing Restaurant Sales.     Our concepts achieve strong sales and customer count growth, with comparable restaurant sales increasing by 12.1%, 12.3%, 11.8% and 9.5% for the four quarters of fiscal 2011 as compared to the respective prior year periods and 6.7% for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012 versus the prior year period. The first quarter of 2012 marked our eighth consecutive quarter of comparable restaurant sales increases. We believe there are significant opportunities to continue to increase our sales and average check through maintaining our focus on tableside up-selling and salesmanship by our servers and by strategically adjusting menu prices and enhancing our concepts’ brand awareness through increased marketing efforts. In addition, we are adding seating to select locations, which we believe will increase sales at these restaurants.

 

 

71


Further Grow Our Private Dining Business.     We believe we are well-positioned to grow our private dining business due to our commitment to our customers’ dining experience, our unique locations and our plans to invest in improving our private dining facilities at select locations. All of our restaurants can serve large and small groups for private dining events, including corporate events, sales meetings, presentations, charity events and private parties. We are focused on growing our private dining business as it typically has a higher average check per customer and higher overall margins than regular dining room business. Private dining represented approximately 14.1% of our total sales in the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011. We intend to drive growth by enhancing our private dining capacity and increasing awareness of our private dining services. To help drive this growth, we are creating additional private dining space at select locations by expanding or reconfiguring existing space. In addition, each location currently dedicates a staff member to increasing its private dining business. At the beginning of 2011, we hired a corporate-wide private dining executive who meets weekly with each restaurant’s private dining coordinator regarding upcoming events and sales initiatives.

Restaurant Industry Overview

According to the National Restaurant Association, or the NRA, U.S. restaurant industry sales in 2011 were $610 billion, an increase of 4.0% over 2010 sales of $587 billion, and are projected to grow to $632 billion in 2012, representing approximately 4.1% of the U.S. gross domestic product. We compete in the full-service steak industry, or the FSR Steak category as defined by Technomic, Inc., a research and consulting firm serving the food and foodservice industries. Each of our concepts fall into the FSR Steak category, which includes fine dining, and is defined as establishments with a relatively broad menu along with table, counter, and/or booth service and a waitstaff. At the conclusion of 2011, the FSR Steak category included 7,356 units. The FSR Steak category achieved $14.1 billion in sales in 2011, representing a 3.5% growth rate over 2010. Restaurants within the FSR Steak category within Technomic’s ranking of the top 500 restaurant chains (as ranked by U.S. system-wide sales) reported sales growth of 5.1% in 2011 and out-performed the overall Full Service Restaurant category, which reported sales growth of 1.8% in 2011.

Site Selection and Development

We believe site selection is critical for the potential success of our restaurants. We carefully consider growth opportunities for each of our restaurant concepts and utilize a customized approach for each concept when selecting and prioritizing markets for expansion. We perform comprehensive demographic and customer profile studies to evaluate and rationalize the trade areas and sites within each desired market. We leverage a significant number of sources to produce extensive research and analysis on the dynamics of the local area, the specific attributes of each site considered and the unit economics we believe we can realize.

For the Del Frisco’s brand, we focus on sites in urban locations that allow us to easily access business clientele and customers seeking a premium dining experience. Many of our Del Frisco’s restaurants are in marquee locations, including waterfront property, popular shopping districts and active business centers. We believe the broader appeal of the Sullivan’s and Grille concepts allows us to target sites in both urban locations as well as more suburban locations in close proximity to affluent residential areas. Our site assessment analysis includes three primary components: customer profiling (demographics, lifestyle segmentation, spend metrics), trade area and site evaluation (physical inspection, competitive benchmarking, analysis of business generators/traffic patterns), and financial modeling (square footage and seat count analysis, predictive sales and margin evaluations, investment cost and return metrics).

 

72


Understanding our customers is an essential element of our market planning and site selection processes. We’ve developed a customer profile for each of our concepts to help guide our development efforts and educate our development partners. We look for the following minimum criteria in our site trade areas:

 

     Population(a)      Daytime
Population(a)
     Average HH
Income
     Median
Age
     Priority Age
Blocks(b)
     Traffic
Counts(c)
 

LOGO

     100,000+         150,000+       $ 100,000+         40+        

 

35-44; 45-54;

55-64

  

  

     40,000+   

LOGO

     75,000+         100,000+       $ 75,000+         35+         35-44; 45-54         25,000+   

LOGO

     75,000+         100,000+       $ 75,000+         35+        

 

25-34; 35-44;

45-54

  

  

     25,000+   

 

(a) Represents the population within a customized target area generally with less than a 20-minute drive time.
(b) Represents the targeted age demographics for a prospective site.
(c) Represents the targeted average daily vehicle traffic for a prospective site.

We expect the size of new Del Frisco’s restaurants to range from 12,000 to 16,000 square feet, new Sullivan’s restaurants to range from 8,000 to 9,000 square feet and new Grille restaurants to range from 6,500 to 8,500 square feet. For the opening of a new restaurant, we measure our cash investment costs net of landlord contributions and equipment financing, but including pre-opening costs. We target average cash investment costs of $7.0 million to $9.0 million for a new Del Frisco’s and $3.0 million to $4.5 million for a new Sullivan’s or Grille. We target a cash-on-cash return of at least 25% beginning in the third operating year across our concepts, consistent with the average of restaurant openings in recent years. To achieve this return we target a ratio of third year restaurant revenues to net development costs in the range of approximately 1.25:1 to 1.50:1. We target restaurant-level EBITDA margins of between 20% and 25% for each of our three concepts.

We believe there are opportunities to open three to five new restaurants annually, generally composed of one Del Frisco’s and two to four Sullivan’s and/or Grilles, with new openings of our Grille concept likely serving as the primary driver of new unit growth in the near term. It generally takes nine to 12 months after the signing of a lease or the closing of a purchase to complete construction and open a new restaurant. Additional time is sometimes required to obtain certain government approvals, permits and licenses, such as liquor licenses.

Properties

We currently operate 32 restaurants across 18 states. We currently lease all of our restaurants, except for one Del Frisco’s restaurant and one Sullivan’s restaurant. The majority of our leases provide for minimum annual rents with some containing percentage-of-sales rent provisions, against which the minimum rent may be applied. Typically, our lease terms are five to 15 years at initiation, with two to four five-year extension options. None of our restaurant leases can be terminated early by the landlord other than as is customary in the context of a breach or default under the applicable lease.

 

73


Opening Date

  

City

  

State

  

Lease/Own

Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House

        

September 1995

  

Dallas

   Texas    Own

April 1996

  

Ft. Worth

   Texas    Lease

January 1997

  

Denver

   Colorado    Lease

March 2000

  

New York

   New York    Lease

July 2000

  

Las Vegas

   Nevada    Lease

May 2007

  

Charlotte

   North Carolina    Lease

November 2007

  

Houston

   Texas    Lease (1)

November 2008

  

Philadelphia

   Pennsylvania    Lease

April 2011

  

Boston

   Massachusetts    Lease

Del Frisco’s Grille

        

August 2011

  

New York

   New York    Lease

November 2011

  

Dallas

   Texas    Lease

June 2012

  

Phoenix

   Arizona    Lease

Sullivan’s Steakhouse

        

May 1996

  

Austin

   Texas    Lease

November 1996

  

Indianapolis

   Indiana    Lease

October 1997

  

Baton Rouge

   Louisiana    Lease

December 1997

  

Wilmington

   Delaware    Lease

January 1998

  

Charlotte

   North Carolina    Lease (2)

July 1998

  

Houston

   Texas    Lease (3)

September 1998

  

Anchorage

   Alaska    Lease

September 1998

  

King of Prussia

   Pennsylvania    Lease

October 1998

  

Dallas

   Texas    Own

December 1998

  

Naperville

   Illinois    Lease

January 1999

  

Palm Desert

   California    Lease

January 1999

  

Denver

   Colorado    Lease

June 1999

  

Chicago

   Illinois    Lease

August 1999

  

Raleigh

   North Carolina    Lease

December 2000

  

Tucson

   Arizona    Lease

July 2007

  

Omaha

   Nebraska    Lease

July 2008

  

Leawood

   Kansas    Lease

November 2008

  

Lincolnshire

   Illinois    Lease

February 2009

  

Baltimore

   Maryland    Lease

June 2010

  

Seattle

   Washington    Lease

 

(1) Current lease term expires November 30, 2012, but can be renewed at our election for an additional five year term with advance written notice.
(2) Current lease term expires December 31, 2012, but can be renewed at our election for an additional five year term with advance written notice.
(3) Current lease term expires August 31, 2012, but can be renewed at our election for an additional five year term with advance written notice.

In addition, for the remainder of 2012 we expect to open three additional restaurants, each of which will be leased, including a Del Frisco’s in Chicago, Illinois, and Grilles in Washington D.C. and Atlanta, Georgia. Our corporate headquarters is located in Southlake, Texas. We lease the property for our corporate headquarters.

Restaurant Operations and Management

Our restaurants have a distinctive combination of food, atmosphere and service in an upscale environment. We believe that our success reflects the consistency of our execution

 

74


across all aspects of the dining experience, from the formulation of proprietary recipes, to the procurement and presentation of high quality menu items and the delivery of a positive customer experience. We strive to provide quality through a carefully controlled and established supply chain and proven preparation techniques.

Depending on the volume of each restaurant, our typical restaurant-level management team consists of one general manager, two to four assistant managers, one executive chef and two sous chefs. We also have an experienced team of regional managers to oversee operations at multiple restaurants. Each of our regional and general managers is broadly trained across Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s, and will also be trained for the Grille, allowing us the flexibility to move appropriate managers into various positions within the organization. To ensure that each restaurant and its employees meet our demanding performance requirements, we have developed a set of strict operational standards that are followed in all facets of our operations. For example, these standards are used to develop corporate recipes, many of which are proprietary, that are adhered to across all of our restaurants. These standards also mandate a quality control process for the menu items in each of our restaurants our chefs and managers oversee before each shift. This quality control process includes the full preparation of each item on our menu, other than our steaks, and the testing of each of these items for presentation, taste, portion size and temperature before they are prepared for our customers. Items that do not meet our rigorous standards are re-made until they do. We believe this process of full preparation for testing differentiates us from our competition.

The consistent execution at our restaurants is a result of the extensive training and supervision of our employees. Our general managers are required to undergo eight to 10 weeks of initial training in food quality, customer service, alcohol beverage service, liquor liability avoidance and employee retention programs. Each of our new hourly employees also typically participates in a training program during which the employee works under the close supervision of his or her general manager. Our chefs and their assistants receive extensive training in food quality, food supply management and kitchen maintenance. All of our employees are trained to uphold each concept’s distinct characteristics and our overall values and operating philosophy.

Our training programs are administered by the general manager at each restaurant and supervised by our vice president of human resources and training, director of new restaurant openings and a dedicated training director for each concept. This training team ensures that all new general managers have developed a comprehensive set of tools that they can use to manage their restaurant, including employee selection, performance management and wage and hourly compliance. We also require each general manager to obtain a mandatory internal certification in areas of the kitchen, dining room and bar area. Our training team also supports new restaurant openings. Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille have developed a streamlined training program that ensures employees opening a new restaurant function as a cohesive team and maintain our high operational and food preparation standards. As a result our corporate and concept-level infrastructure supports our growth strategy, allowing us to successfully replicate our standards in new restaurants.

Sourcing and Supply Chain

Our ability to maintain the consistent quality of our restaurants depends in part on our ability to procure food and other supplies from reliable sources in accordance with the specifications for all food products established by our corporate executive chef. We continually research and evaluate products and supplies to ensure high quality meat, seafood and other menu ingredients. Our executive corporate chef works with U.S. Foodservice, our beef distributor, for all beef purchases on a national level. We have also engaged a corporate purchasing consultant who negotiates directly with suppliers of meat, seafood and certain other

 

75


food and beverage products to ensure consistent quality and freshness and to obtain competitive prices for items purchased nationally for each concept. Our strong relationships with national and regional foodservice distributors ensure that our restaurants receive a constant supply of products. Products are shipped directly to the restaurants, although invoices are sent to corporate headquarters for payment. We do not maintain a central product warehouse or commissary.

Our corporate chef and our purchasing consultant also establish strict product specifications for those items purchased at the local level. We ensure competitive pricing for such supplies by requiring each restaurant’s chef to obtain at least three prices for each locally sourced product from suppliers approved by the corporate purchasing consultant and submit these bids to their regional chef on a weekly basis. Pricing is then compared weekly on a national basis to ensure management for each restaurant has the most up-to-date information to help with procurement. Purchasing at each restaurant is directed primarily by each restaurant’s chef, who is trained in our purchasing philosophy and specifications, and who works with regional and corporate managers to ensure consistent products. Each of our restaurants also has an in-house sommelier responsible for purchasing wines based on customer preferences, market availability and menu content.

We have not experienced any significant delays in receiving restaurant supplies and equipment. Although we currently do not engage in futures contracts or other financial risk management strategies with respect to potential price fluctuations, from time to time, we may opportunistically enter into fixed price beef supply contracts or contracts for other food products or consider other risk management strategies with regard to our meat and other food costs to minimize the impact of potential price fluctuations. This practice could help stabilize our food costs during times of fluctuating prices, although there can be no assurances that this will occur.

Marketing and Advertising

We believe that our commitment to providing quality food, hospitality, service and a high level of value for each price point is an effective approach to attracting customers and maintaining their loyalty. We use a variety of national, regional and local marketing and public relations techniques intended to maintain and build our customer traffic, maintain and enhance our concepts’ images and continually improve and refine our upscale experience. For example, in 2010, we initiated a loyalty program that provides credit and other rewards to our customers based on dollars spent at our restaurants. In addition, local restaurant marketing is important to the success of our concepts. For example, each restaurant’s general manager cultivates relationships with local businesses and luxury hotels that drive the restaurant’s business, in particular its private dining business. We also work with a national public relations firm that coordinates local firms in connection with new restaurant openings.

Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille each use specific marketing and advertising initiatives to position the concepts in the applicable segment of our industry, including ad placement in magazines targeting the affluent segment of the population. We are currently reviewing our marketing and advertising strategy, and in the future anticipate focusing our advertising expenditures on travel-related magazines while continuing to advertise in specialty magazines that appeal to our target demographics and in select local publications.

Competition

The full-service steak industry and general upscale restaurant businesses are highly competitive and fragmented, and the number, size and strength of competitors vary widely by region, especially within the general upscale restaurant segment. We believe restaurant

 

76


competition is based on quality of food products, customer service, reputation, restaurant décor, location, name recognition and price. Depending on the specific concept, our restaurants compete with a number of restaurants within their markets, both locally-owned restaurants and restaurants that are part of regional or national chains. The principal upscale steakhouse chains with which Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille compete are Fleming’s Prime Steakhouse and Wine Bar, The Capital Grille, Smith & Wollensky, The Palm, Ruth’s Chris Steak House and Morton’s The Steakhouse. Our concepts also compete with additional restaurants in the broader upscale dining segment.

Seasonality

Our business is subject to seasonal fluctuations comparable to most restaurants. Historically, like other restaurants in our segment, the percentage of our annual revenues earned during the first and fourth fiscal quarters has been typically higher due to holiday traffic, increased gift card purchases and redemptions and increased private dining during the year-end holiday season. There is also an extra period in our fourth quarter.

Intellectual Property

We have registered the names Del Frisco’s, Double Eagle Steak House and Sullivan’s, and have applied for registration of the Del Frisco’s Grille name, as trade names, trademarks or service marks with the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in certain foreign countries. We have the exclusive right for use of these trademarks throughout the United States, other than with respect to the following. An unrelated third party that operates a restaurant in Louisville, Kentucky has an indefinite right to use a specific registration of the Del Frisco’s name in Jefferson and Fayette Counties in Kentucky, Marion County in Indiana and Hamilton County in Ohio pursuant to a concurrent use agreement. We also agreed not to use the specific registration of the Del Frisco’s name or grant others the right to use it within 50 miles of any restaurant operated by the third party in the territory. The third party has paid us aggregate fees of $52,500. A separate, unrelated third party that operates a restaurant in Orlando, Florida has an exclusive license to use the Del Frisco’s name in Orange, Seminole and Ocala Counties through June 1, 2013 pursuant to a license agreement with no option to renew. We also agreed not to open a Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s or Grille before January 1, 2015 in Orange, Seminole and Ocala Counties. The licensee paid us a one-time fee of $38,000 upon the execution of the agreement in 1993 and a monthly fee of 3% of its total gross sales less any sales tax through December 31, 2011. We do not have any right to any future or recurring payments from or have any affirmative payment obligations to either third party. Each third party is responsible for all costs associated with running its respective location, including all commodity and labor costs and any risks related thereto. We are also aware of names similar to those of our restaurants used by various third parties in certain limited geographical areas. We believe that our trade names, trademarks and service marks are valuable to the operation of our restaurants and are important to our marketing strategy.

Employees

As of March 20, 2012, we had 3,094 employees. Many of our hourly employees are employed on a part-time basis to provide services necessary during peak periods of restaurant operations. None of our employees is covered by a collective bargaining agreement. We believe that we have good relations with our employees.

Government Regulation

Our restaurants are subject to licensing and regulation by state and local health, safety, fire and other authorities, including licensing and regulation requirements for the sale of alcoholic

 

77


beverages and food. We maintain the necessary restaurant, alcoholic beverage and retail licenses, permits and approvals. The development and construction of additional restaurants will also be subject to compliance with applicable zoning, land use and environmental regulations. Federal and state labor laws govern our relationship with our employees and affect operating costs. These laws regulate, among other things, minimum wage, overtime, tips, tip credits, unemployment tax rates, workers’ compensation rates, citizenship requirements and other working conditions. Our restaurants are subject in each state in which we operate to “dram shop” laws, which allow, in general, a person to sue us if that person was injured by an intoxicated person who was wrongfully served alcoholic beverages at one of our restaurants. A judgment against us under a dram shop law could exceed our liability insurance coverage policy limits and could result in substantial liability for us and have a material adverse effect on our results of operations. Our inability to continue to obtain such insurance coverage at reasonable costs also could have a material adverse effect on us. We are also subject to the Federal Americans with Disabilities Act, which prohibits discrimination on the basis of disability in public accommodations and employment.

Legal Proceedings

We are subject to various claims and legal actions, including class actions, arising in the ordinary course of business from time to time, including claims related to food quality, personal injury, contract matters, health, wage and employment and other issues. While it is impossible at this time to determine with certainty the ultimate outcome of these proceedings, lawsuits and claims, management believes that adequate provisions have been made and that the ultimate outcomes will not have a material adverse effect on our financial position.

 

78


MANAGEMENT

Executive Officers and Directors

The following table sets forth certain information regarding the current member of our board of directors, our director nominees, our executive officers and certain of our key employees, as of the date of this prospectus.

 

Name

   Age     

Position

Mark S. Mednansky

     55       Chief Executive Officer; Director Nominee

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

     44       Chief Financial Officer

Thomas G. Dritsas

     41      

Vice President of Culinary & Corporate Executive Chef

James W. Kirkpatrick

     58      

Vice President of Real Estate

Lisa H. Kislak

     53      

Vice President of Brand Marketing

William S. Martens

     40      

Vice President of Development & Construction

April L. Scopa

     45      

Vice President of People and Education

Norman J. Abdallah

     49       Director Nominee

David B. Barr

     48       Director Nominee

Jodi L. Cason

     38       Director Nominee

Richard L. Davis

     59       Director Nominee

Melissa S. Hubbell

     38       Director Nominee

John R. Kinzer

     44       Director Nominee

Jennifer R. Lamprecht

     44       Director

Samuel D. Loughlin

     40      

Chairman of the Board Nominee; Director Nominee

Executive Officers and Key Employees

Mark S. Mednansky has served as Chief Executive Officer since March 2007 and will become a director upon the listing of our common stock. Prior to becoming our Chief Executive Officer in connection with the Acquisition, Mr. Mednansky served in senior management roles with Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc. From 2005 until March 2007, Mr. Mednansky was the Chief Operating Officer of several Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon restaurant concepts, including Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s. Mr. Mednansky also served as Vice President of Operations of the Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s concepts from 2000 to 2005 and President of the Texas Land & Cattle concept from 2003 to 2006. Mr. Mednansky has over 35 years of restaurant industry experience and 25 years of experience as a senior operations manager. Prior to joining Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc., he was Director of Operations for Big Four Restaurants from 1997 to 1998, Director of Culinary Services for Dial Corp. from 1990 to 1997 and Area Manager for Big Four Restaurants from 1985 to 1990.

As our Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Mednansky will bring a deep understanding of the Company’s business, industry, operations and strategic plan to the board of directors. Mr. Mednansky also has extensive institutional knowledge gained through his more than 12 years of experience with the Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s concepts. In addition, Mr. Mednansky’s other senior leadership and restaurant experience will enable him to provide valuable insight and guidance to the board on our industry as a whole. Mr. Mednansky’s board service will also provide a direct open channel of communication between the board and senior management.

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr. has served as Chief Financial Officer since November 2011. Prior to joining our company Mr. Pennison served as Chief Financial Officer for iSeatz Inc., a customized software technology company primarily serving the travel and leisure industry, from 2009 to 2011. Mr. Pennison also operated his own financial consulting firm in Louisiana from 2008 to 2009 where he provided financial and business consulting services to clients in the hospitality and other consumer and retail related industries. Prior to that, Mr. Pennison spent 12 years at

 

79


Ruth’s Hospitality Group, Inc., a restaurant company focused exclusively on the upscale dining segment, formerly known as Ruth’s Chris Steak House, Inc., from 1996 to 2008 serving in various capacities, including Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Additionally, from 1994 to 1996, Mr. Pennison served as Assistant Corporate Controller of Casino Magic Corp., with primary responsibilities for corporate finance and SEC reporting, and from 1991 to 1994, Mr. Pennison was at the public accounting firm KPMG LLP. Mr. Pennison is a member of the Financial Executive Institute and the Louisiana Society of Certified Public Accountants.

Thomas G. Dritsas has served as Vice President of Culinary & Corporate Executive Chef since December 2006 and oversees the day to day culinary operations of Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille. From 2003 to 2006, Mr. Dritsas served as Corporate Executive Chef for Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc., during which time he oversaw the daily culinary operations for each of its concepts. Mr. Dritsas joined Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc. in 1999 and served in various culinary capacities, including as part of new opening teams. Prior to joining Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Mr. Dritsas assisted in the opening of numerous independent restaurants and operated his own restaurant.

James W. Kirkpatrick has served as Vice President of Real Estate since February 2012 and oversees real estate matters for our three concepts, including strategic development and lease administration. Prior to joining our company, Mr. Kirkpatrick served as the Senior Vice President of Development for Morton’s Restaurant Group, Inc., an operator of company-owned upscale steakhouses, from 2006 to 2012, where he managed all aspects of development including real-estate strategic development to lease administration. Prior to Morton’s, Mr. Kirkpatrick worked in several leadership roles with Applebee’s International, Inc. from 1999 to 2006, including Senior Director of Real Estate and Vice President of Real Estate & Construction. Mr. Kirkpatrick has also held a variety of other positions focused on real estate development with a number of other companies in the restaurant industry including Houlihan’s Restaurants, Inc., TGI Friday’s and Pizza Hut, Inc.

Lisa H. Kislak has served as Vice President of Brand Marketing since February 2012 and is responsible for all aspects of marketing for Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s and the Grille. Prior to joining our company, Ms. Kislak was the Vice President of Marketing for The Picture People, a privately held company with more than 170 company-owned portrait studios in 34 states, where she managed the company’s marketing activities. Before that, Ms. Kislak served as a Principal for Premium Knowledge Group, a firm specializing in luxury lifestyle marketing, from 2007 to 2010. Ms. Kislak started her career with Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts where she held various marketing roles over a 13-year period, including Vice President of Brand and Relationship Marketing with Wyndham Hotels, Vice President of Sales and Marketing for Rosewood Hotels & Resorts and Senior Vice President of Marketing for ClubCorp.

William S. Martens has served as Vice President of Development & Construction since 2011 and is responsible for market planning, site selection, site acquisition and construction for our three concepts. Mr. Martens also oversees concept design, portfolio management and facilities operations. Mr. Martens has been with us since 2008, previously serving as our Director of Development where he managed all facets of new unit development and established the infrastructure to support our growth in new and existing markets. Before joining our company, Mr. Martens served as Vice President of Portfolio Management with Hudson Americas, LLC, and affiliate of ours and Lone Star Fund, from 2007 to 2008. Prior to Hudson Americas, Mr. Martens spent nine years with Yum! Brands, where he held multiple leadership roles in Finance and Development, including the position of Senior Manager of Development. In this role, he worked with senior brand leadership teams to develop market plans, define asset strategies and make capital appropriations decisions for approximately 350 new restaurants annually.

 

80


April L. Scopa has served as Vice President of People and Education since June 2011 and is responsible for recruiting, human resources, talent development & training strategy. Prior to joining our company, Ms. Scopa worked with Landmark Leisure Group, a national leader in entertainment development since June 2010 and served as VP of People & Development, beginning in January 2011, where she led the HR, recruiting, new store opening development, employee relations, talent management and personnel development strategy. Prior to Landmark, Ms. Scopa spent eight years with The Capital Grille, an upscale steakhouse division of Darden Restaurants, as Director of Operations and Senior Director of Training, where her responsibilities most recently included quality of operations, people and P&L results for six locations. Prior to The Capital Grille, Ms. Scopa also worked for C.A. Muer Corporation and LongHorn Steakhouse, both in a training and operations capacity.

Directors and Director Nominees

Norman J. Abdallah will become a director upon the listing of our common stock. Mr. Abdallah has served as a member of our Advisory Board since March 2011. Mr. Abdallah has served as the Chief Executive Officer of Romano’s Macaroni Grill, a privately-held restaurant concept, since 2010. Mr. Abdallah has also served as a member of the Board of Directors of California Pizza Kitchen, Inc. since 2011. Prior to joining Romano’s Macaroni Grill, Mr. Abdallah served as Chief Executive Officer of Restaurants Unlimited Inc., a privately-held multi-concept restaurant company, from 2009 to 2010. Prior to joining Restaurants Unlimited, Mr. Abdallah served as the Chief Executive Officer and Co-Founder of Fired Up, Inc., the parent company of U.S.-based casual dining concept Carino’s Italian, from 1997 to 2008.

Mr. Abdallah will bring extensive knowledge of the restaurant industry to the board of directors from his experience with a number of national restaurant concepts. In addition, Mr. Abdallah’s service as a chief executive officer of various other restaurant holding companies will contribute valuable management experience to the board’s collective knowledge. His service on the Company’s Advisory Board also provides Mr. Abdallah with a working knowledge of the Company’s business and operations that will be important to the development of the board following the completion of this offering.

David B. Barr will become a director upon the listing of our common stock. Mr. Barr has served as a member of our Advisory Board since 2008. Mr. Barr has been the Chairman of the board of directors of PMTD Restaurants LLC and its affiliates, a franchisee of KFC since 1998. Mr. Barr has also been Chairman of the board of directors of Rita Restaurant Corp., the owner and operator of Don Pablo’s Mexican Restaurants and Hops Grill and Brewery since 2008, in addition to having served on the board of the prior owner. Mr. Barr also serves on the boards of directors of Mrs. Fields Original Cookies, Inc. (owner of the Ms. Fields and TCBY brands), and Charles & Colvard Ltd., and was previously the Chairman of the board of directors of Samuels Jewelers, Inc. from 2000 to 2006. From 1994 to 2008, Mr. Barr served as the Chief Financial Officer and then Chief Executive Officer of the Great American Cookie Company, a franchisor and operator of cookie stores. Mr. Barr began his career with Price Waterhouse in 1986 where he worked until 1991 when he left to join the finance department of Pizza Hut, Inc. Mr. Barr was a licensed certified public accountant in the State of Georgia and a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants from 1991 to 2003. Mr. Barr currently sits on the board of directors of International Franchise Association and the advisory board of the McIntire School of Commerce at the University of Virginia.

Mr. Barr will bring extensive knowledge of the restaurant industry to the board of directors from his experience with a number of restaurant and retail concepts. His board service for various companies, including as chairman, will also provide valuable insight to the board regarding the dynamics and interactions of a board of directors. Mr. Barr’s financial background

 

81


will assist the board in taking responsibility for our public company reporting of financial information. His service on the Company’s Advisory Board also provides Mr. Barr with working knowledge of the Company’s business and operations that will be important to the development of the board following the completion of this offering.

Jodi L. Cason will become a director upon the listing of our common stock. Ms. Cason is the Senior Vice President of Corporate Finance and Investor Reporting for Hudson Advisors, LLC, an affiliate of ours and Lone Star Fund. Ms. Cason has worked for Hudson Advisors since 2000. Her responsibilities include the oversight of, and global coordination for, the financial reporting requirements of the Limited Partners, General Partner and Co-investment Partners of Lone Star Fund, including Hudson Advisors and its subsidiaries. Prior to 2000, Ms. Cason worked in the Investor Relations group of Lone Star Fund, focusing on the analysis of, and reporting on, the trends and projections of cash flows impacting both the Limited Partners and General Partner of Lone Star Fund. She began her career at KPMG in the Assurance Services group.

Ms. Cason’s background and extensive expertise in financial markets, financing and other funding operations will provide the board of directors with insight regarding investing, accounting and other financial reporting matters. Her tenure at KPMG will assist the board in taking responsibility for our public company reporting of financial information.

Richard L. Davis will become a director upon the listing of our common stock. Mr. Davis has served as a member of our Advisory Board since 2011. Mr. Davis has also served as a member of the board of directors of Bi-Lo Holdings, LLC, a 207-unit grocery company also controlled by Lone Star Fund, since 2011. Mr. Davis’ 40 year business career has been devoted to managing and developing various businesses in retail, printing services and the restaurant and entertainment industries. Mr. Davis was the founder and owner of Main Street Crossing, a restaurant and live entertainment venue, JoeAuto, a chain of auto repair shops, Extreme Logic, a software training company and Night-Rider Overnight Copy Service, a printing business. Mr. Davis was the CEO of CCG Venture Partners from 1992 to 2010 and served in an advisory board capacity in 2011 for Del Frisco’s.

Mr. Davis’ extensive experience in business development across a wide range of industries will allow him to provide insight to the board of directors regarding developing and implementing strategies for growing our business. His service on the Company’s Advisory Board also provides Mr. Davis with working knowledge of the Company’s business and operations that will be important to the development of the board following the completion of this offering.

Melissa S. Hubbell will become a director upon the listing of our common stock. Ms. Hubbell has been the Chief Operating Officer of Hudson Americas, LLC, an affiliate of ours and Lone Star Fund, since 2008, with direct oversight of all business management functions, including Human Capital, Finance, Legal, IT and Investor Relations, as well as asset management responsibility for Lone Star Fund’s investment in our company. Since joining Hudson Americas, Ms. Hubbell has advised operating company management teams and internal leaders on operations matters, including organizational restructurings, executive alignment and recruiting executive-level talent. Prior to joining Hudson Americas, Ms. Hubbell was the Director of Human Resources for GMAC ResCap, a financial services company, a position she held from 2001 to 2008. Ms. Hubbell has over 14 years of strategic human resources experience in the financial services and consumer products industries.

Ms. Hubbell will bring management expertise to the board of directors covering many facets of our business, including investor relations. The breadth of her experience across multiple substantive areas will assist the board in understanding and addressing the wide

 

82


variety of issues it will face following the completion of the offering. Her knowledge of employment and human resource matters will also provide the board with valuable expertise regarding these matters, including recruitment, succession planning, and relations with management personnel. Her prior involvement with Lone Star Fund’s investment in us also provides Ms. Hubbell with a working knowledge of our business and operations that will be important to the development of the board following the completion of this offering.

John R. Kinzer will become a director upon the listing of our common stock. Mr. Kinzer has been a Director of Hudson Americas, LLC, an affiliate of ours, and Lone Star Fund since October 2008. Mr. Kinzer is responsible for a number of real estate and growth initiatives across Lone Star Fund’s investments. Prior to joining Hudson, Mr. Kinzer served as Chief Investment Officer for Provident Realty Advisors, a privately-held owner, developer and manager of a broad range of real estate assets, from December 2006 to October 2008 and was responsible for operations, capital markets and finance for both the real estate and the oil and gas platforms. Prior to joining Provident, Mr. Kinzer served as the Director of Acquisitions for Milestone Group, a real estate investment advisor, from March 2005 to December 2006, where he had responsibility for acquisitions and capital markets activities. From 2000 to 2004, Mr. Kinzer was a Partner with TriVest Residential and acted as the company’s Chief Investment Officer. Prior to his tenure with TriVest, Mr. Kinzer was a Senior Acquisition Manager for the Archon Group in Dallas, Texas. Prior to Archon, Mr. Kinzer also served in various capacities for the Archon Group, JPI Development and the J.E. Robert Companies.

Mr. Kinzer brings broad experience in both finance and asset management to the board of directors. His involvement with Lone Star Fund’s restaurant companies, including our company, also provides Mr. Kinzer with a working knowledge of our business and operations that will be important to the development of the board following the completion of this offering. Mr. Kinzer also has extensive experience in real estate matters, which are a significant aspect of our business and growth prospects for the future.

Jennifer R. Lamprecht has served as a director since March 2011. In 2009, Ms. Lamprecht joined Hudson Americas, LLC, an affiliate of ours and Lone Star Fund, as Director of Capital Markets, focused on optimizing capital structure and financing arrangements for portfolio entities as well as managing commercial and investment banking relationships across multiple asset classes and funds. Ms. Lamprecht’s current responsibilities include asset management for all of Lone Star Fund’s restaurant investments, including our company as well as the Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon and Texas Land & Cattle brands. Prior to joining Hudson Americas, Ms. Lamprecht spent 18 years in the financial services industry, including 10 years at Morgan Stanley in its capital markets and investment banking divisions where she covered healthcare and retail clients.

Ms. Lamprecht’s knowledge of our company allows her to bring a well-informed perspective to the board of directors regarding our operations and our vision for the future. Her extensive experience in the financial markets also allows her to make valuable contributions with respect to our capital structure and financing and investing activities. This experience will also be helpful in forming our relationship with investors following the completion of this offering.

Samuel D. Loughlin will become a director and Chairman of the Board upon the listing of our common stock. Mr. Loughlin is currently a Managing Director of Lone Star U.S. Acquisitions, LLC, an affiliate of ours and Lone Star Fund, where he focuses on originations initiatives. Previously, from 2008 to 2011, he served in various capacities at Hudson Americas, LLC, an affiliate of ours and Lone Star Fund, with responsibility for its retail and restaurant operating companies, in addition to leading teams in special originations initiatives.

 

83


Mr. Loughlin joined Hudson Americas in 2008 and focused on asset management, origination and monetization strategies of a number of assets. Mr. Loughlin has more than 13 years of finance and legal experience, including mergers and acquisitions, financing, private equity investment, originations and asset management transactions. Prior to joining Hudson Americas, Mr. Loughlin was a Partner of CCG Venture Partners, a private equity firm with real estate, operating company and securities holdings, where he was responsible for legal oversight, deal structuring, asset evaluation, acquisitions and sales. Previously, Mr. Loughlin was an attorney in the Business and Corporate Securities Group at Vinson & Elkins LLP, where he supported clients in venture capital and mezzanine financing transactions, private and public securities offerings, mergers and acquisitions, management buyouts and debt financing transactions.

Mr. Loughlin has significant experience with the strategic, financial and operational requirements facing companies in the restaurant and related industries, allowing him to guide the board in analyzing, shaping, and overseeing our execution of important operational and policy issues. His responsibilities for Lone Star Fund’s restaurant companies, including our company, also provide Mr. Loughlin with a working knowledge of our business and operations that will be important to the development of the board following the completion of this offering.

There are no family relationships among any of our directors, director nominees or executive officers.

Management Compensation

After this offering, we expect to continue to compensate our management on a basis substantially similar to immediately prior to this offering, except that, in light of our proposed status as a public company, our equity-based incentive program will be different from the program in effect prior to the offering.

Equity-Based Arrangements. Currently, we do not maintain an equity-based compensation program, other than Class B and Class C interests in our direct parent, LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC, or Wagon, granted to certain of our executive officers and described below under “—Payments in Connection with Offering.” However, in connection with this offering, we intend to adopt a long-term equity incentive plan for employees, officers, non-employee directors and other service providers, to be known as the Del Frisco Restaurant Group 2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan, or the 2012 Plan. The 2012 Plan will be designed to promote our interests by providing eligible persons with the opportunity to share in appreciation of our stock resulting from our performance. We have reserved              shares of our common stock for issuance under the equity incentive plan. Of these              shares reserved for issuance, we anticipate granting options for the issuance of              shares at the time of the pricing of this offering with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price. See “Executive Compensation—2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan” below.

Incentive-Based Arrangements. We currently maintain the Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group Management Bonus Plan, which provides general managers, salaried managers, sous chefs, and executive chefs with bonus payments based on actual restaurant-level financial results.

We also currently maintain an informal bonus policy for certain corporate-level employees of the Company and its subsidiaries, including our named executive officers (as defined under “Executive Compensation” below). Under this policy, all participants are potentially eligible to receive an annual performance-based bonus equal to a target percentage of their annual salary, based upon their corresponding level of individual responsibility within the organization. Whether an individual’s target is achieved depends upon whether various financial performance

 

84


metrics tied to each individual’s responsibilities (such as EBITDA, same store sales, regional sales, food costs, etc.) are satisfied. Our Chief Executive Officer, Mark S. Mednansky, may then recommend a discretionary upward or downward adjustment to each individual’s target bonus (other than his own) based upon such individual’s overall performance and contributions for the year. Mr. Mednansky’s recommendations are reviewed by our Board of Directors, who retains final discretion in determining the amount of any bonuses actually paid.

We expect that our informal bonus policy will be reduced to writing and incorporated within the 2012 Plan after this offering. The 2012 Plan authorizes the payment of cash or stock incentive bonuses. Such incentive bonus will confer upon the participant the opportunity to earn a future payment tied to a level of achievement with respect to one or more performance criteria established for a performance period of typically not less than one year. Our compensation committee will establish the performance criteria and level of achievement versus these criteria that will determine the amount payable under any incentive bonus. Notwithstanding the satisfaction of any award criteria, incentive bonuses awarded or granted under the 2012 Plan may be subject to discretionary adjustment by our compensation committee. However, any adjustment for named executive officers will be downward only, and any downward adjustment for one named executive officer will not result in an upward adjustment for any other named executive officer.

Director Compensation

Historically, we have not paid any compensation to our non-employee directors for their services as directors. However, we intend to pay compensation to independent directors following the completion of this offering. We expect to pay an annual retainer of $15,000 per year to each independent director for his or her services, with an additional $15,000 annual fee for service as the chairman of the board or as chairperson of a committee of the board. In addition, we expect to pay our independent directors an additional fee of $1,500 for each meeting attended in person and $250 for each meeting attended telephonically. Such fees are expected to be paid quarterly in arrears.

Board of Directors

Our certificate of incorporation will provide that our board of directors will be divided into three classes of directors, with the classes to be as nearly equal in number as possible. The members of each class will serve for a three-year term. As a result, one-third of our board of directors will be elected each year, and Mses. Hubbell and Lamprecht and Mr. Loughlin will be class I directors, up for election in 2013, Ms. Cason and Messrs. Barr and Kinzer will be class II directors, up for election in 2014, and Messrs. Abdallah, Davis and Mednansky will be class III directors, up for election in 2015.

Before the completion of this offering, our board of directors will establish an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating and corporate governance committee, each of which will operate pursuant to a charter that will be adopted by our board of directors. Upon the closing of this offering, the composition and functioning of all of our committees will comply with all applicable requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the SEC rules and regulations and the NASDAQ rules.

Following this offering, Lone Star Fund will continue to control more than 50% of the voting power of our common stock in the election of directors. Accordingly, we intend to avail ourselves of the “controlled company” exception available under the NASDAQ rules which eliminates certain requirements, such as the requirements that a company have a majority of independent directors on

 

85


its board of directors, that compensation of the executive officers be determined, or recommended to the board of directors for determination, by a majority of the independent directors or a compensation committee comprised solely of independent directors, and that director nominees be selected, or recommended for the board of directors’ selection, by a majority of the independent directors or a nominations committee comprised solely of independent directors. In the event that we cease to be a controlled company, we will be required to comply with these provisions within the transition periods specified in the NASDAQ rules. These exemptions do not modify the independence requirements for our audit committee, and we intend to comply with the applicable requirements of the SEC and the NASDAQ rules with respect to our audit committee within the applicable time frame.

Audit Committee

The primary responsibilities of our audit committee will be to oversee the accounting and financial reporting processes of our company as well as our subsidiary companies, and to oversee the internal and external audit processes. The audit committee will also assist the board of directors in fulfilling its oversight responsibilities by reviewing the financial information provided to stockholders and others, and the system of internal controls established by management and the board of directors. The audit committee will oversee the independent auditors, including their independence and objectivity. However, the committee members will not act as professional accountants or auditors, and their functions are not intended to duplicate or substitute for the activities of management and the independent auditors. The audit committee will be empowered to retain independent legal counsel and other advisors as it deems necessary or appropriate to assist it in fulfilling its responsibilities, and to approve the fees and other retention terms of the advisors.

The audit committee will be comprised of three members, Ms. Cason and Messrs. Barr and Davis, with Mr. Barr serving as chair. Our board of directors has determined that each of             is independent, as defined under and required by the federal securities laws and the NASDAQ rules. Our board of directors has determined that             qualifies as an audit committee financial expert under the federal securities laws and that each member of the audit committee has the financial sophistication required under NASDAQ rules. The rules of the SEC and NASDAQ require us to have a fully independent audit committee within one year of the date of the effectiveness of the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part and the listing of our common stock, respectively.

Compensation Committee

The primary responsibilities of our compensation committee will be to periodically review and approve the compensation and other benefits for our employees, officers and independent directors. This will include reviewing and approving corporate goals and objectives relevant to the compensation of our executive officers in light of those goals and objectives, and setting compensation for these officers based on those evaluations. Our compensation committee will also administer and have discretionary authority over the issuance of stock awards under our equity incentive plan.

The compensation committee may delegate authority to review and approve the compensation of our employees to certain of our executive officers, including with respect to awards made under our equity incentive plan. Even where the compensation committee does not delegate authority, our executive officers will typically make recommendations to the compensation committee regarding compensation to be paid to our employees and the size of grants of stock option, restricted stock and other forms of stock-based compensation.

 

86


The compensation committee will be comprised of three members, Mses. Hubbell and Lamprecht and Mr. Abdallah, with Ms. Hubbell serving as chair. For so long as we are a controlled company, we are not required to have a compensation committee comprised of independent directors under NASDAQ rules. The board has nonetheless determined that             is independent under NASDAQ rules.

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

Our nominating and corporate governance committee will oversee all aspects of our corporate governance functions. The committee will make recommendations to our board of directors regarding director candidates and assist our board of directors in determining the composition of our board of directors and its committees. The nominating and corporate governance committee will be comprised of three members, Messrs. Davis, Kinzer and Loughlin, with Mr. Loughlin serving as chair. For so long as we are a controlled company, we are not required to have a nominating and governance committee comprised of independent directors under NASDAQ rules. The board has nonetheless determined that             is independent under NASDAQ rules.

Code of Conduct and Ethics

Our board of directors will adopt a code of conduct and ethics that establishes the standards of ethical conduct applicable to all directors, officers and employees of our company. The code will address, among other things, conflicts of interest, compliance with disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting, corporate opportunities and confidentiality requirements. The audit committee will be responsible for applying and interpreting our code of conduct and ethics in situations where questions are presented to it.

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

Our compensation committee will be comprised of Mses. Hubbell and Lamprecht and Mr. Abdallah. None of our executive officers currently serves or has served during the last completed fiscal year, as a member of the board of directors, or as a member of the compensation or similar committee, of any entity that has one or more executive officers who served on our board of directors. For a description of the transactions between us and members of the compensation committee, and entities affiliated with such members, see the transactions described under the section entitled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.”

 

87


EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Compensation Discussion and Analysis

Overview

This Compensation Discussion and Analysis provides an overview of our executive compensation program and explains our compensation philosophy, objectives and design. The compensation provided to our chief executive officer, our chief financial officer, our former chief financial officer and our three other most highly compensated executive officers during fiscal year 2011, or collectively, the named executive officers, is set forth in detail in the tables and narratives that follow this section.

Compensation of Our Named Executive Officers.      Our named executive officers for fiscal 2011 were:

 

   

Mark S. Mednansky, Chief Executive Officer;

 

   

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr., Chief Financial Officer;

 

   

Thomas G. Dritsas, Corporate Executive Chef;

 

   

William S. Martens, Vice President of Development & Construction;

 

   

Jon W. Howie, former Chief Financial Officer; and

 

   

Edie A. Ames, former Chief Operating Officer.

The Company does not directly employ any individuals. All of our corporate-level employees, including our named executive officers, with the exception of Mr. Dritsas, have historically been employed and compensated by Center Cut Hospitality, Inc., or CCH, a direct, wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company, and, in the case of Mr. Dritsas, by one of our indirect subsidiaries, Sullivan’s of North Carolina. Nevertheless, our board of directors has retained final oversight and responsibility with respect to the compensation provided to the employees of CCH. Mr. Dritsas has entered into a new employment agreement with CCH. After this offering, we expect the compensation of our executive officers will be determined by our compensation committee and approved by the board of directors.

Executive Compensation Objectives and Philosophy.     Our primary executive compensation objective has been to attract and retain top talent from within a highly competitive global marketplace to maximize value to our equityholder. We seek to recruit and retain individuals who have demonstrated a high level of expertise and who are market leaders in the restaurant industry. We believe that the compensation paid to our executives is competitive in this marketplace. While we do not formally benchmark the compensation of our executives to any particular group of peer companies, we regularly review publicly available information regarding executive compensation in the restaurant industry to assess whether our executives are generally compensated at competitive levels.

We anticipate that upon completion of this offering, our compensation program will be composed of three principal components:

 

   

annual base salary;

 

   

annual non-equity incentive compensation; and

 

   

long-term equity incentive compensation.

We anticipate that we will set base salaries for our executives at levels sufficient to attract and retain talent and provide a fixed level of income, which would enable them to focus on

 

88


short-term execution objectives. In addition, we will use variable cash and long-term incentives to ensure a performance-based delivery of pay that closely aligns our named executive officers’ compensation with stockholders’ interests, which would enable them to focus on long-term sustained performance of the Company. After the completion of this offering, and periodically from time to time thereafter, our compensation committee will review our compensation program and may alter or adjust some or all of its components based on various factors, including compensation levels within our industry, corporate performance and individual performance of our named executive officers.

Elements of Compensation

Salary.     Base salaries for named executive officers reflect each executive’s level of experience, responsibilities and expected future contributions to our success, as well as market competitiveness. For fiscal year 2011, Messrs. Mednansky, Pennison, Dritsas, Martens and Howie and Ms. Ames were paid annual base salaries of $400,000, $250,000, $191,076, $172,000, $270,000 and $290,000, respectively. The salary levels for each of Messrs. Mednansky and Howie were memorialized in their respective amended and restated employment agreements entered into with Messrs. Mednansky and Howie dated February 7, 2011. As discussed below, Mr. Howie terminated employment with CCH, effective May 4, 2011. Mr. Pennison was hired to replace Mr. Howie. He entered into an employment agreement with CCH dated October 17, 2011, pursuant to which he is paid a base salary of $250,000/year. Mr. Dritsas had an employment agreement with Sullivan’s of North Carolina dated as of June 10, 2010, which established his base salary at $180,000, which was increased to $198,000 effective May 11, 2011. Mr. Martens does not have an employment agreement. His base salary is set, and reviewed periodically, by our board of directors after considering his level of experience and responsibilities. Ms. Ames entered into an employment agreement dated as of May 11, 2010, and updated on February 7, 2011, which sets forth her base salary. Ms. Ames terminated employment with CCH effective July 1, 2011.

Following the completion of this offering, we expect that our compensation committee will conduct a review of each named executive officer’s base salary on an annual basis or at such time as responsibilities change, and we expect that our compensation committee will consider factors such as individual and Company performance, base salaries of executives at similarly situated companies and the competitive environment in our industry in determining whether salary adjustments are warranted.

Non-Equity Incentive Compensation

We maintain a performance-based incentive bonus policy for certain corporate-level employees of the Company and its subsidiaries, including CCH and Sullivan’s of North Carolina. Under this policy, all participants, including our named executive officers, are potentially eligible to receive an annual performance-based bonus equal to a target percentage of their annual salary, based upon their corresponding level of individual responsibility within the organization. Whether an individual’s target is achieved depends upon whether various financial performance metrics tied to each individual’s responsibilities (such as EBITDA, same store sales, regional sales, food costs, etc.) are satisfied. Historically, Mr. Mednansky then recommends a discretionary upward or downward adjustment to each individual’s target bonus (other than his own) based upon such individual’s overall performance and contributions over the prior year. Mr. Mednansky’s recommendations are reviewed by our board of directors, which retains final discretion in determining the amount of any bonuses actually paid. Once established, we expect that our compensation committee will administer this bonus policy.

 

89


Pursuant to his February 7, 2011 employment agreement, Mr. Mednansky’s annual target bonus opportunity under the Company’s current or future bonus compensation plan is at least 50% of his annual base salary, but entitlement to any such bonus actually paid to Mr. Mednansky is to be determined by the board in its good faith discretion. Mr. Howie’s and Ms. Ames’ respective February 7, 2011 employment agreements contained similar provisions. However, in light of their respective terminations of employment in 2011, Mr. Howie and Ms. Ames were not entitled to participate in the bonus plan in fiscal year 2011. Pursuant to Mr. Pennison’s October 17, 2011 employment agreement, he is eligible for a target annual incentive plan bonus of 50% of his annual base salary, subject to achievement of various performance criteria, and further subject to the board’s discretion. Messrs. Dritsas’ and Martens’ target bonus amounts were set at 40% of their respective base salaries for 2011.

We determine performance measures and the associated weighting for each executive based on such executive’s areas of primary responsibility and ability to influence the Company’s financial results. Messrs. Mednansky’s and Pennison’s target bonus levels are based on a combination of revenue and profitability metrics. Mr. Dritsas’ target bonus level includes revenue and profitability metrics as well as measures of food costs. Mr. Martens’ target bonus level includes revenue and profitability metrics as well as measures related to the timing and costs of restaurant development projects.

For 2011, bonuses were determined for each of Messrs. Mednansky, Pennison, Dritsas and Martens, in whole or in part, as applicable, based on achievement of targets for both adjusted EBITDA and the percentage increase in comparable same store sales. In addition, for Messrs. Dritsas and Martens, funding was also based, in part, on the achievement of additional measures tied to their specific responsibilities. Mr. Dritsas’ individual measures included successful development of a playbook and set of recipes for the Grille and managing our cost of food sales as a percentage of total revenues. Mr. Martens’ individual measures included completing remodeling projects at select locations, successfully opening our Grille restaurants in New York City and Dallas and our Del Frisco’s in Boston and adequately managing construction costs for those projects. A summary of the performance measures and weightings for 2011 for each named executive officer is as follows:

 

     Weight of a Particular Measure in Determining Executive
Total Annual Incentive Bonus
 

Name

   Adjusted
EBITDA
    Same
Store
Sales
    Remodels     New
Openings
    Control
Construction
Costs
    Grille
Playbook/

Recipe
    Cost
of
Food
Sales
 

Mark S. Mednansky

     80     20          

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

     80     20          

Thomas G. Dritsas

     50     10           20     20

William S. Martens

     50     10     10     10     20    

For 2011, the specific targets and actual results for the quantitative measures were as follows:

 

Measure

   Target      Actual  

Adjusted EBITDA (1)

   $ 36.7 million       $ 37.0 million   

Same Store Sales

     9.5%         11.2%   

New Openings

     3         3   

Cost of Food Sales

     30.7%         30.7%   

 

 

(1)

Adjusted EBITDA for purposes of our annual incentive plan differs from that presented under “Prospectus Summary—Summary Historical Consolidated Financial and Operating Data” and “Selected Consolidated and Combined Financial Data.” Specifically, for purposes of the annual incentive plan only, adjusted EBITDA also adds amounts related to severance, non-cash equity compensation and a nonrecurring 2011 expense back to income from continuing operations.

 

90


In addition, the Board of Directors determined that both Messrs. Dritsas and Martens achieved their respective qualitative measures relating to the development of a playbook and a set of recipes for the Grille and completing remodeling projects and managing construction costs, respectively.

Based on the results summarized above, each named executive officer achieved his respective quantitative and qualitative targets under the annual incentive plan for 2011, which resulted in a payout of the target bonus amounts discussed above. In addition, the Board determined to exercise its discretion to increase Mr. Mednansky’s bonus to 200% of target (or 100% of his annual base salary) in recognition of achieving significant adjusted EBITDA growth during a period of transition with his management team. The Board also determined to exercise its discretion, at the recommendation of Mr. Mednansky, to increase each of Mr. Dritsas’ and Martens’ bonus to 112.5% of target (or 45% of their respective base salaries) in recognition of Mr. Dritsas’ successful management of food costs and Mr. Martens’ success with new store openings.

In approving the 2011 bonus amounts, our board of directors considered the pre-established target bonus levels, the Company’s performance on the applicable metrics that compose the target bonus levels for each employee and, for employees other than Mr. Mednansky, Mr. Mednansky’s recommendations regarding whether adjustments to the target bonus levels should or should not be made. The board then made its own subjective determination of each named executive officer’s individual performance and level of contribution toward achieving such targets.

The 2012 Plan that we intend to adopt in connection with this offering will replace the bonus policy described above, and will authorize the payment of cash or stock incentive bonuses to various employees of the Company and its subsidiaries, including the named executive officers. Such incentive bonuses would confer upon the participant the opportunity to earn a future payment tied to a level of achievement with respect to one or more performance criteria established for a performance period of typically not less than one year. Once the 2012 Plan is adopted, our compensation committee, or such other body administering the plan, will establish the performance criteria and level of achievement versus these criteria that will determine the amount payable under an incentive bonus. Notwithstanding the satisfaction of any award criteria, any incentive bonuses awarded under the 2012 Plan may be subject to discretionary adjustment by our compensation committee or such other body administering the plan. See “—2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan.”

Long-Term Equity Incentive Compensation

We do not currently maintain a long-term equity incentive plan. However, in connection with this offering, we intend to adopt the 2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan. See “—2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan.”

Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan.     CCH maintains the Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan under which a select group of highly compensated management employees generally employees who are at the level of district manager or above may elect to defer a portion of their annual compensation, including base pay and/or bonuses. Employees who are eligible to participate in this plan are not eligible to participate in the Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group 401(k) Plan. The benefits under the deferred compensation plan are unfunded and evidenced by an account entry credited with the amount deferred each year plus earnings. However, all contributions by the employee and matching contributions by CCH are contributable to a grantor trust, which is invested in certain insurance policies. These assets, although not required by the plan, are segregated to pay benefits to the

 

91


plan participants. In the event of CCH’s bankruptcy, these assets will be subject to the claims of CCH’s creditors. Each year, plan participants elect a percentage of pay they wish to defer for the following year. Additionally, CCH makes a matching contribution of 50% of a participant’s deferrals, up to the first 20% of a participant’s annual pay contributed to the plan. This matching contribution is also credited to a participant’s account under the plan. Matching contributions vest at a rate of 25% per year over four years. Participants may, consistent with applicable procedures, allocate the amount of deferral and Company contributions credited to their account to or between deemed investment alternatives offered by the plan for purposes of determining earnings on a participant’s account. The plan, however, has no obligation to actually invest any amounts in a participant’s account in these investment alternatives. Generally, a participant’s account balance will be distributed upon death, termination of employment, retirement or on a fixed date, subject to certain limitations. In addition, and in the sole discretion of the plan administration committee, a participant may receive a distribution of all or a portion of his or her account balance in the event of an unforeseen emergency. Each of our named executive officers, with the exception of Mr. Pennison, participated in the Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan in 2011. See “—2011 Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan.”

All Other Compensation

We provide our named executive officers with health and welfare benefits, limited perquisites and severance benefits that are intended to be part of a competitive compensation program.

Perquisites and Other Personal Benefits

Messrs. Mednansky’s and Howie’s and Ms. Ames’ February 7, 2011 employment agreements, and Mr. Pennison’s October 17, 2011 employment agreement provide for certain benefits, including Company-paid medical insurance, the use of a Company automobile or an automobile allowance not to exceed $1,000 per month, and Company-provided life insurance in the amount of $2,000,000 for Mr. Mednansky, and $1,000,000 for each of Mr. Pennison, Mr. Howie and Ms. Ames. The Company also provides a similar automobile allowance and life insurance in the amount of $50,000 for each of Mr. Dritsas and Mr. Martens.

Pursuant to his October 17, 2011 employment agreement, Mr. Pennison receives reimbursement of up to $50,000 of relocation and temporary living expenses in connection with his initial hiring and move from New Orleans, Louisiana to Southlake, Texas.

Following the completion of this offering, we expect to continue from time to time to provide limited perquisites and other personal benefits to our executives consistent with the compensation practices within our industry.

Severance and Change of Control Arrangements

During fiscal year 2011, Messrs. Mednansky, Pennison, Dritsas and Howie and Ms. Ames were eligible for severance benefits consisting of base salary continuation for a specified period under certain termination scenarios, as described in greater detail below under “—Potential Payments Upon Termination of Change of Control.” We believe these severance and change of control arrangements are standard in our industry and are intended to attract and retain qualified executives while easing the consequences in the event of an unexpected termination of employment.

On May 26, 2011, CCH entered into a Separation and Release Agreement with Mr. Howie providing for the termination of his employment as Chief Financial Officer, effective as of

 

92


May 4, 2011. See “Potential Payments Upon Termination or Change in Control.” In addition, Mr. Howie received $356,294 in exchange for the surrender and release of his Class B and Class C interests in Wagon as described below under “—Payments in Connection with Offering—LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC Class B and Class C Interests.”

Ms. Ames voluntarily terminated her employment with CCH effective July 1, 2011, and was not entitled to (and did not receive) any severance benefits.

Tax Deductibility

We have considered the potential future effects of Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code, on the compensation paid to our named executive officers. Section 162(m) places a limit of $1 million on the amount of compensation that a publicly held corporation may deduct in any one year with respect to its chief executive officer and each of the next three most highly compensated executive officers (other than its chief financial officer). In general, certain performance-based compensation approved by stockholders is not subject to this deduction limit. As we are not currently publicly-traded, we have not previously taken the deductibility limit imposed by Section 162(m) into consideration in making compensation decisions. We expect that following the consummation of this offering, we will adopt a policy that, where reasonably practicable, we will seek to qualify the variable compensation paid to our named executive officers for an exemption from the deductibility limits of Section 162(m). However, we may authorize compensation payments that do not comply with the exemptions in Section 162(m) when we believe that such payments are appropriate to attract and retain executive talent.

Summary Compensation Table

The following table sets forth information regarding compensation earned by our named executive officers and paid by CCH during the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011:

 

Name and Principal Position

   Year      Salary ($)      Bonus
($)(1)
     Non-Equity
Incentive Plan
Compensation
($)(2)
     All Other
Compensation
($)(3)
     Total ($)  

Mark S. Mednansky

     2011         400,000         200,000         200,000         80,840         880,840   

Chief Executive Officer

                 

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

     2011         35,577                 17,170         7,210         59,957   

Chief Financial Officer

                 

Thomas G. Dritsas

     2011         191,077         9,900         79,200         46,302         326,479   

Corporate Executive Chef

                 

William S. Martens

     2011         172,000         9,200         73,486         26,379         281,065   

Vice President of Development & Construction

                 

Jon W. Howie

     2011         255,462                         18,873         274,335   

Former Chief Financial Officer

                 

Edie A. Ames

     2011         150,577                         23,700         174,277   

Former Chief Operating Officer

                 

 

(1) Amount represents discretionary portion of the payout for each applicable named executive officer under the 2011 bonus plan. See “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis — Elements of Compensation — Non-Equity Incentive Compensation” above.

 

93


(2) For an explanation of non-equity incentive compensation awards, see “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Elements of Compensation—Non-Equity Incentive Compensation” above. Due to their termination effective May 4, 2011 and July 1, 2011, respectively, Mr. Howie and Ms. Ames are not entitled to a 2011 bonus.
(3) Individual breakdowns of amounts included in “All Other Compensation” are as follows:

 

Name

  Company Matching
Contributions to
Deferred
Compensation Plan

($)
    Health and  Life
Insurance
Premiums

($)
    Car Benefits
($)
    Relocation
Allowance

($)
    Total All
Other
Compensation
($)
 

Mark S. Mednansky

    69,444        11,396                      80,840   

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

           1,141        1,708        4,361        7,210   

Thomas G. Dritsas

    34,906        11,396                      46,302   

William S. Martens

    6,883        11,396        8,100               26,379   

Jon W. Howie

    7,477        11,396                      18,873   

Edie A. Ames

    14,173        3,989        5,538               23,700   

Grants of Plan-Based Awards in 2011

The following table provides information regarding grants of plan-based awards to each of our named executive officers during the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011.

 

     Estimated Future Payouts Under Non-Equity Incentive Plan
Awards(1)
 

Name

   Target ($)  

Mark S. Mednansky

     200,000   

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

     17,170   

Thomas G. Dritsas

     79,200   

William S. Martens

     73,486   

Jon W. Howie

       

Edie A. Ames

       

 

(1) These amounts reflect the 2011 target levels under the Company’s annual non-equity incentive bonus policy. The actual bonus amounts associated with these targets are disclosed in the Summary Compensation Table under the heading “Non-Equity Incentive Plan Compensation.” The annual performance bonus plan provides for one payout level. The board has discretion to increase or decrease the same based on a variety of factors. For additional information concerning these awards, please see “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Elements of Compensation—Non-Equity Incentive Compensation” above as well as the narrative description provided below.

Employee Agreements

All of our named executive officers have either an employment agreement or a letter agreement.

Messrs. Mednansky and Howie and Ms. Ames

Pursuant to February 7, 2011 employment agreements entered into between CCH and Messrs. Mednansky and Howie and Ms. Ames, Mr. Mednansky’s annual base salary is set at $400,000, Mr. Howie’s at $270,000, and Ms. Ames’ at $290,000. Under the employment agreements, these salaries are subject to review by the board of directors annually in the first quarter of each year and may be increased at the board’s discretion. In addition, pursuant to these employment agreements, each executive is entitled to participate in all bonus compensation plans, in accordance with the terms of such plans. The target level for each of these executive’s annual bonus is to be set at least 50% of his or her annual salary, but entitlement to any such bonus and the amount of any bonus actually paid to the executive is to be determined by the board in its good faith discretion. For 2011, each of these executive’s target bonus level was set at 50% of their annual base salary. Each of these executive’s employment agreement also provides for certain perquisites, including an automobile allowance of up to $1,000 per month or use of a company car, Company-paid medical and life

 

94


insurance and reimbursement of relocation costs incurred in connection with their transfer to the Company’s headquarters in Southlake, Texas. In addition, the executives are entitled to participate in the Company’s Transaction Bonus Plan, as further discussed below under “—Payments in Connection with Offering—Transaction Bonuses.”

On May 26, 2011, Mr. Howie entered into a Separation Agreement and Release with the Company, as described in greater detail below under “—Potential Payments Upon Termination of Change of Control—Separation Agreement and Release with Mr. Howie.”

Ms. Ames terminated her employment with CCH effective July 1, 2011 without good reason (as defined in Ms. Ames’ employment agreement). Ms. Ames did not enter into any separation agreement and, pursuant to her February 7, 2011 employment agreement, received no compensation in connection with her termination.

Mr. Pennison

On October 17, 2011, Mr. Pennison entered into an employment agreement to serve as its new Chief Financial Officer. Pursuant to the employment agreement, Mr. Pennison is entitled to a base salary of $250,000 and participation in the annual incentive plan described above under “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Elements of Compensation—Non-Equity Incentive Compensation,” with a potential target bonus level set at 50% of his annual base salary, subject to achievement of various performance criteria, and further subject to the board’s discretion. Pursuant to his employment agreement, Mr. Pennison is entitled to certain other benefits, including Company-paid medical insurance, Company-paid life insurance in the amount of $1,000,000, an automobile allowance not to exceed $1,000 per month and reimbursement for up to $50,000 of relocation and temporary living expenses in connection with his relocation to Southlake, Texas. In addition, Mr. Pennison is entitled to participate in the Company’s Transaction Bonus Plan, as further discussed below under “—Payments in Connection with Offering—Transaction Bonuses.”

Mr. Dritsas

Effective June 10, 2010, Mr. Dritsas and Sullivan’s of North Carolina, Inc. entered into an amended and restated employment agreement. Under this agreement, Mr. Dritsas is entitled to an annual base salary of $198,000 per year. He is also entitled to participate in all bonus compensation and stock plans which are specifically applicable to general managers. Accordingly, Mr. Dritsas participates in the Company’s annual bonus plan, described in greater detail under “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Elements of Compensation—Non-Equity Incentive Compensation” above. For 2011, Mr. Dritsas’ potential performance bonus target was set at 40% of his annual salary. Mr. Dritsas is also entitled to an automobile allowance and Company-paid life and health insurance benefits similar to those provided to Messrs. Mednansky, Pennison and Howie and Ms. Ames. Effective January 4, 2012, Mr. Dritsas and CCH entered into an employment agreement.

Mr. Martens

As of the end of fiscal year 2011, Mr. Martens was subject to the Company’s standard Non-Competition, Confidentiality, and Non-Solicitation Agreement dated April 16, 2008, but did not have any other employment agreements with us. Effective January 25, 2012, Mr. Martens and CCH entered into an employment agreement.

As of the end of fiscal year 2011, at the Company’s discretion, Mr. Martens, as a corporate-level employee participates in the Company’s annual bonus plan described in greater detail

 

95


under “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Elements of Compensation—Non-Equity Incentive Compensation” above. For 2011, Mr. Martens’ potential performance bonus target was set at 40% of his annual salary. Mr. Martens is also entitled to an automobile allowance and Company-paid life and health insurance benefits similar to those provided to Messrs. Mednansky, Pennison and Howie and Ms. Ames.

Payments in Connection with the Offering

LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC Class B and Class C Interests

Lone Star Fund provided long-term incentives to certain of our named executive officers by allowing such officers to purchase Class B interests in Wagon, the Company’s sole equityholder, and by granting equity incentive awards in the form of Class C Interests in Wagon. The Class B Interests were fully vested upon issuance and have a stated return, but do not participate in any increase in the value of our business. The Class C Interests, however, were designed to enable the executives to participate in any appreciation of our business by conditioning a portion of the vesting on the achievement of certain performance targets. The Class C Interests also vest in part based on the executive’s continued employment with the Company. Each of Messrs. Mednansky and Howie acquired Class B and Class C Interests in 2007 pursuant to subscription agreements.

Class C Interests vest annually at a rate of 7.5% over a five-year period if the holder was employed on December 31 of each year, and an additional 12.5% each year if certain performance targets with respect to a given year were achieved by December 31 of that year. Interests subject to vesting upon achievement of performance targets are forfeited and cannot vest at a later date if the applicable performance targets for the year were not achieved. The relevant performance targets for 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 and 2011 were based upon a combination of adjusted EBITDA targets, which Wagon achieved in each year. Accordingly, as of December 31, 2011, Mr. Mednansky was 100% vested in his Class C interests. As discussed below, Mr. Howie surrendered his Class B and Class C interests to Wagon in connection with his termination of employment.

Mr. Mednansky’s Class C Interests, which became fully vested on December 31, 2011, entitle him to 3.5% of Wagon’s total value in excess of amounts used to pay a 12% preferred return on Class A and Class B Interests and return all members’ unrecovered capital contributions. However, as discussed below under “—Transaction Bonuses,” if Mr. Mednansky receives a transaction bonus greater in value than his Class C Interests in connection with this offering and/or any subsequent offerings, then, pursuant to the Transaction Bonus Agreement, Mr. Mednansky’s Class C interests will not have any value or be entitled to any payment.

The terms of the subscription agreements entered into with Messrs. Mednansky and Howie allow for the repurchase of the Class B and Class C Interests upon a termination of employment. Mr. Howie terminated his employment on May 4, 2011 and, pursuant to the terms of an Equity Surrender and Release Agreement entered into between Mr. Howie and Wagon’s majority owner, LSF5 COI Holdings, LLC, or COI, Mr. Howie surrendered Class B and Class C interests on May 26, 2011 in exchange for a cash payment of $356,294.

Additionally, pursuant to a February 14, 2011 letter agreement between Wagon and Mr. Mednansky, in the event of a public offering or a secondary public offering of the Company after which Wagon’s direct or indirect ownership of the Company’s common equity is 50% or less or in the event of a sale of the Company, Mr. Mednansky may require Wagon to purchase his Class B interests in Wagon for $ 350,000 minus all distributions of available cash paid to him on any date before the transaction is consummated. This payment is conditioned upon Mr. Mednansky’s execution of a release and that he is employed by CCH on the payment date

 

96


(which may be 75 days after the relevant offering or sale is consummated). Mr. Howie was party to a similar letter agreement with Wagon, but it was terminated in connection with the termination of his employment and the repurchase of his Class B and Class C Interests.

Transaction Bonuses

Mr. Mednansky is also eligible pursuant to an amended and restated letter agreement with Wagon dated October 21, 2011 to receive a transaction bonus that would be paid by Wagon in connection with certain change of control transactions. Specifically Mr. Mednansky may receive a transaction bonus from a bonus pool in connection with this or another firm commitment underwritten public offering resulting in at least $30,000,000 of gross proceeds to the Company; a qualified secondary public offering; any sale, transfer or exchange of all or substantially all of the assets of Company; or in connection with a disposition of a majority of the equity interests currently held in the Company, provided that he is employed by CCH on the date the applicable transaction is consummated, or the Transaction Date.

Upon the occurrence of an eligible transaction, Mr. Mednansky is entitled to receive 45%, subject to a 5% increase in the Company’s sole and absolute discretion, of a total bonus pool calculated based on either the sum of the aggregate outstanding principal balance for Company borrowed money plus the total net purchase price in connection with a private sale of the Company or the sum of the aggregate outstanding principal balance for Company borrowed money plus implied aggregate common equity value of the Company based on the per share price in a qualified offering or public offering. The aggregate value of the bonus pool is determined by the ultimate value ascribed to the Company in the applicable transaction, as follows:

 

Transaction Bonus Pool Amount

Aggregate Value of Company

 

Bonus Share%

 

Bonus Pool Amount

Minimum

 

Maximum

   

Minimum

 

Maximum

Less than

$228,000,000

    0.0%   $0   $0

$228,000,000

  $260,200,000   0.5%   $1,140,000   $1,301,000

Greater than

$260,200,000

  $277,800,000   1.0%   $2,603,000   $2,778,000

Greater than

$277,800,000

  Less than $292,500,000   1.5%   $4,168,500   $4,386,000

$292,500,000

  Greater than $292,500,000     $5,850,000 + 5% of any Aggregate Value over $292,500,000

In the case of a qualified public offering, the value of the bonus pool will be reduced pro rata to reflect Wagon’s outstanding direct or indirect ownership interest in the Company immediately following such offering. For example, if Wagon’s direct or indirect ownership percentage of the Company is reduced by only 30% as a result of this offering, then only 30% of the implied bonus pool will be available for payment. Eligible employees retain the right to be paid subsequent bonuses if and when any secondary offerings are consummated using the same methodology.

Under the October 21, 2011 letter agreement, if Mr. Mednansky is entitled to a bonus payment in connection with a qualified public offering and Wagon or its successors maintains any direct or indirect ownership interest in the Company following the offering, as is expected with this offering, then Mr. Mednansky will be eligible for additional, future transaction bonus

 

97


payments from Wagon in the event of subsequent qualified secondary public offerings until Wagon no longer has any direct or indirect ownership interest in the Company. In order to receive these subsequent payments, Mr. Mednansky must (i) remain employed with CCH or any successor or acquirer of the Company’s business; (ii) not breach or violate the terms of his employment agreement or any other obligation to the Company; (iii) execute and deliver to the Company a release and award termination instrument; and (iv) have been entitled to transaction bonuses with respect to prior secondary offerings, if any.

In addition, if Mr. Mednansky remains actively employed by CCH at all times for 21 months after the Transaction Date of an initial qualified offering, does not breach his employment agreement or any other obligation to the Company during this 21-month period and does not terminate his employment for cause (as defined in Mr. Mednansky’s employment agreement) or voluntarily resign where cause exists, he will not forfeit his right to any transaction bonus in connection with a qualified secondary offering solely because he is not actively employed by CCH on the Transaction Date of such secondary offering.

Furthermore, if at any time Wagon’s direct or indirect interest in the Company is greater than zero but less than 50%, Wagon will have the right to pay Mr. Mednansky a bonus in lieu of the secondary offering transaction bonuses described above equal to the product of (i) the percentage interest in the Company held directly or indirectly by Wagon on the date that notice is provided to Mr. Mednansky of Wagon’s decision to exercise this right multiplied by (ii) the amount of the transaction bonus Mr. Mednansky would receive if the Company consummated a secondary public offering at a per share price of 105% of the fair market value of one share of the Company’s common stock on the date of such notice. Such bonus would be payable, at Wagon’s election, in any combination of cash and/or Company stock (valued as of the date of the grant) within 75 days of the notice. No bonus is payable with respect to any private sale that occurs after a qualifying public offering.

Furthermore, pursuant to the October 21, 2011 letter agreement, any transaction bonus payable to Mr. Mednansky by Wagon will be subject to additional conditions. If the transaction is a private sale, Mr. Mednansky is entitled to be paid in the same form of consideration that the ownership of the Company receives in connection with the sale. In addition, if any portion of the consideration payable to the ownership in a private sale is deferred or contingent, then Mr. Mednansky’s bonus will also be deferred and/or subject to the same contingency.

Pursuant to the terms of the October 21, 2011 letter agreement, the value of Mr. Mednansky’s Class C Interests in Wagon will be reduced (but not below $0) by any transaction bonus payable to Mr. Mednansky under the October 21, 2011 letter agreement, Thus, Mr. Mednansky will be paid only the greater of the transaction bonus set forth above or the value of his Class C interests. In accordance with the terms of the October 21, 2011 letter agreement, it is expected that Mr. Mednansky will receive a transaction bonus of $         in connection with this offering, which is greater than the value of his Class C interests, and thus the Class C Interests will not have any value, and upon the eventual liquidation and distribution of Wagon, will be cancelled without any payment therefor. Any transaction bonus is to be paid by Wagon within 75 days after the Transaction Date and is subject to Mr. Mednansky’s execution of a general release of the Company and its affiliates. If Mr. Mednansky’s employment is terminated within the 180-day period ending on the Transaction Date due to disability, without cause, or by Mr. Mednansky for good reason (as defined in Mr. Mednansky’s employment agreement), then Mr. Mednansky will be treated as actively employed as of the Transaction Date, and will be entitled to a bonus payment from Wagon. Mr. Mednansky is not however entitled to any bonus if the applicable transaction is a sale and Mr. Mednansky is terminated for cause or quits without good reason prior to the payment of the bonus.

 

98


Mr. Pennison is party to a similar transaction bonus agreement with Wagon dated as of October 17, 2011. Pursuant to this agreement, Mr. Pennison is entitled to 20%, subject to a 5% increase in the Company’s sole and absolute discretion, of the total bonus pool described above. Mr. Pennison’s transaction bonus agreement is otherwise identical to Mr. Mednansky’s agreement in all material respects. Pursuant to the terms of the October 17, 2011 letter agreement, it is expected that Mr. Pennison will receive a transaction bonus of $             in connection with this offering.

Mr. Howie and Ms. Ames were each a party to a similar transaction bonus letter agreement with Wagon. However, pursuant to the terms of these agreements, Mr. Howie and Ms. Ames were required to be employed by CCH within 180 days of the date that any of the above-described transactions were consummated, if terminated without cause or for good reason, or to be employed as of such date, if terminated without good reason. Mr. Howie’s employment was terminated without cause on May 4, 2011, and Ms. Ames voluntarily terminated her employment on July 1, 2011 without good reason, and therefore neither Mr. Howie nor Ms. Ames is eligible for a transaction bonus.

Outstanding Equity Awards at 2011 Year-End

The following table sets forth information concerning outstanding equity awards for each of our named executive officers as of December 27, 2011.

 

    Stock Awards  

Name

  Number of Shares
or Units of Stock
That Have Not
Vested (#)
    Market Value of
Shares or Units
of Stock That
Have Not
Vested ($)
    Equity Incentive Plan
Awards: Number of
Unearned Shares,
Units or Other
Rights That Have
Not Vested(#)
    Equity Incentive Plan
Awards: Market or
Payout Value of
Unearned Shares,
Units or Other
Rights That Have
Not Vested($)(1)
 

Mark S. Mednansky

    (1     (2     (1 )       (2 )  

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

                           

Thomas G. Dritsas

                           

William S. Martens

                           

Jon W. Howie

                           

Edie A. Ames

                           

 

(1) Mr. Mednansky’s unvested Class C Interests in Wagon represent 0.70% of Wagon’s total value in excess of amounts used to pay a 12% preferred return on Class A and Class B Interests and return all members’ unrecovered capital contributions.
(2) The market value of the unvested Class C Interests in Wagon is based upon             .

Option Exercises and Stock Vested

The following table sets forth information for each of our named executive officers concerning stock awards vested during the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011.

 

    Stock Awards

Name

  Number of Shares Acquired on
Vesting (#)
  Value Realized on Vesting ($)(1)

Mark S. Mednansky

  (2)  

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

   

Thomas G. Dritsas

   

William S. Martens

   

Jon W. Howie

   

Edie A. Ames

   

 

99


 

(1) The market value of the vested Class C Interests in Wagon as of December 27, 2011 is based upon             .
(2) Consists of Class C Interests in Wagon, which vested on December 31, 2010. Such Class C Interests represent 0.70% of Wagon’s total value in excess of amounts used to pay a 12% preferred return on Class A and Class B Interests and return all members’ unrecovered capital contributions.

2011 Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan

The following table sets forth the deferred compensation activity for each named executive officer during the fiscal year ended December 27, 2011.

 

Name

  Executive
Contributions
in Last FY
($)(1)
    Registrant
Contributions in
Last FY ($)(2)
    Aggregate
Earnings in
Last FY ($)
    Aggregate
Withdrawals/
Distributions ($)
    Aggregate Balance
at Last FYE ($)
 

Mark S. Mednansky

    138,887        69,444        7,747               1,525,276   

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

                                  

Thomas G. Dritsas

    69,812        34,906        (54,284            556,196   

William S. Martens

    13,767        6,883        57               64,986   

Jon W. Howie

    14,954        7,477        (68,571     707,081          

Edie A. Ames

    28,346        14,173        (180     28,226          

 

(1) This amount is also reported in the “Salary” or “Non-Equity Incentive Plan Compensation” columns of the Summary Compensation Table.
(2) This amount is also reported in the “All Other Compensation” column of the Summary Compensation Table. See footnote 2 to the Summary Compensation Table.

Potential Payments Upon Termination or Change in Control

The information below describes certain compensation and benefits to which our named executive officers are entitled in the event their employment is terminated under certain circumstances. As explained below and summarized in the table that follows this section, each of our named executive officers, with the exception of Mr. Martens, would have been entitled to such compensation and benefits assuming a termination of employment had occurred on December 27, 2011.

Mr. Mednansky

On February 7, 2011, Mr. Mednansky entered into an amended and restated employment agreement that provides for enhanced benefits in the event that he is terminated without cause, resigns for good reason, or is terminated as a result of disability on or after such date.

Under the February 7, 2011 agreement, upon a termination without cause or a resignation for good reason, not as a result of death or disability and that occurs prior to a change in control, Mr. Mednansky is entitled to continue to receive his base monthly salary for a period of 12 months and payment of his medical premiums for 12 months for the medical coverage that was in effect under CCH’s benefit plans immediately prior to such termination or resignation, provided that he receives COBRA benefits during this period. Upon a termination without cause or a resignation for good reason that occurs within 180 days following a change in control, Mr. Mednansky will be entitled to continue to receive his base monthly salary for a period of 18 months and payment of his medical premiums for 18 months for the medical coverage that was in effect under CCH’s benefit plans immediately prior to such termination or resignation, provided that he receives COBRA benefits during this period. All severance benefits payable upon a termination without cause or a resignation for good reason are conditioned upon Mr. Mednansky’s execution of a separation agreement and general release of claims in favor of CCH and its affiliates.

 

100


Upon termination due to disability, Mr. Mednansky is entitled to receive 50% of his annual salary in addition to any disability insurance benefits received under CCH’s employee benefit plans, paid semi-monthly, in 12 equal installments.

CCH’s obligation to provide any of the severance benefits payable upon a termination without cause, a resignation for good reason, or a termination due to disability will cease immediately in the event of Mr. Mednansky’s violation of the confidentiality, non-compete, or non-solicitation covenants contained in his employment agreement. In addition, Mr. Mednansky must repay CCH any such severance benefits received by him during the period of non-compliance with such confidentiality, non-compete and non-solicitation covenants, as determined by CCH in good faith.

Upon termination for any other reason, Mr. Mednansky is not entitled to any severance or other termination benefits, but only to payment of his accrued compensation through the date of termination.

For the purposes of Mr. Mednansky’s 2011 employment agreement:

 

   

“Cause” is defined as (i) a failure by Mr. Mednansky to substantially perform his material duties under his employment agreement or to devote his full time and effort to his position with CCH (other than as a result of death, injury, illness, or disability), which, if curable, is not cured within 30 days after receipt of written notice of such failure; (ii) failure by Mr. Mednansky to comply materially with all policies of CCH, which, if curable, is not cured within 30 days after receipt of written notice of such failure; (iii) commission by Mr. Mednansky of an illegal act or an act not within the ordinary course of his responsibilities that exposes CCH to a significant level of undue liability (explicitly excluding a use by the Company of Mr. Mednansky’s liquor license); (iv) Mr. Mednansky’s conviction or plea of guilty or nolo contendre to any felony; or (v) breach of the confidentiality or non-compete covenants contained in Mr. Mednansky’s employment agreement.

 

   

“Change in control” is defined as either (i) the closing of a firm commitment underwritten public offering of common equity securities for gross cash proceeds to the issuer of at least $30,000,000, where the shares of the Company or CCH are listed on a national securities exchange or are quoted on NASDAQ; or (ii) the closing of a sale or transfer of all or substantially all of the assets of CCH in one or a series of transactions, the sale, exchange, or other disposition of a majority of the equity interests in the Company or CCH, or any transaction having similar effect (including, without limitation, a merger or consolidation), excluding certain sales or transfers within the Wagon’s controlled group. This offering is expected to qualify as a change in control under Mr. Mednansky’s employment agreement.

 

   

“Good reason” is defined as, without his consent, the relocation of his place of employment to a location more than 50 miles from his current location, a reduction in his base salary (other than a general cost reduction not exceeding 10%, that affects all salaried employees of CCH proportionally), a material breach by CCH of the employment agreement, or a material diminution in his title and/or duties, responsibilities or authority. Prior to any of the above qualifying as “good reason,” Mr. Mednansky must provide CCH with notice and a 30-day period to cure any of the above.

Mr. Mednansky currently holds no Company equity, but the Company anticipates granting him stock options at the time of this offering with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price. These awards may contain change of control accelerated vesting provisions.

 

101


Mr. Pennison

Pursuant to his employment agreement with us, Mr. Pennison is entitled to similar severance and change in control benefits as those described above with respect to Mr. Mednansky’s employment agreement, except that if Mr. Pennison is terminated without cause or resigns for good reason at any time before October 18, 2012 (but prior to a change in control), then Mr. Pennison is entitled to continue to receive his base monthly salary for a period of six months and payment of his medical premiums for six months for the medical coverage that was in effect under CCH’s benefit plans immediately prior to such termination or resignation, provided that he receives COBRA benefits during this period.

Mr. Dritsas

Pursuant to Mr. Dritsas’ Amended and Restated Employment Agreement in effect on December 27, 2011, he is entitled to certain payments if he is terminated without cause. Upon a termination without cause, not as a result of resignation, death or disability, and subject to his execution of a general release, Mr. Dritsas is entitled to continue to receive his base salary for a period of 12 months from the date of termination and to continued health benefits as he had enrolled and participated in prior to termination for a period of 12 months. Mr. Dritsas is not entitled to any severance or benefits other than the payment of accrued compensation through the date of termination if he is terminated for cause, due to death or disability, or he resigns.

“Cause” is defined in Mr. Dritsas’ amended and restated employment agreement dated June 10, 2011 as (i) a material breach by Mr. Dritsas of his employment obligations; (ii) the commission of an act of fraud, embezzlement, misappropriation, willful misconduct or breach of fiduciary duty against Sullivan’s of North Carolina, Inc. or other conduct potentially harmful to Sullivan’s of North Carolina, Inc.’s best interests; (iii) a material breach of confidentiality, non-disclosure, non-compete, or non-solicitation provisions contained in his employment agreement; (iv) Mr. Dritsas’ conviction, plea of guilty, no contest, or nolo contendre, deferred adjudication, or unadjudicated probation for any felony or any crime involving moral turpitude; (v) the failure of Mr. Dritsas to carry out or comply with, in any material respect, any lawful order of Sullivan’s of North Carolina, Inc.; or (vi) Mr. Dritsas’ unlawful use (including being under the influence) or possession of illegal drugs.

Mr. Martens

Mr. Martens was not entitled to any severance or other payments upon termination or a change of control event as of December 27, 2011.

Mr. Howie

On February 7, 2011, Mr. Howie entered into an amended and restated employment agreement with terms substantially similar to those described above with respect to Mr. Mednansky’s 2011 employment agreement. On May 4, 2011, Mr. Howie was terminated without cause triggering certain benefits under this agreement. On May 26, 2011, Mr. Howie entered into a Separation and Release Agreement providing for the termination of his employment as Chief Financial Officer, effective as of May 4, 2011. Pursuant to the agreement, CCH (i) paid Mr. Howie a severance payment of $85,000; (ii) agreed to continue paying Mr. Howie’s monthly salary of $22,500 for a period of 12 months, commencing on the first regular payroll date following June 18, 2011; and (iii) agreed to pay Mr. Howie’s medical premiums for 12 months, provided that Mr. Howie elected COBRA coverage. In addition to these benefits, Mr. Howie received $356,294 in exchange for the surrender and release of his Class B and Class C interests in Wagon as described above under “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Payments in Connection with Offering—LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC Class B and Class C Interests.”

 

102


Ms. Ames

On February 7, 2011, Ms. Ames entered into an amended and restated employment agreement with terms substantially similar to those described above with respect to Mr. Mednansky’s 2011 employment agreement. Ms. Ames voluntarily resigned effective July 1, 2011 without good reason, and consequently was not entitled to, and did not receive, any severance payments.

The table below sets forth the estimated value of the potential payments to each of our named executive officers, assuming the executive’s employment had terminated on December 27, 2011 under an employment agreement or a letter agreement in effect at that time, except in the case of Mr. Howie and Ms. Ames, whose employment terminated on May 4, 2011 and July 1, 2011, respectively for whom the actual payments, if any, are detailed below.

 

Name

  Potential Payments and
Benefits Upon  Termination
Without Cause or for Good
Reason  not  Within 180
days of a CIC
    Potential Payments and
Benefits Upon Termination
Without Cause or for Good
Reason Within 180

Days of a CIC
    Potential Payments
Upon Termination
Due to Disability(3)
 
    Cash
Compensation(2)
    Company-paid
COBRA
Premiums
    Cash
Compensation
    Company-paid
COBRA
       

Mark S. Mednansky

  $ 400,000      $ 11,396      $ 600,000      $ 22,792      $ 200,000   

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.(4)

  $ 250,000      $ 11,396      $ 375,000      $ 17,094      $ 125,000   

Thomas G. Dritsas(5)

  $ 198,000      $ 11,396      $ 191,077      $ 11,396        0   

William S. Martens

    0        0        0        0        0   

Jon W. Howie(6)

  $ 355,000      $ 11,396      $ 355,000      $ 11,396        0   

Edie A. Ames(7)

    0        0        0        0        0   

 

(1) Payments include those that would have been made to Mr. Mednansky in the event of non-renewal of his employment agreement as well.
(2) Amount payable over 12-month period following termination as a continuation of base salary for 12 months.
(3) Amount payable semi-monthly in 12 equal installments.
(4) Cash compensation and Company premiums will be reduced by 50% if termination is within one year of entering into employment agreement (and not in context of a change in control).
(5) Mr. Dritsas is only entitled to severance upon an involuntary termination not for Cause. He is not entitled to any severance for a Good Reason resignation.
(6) Mr. Howie terminated his employment on May 4, 2011.
(7) Ms. Ames terminated her employment on July 1, 2011.

2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan

Prior to completion of this offering, we will adopt the 2012 Plan. The purpose of the 2012 Plan is to advance the interests of the Company and its affiliates by encouraging the efforts of directors, officers, employees, and other service providers, by incentivizing such individuals to continue working toward and contributing to the progress and success of the Company, and to align their interest with the interests of the Company’s stockholders. The 2012 Plan allows for the grant of stock options, both incentive stock options and “non-qualified” stock options; stock appreciation rights, or SARs, alone or in conjunction with other awards; shares of restricted stock and restricted stock units, or RSUs; and incentive bonuses, which may be paid in cash or stock or a combination thereof.

The following description of the 2012 Plan is not intended to be complete and is qualified in its entirety by the complete text of the 2012 Plan, which has been filed as an exhibit to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part. Stockholders are urged to read the 2012 Plan in its entirety. Any capitalized terms which are used in this summary description but not defined here or elsewhere in this registration statement have the meanings assigned to them in the 2012 Plan.

 

103


Administration.     The 2012 Plan is administered by a plan Administrator, which will be the Compensation Committee of the board of directors, or in the absence of a Compensation Committee, the board of directors itself. The Administrator has broad authority, subject to the provisions of the 2012 Plan, to administer and interpret the 2012 Plan. All decisions and actions of the Administrator are final.

Stock Subject to 2012 Plan.     The maximum number of shares that may be issued under the 2012 Plan is equal to            , subject to certain adjustments in the event of a change in the Company’s capitalization. Shares of common stock issued under the 2012 Plan may be either authorized and unissued shares or previously issued shares acquired by the Company. On termination or expiration of an unexercised option, SAR or other stock-based award under the 2012 Plan, in whole or in part, the number of shares of common stock subject to such award will again become available for grant under the 2012 Plan. Once the 2012 Plan becomes subject to Section 162(m) (generally three years after the IPO), no single participant may be granted awards under the 2012 Plan covering more than             shares of common stock in any fiscal year. The maximum number of shares of common stock that may be issued pursuant to stock options intended to be incentive stock options is             shares. Once the 2012 Plan becomes subject to Section 162(m) (generally three years after the IPO), the maximum amount payable to any one employee in any performance period pursuant to that portion of an incentive bonus that is intended to satisfy the requirements for “performance based compensation” under Section 162(m) is $10,000,000.

Stock Options.     All stock options granted under the 2012 Plan will be evidenced by a written agreement between the Company and the participant, which provides, among other things, whether the option is intended to be an agreement for an incentive stock option or a non-qualified stock option, the number of shares subject to the option, the exercise price, exercisability (or vesting), the term of the option, which may not exceed 10 years, and other terms and conditions. Subject to the express provisions of the 2012 Plan, options generally may be exercised over such period, in installments or otherwise, as the Administrator may determine. The exercise price for any stock option granted may not generally be less than the fair market value of the common stock subject to that option on the grant date. The exercise price may be paid in shares, cash or a combination thereof, as determined by the Administrator, including an irrevocable commitment by a broker to pay over such amount from a sale of the shares issuable under an option, the delivery of previously owned shares and withholding of shares deliverable upon exercise. Other than in connection with a change in the Company’s capitalization, at any time when the exercise price of an option is above the fair market value of a share, the Company will not, without stockholder approval, (i) reduce the exercise price of such option, (ii) exchange such option for cash, another award or a new option or stock appreciation right with a lower exercise or base price or (iii) otherwise reprice such option.

Stock Appreciation Rights.     Stock Appreciation Rights may be granted alone or in conjunction with all or part of a stock option. Upon exercising a SAR, the participant is entitled to receive the amount by which the fair market value of the common stock at the time of exercise exceeds the strike price of the SAR. This amount is payable in common stock, cash, or a combination of common stock and cash, at the Administrator’s discretion.

Restricted Stock and RSUs.     The Committee may award restricted common stock and RSUs. Restricted stock awards consist of shares of stock that are transferred to the participant subject to restrictions that may result in forfeiture if specified conditions are not satisfied. RSUs result in the transfer of shares of cash or stock to the participant only after specified conditions are satisfied. The Committee will determine the restrictions and conditions applicable to each award of restricted stock or RSUs, which may include performance vesting conditions.

 

104


Incentive Bonuses .    Each incentive bonus will confer upon the participant the opportunity to earn a future payment tied to the level of achievement with respect to one or more performance criteria established for a performance period of not less than one year. The Administrator will establish the performance criteria and level of achievement versus these criteria that will determine the threshold, target and maximum amount payable under an incentive bonus, which criteria may be based on financial performance and/or personal performance evaluations. Payment of the amount due under an incentive bonus may be made in cash or shares, as determined by the Administrator.

Performance Criteria.     The Administrator may specify certain performance criteria which must be satisfied before stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock, RSUs, and incentive bonuses will be granted or will vest. The performance goals may vary from participant to participant, group to group, and period to period.

Transferability.     Awards generally may not be sold, transferred, pledged, assigned, or otherwise alienated or hypothecated by a participant other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution, and each option or stock appreciation right may be exercisable only by the participant during his or her lifetime.

Amendment and Termination.     The board of directors has the right to amend, alter, suspend or terminate the 2012 Plan at any time, provided that no material amendment may be made without stockholder approval, and no other amendment or alteration, or any suspension, discontinuation or termination will be made without stockholder approval if the approval is required by applicable law, regulatory requirement or stock exchange or accounting rules, or if the board of directors deems it necessary or desirable to qualify for or comply with any tax, applicable law, stock exchange, accounting or regulatory requirement. In addition, no such amendment, alteration, suspension, discontinuation or termination can be made, except as required by applicable law or stock exchange or accounting rules, without the consent of a participant if that action would impair the participant’s rights under any award. The 2012 Plan will be adopted by the board and the Company’s shareholders in connection with this offering and will automatically terminate, unless earlier terminated by the Company’s board of directors, 10 years after approval by the board of directors.

 

105


PRINCIPAL AND SELLING STOCKHOLDERS

The following table presents information concerning the beneficial ownership of the shares of our common stock as of                     , 2012 by (1) each person known to us to beneficially own more than 5% of the outstanding shares of our common stock, (2) each selling stockholder, (3) each of our directors, director nominees and named executive officers and (4) all of our directors and executive officers as a group, each as of the date of this prospectus. The table also contains information about beneficial ownership, as adjusted, to reflect the sale of common stock in this offering assuming:

 

   

            shares of common stock outstanding as of                     , 2012 and             shares outstanding immediately following the completion of this offering; and

 

   

no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option.

Beneficial ownership is determined under the rules of the SEC and generally includes voting or investment power over securities. Except in cases where community property laws apply or as indicated in the footnotes to this table, we believe that each stockholder identified in the table possesses sole voting and investment power over all shares of common stock shown as beneficially owned by the stockholder. Shares of common stock subject to options and warrants that are exercisable or exercisable within 60 days of                     , 2012 are considered outstanding and beneficially owned by the person holding the options for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of that person but are not treated as outstanding for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of any other person. Unless indicated below, the address of each individual listed below is c/o Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC, 930 S. Kimball Ave., Suite 100, Southlake, TX 76092.

The selling stockholder may be deemed an underwriter in connection with this offering.

 

    Shares Beneficially Owned
Prior to this Offering
  Number
of Shares
of Being
Sold in
this
Offering
  Shares Beneficially
Owned After this
Offering Assuming
No Exercise of Over-
Allotment Option
  Shares Beneficially
Owned After this
Offering Assuming
Full Exercise of Over-
Allotment Option

Name of Beneficial Owner

  Shares of
Common
Stock
  Percentage of
Total Outstanding
Common Stock
(%)
    Shares of
Common
Stock
  Percentage of
Total Outstanding
Common  Stock

(%)
  Shares of
Common
Stock
  Percentage of
Total Outstanding
Common Stock
(%)

5% Stockholders

             

LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC(1)

             

Named Executive Officers

             

Mark S. Mednansky

             

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

             

Jon W. Howie(2)

             

Thomas G. Dritsas

             

William S. Martens

             

Edie A. Ames(3)

             

Directors and Director Nominees

             

Norman J. Abdallah

             

David B. Barr

             

Jodi L. Cason

             

Richard L. Davis

             

Melissa S. Hubbell

             

John R. Kinzer

             

Jennifer R. Lamprecht

             

Samuel D. Loughlin

             

All executive officers and directors as a group
(12 persons)

             

 

* Represents less than 1%.

 

106


(1) LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC directly owns            shares of common stock. LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company is controlled by Lone Star Fund V (U.S.) L.P., a Delaware limited partnership, which is controlled by its general partner, Lone Star Partners V, L.P., a Bermuda limited partnership, which is controlled by Lone Star Management Co. V, Ltd., a Bermuda exempted limited company, which is controlled by its sole owner John P. Grayken. The address for all of these persons, other than Lone Star Partners V, L.P. and Lone Star Management Co. V, Ltd., is 2711 North Haskell Avenue, Suite 1700, Dallas, Texas 75204. The address for Lone Star Partners V, L.P. and Lone Star Management Co. V, Ltd. is Washington Mall, Suite 304, Third Floor,

7 Reid Street, Hamilton HM11, Bermuda.

(2) Mr. Howie’s employment with the Company terminated effective May 4, 2011.
(3) Ms. Ames’ employment with the Company terminated effective July 1, 2011.

 

107


CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Relationships with the Casual Dining Companies

In the Acquisition, Lone Star Fund acquired not only the Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s concepts, but also the Texas Land & Cattle and Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon concepts. Lone Star Fund spun-off the subsidiaries that operated the Texas Land & Cattle and Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon concepts as part of the restructuring. These entities, which along with their affiliate companies are referred to in this prospectus as the Casual Dining Companies, are wholly-owned by Lone Star Fund and are therefore considered related parties of us. We do not have any ownership interest in them and they do not have any ownership interest in us.

Prior Shared Services Agreement

From December 13, 2006 to December 28, 2010, we were provided with certain accounting, administrative and management services by the Shared Services Provider, one of the Casual Dining Companies, under the Shared Services Agreement. In exchange for these services, we were charged an accounting fee of $1,800 per restaurant per four-week accounting period, except for the New York City Del Frisco’s, which was charged $5,400 per four-week accounting period, plus a management fee equal to 19.5% of certain agreed upon expenses, as provided for in the Shared Services Agreement, which totaled $1.2 million, $1.3 million and $0.3 million in 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. Effective January 1, 2011, InfoSync Services, LLC, a leading business process outsourcing provider focused exclusively on the restaurant industry, began providing these services to us.

Note Payable to Casual Dining Company

In July 2007, we converted all outstanding advances payable to one of the Casual Dining Companies into a $42.2 million note bearing interest at an annual rate of 4.65%. We made no payments on this note until the note was repaid in full in November 2010.

Lease Guarantees and Reimbursement Agreement

Prior to the acquisition of Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc. by Lone Star Fund, Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon guaranteed certain leases entered into by various operating subsidiaries of Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, including certain of the Casual Dining Companies. We continue to be a guarantor for five of these leases, which expire at various times through 2016. These guarantees would require payment by us only in an event of default by the Casual Dining Company tenant if it failed to make the required lease payments or perform other obligations under a lease. At March 20, 2012, the maximum potential amount of future lease payments we could be required to make as a result of the guarantees was $2.4 million.

Relationships with Lone Star Fund and its Affiliates

General

Upon completion of this offering, Lone Star Fund will own     % of our outstanding common stock (or     % if the underwriters’ over-allotment option is exercised in full).

For as long as Lone Star Fund and its affiliates continue to beneficially own shares of common stock representing more than a majority of the voting power of our common stock, they will be able to direct the election of all of the members of our board of directors and exercise a controlling influence over our business and affairs, including any determinations with respect to mergers or other business combinations, the acquisition or disposition of assets, the

 

108


incurrence of indebtedness, the issuance of any additional common stock or other equity securities, the repurchase or redemption of common stock and the payment of dividends. Similarly, Lone Star Fund will have the power to determine matters submitted to a vote of our stockholders without the consent of our other stockholders, will have the power to prevent a change in our control and could take other actions that might be favorable to them.

Lone Star Fund has advised us that it currently intends to continue to hold all of the common stock beneficially owned by it following this offering. However, Lone Star Fund is not subject to any contractual obligations to retain its controlling interest, except that it has agreed, subject to certain exceptions, not to sell or otherwise dispose of any shares of common stock for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus without the prior written consent of the underwriters. Except for this brief period, there can be no assurance as to the period of time during which Lone Star Fund will maintain its beneficial ownership of our common stock following this offering. Following this brief period, Lone Star Fund will have rights to cause us to register its shares as described under “—Registration Rights Agreement” below.

Termination of Asset Advisory Agreement

In connection with Lone Star Fund’s acquisition of Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc., we entered into arrangements with an affiliate of Lone Star Fund requiring us to reimburse the affiliate for the costs of certain services it provides us. These services include financial analysis and other financial services, real estate management, legal services and other services. In 2009, 2010, 2011 and the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, we paid this affiliate of Lone Star Fund approximately $1.6 million, $2.1 million, $3.1 million and $0.7 million, respectively, for these services. We have reimbursed this Lone Star Fund affiliate directly for these services.

Upon the consummation of this offering these arrangements to reimburse the affiliate of Lone Star Fund directly for these services will be terminated in exchange for a one-time termination payment of $3.0 million. See “Use of Proceeds.” As a result, concurrent with this offering we will enter into a transition services agreement with affiliates of Lone Star Fund pursuant to which we will be provided certain insurance management, legal and benefits administration services at a cost of $200, $500, and $200 per hour, respectively, on an actual hours incurred basis.

Registration Rights Agreement

Prior to the consummation of this offering, we will enter into a registration rights agreement with Lone Star Fund. The terms of the registration rights agreement will include provisions for demand registration rights and piggyback registration rights in favor of Lone Star Fund. The registration rights agreement will not provide for the payment of any consideration by us to Lone Star Fund if a registration statement for the resale of shares of common stock held by Lone Star Fund is not declared effective or if the effectiveness is not maintained. Immediately following consummation of this offering,             shares of our common stock will be entitled to these registration rights. Shares registered with the SEC pursuant to these registrations rights will be eligible for sale in the public markets, subject to the lock-up agreements described in “Underwriting.” See “Shares Eligible for Future Sale—Registration Rights Agreement.”

Director Indemnification Agreements

Our bylaws to be effective following this offering permit us to indemnify our directors to the fullest extent permitted by law, subject to limited exceptions. Prior to the consummation of this offering, we will enter into indemnification agreements with each of our directors that provide, in general, that we will indemnify them to the fullest extent permitted by law in connection with their service to us or on our behalf.

 

109


Review and Approval of Related Party Transactions

Following this offering, we will implement a written policy pursuant to which our board of directors will review and approve transactions with our directors, officers and holders of more than 5% of our voting securities and their affiliates (each, a related party). Prior to approving any transaction with a related party, our board of directors will consider the material facts as to the related party’s relationship with the company or interest in the transaction. Following this offering, related party transactions will not be approved unless the nominating and corporate governance committee has approved of the transaction. We did not have a formal review and approval policy for related party transactions at the time of any transaction described in this “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions” section.

 

110


DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

The following is a description of the material provisions of our capital stock, as well as other material terms of our certificate of incorporation and bylaws, which we will adopt prior to the consummation of this offering, as they will be in effect as of the consummation of this offering. Copies of the forms of our certificate of incorporation and bylaws to be adopted have been filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part.

General

Upon consummation of this offering, our authorized capital stock will consist of              shares of common stock, no par value, and             shares of preferred stock, no par value.

Common Stock

All outstanding shares of common stock are validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable, and the shares of common stock that will be issued on completion of this offering will be validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable.

The holders of our common stock are entitled to one vote per share on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders and our certificate of incorporation will not provide for cumulative voting in the election of directors. Subject to preferences that may be applicable to any outstanding series of preferred stock, the holders of our common stock will receive ratably any dividends declared by our board of directors out of funds legally available for the payment of dividends. In the event of our liquidation, dissolution or winding-up, the holders of our common stock are entitled to share ratably in all assets remaining after payment of or provision for any liabilities, subject to prior distribution rights of preferred stock, if any, then outstanding.

Preferred Stock

Our certificate of incorporation will provide that our board of directors has the authority, without further action by the stockholders, to issue up to             shares of preferred stock. Our board of directors will be able to issue preferred stock in one or more series and determine the rights, preferences, privileges, qualifications and restrictions granted to or imposed upon our preferred stock, including dividend rights, conversion rights, voting rights, rights and terms of redemption, liquidation preferences and sinking fund terms, any or all of which may be greater than the rights of our common stock. Issuances of preferred stock could adversely affect the voting power of holders of our common stock and reduce the likelihood that holders of our common stock will receive dividend payments and payments upon liquidation. Any issuance of preferred stock also could have the effect of decreasing the market price of our common stock and could delay, deter or prevent a change in control of our company. Our board of directors does not presently have any plans to issue shares of preferred stock.

Limitations on Directors’ Liability

Our governing documents will limit the liability of, and provide for us to indemnify, our directors to the fullest extent permitted by the DGCL. The DGCL permits a corporation to limit or eliminate a director’s personal liability to the corporation or the holders of its capital stock for breach of fiduciary duty. This limitation is generally unavailable for acts or omissions by a director which (a) were in bad faith, (b) were the result of intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (c) the director derived an improper personal benefit from (such as a financial profit or other advantage to which the director was not legally entitled) or (d) breached the director’s duty of loyalty. The DGCL also prohibits limitations on director liability under Section 174 of the DGCL, which relates to certain unlawful dividend declarations and stock

 

111


repurchases. The limitation of liability and indemnification provisions in our certificate of incorporation and bylaws to be adopted may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against directors for breach of their fiduciary duty. These provisions may also have the effect of reducing the likelihood of derivative litigation against directors and officers, even though such an action, if successful, might otherwise benefit us and our stockholders. In addition, your investment may be adversely affected to the extent we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and officers pursuant to these indemnification provisions.

We will obtain insurance that insures our directors and officers against certain losses and which insures us against our obligations to indemnify the directors and officers, and we intend to obtain greater coverage. We also intend to enter into indemnification agreements with our directors and executive officers.

Forum Selection Clause

Unless we consent in writing to the selection of an alternative forum, the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware will be the sole and exclusive forum for (i) any derivative action or proceeding brought on our behalf, (ii) any action asserting a claim of breach of a fiduciary duty owed by any of our directors, officers, employees or agents or our stockholders, (iii) any action asserting a claim arising pursuant to any provision of the DGCL or (iv) any action asserting a claim governed by the internal affairs doctrine, in each such case subject to said Court of Chancery having personal jurisdiction over the indispensable parties named as defendants therein. Any person or entity purchasing or otherwise acquiring any interest in shares of our capital stock of the corporation will be deemed to have notice of and consented to the forum selection clause.

Provisions of Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws to be Adopted and Delaware Law That May Have an Anti-Takeover Effect

Provisions of the DGCL and our certificate of incorporation and bylaws to be adopted prior to the completion of this offering could make it more difficult to acquire us by means of a tender offer, a proxy contest or otherwise, or to remove incumbent officers and directors. These provisions, summarized below, are expected to discourage types of coercive takeover practices and inadequate takeover bids and to encourage persons seeking to acquire control of us to first negotiate with us. We believe that the benefits of increased protection of our potential ability to negotiate with the proponent of an unfriendly or unsolicited proposal to acquire or restructure us outweigh the disadvantages of discouraging takeover or acquisition proposals because, among other things, negotiation of these proposals could result in an improvement of their terms.

Delaware Anti-Takeover Statute

We are subject to Section 203 of the DGCL, an anti-takeover statute. In general, Section 203 prohibits a publicly held Delaware corporation from engaging in a “business combination” with an “interested stockholder” for a period of three years following the time the person became an interested stockholder, unless (with certain exceptions) the business combination or the transaction in which the person became an interested stockholder is approved in a prescribed manner. Generally, a “business combination” includes a merger, asset or stock sale, or other transaction resulting in a financial benefit to the interested stockholder. Generally, an “interested stockholder” is a person who, together with affiliates and associates, owns (or within three years prior to the determination of interested stockholder status, did own) 15% or more of a corporation’s voting stock. The existence of this provision would be expected to have

 

112


an anti-takeover effect with respect to transactions not approved in advance by the board of directors, including discouraging attempts that might result in a premium over the market price for the shares of common stock held by stockholders.

Requirements for Advance Notification of Stockholder Meetings, Nominations and Proposals

Our bylaws will provide that special meetings of the stockholders may be called only by or at the direction of the board of directors, the chairman of our board or the chief executive officer with the concurrence of a majority of the board of directors. Our bylaws will prohibit the conduct of any business at a special meeting other than as specified in the notice for such meeting. These provisions may have the effect of deferring, delaying or discouraging hostile takeovers, or changes in control or management of our company.

Our bylaws will establish advance notice procedures with respect to stockholder proposals and the nomination of candidates for election as directors. In order for any matter to be “properly brought” before a meeting, a stockholder will have to comply with advance notice requirements and provide us with certain information. Our bylaws will allow the presiding officer at a meeting of the stockholders to adopt rules and regulations for the conduct of meetings which may have the effect of precluding the conduct of certain business at a meeting if the rules and regulations are not followed. These provisions may also defer, delay or discourage a potential acquirer from conducting a solicitation of proxies to elect the acquirer’s own slate of directors or otherwise attempting to obtain control of our company.

Any amendment to our certificate of incorporation will require the affirmative vote of at least 66 2/3% of the voting power of all shares of our common stock then outstanding. Our certificate of incorporation provides that the board of directors is expressly authorized to adopt, amend or repeal our bylaws and that our stockholders may only amend our bylaws with the approval of at least 66 2/3% of the voting power of all shares of our common stock then outstanding.

No Cumulative Voting

The DGCL provides that stockholders are denied the right to cumulate votes in the election of directors unless our certificate of incorporation provides otherwise. Our certificate of incorporation will not provide for cumulative voting.

Classified Board of Directors

Our certificate of incorporation will provide that our board of directors will be divided into three classes of directors, with the classes to be as nearly equal in number as possible. The members of each class serve for a three-year term. As a result, approximately one-third of our board of directors will be elected each year. The classification of directors will have the effect of making it more difficult for stockholders to change the composition of our board of directors. Our certificate of incorporation will provide that the number of directors will be fixed from time to time pursuant to a resolution adopted by the board of directors, but must consist of not less than three or more than 13 directors.

Removal of Directors

Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws will provide that (i) prior to the date on which Lone Star and its affiliates cease to beneficially own, in aggregate, at least a majority of the voting power of all outstanding shares entitled to vote generally in the election of directors,

 

113


directors may be removed with or without cause upon the affirmative vote of holders of at least a majority of the voting power of all the then outstanding shares of stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class and (ii) on and after the date Lone Star and its affiliates cease to beneficially own, in aggregate, at least a majority of the voting power of all outstanding shares entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, directors may be removed only for cause and only upon the affirmative vote of holders of at least 66  2 / 3 % of the voting power of all the then outstanding shares of stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class. In addition, our certificate of incorporation and bylaws will also provide that any newly created directorships and any vacancies on our board of directors will be filled only by the affirmative vote of the majority of remaining directors; provided that so long as affiliates of Lone Star own at least 25% of the total voting power of our capital stock, the positions can only be filled by our stockholders.

Stockholder Action by Written Consent

The DGCL permits any action required to be taken at any annual or special meeting of the stockholders may be taken without a meeting, without prior notice and without a vote if a consent or consents in writing, setting forth the action so taken, is signed by the holders of outstanding stock having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares of stock entitled to vote thereon were present and voted, unless the certificate of incorporation provides otherwise. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws will preclude stockholder action by written consent after the date on which Lone Star and its affiliates ceases to beneficially own, in the aggregate, at least a majority of the voting power of all outstanding shares of our stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors.

Limitations on Liability and Indemnification of Officers and Directors

The DGCL authorizes corporations to limit or eliminate the personal liability of directors to corporations and their stockholders for monetary damages for breaches of directors’ fiduciary duties as directors. Our organizational documents will include provisions that eliminate, to the extent allowable under the DGCL, the personal liability of directors or officers for monetary damages for actions taken as a director or officer, as the case may be. Our organizational documents will also provide that we must indemnify and advance reasonable expenses to our directors and officers to the fullest extent authorized by the DGCL. We are also expressly authorized to carry directors’ and officers’ insurance for our directors, officers and certain employees for some liabilities.

The limitation of liability and indemnification provisions in our certificate of incorporation and bylaws to be adopted may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against directors for breach of their fiduciary duty. These provisions may also have the effect of reducing the likelihood of derivative litigation against directors and officers, even though such an action, if successful, might otherwise benefit us and our stockholders. In addition, your investment may be adversely affected to the extent that, in a class action or direct suit, we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and officers pursuant to these indemnification provisions.

There is currently no pending material litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors, officers or employees for which indemnification is sought.

 

114


Authorized but Unissued Shares

Our authorized but unissued shares of common stock and preferred stock will be available for future issuance without your approval. The DGCL does not require stockholder approval for any issuance of authorized shares. However, the NASDAQ listing requirements require stockholder approval of certain issuances equal to or exceeding 20% of the then-outstanding voting power or the then-outstanding number of shares of common stock. No assurances can be given that our shares will remain so listed. We may use additional shares for a variety of corporate purposes, including future public offerings to raise additional capital, corporate acquisitions and employee benefit plans. The existence of authorized but unissued shares of common stock and preferred stock could render more difficult or discourage an attempt to obtain control of us by means of a proxy contest, tender offer, merger or otherwise.

Corporate Opportunities and Transactions with Lone Star Fund

In recognition that principals, members, directors, managers, partners, stockholders, officers, employees and other representatives of Lone Star Fund and its affiliates and affiliated investment funds, referred to as the Lone Star entities, may serve as our directors or officers, and that the Lone Star entities may engage in similar activities or lines of business that we do, our certificate of incorporation will provide for the allocation of certain corporate opportunities between us and the Lone Star entities. Specifically, none of the Lone Star entities or any principal, member, director, manager, partner, stockholder, officer, employee or other representative of the Lone Star entities has any duty to refrain from engaging directly or indirectly in the same or similar business activities or lines of business that we do. In the event that any Lone Star entity acquires knowledge of a potential transaction or matter which may be a corporate opportunity for itself and us, we will not have any expectancy in the corporate opportunity, and the Lone Star entity will not have any duty to communicate or offer the corporate opportunity to us and may pursue or acquire such corporate opportunity for itself or direct such opportunity to another person. In addition, if a director or officer of our company who is also a principal, member, director, manager, partner, stockholder, officer, employee or other representative of any Lone Star entity acquires knowledge of a potential transaction or matter which may be a corporate opportunity for us and a Lone Star entity, we will not have any expectancy in the corporate opportunity unless the corporate opportunity is expressly offered to the person solely in his or her capacity as a director or officer of our company.

In recognition that we may engage in material business transactions with the Lone Star entities, from which we are expected to benefit, our certificate of incorporation will provide that any of our directors or officers who are also principals, members, directors, managers, partners, stockholders, officers, employees and other representatives of any Lone Star entity will have fully satisfied and fulfilled his or her fiduciary duty to us and our stockholders with respect to such transaction, if:

 

   

the transaction was approved, after being made aware of the material facts of the relationship between each of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. or a subsidiary thereof and the Lone Star entity and the material terms and facts of the transaction, by (1) an affirmative vote of a majority of the members of our board of directors who do not have a material financial interest in the transaction, known as disinterested persons, or (2) an affirmative vote of a majority of the members of a committee of our board of directors consisting of members who are disinterested persons; or

 

   

the transaction was fair to us at the time we entered into the transaction; or

 

   

the transaction was approved by an affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of shares of our common stock entitled to vote, excluding the Lone Star entities and any holder who has a material financial interest in the transaction.

 

115


By becoming a stockholder in our company, you will be deemed to have received notice of and consented to these provisions of our certificate of incorporation.

Transfer Agent and Registrar

The Transfer Agent and Registrar for our common stock is American Stock Transfer & Trust Company, LLC.

Listing

We have applied to list our common stock on the Nasdaq Global Select Market under the symbol “DFRG.”

 

116


SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

Prior to this offering, there has been no market for our common stock. Immediately following the consummation of the offering, based on shares outstanding as of                     , 2012, we will have an aggregate of             shares of common stock outstanding, assuming no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option and no exercise of outstanding options. If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, assuming no exercise of outstanding options, we will have an aggregate of             shares of common stock outstanding. Of the outstanding shares, the             shares sold in this offering (or             shares if the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full) will be freely tradable without restriction or further registration under the Securities Act, except that any shares held by our affiliates, as that term is defined in Rule 144 of the Securities Act, may generally be sold only in compliance with the limitations described below. The remaining outstanding shares of our common stock will be deemed restricted securities, as defined in Rule 144. We expect that Lone Star Fund will be considered an affiliate 180 days after this offering based on its expected share ownership (consisting of             shares owned by Lone Star Fund assuming no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option). Certain other of our stockholders may also be considered affiliates at that time.

Lock-Up Agreements

We and our officers, directors and holders of all of our outstanding shares of common stock immediately prior to this offering will be subject to lock-up agreements with the underwriters that will restrict the sale of shares of our common stock held by them for 180 days after the date of this prospectus, subject to certain exceptions. See “Underwriting” for a description of these lock-up agreements.

Sales of Restricted Securities

Other than the shares sold in this offering, all of the remaining shares of our common stock will be available for sale, subject to the lock-up agreements described above, after the date of this prospectus in registered sales or pursuant to Rule 144 or another exemption from registration. For the purpose of the volume, manner of sale and other limitations under Rule 144 applicable to affiliates described below, we expect that Lone Star Fund will be considered an affiliate 180 days after this offering based on its expected share ownership (consisting of             shares owned by Lone Star Fund assuming no exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares).

Restricted shares may be sold in the public market only if registered or if they qualify for an exemption from registration including under Rule 144 or 701 promulgated under the Securities Act, each of which is summarized below.

In general, under Rule 144, beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, a person who is not our affiliate and has not been our affiliate at any time during the preceding three months will be entitled to sell any shares of our common stock that such person has beneficially owned for at least six months, including the holding period of any prior owner other than one of our affiliates, without regard to the volume limitations summarized below. Sales of our common stock by any such person would be subject to the availability of current public information about us if the shares to be sold were beneficially owned by such person for less than one year.

In addition, under Rule 144, a person may sell shares of our common stock acquired from us immediately after the consummation of this offering, without regard to volume limitations or the availability of public information about us, if: (i) the person is not our affiliate and has not

 

117


been our affiliate at any time during the preceding three months; and (ii) the person has beneficially owned the shares to be sold for at least one year, including the holding period of any prior owner other than one of our affiliates.

Beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, our affiliates who have beneficially owned shares of our common stock for at least six months, including the holding period of any prior owner other than one of our affiliates, would be entitled to sell within any three-month period a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of: (i) 1% of the number of shares of our common stock then-outstanding, which will equal approximately             shares immediately after the consummation of this offering; and (ii) the average weekly trading volume in our common stock on the NASDAQ Global Select Market during the four calendar weeks preceding the date of filing of a Notice of Proposed Sale of Securities Pursuant to Rule 144 with respect to the sale.

Sales under Rule 144 by our affiliates are also subject to manner of sale provisions and notice requirements and to the availability of current public information about us.

Rule 701 provides that the shares of common stock acquired upon the exercise of currently outstanding options or pursuant to other rights granted under our equity incentive plan may be resold by persons, other than our affiliates, beginning 90 days after the effective date of the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part, subject only to the manner of sale provisions of Rule 144, and by our affiliates under Rule 144, without compliance with its one-year minimum holding period. As of the date of this prospectus, no options to purchase shares of our common stock were outstanding.

As a result of lock-up agreements described in “Underwriting” and the provisions of Rules 144 and 701, additional shares will be available for sale in the public market upon the expiration or, if earlier, the waiver of the lock-up period provided for in the lock-up agreements, subject, in some cases, to volume limitations.

Additional Registration Statements

In addition,             shares of common stock may be granted under our stock incentive plan, including             shares issuable upon the exercise of stock options that we intend to grant to our executive officers and certain director nominees at the time of the pricing of this offering with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price. See “Executive Compensation—2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan.” We intend to file one or more registration statements under the Securities Act after this offering to register up to             shares of our common stock issued or reserved for issuance under our equity incentive plans. These registration statements will become effective upon filing, and shares covered by these registration statements will be eligible for sale in the public market immediately after the effective dates of these registration statements, subject to any limitations on exercise under our equity incentive plan, the lock-up agreements described in “Underwriting” and Rule 144 limitations applicable to affiliates.

Registration Rights Agreement

Prior to the consummation of this offering, we will enter into a registration rights agreement with Lone Star Fund. The terms of the registration rights agreement will include provisions for demand registration rights and piggyback registration rights in favor of Lone Star Fund. The registration rights agreement will not provide for the payment of any consideration by us to Lone Star Fund if a registration statement for the resale of shares of common stock held by Lone Star Fund is not declared effective or if the effectiveness is not maintained. Immediately following consummation of this offering,             shares of our common stock will be entitled to these registration rights. Shares registered with the SEC pursuant to these

 

118


registration rights will be eligible for sale in the public markets upon effectiveness of the registration statement covering those shares, subject to the lock-up agreements described in “Underwriting.” By exercising its registration rights and causing a large number of shares to be registered and sold in the public market, Lone Star Fund could cause the price of the common stock to fall. In addition, any demand to include these shares in our registration statements could have a material adverse effect on our ability to raise needed capital. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Registration Rights Agreement.”

Subject to the terms of the registration rights agreement, Lone Star Fund, the holder of             shares of our common stock, will have the right to require that we register its shares under the Securities Act for sale to the public. We must pay all expenses, except for underwriters’ discounts and commissions, incurred in connection with the exercise of these demand registration rights.

Lone Star Fund, the holder of             shares of our common stock, will have piggyback registration rights under the terms of the registration rights agreement. The registration rights agreement will provide that Lone Star Fund has the right to include its shares in any registration that we effect under the Securities Act, other than a registration effected pursuant to an exercise of demand registration rights, subject to specified exceptions. We must pay all expenses, except for underwriters’ discounts and commissions, incurred in connection with these piggyback registration rights.

Effects of Sales of Shares

No predictions can be made as to the effect, if any, that sales of shares of our common stock from time to time, or the availability of shares of our common stock for future sale, may have on the market price for shares of our common stock. Sales of substantial amounts of common stock, or the perception that such sales could occur, could adversely affect prevailing market prices for our common stock and could impair our future ability to obtain capital through an offering of equity securities.

 

119


U.S. FEDERAL TAX CONSIDERATIONS FOR NON-U.S. HOLDERS

The following is a general discussion of material U.S. federal income and estate tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership, and disposition of our common stock purchased pursuant to this offering by a non-U.S. holder. As used in this prospectus, the term “non-U.S. holder” means a beneficial owner of 5% or less of our common stock that, for U.S. federal income tax purposes, is neither a partnership nor any of the following:

 

   

an individual who is a citizen or resident of the United States;

 

   

a corporation (including any entity treated as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes) created or organized in the United States or under the laws of the United States or any state thereof (including the District of Columbia);

 

   

an estate the income of which is subject to U.S. federal income taxation regardless of its source; or

 

   

a trust (i) whose administration is subject to the primary supervision of a U.S. court and which has one or more U.S. persons who have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust, or (ii) that has a valid election in effect under applicable U.S. Treasury regulations to be treated as a U.S. person.

An individual who is not a citizen of the United States may, subject to certain restrictions as well as limitations contained in any applicable income tax treaties, be deemed to be a resident of the United States by reason of being present in the United States for at least 31 days in the calendar year and an aggregate of at least 183 days during a three year period ending in the current calendar year (counting for such purposes all of the days present in the current year, one-third of the days present in the immediate preceding calendar year and one-sixth of the days present in the second preceding calendar year). U.S. residents are generally taxed for U.S. federal income tax purposes in the same manner as U.S. citizens.

This discussion assumes that you will hold our common stock issued pursuant to this offering as a capital asset within the meaning of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code (i.e., generally, property held for investment). This discussion does not address all aspects of U.S. federal taxation that may be relevant to a particular non-U.S. holder in light of the holder’s individual investment or tax circumstances, or to non-U.S. holders that are subject to special tax rules. In addition, this description of U.S. tax consequences does not address:

 

   

U.S. state and local or non-U.S. tax consequences;

 

   

U.S. federal gift tax consequences;

 

   

specific facts and circumstances that may be relevant to a particular non-U.S. holder’s tax position;

 

   

the tax consequences for the stockholders, partners or beneficiaries of a non-U.S. holder;

 

   

special tax rules that may apply to some non-U.S. holders, including without limitation, banks, insurance companies, financial institutions, hybrid entities, broker-dealers, tax-exempt entities, controlled foreign corporations, passive foreign investment companies or U.S. expatriates; or

 

   

special tax rules that may apply to a non-U.S. holder that holds our common stock as part of a straddle, hedge or conversion transaction or other integrated investment.

 

120


If a partnership is a beneficial owner of our common stock, the treatment of a partner in the partnership generally will depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. A beneficial owner of our common stock that is a partnership and partners in such a partnership should consult their tax advisors regarding the U.S. federal income tax consequences of acquiring, owning, and disposing of our common stock.

This discussion is based on current provisions of the Code, final, temporary and proposed U.S. Treasury regulations, judicial opinions, published positions of the U.S. Internal Revenue Service, or IRS, and other applicable authorities, all as in effect on the date hereof and all of which are subject to differing interpretations or change, possibly with retroactive effect. We have not sought, and will not seek, any ruling from the IRS or any opinion of counsel with respect to the tax consequences discussed herein, and there can be no assurance that the IRS will not take a position contrary to the tax consequences discussed below or that any position taken by the IRS would not be sustained. Furthermore, this discussion does not include any discussion of any state, local or foreign tax considerations.

We urge you to consult your tax advisor regarding the U.S. federal tax consequences of acquiring, owning or disposing our common stock, as well as any tax consequences that may arise under the laws of any foreign, state, local or other taxing jurisdiction or under any applicable tax treaty.

Dividends

As described under “Dividend Policy” above, we do not anticipate paying cash dividends on our common stock in the foreseeable future. However, if distributions of cash or property (other than certain stock distributions) are made to non-U.S. holders on shares of our common stock, such distributions generally will constitute dividends for U.S. federal income tax purposes to the extent paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles. Distributions in excess of earnings and profits will constitute a return of capital that is applied against and reduces the non-U.S. holder’s adjusted tax basis in our common stock. Any remaining excess will be treated as gain realized on the sale or other disposition of the common stock and will be treated as described under “—Gain on Sale, Exchange or Other Taxable Disposition of Common Stock” below.

Dividends paid to a non-U.S. holder that are not effectively connected with the non-U.S. holder’s conduct of a trade or business in the United States generally will be subject to withholding of U.S. federal income tax at the rate of 30% or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. Non-U.S. holders should consult their tax advisors regarding their entitlement to benefits under an applicable income tax treaty and the requirements for and manner of claiming the benefits of such treaty (including, without limitation, the need to obtain a U.S. taxpayer identification number).

If the non-U.S. holder is engaged in a trade or business in the United States, either directly or through an entity treated as a partnership for U.S. tax purposes, and the dividends are effectively connected with the conduct of such trade or business, and, if provided in an applicable income tax treaty, are dividends attributable to a permanent establishment or fixed base maintained by the non-U.S. holder in the United States, then the dividends are not subject to the U.S. withholding tax, but instead are subject to U.S. federal income tax on a net income basis at applicable graduated U.S. federal income tax rates and in a manner applicable to U.S. persons. Certain certification and disclosure requirements must be complied with for effectively connected income or income attributable to a permanent establishment to be exempt from withholding. Any effectively connected dividends or dividends attributable to a permanent

 

121


establishment received by a non-U.S. holder that is treated as a foreign corporation for U.S. tax purposes may be subject to an additional “branch profits tax” at a 30% rate, or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty.

To claim the benefit of a tax treaty or an exemption from withholding because dividends are effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business in the United States, a non-U.S. holder must provide to the withholding agent a properly executed IRS Form W-8BEN (or successor form) for treaty benefits or IRS Form W-8ECI (or successor form) for effectively connected income, before the payment of dividends, and, if claiming the benefit of a tax treaty, must certify under penalties of perjury on the appropriate forms that such non-U.S. holder is not a U.S. person and is eligible for treaty benefits. These forms must be periodically updated. Non-U.S. holders may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld by timely filing an appropriate claim for refund along with the required information. However,

 

   

in the case of common stock held by a foreign partnership, the certification requirement generally will be applied to the partners of the partnership and the partnership will be required to provide certain information;

 

   

in the case of common stock held by a foreign trust, the certification requirement generally will be applied to the trust or the beneficial owners of the trust depending on whether the trust is a “foreign complex trust,” “foreign simple trust,” or “foreign grantor trust” as defined in the U.S. Treasury regulations; and

 

   

look-through rules will apply for tiered partnerships, foreign simple trusts and foreign grantor trusts.

A non-U.S. holder that is a foreign partnership or a foreign trust is urged to consult its own tax advisor regarding its status under U.S. tax law and the certification requirements applicable to it.

Gain on Sale, Exchange or Other Taxable Disposition of Common Stock

A non-U.S. holder generally will not be subject to U.S. federal income tax, including by way of withholding, on gain recognized on a sale, exchange or other taxable disposition of our common stock unless any one of the following applies:

 

  1. The non-U.S. holder is a nonresident alien individual who is present in the United States for 183 days or more in the taxable year of the sale, exchange or other taxable disposition and certain other requirements are met;

 

  2. The gain is effectively connected with the non-U.S. holder’s conduct of a trade or business in the United States, directly or through an entity treated as a partnership for U.S. tax purposes and, if an applicable tax treaty requires, attributable to a U.S. permanent establishment or fixed base of such non-U.S. holder; or

 

  3.

We are or have been, at any time during the five-year period preceding such disposition (or the non-U.S. holder’s holding period, if shorter) a “United States real property holding corporation,” within the meaning of Section 897(c)(2) of the Code, unless our common stock is regularly traded on an established securities market and the non-U.S. holder holds no more than 5% of our outstanding common stock, directly or indirectly, during the relevant period, or the 5% exception. Generally, a United States corporation is treated as a United States real property holding corporation within the meaning of Section 897(c)(2) of the Code if the fair market value of its United States real property interests equals or exceeds 50% of the sum of the fair market value of its worldwide real property interests plus its other assets used or held for use in a trade or business.

 

122


  We believe that we have not been and are not currently a United States real property holding corporation, and we do not expect to become a United States real property holding corporation. However, no assurances can be made in this regard. Furthermore, no assurances can be provided that our stock will be considered to be regularly traded on an established securities market for purposes of Section 897 of the Code.

Non-U.S. holders described in clause (1) above are taxed on their gains (including gains from sales of our common stock and net of applicable U.S. losses from sales or exchanges of other capital assets incurred during the year) at a flat rate of 30% or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. Non-U.S. holders described in clause (2) or (3) above will be subject to tax on the net gain derived from the sale under regular graduated U.S. federal income tax rates and in a manner applicable to U.S. persons, unless an applicable income tax treaty provides otherwise. If a non-U.S. holder described in clause (2) or (3) is a corporation, it may be subject to the additional branch profits tax at a rate equal to 30% of its effectively connected earnings and profits or at such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. In addition, if we are determined to be a United States real property holding corporation and the 5% exception does not apply, then a purchaser may be required to withhold 10% of the proceeds payable to a non-U.S. holder from a sale or other taxable disposition of our common stock.

U.S. Federal Estate Taxes

Our common stock beneficially owned or treated as beneficially owned by an individual who at the time of death is a non-U.S. holder, and certain lifetime transfers of an interest in common stock made by such an individual, will be included in his or her gross estate for U.S. federal estate tax purposes, unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise and, therefore, may be subject to U.S. federal estate tax. Estates of non-resident alien individuals are generally allowed a statutory credit that has the effect of offsetting the U.S. federal estate tax imposed on the first $60,000 of the taxable estate.

Legislation Affecting Taxation of Common Stock Held by or Through Foreign Entities

Under legislation enacted in 2010, a 30% U.S. federal withholding tax will be imposed on dividends on stock of U.S. corporations, and on the gross proceeds from the disposition of such stock, paid to a “foreign financial institution” (as specially defined for this purpose), unless such institution enters into an agreement with the U.S. Treasury to collect and provide to the U.S. Treasury substantial information regarding its U.S. account holders and certain account holders that are foreign entities with U.S. owners. A 30% U.S. federal withholding tax will also apply to dividends paid on stock of U.S. corporations and on the gross proceeds from the disposition of such stock paid to a non-financial foreign entity unless such entity provides the withholding agent with a certification that it does not have any substantial U.S. owners or a certification identifying the direct and indirect substantial U.S. owners of the entity. The withholding taxes described above will apply to dividend payments made after December 31, 2013 and payments of gross proceeds made after December 31, 2014. Under certain circumstances, a non-U.S. holder may be eligible for refunds or credits of such withholding taxes. Investors are urged to consult with their own tax advisors regarding the possible application of these rules to their investment in our common stock.

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding

Under U.S. Treasury regulations, we must report annually to the IRS and to each non-U.S. holder the amount of dividends paid to such non-U.S. holder and the tax withheld with respect to those dividends. These information reporting requirements apply even if withholding was not

 

123


required because the dividends were effectively connected to the conduct of the non-U.S. holder’s trade or business within the United States or withholding was reduced or eliminated by an applicable tax treaty. Copies of the information returns reporting those dividends and withholding may also be made available to the tax authorities in the country in which the non-U.S. holder is a resident under the provisions of an applicable income tax treaty or agreement.

The gross amount of dividends paid to a non-U.S. holder that fails to certify its non-U.S. holder status in accordance with applicable U.S. Treasury regulations and fails to otherwise establish an exemption generally will be reduced by backup withholding at the applicable rate (currently 28%).

A non-U.S. holder is required to certify its non-U.S. status under penalties of perjury or otherwise establish an exemption in order to avoid information reporting and backup withholding on disposition proceeds where the transaction is effected by or through a U.S. office of a broker.

U.S. information reporting and backup withholding generally will not apply to a payment of proceeds of a disposition of common stock where the transaction is effected outside the United States through a non-U.S. office of a non-U.S. broker. However, information reporting requirements, but not backup withholding, generally will apply to such a payment if the broker is (i) a U.S. person; (ii) a foreign person that derives 50% or more of its gross income for certain periods from the conduct of a trade or business in the United States; (iii) a controlled foreign corporation as defined in the Code; (iv) a foreign partnership with certain U.S. connections, unless the broker has documentary evidence in its records that the holder is a non-U.S. holder and certain conditions are met or the holder otherwise establishes an exemption; or (v) a U.S. branch of a foreign bank or a foreign insurance company.

Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Amounts that we withhold under the backup withholding rules may be refunded or credited against the non-U.S. holder’s U.S. federal income tax liability, if any, provided that certain required information is furnished to the IRS in a timely manner. Non-U.S. holders should consult their own tax advisors regarding application of backup withholding in their particular circumstance and the availability of and procedure for obtaining an exemption from backup withholding under current U.S. Treasury regulations.

The foregoing discussion is only a summary of certain U.S. federal income and estate tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of our common stock by non-U.S. holders. You are urged to consult your own tax advisor with respect to the particular tax consequences to you of ownership and disposition of our common stock, including the effect of any U.S., state, local, non-U.S. or other tax laws and any applicable income or estate tax treaty.

 

124


UNDERWRITING

Subject to the terms and conditions of the underwriting agreement, the underwriters named below, through their representatives Deutsche Bank Securities Inc. and Piper Jaffray & Co. have severally agreed to purchase from us and the selling stockholder the following respective number of shares of common stock at a public offering price less the underwriting discounts and commissions set forth on the cover page of this prospectus:

 

Underwriters

   Number
of

Shares

Deutsche Bank Securities Inc.

  

Piper Jaffray & Co.

  

Wells Fargo Securities, LLC

  

Cowen and Company, LLC

  

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

  
  
  
  

 

Total

  
  

 

The underwriting agreement provides that the obligations of the several underwriters to purchase the shares of common stock offered hereby are subject to certain conditions precedent and that the underwriters will purchase all of the shares of common stock offered by this prospectus, other than those covered by the over-allotment option described below, if any of these shares are purchased.

We have been advised by the representatives of the underwriters that the underwriters propose to offer the shares of common stock to the public at the public offering price set forth on the cover of this prospectus and to dealers at a price that represents a concession not in excess of $             per share under the public offering price. The underwriters may allow, and these dealers may re-allow, a concession of not more than $             per share to other dealers. After the initial public offering, representatives of the underwriters may change the offering price and other selling terms.

We and the selling stockholder have granted to the underwriters an option, exercisable not later than 30 days after the date of this prospectus, to purchase up to             additional shares of common stock at the public offering price less the underwriting discounts and commissions set forth on the cover page of this prospectus. The underwriters may exercise this option only to cover over-allotments made in connection with the sale of the common stock offered by this prospectus. To the extent that the underwriters exercise this option, each of the underwriters will become obligated, subject to conditions, to purchase approximately the same percentage of these additional shares of common stock as the number of shares of common stock to be purchased by it in the above table bears to the total number of shares of common stock offered by this prospectus. We or the selling stockholder will be obligated, pursuant to the option, to sell these additional shares of common stock to the underwriters to the extent the option is exercised. If any additional shares of common stock are purchased, the underwriters will offer the additional shares on the same terms as those on which the             shares are being offered.

 

125


The underwriting discounts and commissions per share are equal to the public offering price per share of common stock less the amount paid by the underwriters to us per share of common stock. The underwriting discounts and commissions are     % of the initial public offering price. We have agreed to pay the underwriters the following discounts and commissions, assuming either no exercise or full exercise by the underwriters of the underwriters’ over-allotment option:

 

          Total Fees
     Fee per
share
   Without Exercise of
Over-Allotment
Option
   With Full Exercise of
Over-Allotment
Option

Discounts and commissions paid by us

   $                $                            $                        

Discounts and commissions paid by the selling stockholder

   $                $                                $                            

In addition, we estimate that our share of the total expenses of this offering, excluding underwriting discounts and commissions, will be approximately $            .

We and the selling stockholder have agreed to indemnify the underwriters against some specified types of liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act, and to contribute to payments the underwriters may be required to make in respect of any of these liabilities.

Each of our officers and directors, and substantially all of our stockholders and holders of options to purchase our stock, have agreed not to offer, sell, contract to sell or otherwise dispose of, or enter into any transaction that is designed to, or could be expected to, result in the disposition of any shares of our common stock or other securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for shares of our common stock or derivatives of our common stock owned by these persons prior to this offering or common stock issuable upon exercise of options held by these persons for a period of 180 days after the effective date of the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part without the prior written consent of Deutsche Bank Securities Inc. and Piper Jaffray & Co. This consent may be given at any time without public notice except in limited circumstances. Transfers or dispositions can be made during the lock-up period in the case of gifts or for estate planning purposes and other limited circumstances where the transferee signs a lock-up agreement. We have entered into a similar agreement with the representatives of the underwriters. There are no agreements between the representatives and any of our stockholders or affiliates releasing them from these lock-up agreements prior to the expiration of the 180-day period.

The representatives of the underwriters have advised us that the underwriters do not intend to confirm sales to any account over which they exercise discretionary authority.

In connection with the offering, the underwriters may purchase and sell shares of our common stock in the open market. These transactions may include short sales, purchases to cover positions created by short sales and stabilizing transactions.

Short sales involve the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of shares than they are required to purchase in the offering. Covered short sales are sales made in an amount not greater than the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares of common stock from us in the offering. The underwriters may close out any covered short position by either exercising their option to purchase additional shares or purchasing shares in the open market. In determining the source of shares to close out the covered short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market as compared to the price at which they may purchase shares through the over-allotment option.

 

126


Naked short sales are any sales in excess of the over-allotment option. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of the shares in the open market prior to the completion of the offering.

Stabilizing transactions consist of various bids for or purchases of our common stock made by the underwriters in the open market prior to the completion of the offering.

The underwriters may impose a penalty bid. This occurs when a particular underwriter repays to the other underwriters a portion of the underwriting discount received by it because the representatives of the underwriters have repurchased shares sold by or for the account of that underwriter in stabilizing or short covering transactions.

Purchases to cover a short position and stabilizing transactions may have the effect of preventing or slowing a decline in the market price of our common stock. Additionally, these purchases, along with the imposition of the penalty bid, may stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the market price of our common stock. As a result, the price of our common stock may be higher than the price that might otherwise exist in the open market. These transactions may be effected on the NASDAQ Global Select Market, in the over-the-counter market or otherwise.

A prospectus in electronic format is being made available on Internet web sites maintained by one or more of the lead underwriters of this offering and may be made available on web sites maintained by other underwriters. Other than the prospectus in electronic format, the information on any underwriter’s web site and any information contained in any other web site maintained by an underwriter is not part of the prospectus or the registration statement of which the prospectus forms a part.

Some of the underwriters or their affiliates have provided investment banking services to us in the past and may do so in the future. They receive customary fees and commissions for these services. In addition, the selling stockholder may be deemed an underwriter in connection with this offering.

Pricing of this Offering

Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. Consequently, the initial public offering price of our common stock will be determined by negotiation among us, the selling stockholder and the representatives of the underwriters. Among the primary factors that will be considered in determining the public offering price are:

 

   

prevailing market conditions;

 

   

our results of operations in recent periods;

 

   

the present stage of our development;

 

   

the market capitalizations and stages of development of other companies that we and the representatives of the underwriters believe to be comparable to our business; and

 

   

estimates of our business potential.

Notice to Investors in the European Economic Area

In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a Relevant Member State) an offer to the public of any shares which are the subject of the offering contemplated by this prospectus may not be made in that

 

127


Relevant Member State other than the offers contemplated in the prospectus once the prospectus has been approved by the competent authority in such Member State and published and passported in accordance with the Prospectus Directive as implemented in the Relevant Member State except that an offer to the public in that Relevant Member State of any shares may be made at any time under the following exemptions under the Prospectus Directive, if they have been implemented in that Relevant Member State:

 

   

to legal entities which are authorized or regulated to operate in the financial markets or, if not so authorized or regulated, whose corporate purpose is solely to invest in securities;

 

   

to any legal entity which has two or more of (1) an average of at least 250 employees during the last financial year; (2) a total balance sheet of more than 43,000,000 and (3) an annual net turnover of more than 50,000,000, as shown in its last annual or consolidated accounts;

 

   

by the underwriters to fewer than 100 natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Directive) subject to obtaining the prior consent of the underwriters for any such offer; or

 

   

in any other circumstances falling within Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive,

provided that no such offer of shares shall result in a requirement for the publication by the Issuer or any underwriter of a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive.

For the purposes of this provision, the expression an “offer to the public” in relation to any shares in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and any shares to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase any shares, as the same may be varied in that member state by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that member state and the expression “Prospectus Directive” means Directive 2003/71/EC and includes any relevant implementing measure in each Relevant Member State.

Notice to Investors in the United Kingdom

Each underwriter has represented and agreed that (a) it has only communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated an invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of Section 21 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, or the FSMA, received by it in connection with the issue or sale of the shares (i) to investment professionals falling within Article 19(5) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Financial Promotion) Order 2005, or the Order, or (ii) to high net worth entities, and other persons to whom it may lawfully be communicated, falling within Article 49(2)(a) and (d) of the Order, with all such persons together being referred to as relevant persons, and (b) it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to the shares of our common stock in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom. This prospectus and its contents are confidential and should not be distributed, published or reproduced (in whole or in part) or disclosed by recipients to any other persons in the United Kingdom. Any person in the United Kingdom that is not a relevant person should not act or rely on this document or any of its contents.

Notice to Prospective Investors in Hong Kong

The shares may not be offered or sold in Hong Kong by means of any document other than (i) in circumstances which do not constitute an offer to the public within the meaning of the

 

128


Companies Ordinance (Cap. 32, Laws of Hong Kong), or (ii) to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap. 571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder, or (iii) in other circumstances which do not result in the document being a “prospectus” within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap. 32, Laws of Hong Kong) and no advertisement, invitation or document relating to the shares may be issued or may be in the possession of any person for the purpose of issue (in each case whether in Hong Kong or elsewhere), which is directed at, or the contents of which are likely to be accessed or read by, the public in Hong Kong (except if permitted to do so under the laws of Hong Kong) other than with respect to shares which are or are intended to be disposed of only to persons outside Hong Kong or only to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap. 571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder.

Notice to Prospective Investors in Singapore

This prospectus has not been registered as a prospectus with the Monetary Authority of Singapore. Accordingly, this prospectus and any other document or material in connection with the offer or sale, or invitation for subscription or purchase, of the shares may not be circulated or distributed, nor may the shares be offered or sold, or be made the subject of an invitation for subscription or purchase, whether directly or indirectly, to persons in Singapore other than (i) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the Securities and Futures Act, Chapter 289 of Singapore, or the SFA, (ii) to a relevant person pursuant to Section 275(1), or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions specified in Section 275 of the SFA or (iii) otherwise pursuant to, and in accordance with the conditions of, any other applicable provision of the SFA, in each case subject to compliance with conditions set forth in the SFA.

Where the shares are subscribed or purchased under Section 275 of the SFA by a relevant person which is:

 

   

a corporation (which is not an accredited investor (as defined in Section 4A of the SFA)) the sole business of which is to hold investments and the entire share capital of which is owned by one or more individuals, each of whom is an accredited investor; or

 

   

a trust (where the trustee is not an accredited investor) whose sole purpose is to hold investments and each beneficiary of the trust is an individual who is an accredited investor,

shares, debentures and units of shares and debentures of that corporation or the beneficiaries’ rights and interest (howsoever described) in that trust shall not be transferred within six months after that corporation or that trust has acquired the shares pursuant to an offer made under Section 275 of the SFA except:

 

   

to an institutional investor (for corporations, under Section 274 of the SFA) or to a relevant person defined in Section 275(2) of the SFA, or to any person pursuant to an offer that is made on terms that such shares, debentures and units of shares and debentures of that corporation or such rights and interest in that trust are acquired at a consideration of not less than S$200,000 (or its equivalent in a foreign currency) for each transaction, whether such amount is to be paid for in cash or by exchange of securities or other assets, and further for corporations, in accordance with the conditions specified in Section 275 of the SFA;

 

   

where no consideration is or will be given for the transfer; or

 

   

where the transfer is by operation of law.

 

129


LEGAL MATTERS

The validity of the shares of common stock offered hereby will be passed upon for us by Gibson, Dunn & Crutcher LLP. Certain legal matters in connection with this offering will be passed upon for the underwriters by White & Case LLP.

EXPERTS

The consolidated financial statements of the Company at December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011 and for each of the three fiscal years in the period ended December 27, 2011 appearing in this prospectus and registration statement have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, as set forth in their report thereon appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance upon such report, given on the authority of such firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1, including exhibits, of which this prospectus is a part, under the Securities Act with respect to the shares of common stock to be sold in this offering. This prospectus does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement and exhibits and schedules to the registration statement. For further information with respect to our company and the shares of common stock to be sold in this offering, reference is made to the registration statement, including the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement. Copies of the registration statement, including the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement, may be examined without charge at the public reference room of the SEC, 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, DC 20549. Information about the operation of the public reference room may be obtained by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. Copies of all or a portion of the registration statement can be obtained from the public reference room of the SEC upon payment of prescribed fees. Our SEC filings, including our registration statement, are also available to you for free on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. Upon consummation of this offering we will become subject to the informational requirements of the Exchange Act and will be required to file reports and other information. You will be able to inspect and copy these reports and other information at the public reference facilities maintained by the SEC at the address noted above. You will also be able to obtain copies of these materials from the Public Reference Room of the SEC at the address noted above or inspect them without charge at the SEC’s website. We intend to make available to our common stockholders annual reports containing consolidated financial statements audited by an independent registered public accounting firm.

 

130


INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-2   

Financial Statements:

  

Consolidated Balance Sheets

     F-3   

Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income

     F-4   

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Member’s Equity (Deficit)

     F-5   

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

     F-6   

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-7   

 

F-1


REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The Board of Directors

Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC (the Company) as of December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, and the related consolidated statements of income and comprehensive income, changes in member’s equity (deficit), and cash flows for each of the three fiscal years in the period ended December 27, 2011. These financial statements are the responsibility of the company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. We were not engaged to perform an audit of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Our audit included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of the Company at December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three fiscal years in the period ended December 27, 2011, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

/s/    Ernst & Young LLP

Dallas, Texas

April 16, 2012

   except for the adoption of ASU 2011-05

   as discussed in Note 2, as to which the

   date is May 17, 2012

 

F-2


DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, LLC

Consolidated Balance Sheets

(In Thousands)

 

    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 20,
2012
    March 20,
2012
 
                      Pro Forma  
                (Unaudited)  

Assets

       

Current assets:

       

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 4,157      $ 14,119      $ 8,672      $     

Restricted cash

           976        976     

Inventories

    8,661        9,891        9,738     

Income tax receivable

    624                   

Deferred income taxes

    2,018        1,748        1,955     

Other

    3,397        4,496        3,683     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

Total current assets

    18,857        31,230        25,024     

Property and equipment:

       

Land

    5,007        2,539        2,539     

Buildings

    6,813        3,204        3,204     

Leasehold improvements

    67,445        81,579        84,498     

Furniture, fixtures, and equipment

    15,930        21,524        22,371     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   
    95,195        108,846        112,612     

Less accumulated depreciation and amortization

    (19,984     (26,488     (28,155  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   
    75,211        82,358        84,457     

Deferred compensation plan investments

    6,583        6,159        6,943     

Other assets:

       

Goodwill

    78,899        77,687        77,687     

Intangible assets, net

    36,361        36,493        36,454     

Loan costs, net of accumulated amortization of $2,507 in 2010, $168 in 2011, and $262 in 2012 (unaudited)

    2,885        1,868        1,774     

Other

    38        63        60     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   
    118,183        116,111        115,975     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

Total assets

  $ 218,834      $ 235,858      $ 232,399      $     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

Liabilities and member’s equity

       

Current liabilities:

       

Current maturities of long-term debt

  $ 3,000      $      $      $     

Accounts payable

    3,133        7,491        5,704     

Sales tax payable

    920        1,299        538     

Accrued payroll

    3,528        5,913        5,419     

Real estate taxes

    693        417        226     

Accrued self-insurance

    1,235        1,581        1,626     

Deferred revenue for gift cards

    6,286        8,074        6,670     

Income taxes payable

           60        1,169     

Other

    2,338        2,622        2,264     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total current liabilities

    21,133        27,457        23,616     

Long-term debt, less current maturities

    75,922        70,000        65,000     

Other noncurrent liabilities

    3,565        3,876        3,921     

Deferred-compensation plan liabilities

    7,590        7,841        8,408     

Deferred rent obligations

    7,119        17,147        17,226     

Deferred tax liabilities

    14,405        12,081        11,787     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

    129,734        138,402        129,958     

Member’s equity:

       

Member’s equity

    52,092        51,359        51,359     

Common stock $            par value,             shares authorized,             shares issued and outstanding, pro-forma

                           

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

                           

Additional paid-in capital, pro forma

       

Retained earnings

    37,008        46,097        51,082          
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total member’s equity

    89,100        97,456        102,441     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities and member’s equity

  $ 218,834      $ 235,858      $ 232,399      $                
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying notes.

 

F-3


DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, LLC

Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income

(In Thousands)

 

    Year Ended     Twelve Weeks Ended  
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
                     

(Unaudited)

 

Revenues

  $ 160,177      $ 165,575      $ 201,629      $ 43,352      $ 53,678   

Costs and expenses:

         

Costs of sales

    47,593        50,339        61,647        13,445        16,579   

Restaurant operating expenses

    69,209        73,404        88,210        19,331        22,673   

Marketing and advertising costs

    3,523        2,825        4,359        727        874   

Pre-opening costs

    493        798        3,018        354        70   

General and administrative

    8,236        7,512        10,640        2,190        2,646   

Management and accounting fees paid to related party

    2,878        3,345        3,399        469        744   

Non-cash impairment charges

                  1,400                 

Depreciation and amortization

    6,422        6,624        7,146        1,525        1,713   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

    21,823        20,728        21,810        5,311        8,379   

Other income (expense), net:

         

Interest expense—affiliates

    (2,281     (1,775                     

Interest expense—other

    (5,942     (9,906     (8,856     (1,764     (1,221

Other, net

    36        (249     (114     2        (3
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

    13,636        8,798        12,840        3,549        7,155   

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

    3,616        (44     3,751        1,064        2,170   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

  $ 10,020      $ 8,842      $ 9,089      $ 2,485      $ 4,985   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Unaudited pro forma net income per common share:

         

Basic and diluted

  $        $        $        $        $     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Shares used in computing unaudited pro forma net income per share:

         

Basic and diluted

         
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comprehensive income:

         

Realized loss on cash flow hedge

    326        367                        
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income before tax

    326        367                        

Income tax benefit related to other comprehensive income

    (130     (147                     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income, net of tax

    196        220                        
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comprehensive income

  $ 10,216      $ 9,062      $ 9,089      $ 2,485      $ 4,985   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying notes.

 

F-4


DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, LLC

Consolidated Statement of Changes in

Member’s Equity (Deficit)

(In Thousands)

 

     Member’s
Equity (Deficit)
    Retained
Earnings
     Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
    Total  

Balance at December 30, 2008

   $ (27,884   $ 18,146       $ (416   $ (10,154

Comprehensive income

            10,020         196        10,216   

Member contributions

     32,509                       32,509   

Equity-based compensation

     170                       170   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 29, 2009

     4,795        28,166         (220     32,741   

Comprehensive income

            8,842         220        9,062   

Member contributions

     47,127                       47,127   

Equity-based compensation

     170                       170   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 28, 2010

     52,092        37,008                89,100   

Comprehensive income

            9,089                9,089   

Deemed distribution

     (477                    (477

Cash distribution

     (357                    (357

Equity-based compensation

     101                       101   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 27, 2011

   $ 51,359      $ 46,097       $      $ 97,456   

Comprehensive income (unaudited)

            4,985                4,985   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at March 20, 2012 (unaudited)

   $ 51,359      $ 51,082       $      $ 102,441   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying notes.

 

F-5


DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, LLC

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

(In Thousands)

 

    Year Ended     Twelve Weeks Ended  
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 22,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
                      (Unaudited)  

Operating activities

         

Net income

  $ 10,020      $ 8,842      $ 9,089      $ 2,485      $ 4,985   

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

         

Depreciation and amortization

    6,422        6,624        7,146        1,525        1,713   

Loan cost amortization

    694        872        3,128        192        94   

Noncash interest charge—affiliate

    1,881        1,775                        

Noncash equity-based compensation

    170        170        101        39          

Noncash impairment charges

                  1,400                 

Deferred income taxes

    5,723        (238     (1,736     (3,531     (501

Amortization of deferred lease incentives

    (90     (100     (172     (23     (42

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

         

Restricted cash

                  (976              

Inventories

    2,167        (155     (1,230     354        153   

Other current assets

    (1,203     (1,015     (1,099     1,067        813   

Accounts payable

    (811     (2,366     4,358        1,906        (1,787

Income taxes

    (3,716     2,133        2,207        3,132        1,154   

Other liabilities

    (2,341     2,200        5,863        483        (2,475

Payments attributable to accrued interest included in advances due affiliate

           (6,464                     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by operating activities of continuing operations

    18,916        12,278        28,079        7,629        4,107   

Investing activities

         

Proceeds from sale-leaseback transaction

           4,345        13,235        13,235          

Payments to dissenting stockholders

    (19,800                            

Purchases of property and equipment

    (7,755     (5,550     (20,063     (4,749     (3,773

Other

    (983     (284     101        (438     (781
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities

    (28,538     (1,489     (6,727     8,048        (4,554

Financing activities

         

Member contribution

    19,800        47,127                        

Proceeds from long-term debt

                  71,800                 

Payment of long-term debt

    (3,075     (26,353     (80,722     (11,156     (5,000

Loan costs

    (1,138            (2,111              

Distribution to parent

                  (357              

Advances due to affiliate

           (40,663                     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

    15,587        (19,889     (11,390     (11,156     (5,000

Net (decrease) increase in cash and cash equivalents

    5,965        (9,100     9,962        4,521        (5,447

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

    7,292        13,257        4,157        4,157        14,119   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

  $ 13,257      $ 4,157      $ 14,119      $ 8,678      $ 8,672   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information

         

Cash paid for income taxes

  $ 1,611      $ (1,939   $ 3,279      $ 264      $ 1,517   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash paid for interest

  $ 8,338      $ 10,109      $ 5,567      $ 1,573      $ 1,226   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Noncash investing and financing activities:

         

Deemed distribution to parent

  $      $      $ 477      $      $   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Contribution to member’s equity through the assumption of a portion of the payable to dissenting shareholders by parent

  $ 12,709      $      $      $      $   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying notes.

 

F-6


DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, LLC

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

(Information Pertaining to the Twelve Weeks Ended

March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012 is Unaudited)

(1)    Organization and Basis of Presentation

Background

Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC (the Company) was incorporated in Delaware as a limited liability company and will have a perpetual existence. The Company is a wholly owned subsidiary of LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC, which is a wholly owned subsidiary of LSF5 COI Holdings, LLC (Holdings), which is majority owned by Lone Star Fund V (U.S.), L.P. (the Fund), which is a private investment fund and the ultimate parent of the Company.

Effective December 13, 2006, the Fund, through Holdings, acquired all of the outstanding capital stock of Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc. (Star), through a series of transactions pursuant to an Agreement and Plan of Merger (the Acquisition). Prior to the Acquisition, Star was a public company that owned and operated steakhouse restaurants under four different restaurant brands, which included Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon (Lone Star), Texas Land & Cattle Steak House (TXLC), Sullivan’s Steakhouse (Sullivan’s), and Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House (Del Frisco’s).

In connection with the Acquisition, Holdings contributed all of the assets, restaurant operations, trade names, and other intangible assets of its Lone Star and TXLC restaurants to LSF5 Cowboy Holdings, LLC (Casual Dining Companies), which is a wholly owned subsidiary of Holdings. In addition, LS Management, Inc. (LSM), which was previously a wholly owned subsidiary of Star that provided all of the accounting, legal, and other administrative support to all of Star’s restaurants, was contributed to the Casual Dining Companies. Concurrently, the remaining assets and restaurant operations of Star, which primarily included the Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s restaurants as well as LS Finance, LLC which was previously a wholly owned subsidiary of Star that provided all of the cash management and treasury support to all of Star’s restaurants, were contributed to the Company.

Description of Business

The Company owns and operates restaurants in the upscale steakhouse market under the brand names of Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House, Sullivan’s Steakhouse, and Del Frisco’s Grille. In addition, the Company, through LS Finance, LLC, its wholly owned subsidiary, provided cash management and treasury services for the Company’s restaurants and, until March 2007, the restaurants owned and operated by the Casual Dining Companies. As of December 27, 2011 the Company owned and operated nine Del Frisco’s, 20 Sullivan’s and two Del Frisco’s Grille restaurants. During fiscal 2009, the Company opened a Sullivan’s restaurant in Baltimore, Maryland. In fiscal 2010, the Company opened a Sullivan’s restaurant in Seattle, Washington. During fiscal 2011, the Company opened a Del Frisco’s in Boston, Massachusetts and a Del Frisco’s Grille in New York City and Dallas, Texas. The Company’s sole member interest is held by LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC, which is wholly owned by Holdings. The business and affairs of the Company are exclusively for the benefit of its sole member.

Basis of Presentation and Acquisition

The Acquisition resulted in a new valuation of the assets and liabilities of Star and its subsidiaries, based on their estimated fair values as of the date of Acquisition. Since the Fund acquired 100% of the capital stock of Star, the Company was required to apply push down accounting pursuant to the provisions of Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 54, Push down Basis of Accounting Required in Certain Limited Circumstances.

 

F-7


The Company has performed an evaluation of subsequent events through April 16, 2012, which is the date the consolidated financial statements were issued.

Unaudited Interim Financial Statements

The interim financial statements of the Company for the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012, respectively, included herein, have been prepared by the Company, without audit, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States for interim financial information, pursuant to the rules and regulations of the SEC. Accordingly, they do not include all the information and footnotes required by generally accepted accounting principles in the United States for complete financial statements. In the opinion of management, all adjustments, consisting of normal, recurring accruals, which the Company considers necessary for a fair presentation of the financial position and the results of the interim periods presented, have been included. The results for the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012 are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for the full year ending December 25, 2012. The Company’s first, second and third quarters each contain 12 operating weeks with the fourth quarter containing 16 operating weeks. The Company has performed an evaluation of subsequent events on the unaudited interim financial statements through May 17, 2012, which is the date the interim consolidated financial statements were available.

(2)    Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

Principles of Consolidation

The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its wholly owned subsidiaries. All significant intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated.

Fiscal Year

The Company operates on a 52- or 53-week fiscal year ending the last Tuesday in December. Fiscal 2009, 2010 and 2011 included 52 weeks of operations.

Concentrations

The Company has certain financial instruments exposed to a concentration of credit risk, which consist primarily of cash and cash equivalents. The Company places cash with high-credit-quality financial institutions, and, at times, such cash may be in excess of the federal depository insurance limit. The Company has cash equivalents of approximately $575 and $575 at December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, respectively, in money market mutual funds.

Additionally, the Company purchased approximately 97%, 100% and 100% of total beef purchases from four suppliers during fiscal 2009, 2010, and 2011, respectively. Due to the nature of the beef purchases, there are alternative sources of supply available; however, a change in suppliers could potentially cause increased costs.

Use of Estimates

The preparation of the consolidated financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

 

F-8


Cash and Cash Equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents include currency on hand, demand deposits with banks or other financial institutions, credit card receivables, and short-term investments with maturities of three months or less when purchased. Cash and cash equivalents are carried at cost, which approximates fair value.

Financial Instruments

The Company considers the carrying amounts of cash and cash equivalents, short-term investments, receivables, advances due to affiliate, and accounts payable to approximate fair value based on the short-term nature of these items. Borrowings under the credit facility at December 27, 2011 and at March 20, 2012 have variable interest rates that reflect currently available terms and conditions for similar debt. The carrying amount of the debt is a reasonable estimate of its fair value.

Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities

The Company records all derivatives on the consolidated balance sheets at fair value. Derivatives qualify for treatment as hedges when there is a high correlation between the change in fair value of the derivative instrument and the related change in value of the underlying hedged item. Derivatives that are not accounted for as hedges or the ineffective portions of qualifying hedges must be adjusted to fair value through earnings. For qualifying hedges, the effective portion of the derivative’s gain or loss is initially reported as a component of other comprehensive income (OCI) and subsequently reclassified into income when the hedged exposure affects income.

Cash flow hedges related to anticipated transactions are designated and documented at the inception of each hedge by matching the terms of the contract to the underlying transaction as well as its risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge. The Company classifies the cash flows from hedging transactions in the same categories on the statements of income and comprehensive income as the cash flows from the respective hedged items. Once established, cash flow hedges are generally not removed until maturity unless an anticipated transaction is no longer likely to occur. The Company does not engage in trading activities with its financial instruments.

The only derivative instruments used by the Company during the 2009 and 2010 fiscal years were an interest rate swap and collar to hedge the variability of a majority of its future interest payments on its variable rate debt. See Note 9 for additional information.

Inventories

Inventories, which primarily consist of food and beverages, are valued at the lower of cost, using the first-in, first-out (FIFO) method, or market.

Property and Equipment

Property and equipment are stated at cost. Maintenance, repairs, and renewals that do not enhance the value of or increase the lives of the assets are expensed as incurred. Buildings are depreciated using the straight-line method over their estimated useful lives of 20 to 25 years. Leasehold improvements are amortized using the straight-line method over the lesser of the estimated useful lives of the assets of 20 years or the expected term of the lease, including cancelable optional renewal periods when failure to exercise such renewal options would result in

 

F-9


an economic penalty to the Company. Furniture, fixtures, and equipment are depreciated using the straight-line method over three to seven years, which are the estimated useful lives of the assets.

Interest is capitalized in connection with the construction of restaurant facilities. The capitalized interest is recorded as part of the asset to which it relates and is amortized over the asset’s estimated useful life. Capitalized interest was $12, $0 and $204 for the years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, respectively.

Operating Leases

The Company leases restaurants under operating leases. The majority of the Company’s leases provide for rent escalation clauses, contingent rental expense, and/or tenant improvement allowances.

Rent expense is recognized on a straight-line basis over the expected term of the lease, which includes cancelable optional renewal periods that are reasonably assured to be exercised and where failure to exercise such renewal options would result in an economic penalty to the Company.

Certain of the Company’s operating leases contain clauses that provide additional contingent rent based on a percentage of sales greater than certain specified target amounts. The Company recognizes contingent rent expense prior to the achievement of the specified target that triggers the contingent rent, provided achievement of that target is considered probable.

The Company records tenant improvement allowances and other landlord incentives as a component of deferred rent which is amortized on a straight-line basis over the expected term of the lease.

Preopening Costs

Preopening costs, including labor costs, costs of hiring and training personnel, and certain other costs related to opening new restaurants, are expensed when the costs are incurred.

Deferred Offering Costs

Other current assets at December 27, 2011 and March 20, 2012 include deferred offering costs of $820 and $1,449 (unaudited), respectively, which reflect the costs incurred by the Company during 2011 and 2012 in connection with a proposed public offering of common stock which has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). Such costs will be charged to paid-in-capital at the time the offering is completed. Although the Company plans to complete the offering in 2012, there can be no assurance that the offering will be successful. Should the offering not be successful, any costs related to the offering will be expensed at the time the offering is terminated.

Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets

The Company’s intangible assets primarily include goodwill, trade names, and licensing permits. The Company’s trade names include “Del Frisco’s Double Eagle Steak House” and “Sullivan’s Steakhouse,” both of which have indefinite lives and, accordingly, are not subject to amortization. The trade names are used in the advertising and marketing of the restaurants and are widely recognized and accepted by consumers in their respective markets for providing its customers an enjoyable fine-dining experience. Goodwill represents the excess of costs over the fair value of the net assets acquired.

 

F-10


Goodwill and intangible assets that have indefinite useful lives are not amortized. However, both goodwill and trade names are subject to annual impairment testing. The Company amortizes its finite-lived intangible assets on a straight-line basis over the estimated period of benefit, generally seven to 17 years. See Note 3 for additional information.

The impairment evaluation for goodwill is conducted annually using a two-step process. In the first step, the fair value of each reporting unit is compared to the carrying amount of the reporting unit, including goodwill. The estimated fair value of the reporting unit is determined using discounted cash flows and a market-based approach. If the estimated fair value of the reporting unit is less than the carrying amount of the reporting unit, then a second step must be completed in order to determine the amount of the goodwill impairment that should be recorded. In the second step, the implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill is determined by allocating the reporting unit’s fair value to all of its assets and liabilities, other than goodwill, in a manner similar to a purchase price allocation. If the resulting implied fair value of the goodwill that results from the application of this second step is less than the carrying amount of the goodwill, an impairment charge is recorded for the difference. Currently, the Company defines the reporting units to be Del Frisco’s and Sullivan’s concepts. The Company performs its annual impairment test as of its year-end.

The evaluation of the carrying amount of other intangible assets with indefinite lives is made annually by comparing the carrying amount of these assets to their estimated fair value. The estimated fair value is determined on the basis of existing market-based conditions as well as discounted future cash flow or the royalty-relief method for trade names. If the estimated fair value is less than the carrying amount, an impairment charge is recorded to reduce the asset to its estimated fair value.

The assumptions used in the estimate of fair value are generally consistent with the past performance of each reporting unit and other intangible assets and are also consistent with the projections and assumptions that are used in current operating plans. These assumptions are subject to change as a result of changing economic and competitive conditions.

Loan Costs

Loan costs are stated at cost and amortized using the effective interest method over the life of the related loan.

Deferred Compensation Plan

In connection with the Company’s deferred-compensation plan, the Company has created a grantor trust to which it contributes amounts equal to employee participants’ qualified deferrals and the Company’s matching portion. The plan is informally funded using life insurance policies held by the grantor trust. All assets held by the grantor trust remain the property of the Company; however, the Company does not currently intend to use such assets for any purpose other than to fund payments to the participants pursuant to the terms of the deferred-compensation plan. The assets of the plan consist principally of cash surrender values of the life insurance policies. Because the investment assets of the deferred-compensation plan are assets of the Company and would be subject to general claims by creditors in the event of the Company’s insolvency, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets reflect such investments as assets, with a liability for deferred compensation reflected in long-term liabilities for amounts owed to employees.

 

F-11


Impairment of Long-Lived Assets

Property and equipment and finite-life intangibles are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. The Company reviews applicable finite-lived intangible assets and long-lived assets related to each restaurant on a periodic basis. The Company’s assessment of recoverability of property and equipment and finite-lived intangible assets is performed at the component level, which is generally an individual restaurant. When events or changes in circumstances indicate an asset may not be recoverable, the Company estimates the future cash flows expected to result from the use of the asset. If the sum of the expected undiscounted future cash flows is less than the carrying value of the asset, an impairment loss is recognized. The impairment loss is recognized by measuring the difference between the carrying value of the assets and the estimated fair value of the assets. The Company’s estimates of fair values are based on the best information available and require the use of estimates, judgments, and projections. The actual results may vary significantly from the estimates.

During fiscal 2011, the Company determined that the carrying amount of one of its Sullivan’s restaurants is most likely not recoverable. Therefore, the Company recorded a non-cash impairment charge of $1,400, which represents the difference between the carrying value of the restaurant assets and their estimated fair value, which was based on an estimated sales price.

Self-Insurance Reserves

The Company maintains self-insurance programs for its workers’ compensation and general liability issuance programs. In order to minimize the exposure under the self-insurance programs, the Company has purchased stop-loss coverage both on a per-occurrence and on an aggregate basis. The self-insured losses under the programs are accrued based on the Company’s estimate of the ultimate expected liability for both claims incurred and on an incurred but not reported basis. The establishment of such accruals for self-insurance involves certain management judgments and assumptions regarding the frequency or severity of claims, the historical patterns of claim development, and the Company’s experience with claim-reserve management and settlement practices. To the extent actual results differ from the assumptions used to develop the accruals, such unanticipated changes may produce significantly different amounts of expense than those estimated under the self-insurance programs.

Income Taxes

The Company uses the asset and liability method of accounting for income taxes. Under this method, deferred tax assets and liabilities are determined based on differences between financial reporting and tax basis of assets and liabilities and are measured using the enacted tax rates and laws that will be in effect when the differences are expected to reverse. The Company regularly evaluates the likelihood of realization of tax benefits derived from positions it has taken in various federal and state filings after consideration of all relevant facts, circumstances, and available information. For those tax benefits deemed more likely than not that will be sustained, the Company recognizes the benefit it believes is cumulatively greater than 50% likely to be realized. To the extent the Company were to prevail in matters for which accruals have been established or be required to pay amounts in excess of recorded reserves, the effective tax rate in a given financial statement period could be materially impacted.

Advertising Costs

Advertising costs are expensed as incurred. Advertising expense for the fiscal years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010, December 27, 2011 was $3,523, $2,825 and $4,359, respectively. Advertising costs incurred for the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012 were $727 (unaudited) and $874 (unaudited), respectively.

 

F-12


Revenue Recognition

Revenue from restaurant sales is recognized when food and beverage products are sold. Proceeds from the sale of gift cards are recorded as deferred revenue at the time of sale and recognized as income when the gift card is redeemed by the holder or the likelihood of redemption becomes remote (gift card breakage) and the Company determines there is no legal obligation to remit the value of the unredeemed gift cards to governmental agencies. The Company determines the gift card breakage rate based upon historical redemption patterns. Certain of the Company’s gift cards are sold on a discount and the net value (face value to be redeemed less the discount offered) is deferred until redeemed or breakage is deemed appropriate. The Company has deemed gift card breakage income immaterial for fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011 and the unaudited twelve week periods ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012, and it is included in revenues in the consolidated statements of income and comprehensive income. The Company excludes from revenue any taxes assessed by governmental agencies that are directly imposed on revenue-producing transactions between the Company and a customer.

Reclassifications

Certain amounts from the prior years have been reclassified to conform with the fiscal 2011 presentation.

Segment Reporting

The Company operates the Del Frisco’s, Sullivan’s, and Del Frisco’s Grille brands as operating segments. The concepts operate solely in the U.S. within the full-service dining industry, providing similar products to similar customers. The concepts also possess similar economic characteristics, resulting in similar long-term expected financial performance characteristics. Sales from external customers are derived principally from food and beverage sales. The Company does not rely on any major customers as a source of sales. The Company believes it meets the criteria for aggregating its operating segments into a single reporting segment.

Recently Issued Accounting Standards

In May 2011, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2011-04, Fair value Measurement (Topic 820), Amendments to Achieve Common Fair Value Measurement and Disclosure Requirements in U.S. GAAP and IFRS . Many of the amendments in this update change the wording used in the existing guidance to better align generally accepted accounting principles in the United States with International Financial Reporting Standards and to clarify the FASB’s intent on various aspects of the fair value guidance. The update also requires increased disclosure of quantitative information about unobservable inputs used in a fair value measurement that is categorized within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy. The update is effective for the Company beginning in fiscal 2012 and should be applied prospectively. Other than requiring additional disclosures, the new guidance did not have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements upon adoption in the interim period ending March 20, 2012.

In June 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-05, Comprehensive Income (Topic 220), Presentation of Comprehensive Income, which requires the Company to present the total of comprehensive income, the components of net income, and the components of other comprehensive income either in a single continuous statement of comprehensive income or in two separate but consecutive statements. The update eliminates the option to present the components of other comprehensive income as part of the statement of equity. In December

 

F-13


2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-12, Comprehensive Income (Topic 220), Deferral of Effective Date for Amendments to the Presentation of Reclassifications of Items Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income in ASU 2011-05, to defer the effective date of the specific requirement to present items that are reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income to net income alongside their respective components of net income and other comprehensive income. All other provisions of the update are effective for the Company in fiscal 2012 and have been applied retrospectively.

In September 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-08, Intangible-Goodwill and Other (Topic 350), Testing Goodwill for Impairment, which permits an entity to make a qualitative assessment of whether it is more likely than not that a reporting unit’s fair value is less than its carrying value before applying the two-step goodwill impairment model that is currently in place. If it is determined through qualitative assessment that a reporting unit’s fair value is more likely than not greater than its carrying value, the remaining impairment steps would be unnecessary. The qualitative assessment is optional, allowing the Company to go directly to the quantitative assessment. The update is effective in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2011, which for the Company will require adoption in fiscal 2012, however early adoption is permitted. The Company does not believe the new guidance will have a significant impact on its consolidated financial statements.

(3)    Intangible Assets and Goodwill

 

     December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
    March 20,
2012
 
           (Unaudited)  
     (In Thousands)  

Amortized intangible assets:

      

Gross carrying amount:

      

Favorable leasehold interests

   $ 848      $ 848      $ 848   

Licensing and development rights

     1,077        1,077        1,077   

Other

     110        198        198   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     2,035        2,123        2,123   

Accumulated amortization:

      

Favorable leasehold interests

     (458     (549     (570

Licensing and development rights

     (267     (333     (348

Other

     (17     (26     (29
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     (742     (908     (947
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net amortized intangible assets

   $ 1,293      $ 1,215      $ 1,176   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Unamortized intangible assets:

      

Goodwill

   $ 78,899      $ 77,687      $ 77,687   

Trade names

     34,893        34,893        34,893   

Liquor license permits

     175        385        385   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
   $ 113,967      $ 112,965      $ 112,965   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Licensing contract rights and favorable lease rights are being amortized using the straight-line method over the estimated lives of the related contracts and agreements, which are seven to nine years for favorable leasehold interest and 17 years for licensing contract rights. Liquor licenses are transferable and carried at cost. Such licenses are reviewed for impairment on an annual basis.

The Company has estimated that annual amortization expense will amount to approximately $168 for 2012, $163 for 2013, $149 for 2014, $122 for 2015, and $86 for 2016.

 

F-14


Amortization expense was $190, $175 and $166 for the years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010, and December 27, 2011, respectively. Amortization expense was $38 (unaudited) and $39 (unaudited) for the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012, respectively.

During fiscal 2009, goodwill was increased by $1,583 reflecting the increase in per-share amounts paid to certain former Star shareholders in the settlement of the amounts due the shareholders (see Note 10 for additional information).

During fiscal 2010, the Company’s remaining tax deductible goodwill was fully amortized. The Company performed the annual test for impairment of goodwill and intangible assets and concluded that no impairment existed as of December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 or December 27, 2011; accordingly, no impairment losses were recorded.

During fiscal 2011, the Company reduced goodwill by $1,212 as the result of a one-time correction to its income tax payable/receivable related to an over-accrual at the date of acquisition. See Note 6 for additional information.

On February 1, 2012, the Company entered into an agreement to terminate a license agreement with the licensee operating a Del Frisco’s in Orlando, Florida effective June 1, 2013. The original licensing agreement has been amortized over the expected term of the agreement, and has a remaining book value of $744 and $729 (unaudited) as of December 27, 2011 and March 20, 2012, respectively. Under the agreement, in exchange for the Company surrendering its right to receive licensing fees from January 1, 2012 through June 1, 2013 and making a one-time $25 (unaudited) payment to the licensee, the Company will have the rights to open and operate any of its restaurants in the three counties that make up the Orlando GMA no earlier than January 1, 2015. The Company accounted for this as an exchange of non-monetary assets, for which the Company has concluded that the fair value of the asset surrendered approximates its book value and therefore no gain or loss has been recorded on the exchange. To determine the fair value of the asset surrendered, the Company utilized a discounted cash flow method that applied a discount rate of 10.75%, the Company’s weighted-average cost of capital, to the future estimated cash flows to be received over the remaining term, including expected renewal, of the license agreement.

(4)    Related Party Transactions

General and Administrative Expenses

General and administrative expenses include charges from LSM, which is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of the Fund. These charges totaled $1,243, $1,275, and $269 for the years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, respectively and $182 (unaudited) and $0 (unaudited) for the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012, respectively. The charges are primarily for accounting, risk management, human resources and benefits administration, legal, management information services, and other shared support services. The amounts that are included in management fees to related party in the accompanying consolidated statements of income and comprehensive income are charged pursuant to a shared service agreement formerly between the Company and LSM. The Company cannot estimate with reasonable certainty what the charges for similar services would have been on a stand-alone basis. However, the Company believes that the charges are indicative of what it would have incurred on a stand-alone basis.

At the date of Acquisition, the Company entered into an agreement with Hudson Advisors, L.L.C. (Hudson), an affiliate of certain entities that holds an indirect investment interest in the Company. Pursuant to the agreement, Hudson provides certain asset management and advisory services to the Company. During the years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010, and

 

F-15


December 27, 2011, the Company incurred charges for such services of $1,635, $2,070, and $3,129, respectively, and $286 (unaudited) and $744 (unaudited) for the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012, respectively.

Advances Due to Affiliates

The Company had amounts payable to certain wholly owned subsidiaries of the Casual Dining Companies, which totaled approximately $45,269 at December 29, 2009. These advances were in the form of an unsecured promissory note bearing interest at 4.65%, for which the principal and interest were due December 31, 2014. During fiscal 2010, the Casual Dining Companies transferred their interest in the advances due from the Company to the Company’s Parent. In November 2010, the Company paid the advances in full from proceeds of a cash capital contribution from its Parent in the amount of $47,127. During the years ended December 29, 2009 and December 28, 2010, the Company incurred interest expense of $1,881 and $1,775, respectively, under the advances due to affiliate.

The average balance of the advances due to affiliates was approximately $44,414 and $39,124 for the years ended December 29, 2009 and December 28, 2010, respectively. Transactions during the periods presented consisted of the following items:

 

     December 29,
2009
     December 28,
2010
 
     (In Thousands)  

Beginning balance

   $ 43,356       $ 45,269   

Interest accrued on advances due to affiliates

     1,881         1,775   

Other

     32         83   

Payments

             (47,127
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Ending balance

   $ 45,269       $   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

For cash flow presentation purposes, the Company accounts for the interest accrued on advances due to affiliates as a noncash charge to income as the accrued interest is added to the principal of the debt as payment in kind. The in-kind amounts paid in 2010 are presented as an operating activity as such amounts were settled in cash.

During 2011, the Company recorded a $795 long-term liability for former employees’ health care costs with an offset to member’s equity in the form of a $477, net of deferred tax, deemed distribution. The liability should have been recorded at the date of Acquisition (described in Note 1). Prior years’ financial statements were not restated as the impact of this issue was immaterial to previously reported results for any individual prior year and 2011.

Long-Term Incentive Equity Compensation

In April 2007, Holdings provided long-term incentives to certain of the Company’s officers through the issuance of equity incentive awards in the form of its Class C interests. In addition, these same officers acquired Class B interests in Holdings for $525, which amount was subsequently contributed to the Company by Holdings. The Class B interests of Holdings, which were purchased at their estimated fair value, were fully vested upon issuance and have a stated return but do not participate in any increase in the value of Holdings. The Class C interests of Holdings, which represent a 7% equity participation in Holdings, vest ratably over a five-year period based on both continuing employment and the achievement of performance targets from 2007 through 2011. The Class C interests vest 7.5% annually over five years if the holder is employed on December 31 of each year . The annual compensation expense related to this 7.5% is based upon the value of Class C interests calculated at April 30, 2007, the date of grant. The

 

F-16


remaining Class C interests vest 12.5% annually in each of the five years if performance targets of each such year are achieved by December 31 of such year; however, these interests, subject to vesting upon achievement of performance targets, are forfeited and not eligible to vest at a later date if the performance targets for such year are not achieved. These awards are being accounted for as variable awards, which are revalued at the end of each reporting period until such interests are either vested or forfeited. Those Class C interests that have not been previously forfeited become fully vested if there is a change of control in the ownership of the Company or Holdings, as set forth in the operating agreement of Holdings. During 2009, 2010, and 2011, both the 7.5% service-based and the 12.5% performance-based of Class C interests vested for those participants still employed by the Company at the end of each year.

A contemporaneous independent appraisal was conducted by an unrelated valuation specialist to value the Class B and Class C interests at the date of grant as well as for the Class C interests at December 30, 2008. This valuation used the option value method, as further discussed below, to determine the estimated fair value of the interests. The estimated fair value of the Class B interests approximated the purchase value by the officers and was vested upon issuance, and therefore, no compensation cost was recorded on the Class B interests.

The estimated fair value of the Class C interests was calculated based on the estimated market value of the Company with discounts applied that related to lack of marketability, restrictions on the transferability of the Class C interests, and the preferences of Class A and B interests. The Class C interests only have value after the Class A and B interests are paid the amount invested in Holdings plus the stated rate of return of 12% on such invested amounts. The estimated fair value of the Class C interests was calculated using the option value method based on a risk-free interest rate of 0.62%; an expected life of approximately 1.75 years; and expected volatility of 34%, at December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011; and an estimated dividend yield of zero. The unrelated valuation specialist utilized the constant maturity treasury rate relative to the expected life for the expected risk-free interest rate, the volatility of comparable publicly traded companies for expected volatility, and the expected time between valuation date and a liquidity event for the expected life. This equity-based compensation totaled $170, $170, and $101 for the years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010, and December 27, 2011, respectively. The Company has recorded this equity-based compensation as a charge to earnings in its consolidated statements of income and comprehensive income with an affect to members’ equity in its consolidated statements of changes in member’s equity for the years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, respectively. As of December 31, 2011, only one of the original three Class C interest holders was still employed by the Company and all interest in Class B and Class C awards were fully vested.

During 2011, the Company distributed $357 to Wagon Holdings, which was recorded as a cash distribution to parent and is reflected on the Statement of Changes in Member’s Equity. Wagon Holdings, in turn, paid a former executive of the Company $357 as consideration for his surrendering his Class B and Class C interests. The consideration paid for surrender solely related to the value of Class B interests which was the amount invested in Holdings plus the stated rate of return of 12% on such invested amounts.

(5)    Leases

The Company leases certain facilities under noncancelable operating leases with terms expiring between 2012 and 2034. The leases have renewal options ranging from five to 20 years, which are exercisable at the Company’s option. In addition, certain leases contain escalation clauses based on a fixed percentage increase and provisions for contingent rentals based on a

 

F-17


percentage of gross revenues, as defined. Total rental expense amounted to $7,825, $8,228, and $11,601, including contingent rentals of approximately $1,549, $1,751, and $2,682 for the years ended December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010, and December 27, 2011, respectively. For the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 22, 2012, total rental expense was $2,666 (unaudited) and $2,877 (unaudited), respectively, including contingent rentals of $539 (unaudited) and $664 (unaudited), respectively. In 2011, the Company determined that straight-line rent expense on certain leases was recorded inconsistently and corrected the deferred rent liability account resulting in a non-cash $430 cumulative adjustment to record additional rent expense in the first fiscal quarter of 2011 relating to prior fiscal years. The adjustment did not impact historical cash flows and will not impact the timing of future cash payments under the related leases. Prior years’ financial statements were not restated as the impact of these issues was immaterial to previously reported results for any individual prior year and 2011.

Future minimum lease payments under noncancelable operating leases include renewal option periods for certain leases when such option periods are included for purposes of calculating straight-line rents. At December 27, 2011, future minimum rentals for each of the next five years and in total are as follows:

 

2012

   $ 9,389   

2013

     9,870   

2014

     10,158   

2015

     10,195   

2016

     10,185   

Thereafter

     108,881   
  

 

 

 

Total minimum lease payments

   $ 158,678   
  

 

 

 

During 2010, the Company entered into a sale-leaseback arrangement with a private investor group. Under the arrangement, the Company sold the land and building of its Sullivan’s restaurant located in Chicago, Illinois and leased a portion of the facility back for a term of 10 years with options to renew. The sale-leaseback transaction did not provide for any continuing involvement by the Company other than a normal lease where the Company intends to use the property during the lease term. The lease was accounted for as an operating lease. The net proceeds from the transaction of approximately $3,853 were used to reduce the Company’s indebtedness under its credit facility. The Company realized a gain of approximately $743 which has been deferred and is being amortized over the life of the lease as a reduction in rent expense.

On January 24, 2011, the Company entered into a sale-leaseback arrangement with a private investor group. Under the arrangement, the Company sold the land and building of two of its Del Frisco’s restaurants located in Denver, Colorado and Ft. Worth, Texas and leased them back for a term of 15 years with options to renew. The sale-leaseback transactions do not provide for any continuing involvement by the Company other than a normal lease where the Company intends to use the property during the lease term. The leases were accounted for as operating leases. The aggregate annual lease obligation for the first year of the arrangement is approximately $1,151 with lease rental escalating every five years thereafter. The net proceeds from the transaction were approximately $13,235. Approximately $10,405 of the net proceeds were used to pay down the Company’s indebtedness under its credit facility. The Company realized a gain of approximately $8,699 which has been deferred and is being amortized over the life of the leases as a reduction in rent expense.

 

F-18


(6)    Income Taxes

The components of the provision for income taxes consist of the following (in thousands):

 

     Year Ended  
     December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
 

Current tax (benefit) expense:

      

Federal

   $ (1,536   $ (2,349   $ 3,231   

State

     (848     2,543        2,256   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total current tax (benefit) expense

     (2,384     194        5,487   

Deferred tax expense (benefit):

      

Federal

     5,250        (208     (1,127

State

     750        (30     (609
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax expense (benefit)

     6,000        (238     (1,736
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total provision for income taxes

   $ 3,616      $ (44   $ 3,751   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The difference between the reported provision for income taxes and taxes determined by applying the applicable U.S. federal statutory income tax rate to income before taxes from continuing operations is reconciled as follows (dollars in thousands):

 

     December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
 

Income tax expense at federal statutory rate

   $ 4,772        35   $ 3,079        35   $ 4,493        35

State tax expense, net

     733        5     672        8     751        6

FICA tip and work opportunity credits

     (1,373     (10 )%      (1,496     (17 )%      (1,768     (14 )% 

Nondeductible (nontaxable) insurance

     (429     (3 )%      (237     (3 )%      450        3

Other items, net

     (87            (2,062     (23 )%      (175     (1 )% 
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Provision for income taxes

   $ 3,616        27   $ (44     0   $ 3,751        29
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

In fiscal 2010, Other items, net consisted primarily of a $3,683 tax benefit for the reversal of previously reserved unrecognized tax benefits resulting from the expiration of the statute of limitations in 2010 relating to various uncertain tax positions. The impact of the reversal was partially offset by an additional provision of $1,503 related to income tax accruals provided for various newly identified uncertain tax positions.

 

F-19


Deferred income taxes reflect the net effects of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and amounts used for income tax purposes. Significant components of deferred tax assets and liabilities are presented below (in thousands):

 

    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
 

Deferred tax assets:

   

Equity-based compensation

  $ 326      $ 366   

Accrued liabilities

    1,903        2,197   

Deferred compensation

    3,036        2,848   

Deferred rent liabilities

    2,401        3,198   

Other

    2,159        2,101   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax assets

    9,825        10,710   

Deferred tax liabilities:

   

Property and equipment

    7,026        7,559   

Intangible assets

    15,130        13,384   

Other

    56        100   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax liabilities

    22,212        21,043   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net deferred tax liabilities

  $ (12,387   $ (10,333
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Company accounts for unrecognized tax benefits in accordance with the provisions of FASB guidance which, among other directives, requires uncertain tax positions to be recognized only if they are more likely than not to be upheld based on their technical merits. The measurement of the uncertain tax position is based on the largest benefit amount that is more likely than not (determined on a cumulative probability basis) to be realized upon settlement.

The Company may, from time to time, be assessed interest or penalties by major tax jurisdictions, although any such assessments historically have been minimal and immaterial to the Company’s financial results. In the event the Company receives an assessment for interest and penalties, it has been classified in the consolidated financial statements as income tax expense. Generally, the Company’s federal, state, and local tax returns for years subsequent to 2007 remain open to examination by the major taxing jurisdictions to which the Company is subject.

At December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, the Company’s unrecognized tax benefits totaled approximately $1,691, and $1,631, respectively, related primarily to acquisitions and state tax issues. In 2010, the change in the unrecognized tax benefits, as reflected in the Other, net line of the effective tax rate reconciliation above, primarily relates to the release of exposure items due to the expiration of the statute of limitations, offset by additions for positions taken in prior years. The Company does not believe its uncertain tax positions will change materially during the next 12 months. A reconciliation of the beginning and ending amount of unrecognized tax benefits is as follows (in thousands):

 

    Year Ended  
    December 29,
2009
    December 28,
2010
    December 27,
2011
 

Balance at beginning of year

  $ 4,376      $ 4,133      $ 1,691   

Additions resulting from current year positions

                    

Additions for positions taken in prior years

           804          

Expiration of statute of limitations

    (243     (3,246     (60
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at end of year

  $ 4,133      $ 1,691      $ 1,631   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-20


The Company accrues interest and penalties in its tax provision. As of December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, accrued interest and penalties included in the consolidated balance sheets totaled $1,874 and $2,245, respectively. The change in interest and penalties associated with the Company’s unrecognized tax benefits is included as a component of the Other, net line of the effective tax rate reconciliation.

In the fourth quarter of fiscal 2011, the Company determined that its net income tax receivable had been understated by approximately $1,505 at December 28, 2010. Of this amount, $1,212 was determined by the Company to relate to the over accrual of income tax expense in periods prior to the Acquisition (described in Note 1). The remaining $293 was determined to relate to the over accrual of income tax expense in fiscal years 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010. The Company corrected this immaterial error in the income tax receivable/payable in the fourth quarter of 2011 resulting in a non-cash cumulative adjustment to reduce goodwill by $1,212 and reduce income tax expense by $293, which is included in Other items, net in the rate reconciliation. Prior years’ financial statements were not restated as the impact of the adjustment was immaterial to previously reported results for any individual prior year and 2011.

The effective income tax rate was 30.0% (unaudited) and 30.3% (unaudited) for the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012, respectively. The factors that cause the effective tax rates to vary from the federal statutory rate of 35% include the impact of FICA tip and other credits, partially offset by state income taxes and certain non-deductible expenses.

(7)    Long-Term Debt

In July 29 2011, the Company terminated its prior credit facility and replaced it with a new credit facility that provides for a five-year term loan of $70,000 and a five-year revolving credit facility of up to $10,000. Borrowings under the new credit facility bear interest at a rate between LIBOR plus 4.75% and LIBOR plus 5.75%, depending on the Company’s leverage ratio. Interest is payable quarterly. Principal payments are due in quarterly payments of $875 commencing September 30, 2013 with the balance due July 29, 2016. Mandatory prepayments may be required in certain circumstances as defined in the agreement. The Company is required to pay a commitment fee equal to 0.50% per annum on the available but unused revolving loan facility. The credit facility is secured by substantially all of the Company’s assets. The new credit facility contains various financial covenants, including a maximum ratio of total indebtedness to EBITDA, as defined in the credit agreement, a minimum amount of EBITDA plus corporate general and administrative expenses, a minimum ratio of EBITDA plus certain non-recurring items to fixed charges (including consolidated capital expenses) and a minimum level of liquidity, as defined in the credit agreement. The new credit facility also contains covenants restricting certain corporate actions, including asset dispositions, acquisitions, the payment of dividends, changes of control, the incurrence of indebtedness and providing financing or other transactions with affiliates. The Company was in compliance with all of the debt covenants as of December 27, 2011 and March 20, 2012. As of December 27, 2011, future maturities of long-term debt under the new credit facility, exclusive of interest, were as follows:

 

2012

   $   

2013

     875   

2014

     3,500   

2015

     3,500   

2016

     62,125   
  

 

 

 

Total

     70,000   

Less current portion

       
  

 

 

 
   $
70,000
  

 

F-21


As of March 20, 2012, future maturities of long-term debt under the new credit facility, exclusive of interest, were as follows (unaudited):

 

2012

   $   

2013

     875   

2014

     3,500   

2015

     3,500   

2016

     57,125   
  

 

 

 

Total

     65,000   

Less current portion

       
  

 

 

 
   $ 65,000   

As of December 27, 2011, the outstanding balances on the Company’s term loan and its revolving loan were $70,000 and $0, respectively, at a weighted-average interest rate of 6.75%. Under the revolving loan commitment, the Company had approximately $10,000 of borrowings available under its revolving credit facility.

During the twelve weeks ended March 20, 2012, the Company made a $5,000 (unaudited) voluntary principal payment of a portion of its term loan. As of March 20, 2012, the outstanding balances on the Company’s term loan and its revolving loan were $65,000 (unaudited) and $0 (unaudited), respectively, at a weighted-average interest rate of 6.75% (unaudited). Under the revolving loan commitment, the Company had approximately $10,000 (unaudited) of borrowings available.

The Company entered into its prior credit facility on July 9, 2007 with a bank syndicate that provided for term loans of $110,000 and up to an aggregate of $20,000 in revolving commitments, which could be used as lines of credit or letters of credit. Principal was payable in quarterly installments of $275 beginning September 4, 2007, with a final balloon payment of $102,600 due in July 2014. In addition, the Company was required to make additional principal payments of up to 75% of excess cash flows, as defined in the credit facility agreement. Interest was payable either monthly or quarterly at a rate that was determinable by the Company to equal either (i) a base rate, equal to the greater of the prime rate in effect on such day, or the federal funds effective rate in effect on such day plus 0.5%, plus an additional 1.5% or 1.75% depending on senior debt rating of the Company, or (ii) a Eurodollar rate, equal to LIBOR plus 2.5% or 2.75% depending on the senior debt rating of the Company.

On October 5, 2009, the Company amended its July 9, 2007 credit facility with a bank syndicate. The amended facility provided for term loans of $106,025 and up to an aggregate of $16,000 in revolving commitments, which could be used as lines of credit or letters of credit. In connection with the amendment, the Company was required to make an additional $1,500 principal payment in October 2009. Principal was payable in quarterly installments of $750 beginning December 29, 2009, with a final balloon payment due in July 2014. In addition, the Company was required to make additional principal payments of up to 100% of excess cash flows, as defined in the amended credit facility agreement, until the outstanding combined principal balance is less than or equal to $75,000, at which time the Company was required to make additional principal payments of up to 80% of excess cash flows. The additional principal payment required for 2009 pursuant to the excess cash flow calculation was $6,000 and was paid in March 2010. There were no additional principal payments required for 2010 due to voluntary principal payments made during 2010. Amounts available under the revolving commitments were permanently reduced in consecutive quarterly installments of $250, commencing March 23, 2010. The amendment also increased the interest rates payable by the Company. Interest was payable at a rate that is determinable by the Company to equal either

 

F-22


(i) a Base Rate, or (ii) a Eurodollar Rate as defined in the agreement, plus an additional 5.5% to 8.0% depending on the senior debt rating of the Company and the outstanding combined principal balance of the loans (9.25% at December 28, 2010). In addition, the Company was required to pay a commitment fee equal to 0.75% per annum on the available but unused revolving loan facility. The amendment reduced the existing financial covenant requirements to three, including an interest coverage ratio, an adjusted debt leverage ratio and a minimum EBITDAR requirement. The amendment also placed additional limitations on the amount of new restaurant capital expenditures the Company can invest.

As of December 28, 2010, the outstanding balances on the Company’s term loan and its revolving loan were $78,922 and $0, respectively, at a weighted-average interest rate of 9.25%. The credit facility was secured by substantially all of the assets of the Company. The note required mandatory prepayments equal to the receipt of any proceeds from the disposition of any secured assets or any insurance proceeds obtained from a covered loss of secured assets for which proceeds are not used to replace or repair such asset. The Company was required to maintain certain financial covenants as described above. In addition, among other things, the Company was prohibited from paying dividends, incurring additional indebtedness, disposing of assets, or consummating mergers or acquisitions without the prior consent of the bank syndicate. The Company was in compliance with all debt covenants at December 28, 2010.

(8)    Retirement Plans

The Company provides two retirement benefit plans to participants. The salary-reduction plans are provided through a qualified 401(k) plan and a nonqualified deferred compensation plan (the Plans). Under the Plans, employees who meet minimum service requirements and elect to participate may make contributions of up to 15% of their annual salaries under the 401(k) plan and up to 80% under the deferred-compensation plan. The Company may make additional contributions at the discretion of the Board of Directors. Expenses related to the Plans for the years ended, December 29, 2009, December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011, totaled $1,061, $911 and $1,009, respectively. Expenses related to the Plans for the twelve weeks ended March 22, 2011 and March 20, 2012 totaled $260 (unaudited) and $299 (unaudited), respectively.

(9)    Derivative Financial Instruments

The Company enters into derivative instruments for risk management purposes only. The Company uses interest rate-related derivative instruments to manage its exposure to fluctuations in interest rates. By using these instruments, the Company exposes itself, from time to time, to credit risk and market risk. Credit risk is the failure of the counterparty to perform under the terms of the derivative contract. When the fair value of a derivative contract is positive, the counterparty owes the Company, which creates credit risk for the Company. The Company minimizes the credit risk by entering into transactions with high-quality counterparties whose credit rating is evaluated on a regular basis. The Company’s counterparty in the interest rate collar and interest rate swap was Barclays Bank PLC. Market risk is the adverse effect on the value of a financial instrument that results from changing interest rates. The Company minimizes market risk by establishing and monitoring parameters that limit the types and degree of market risk that may be taken.

On September 27, 2007, the Company entered into a three-year interest rate collar to hedge the variability of future interest payments on borrowings of approximately $64,725 of the Company’s outstanding long-term debt. The interest rate collar consisted of a combination of a purchased cap option with a three-month LIBOR cap rate of 5.75% and a sold floor option with a three-month LIBOR floor rate of 3.23%. This derivative was not accounted for as a hedge under the hedge accounting guidance. Accordingly, this derivative was marked-to-market, and gains

 

F-23


and losses were recognized in interest expense. The change in fair value of this interest rate collar during 2009, and 2010 resulted in a reduction of interest expense totaling $950, and $976, respectively. The derivative transaction expired in July 2010.

On February 17, 2008, the Company entered into an interest rate swap agreement to limit the variability of its interest payments on $25,000 of its outstanding long-term debt. Under the terms of the swap, the Company pays a fixed rate of 3.1% on the $25,000 notional amount and receives payments from the counterparty based on the three-month LIBOR rate for a term ending July 9, 2010. For the year ending December 30, 2008, and for the period through October 4, 2009, this interest rate swap was accounted for as a cash flow hedge, and, accordingly, all changes in the fair value of the interest rate swap deemed highly effective in offsetting the variability in interest payments on the long-term debt attributable to fluctuations in three-month LIBOR rates were recorded in other comprehensive income on the balance sheet. On October 5, 2009, the Company determined that there was no longer a high correlation between the change in fair value of this derivative instrument and the underlying interest expense, due to the credit facility amendment placing a floor of 2.5% on the Eurodollar rate, as defined in the agreement, which equates to the three-month LIBOR rate. Therefore, as of October 5, 2009, the Company de-designated the hedge and, accordingly, commenced to amortize the unrealized deferred loss over the remaining life of the contract from other comprehensive income, net of tax. The accumulated deferred loss at December 29, 2009 was $220, net of tax and $0 at December 28, 2010. The change in the accumulated deferred loss is recorded through the consolidated income statements as interest expense.

At December 29, 2009, the fair value of these derivatives resulted in a liability of approximately $1,344, which is included in other current liabilities in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets. All of the Company’s derivative instruments expired during 2010 and the Company did not have any derivative instruments outstanding at December 28, 2010.

(10)    Litigation

On September 8, 2006, in connection with the Acquisition, a class action lawsuit was filed in Sedgwick County District Court by Superior Partners against Star, the individual members of the Board of Directors of Star, its former Chief Executive Officer, and the Fund. The complaint alleged that the Directors breached their duty of care, loyalty, and disclosure when negotiating the sale of the Company. On November 17, 2006, another class action lawsuit was filed in Sedgwick County District Court by Leo Kwalik against Star, the individual members of the Board of Directors of Star, and the Fund. The complaint contained similar allegations as the Superior Partners lawsuit. In March 2007, both cases were consolidated into one lawsuit. On May 13, 2009, the Company and the plaintiffs negotiated a settlement that dismissed this class action lawsuit. The resulting uninsured loss was not significant to the accompanying consolidated financial statements.

In connection with the Acquisition, on February 7, 2007, certain shareholders of Star exercised their dissenters’ rights and chose not to accept the $27.35 per share transaction consideration and filed a petition to have their respective shares of stock appraised at fair value pursuant to Delaware law. Initially the Company recorded a liability equal to the purchase price per share of $27.35 or an aggregate of $32,793 at the date of Acquisition. This liability was reduced by $372 and $1,495 during fiscal 2007 and 2008, respectively, as a result of certain shareholders that subsequently accepted the $27.35 per share price and accordingly, were paid by the Company. The recorded liability at December 30, 2008 was $30,926. During fiscal 2009, the Company settled its outstanding litigation with the remaining dissenting shareholders for an aggregate consideration of $32,509. Pursuant to the Company’s credit facility entered into on July 9, 2007, any cash payments made by the Company in settlement of the amounts due

 

F-24


dissenting shareholders were required to be reimbursed by Holdings as an equity contribution. In connection with the settlement, the Company paid $19,800 in cash and received a cash equity contribution from Holdings for $19,800. In addition, Holdings assumed the remaining obligation in the amount of $12,709 due to the dissenting shareholders. The assumption of the indebtedness is reflected as an increase in member’s equity in the accompanying consolidated financial statements. As a result of the settlement, the Company increased its carrying value of goodwill by $1,583 to reflect the increase in the per share amount paid in the settlement. Further, the Company reversed certain interest expense accrued prior to the settlement, resulting in a reduction to interest expense of $1,180.

The Company is involved, from time to time, in litigation arising in the ordinary course of business. The Company believes the outcome of such matters will not have a material adverse effect on its consolidated financial position or results of operations.

(11)    Member’s Equity

In November 2010, the Company received a cash equity contribution from its Parent in the amount of $47,127. The proceeds from the equity contribution were used to retire in full certain advances due affiliate (see Note 4 for additional information).

(12)    Commitments and Contingencies

Prior to the Acquisition, the Company guaranteed certain lease payments of Star’s subsidiaries in connection with the leasing of real estate for restaurant locations. As of December 27, 2011, the Company was responsible as guarantor for five of the leases of its affiliates. The leases expire at various times through 2016. These guarantees will require payment by the Company only in an event of default by the affiliate where it is unable to make the required lease payments. During 2010 and 2011, the Company incurred expenses of $280 and $130 in connection with certain of these guarantees in return for releases from such guarantees which are included in other expenses. Management believes that any future payments required under these guarantees will not be significant. At December 27, 2011 and March 20, 2012 the maximum potential amount of future payments the Company could be required to make as a result of the guarantee was $2,549 and $2,411 (unaudited), respectively.

At December 27, 2011 and March 20, 2012 (unaudited), the Company had outstanding letters of credit of $976, which were collateralized by restricted cash. The letters of credit typically act as guarantee of payment to certain third parties in accordance with specified terms and conditions.

(13)    Fair Value Measurement

Under generally accepted accounting principles in the United States, the Company is required to measure certain assets and liabilities at fair value, or to disclose the fair value of certain assets and liabilities recorded at cost. Pursuant to these fair value measurement and disclosure requirements, fair value is defined as the price that would be received upon sale of an asset or paid upon transfer of a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date and in the principal or most advantageous market for that asset or liability. The fair value is calculated based on assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability, not on assumptions specific to the entity. In addition, the fair value of liabilities includes consideration of non-performance risk, including the Company’s own credit risk. Each fair value measurement is reported in one of the following three levels:

 

   

Level 1—valuation inputs are based upon unadjusted quoted prices for identical instruments traded in active markets.

 

   

Level 2—valuation inputs are based upon quoted prices for similar instruments in active markets, quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in markets that are not active,

 

F-25


 

and model-based valuation techniques for which all significant assumptions are observable in the market or can be corroborated by observable market data for substantially the full term of the assets or liabilities.

 

   

Level 3—valuation inputs are unobservable and typically reflect management’s estimates of assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability. The fair values are therefore determined using model-based techniques that include option pricing models, discounted cash flow models, and similar techniques.

The following tables present our financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis at December 28, 2010 and December 27, 2011 (in thousands):

 

     December 28, 2010  
     Fair Value      Level 1      Level 2  

Assets:

        

Deferred compensation plan investments

   $ 6,583       $       $ 6,583   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 6,583       $       $ 6,583   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities:

        

Deferred compensation plan liabilities

   $ 7,590       $       $ 7,590   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

   $ 7,590       $       $ 7,590   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     December 27, 2011  
     Fair Value      Level 1      Level 2  

Assets:

        

Deferred compensation plan investments

   $ 6,159       $       $ 6,159   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 6,159       $       $ 6,159   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities:

        

Deferred compensation plan liabilities

   $ 7,841       $       $ 7,841   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

   $ 7,841       $       $ 7,841   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The following table presents our financial liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis at March 20, 2012 (in thousands):

 

     March 20, 2012 (unaudited)  
     Fair Value      Level 1      Level 2  

Assets:

        

Deferred compensation plan investments

   $ 6,943       $       $ 6,943   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 6,943       $       $ 6,943   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities:

        

Deferred compensation plan liabilities

   $ 8,408       $       $ 8,408   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

   $ 8,408       $       $ 8,408   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

There were no transfers among levels within the fair value hierarchy during the years ended December 28, 2010 or December 27, 2011.

The Company has no derivative instruments at December 28, 2010 or December 27, 2011.

At December 28, 2010, the Company does not have any nonfinancial assets or liabilities that have been measured at fair value on a recurring basis.

 

F-26


The following table presents our non-financial assets measured at fair value on a non- recurring basis at December 27, 2011 (in thousands):

 

     December 27, 2011   
     Fair Value      Level 1      Level 2  

Assets:

        

Long-lived assets held and used

   $ 1,850       $       $ 1,850   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 1,850       $       $ 1,850   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

During fiscal 2011, the Company determined that the carrying amount of one of its Sullivan’s restaurants is most likely not recoverable. Therefore, the Company recorded a non-cash impairment charge of $1,400, which represents the difference between the carrying value of the restaurant assets and their estimated fair value, which was based on an estimated sales price.

(14)    Other

Initial Public Offering and Unaudited Pro Forma Information, Including Income Per Share

In January 2012, the Company filed a registration statement with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) that would permit the sale of shares of the Company’s stock in a proposed initial public offering (IPO). Immediately prior to the effectiveness of the registration statement, the Company will convert from a limited liability company into a Delaware corporation. Additionally, shares of the newly formed corporation will be issued to the existing holders of units in the Company. Upon the successful completion of the anticipated IPO, the Fund will beneficially own approximately     % of the Company’s outstanding shares and accordingly, will continue to control the Company.

In connection with the IPO, the Company intends to adopt a long-term equity incentive plan to promote the Company’s interests by providing eligible persons with the opportunity to share in the appreciation of the Company’s stock. The plan will allow the Board of Directors to grant stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock units, deferred stock units and other equity-based awards to employees, officers, non-employee directors and other service providers. The plan will also provide that the exercise price for any option granted under the plan, including options granted at the time of the pricing of the IPO, may not be less than the fair value of the stock subject to the option on the date of grant other than in limited circumstances in the context of a substitute or replacement grant made in connection with a merger or other acquisition. The Company intends to grant options to its officers and certain director nominees under this plan at the time of the pricing of the IPO with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price.

The unaudited pro forma balance sheet at March 20, 2012 reflects the corporate reorganization of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC into a Delaware corporation. All amounts attributable to member’s equity and undistributed earnings were reclassified as paid-in-capital in the pro forma balance sheet.

There is no impact to the financial statements as a result of converting from a limited liability company to a corporation, because the historical financial statements of the Company have included a provision for income taxes and related deferred income taxes. Unaudited pro forma basic and diluted income per share will be computed by dividing net income for each period by the shares of common stock to be issued upon the corporate reorganization. Such shares will be assumed to be outstanding for all periods presented. There will be no potentially dilutive securities.

 

F-27


 

LOGO


LOGO


PART II

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN THE PROSPECTUS

Item 13.     Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution

The following table shows the costs and expenses, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, payable in connection with the sale and distribution of the securities being registered. Except as otherwise noted, we will pay all of these amounts. All amounts except the SEC registration fee, the NASDAQ listing fee and the FINRA fee are estimated.

 

Type

   Amount  

SEC registration fee

   $ 11,460   

FINRA filing fee

     10,500  

NASDAQ listing fee

     168,500  

Legal fees and expenses

     *  

Accounting fees and expenses

     *  

Printing and engraving expenses

     *  

Transfer agent and registrar fees

     3,500  

Miscellaneous expenses

     *  
  

 

 

 

Total

   $ *  
  

 

 

 

 

* To be provided by amendment.

Item 14.     Indemnification of Directors and Officers

Our current amended and restated limited liability company agreement provides that each member, the managing member, officer or a director, officer, member, manager, trustee, partner or stockholder of a member and other persons acting in good faith on behalf of our company is entitled to be indemnified, defended and held harmless by us to the full extent permitted by the Delaware Limited Liability Company Act for liabilities and expenses arising from proceedings that relate to the operations of the company or any subsidiary in which an indemnitee may be involved or is threatened to be involved as a party or otherwise unless it is established that the act or omission of the indemnitee was committed in bad faith or was the result of active and deliberate dishonesty, willful misconduct or gross negligence, the indemnitee actually received an improper personal benefit or the indemnitee had reasonable cause to believe that the act or omission was unlawful.

Upon our conversion and reorganization, Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. will be a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Delaware. Section 145(a) of the Delaware General Corporation Law, or DGCL, authorizes a corporation to indemnify any person who was or is a party, or is threatened to be made a party, to a threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (other than an action by or in the right of the corporation), by reason of the fact that the person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, against expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by the person in connection with such action, suit or proceeding, if the person acted in good faith and in a manner the person reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, the best interests of the corporation and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe the person’s conduct was unlawful.

 

II-1


Section 145(b) of the DGCL provides in relevant part that a corporation may indemnify any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action or suit by or in the right of the corporation to procure a judgment in its favor by reason of the fact that the person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise against expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably incurred by the person in connection with the defense or settlement of such action or suit if the person acted in good faith and in a manner the person reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the corporation and except that no indemnification shall be made in respect of any claim, issue or matter as to which such person shall have been adjudged to be liable to the corporation unless and only to the extent that the Court of Chancery or the court in which such action or suit was brought shall determine upon application that, despite the adjudication of liability but in view of all the circumstances of the case, such person is fairly and reasonably entitled to indemnity for such expenses which the Court of Chancery or such other court shall deem proper.

The DGCL also provides that indemnification under Section 145(d) can only be made upon a determination that indemnification of the present or former director, officer or employee or agent is proper in the circumstances because such person has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in Section 145(a) and (b). Such determination shall be made, with respect to a person who is a director or officer at the time of such determination, (1) by a majority vote of directors who are not a party to the action at issue (even though less than a quorum), or (2) by a majority vote of a designated committee of these directors (even though less than a quorum), or (3) if there are no such directors, or these directors authorize, by the written opinion of independent legal counsel, or (4) by the stockholders.

Section 145(g) of the DGCL also empowers a corporation to purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of any person who is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise against any liability asserted against such person and incurred by such person in any such capacity, or arising out of such person’s status as such, whether or not the corporation would have the power to indemnify such person against such liability under Section 145 of the DGCL.

Section 102(b)(7) of the DGCL permits a corporation to provide for eliminating or limiting the personal liability of one of its directors for any monetary damages related to a breach of fiduciary duty as a director, as long as the corporation does not eliminate or limit the liability of a director for acts or omissions which (1) were in bad faith, (2) were the result of active and deliberate dishonesty and were material to the cause of action so adjudicated, (3) the director derived an improper personal benefit from (such as a financial profit or other advantage to which such director was not legally entitled) or (4) breached the director’s duty of loyalty.

We will be party to indemnification agreements with each of our officers and directors that will provide, in general, that we will indemnify them to the fullest extent permitted by law in connection with their service to us or on our behalf.

The proposed form of Underwriting Agreement to be filed as Exhibit 1.1 to this Registration Statement provides for indemnification of our directors and officers by the underwriters against certain liabilities.

 

II-2


Item 15.     Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities

We have not issued any securities that were not registered under the Securities Act since June 11, 2009.

Item 16.     Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules

 

(a) Exhibit Index

See the Exhibit Index following the signature page.

 

(b) Financial Statement Schedule

None. Financial statement schedules have been omitted because the information is included in our consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this Registration Statement.

Item 17.     Undertakings

(a) The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriter at the closing specified in the underwriting agreements, certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriter to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

(b) Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

(c) The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:

(i) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act of 1933 shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

(ii) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

 

II-3


SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized in the City of Southlake, State of Texas, on June 11, 2012.

 

Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC
By:  

/s/    Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

Name:  

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

Title:   Chief Financial Officer

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the following persons have signed this Registration Statement in the capacities and on the date indicated.

 

*

Mark S. Mednansky

  

Chief Executive Officer

(Principal Executive Officer)

  June 11, 2012

*

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

  

Chief Financial Officer

(Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)

  June 11, 2012

*

Jennifer R. Lamprecht

   Director   June 11, 2012

 

*By:

  /s/    Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.        
 

Thomas J. Pennison, Jr.

Attorney-in-fact

 

II-4


EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit No.

 

Description

  1.1*   Form of Underwriting Agreement.
  3.1   Form of Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant to be adopted.
  3.2   Form of Bylaws of the Registrant to be adopted.
  4.1*   Form of Certificate of Common Stock of the Registrant.
  4.2   Form of Registration Rights Agreement, dated                    , between Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. and LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC.
  5.1*   Opinion of Gibson, Dunn & Crutcher LLP.
10.1**   Credit and Guaranty Agreement, dated as of July 29, 2011, by and among Center Cut Hospitality, Inc., Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC, certain subsidiaries of Center Cut Hospitality, Inc., as guarantors, the lenders party thereto from time to time, and Goldman Sachs Bank USA, as administrative agent, collateral agent, and lead arranger.
10.2**   First Amendment to Credit and Guaranty Agreement, dated as of August 24, 2011, by and among Center Cut Hospitality, Inc., Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC, the other Credit Parties party thereto, Goldman Sachs Bank USA, as administrative agent, and the Lenders party thereto.
10.3   Form of Indemnification Agreement for officers and directors.
10.4**#   Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan, effective as Amended and Restated December 1, 2007.
10.5**#   First Amendment to Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan, dated as of December 31, 2009.
10.6**#   Executive Employment Agreement, dated February 7, 2011, by and between Mark Mednansky and Center Cut Hospitality, Inc.
10.7**#   Letter Agreement, dated February 14, 2011, by and between Mark Mednansky and LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC.
10.8**#   Letter Agreement, dated October 21, 2011, by and between LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC, Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC and Mark S. Mednansky.
10.9**#   Executive Employment Agreement, dated October 17, 2011, by and between Thomas J. Pennison, Jr. and Center Cut Hospitality, Inc.
10.10**#   Letter Agreement, dated October 17, 2011, by and between Thomas J. Pennison, Jr. and LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC and Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC.
10.11**#   Non-Competition, Confidentiality, and Non-Solicitation Agreement, dated July 13, 1999, by and between Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc. and Thomas G. Dritsas.
10.12**#   Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated June 10, 2010, by and between Sullivan’s of North Carolina, Inc. and Thomas G. Dritsas.
10.13**#   Employment Agreement, effective January 4, 2012, between Thomas G. Dritsas and Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC
10.14**#   Non-Competition, Confidentiality, and Non-Solicitation Agreement, dated April 16, 2008, by and between Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC and William S. Martens.

 

II-5


Exhibit No.

 

Description

10.15**#   Subscription Agreement, dated April 30, 2007, by and between Mark S. Mednansky and LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC.
10.16**#   Subscription Agreement, dated April 30, 2007, by and between Jon W. Howie and LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC.
10.17**#   Executive Employment Agreement, dated February 7, 2011, by and between Jon W. Howie and Center Cut Hospitality, Inc.
10.18**#   Letter Agreement, dated February 7, 2011, by and between LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC, Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC and Jon W. Howie.
10.19**#   Letter Agreement, dated February 14, 2011, by and between Jon W. Howie and LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC.
10.20**#   Separation Agreement and Release, dated May 26, 2011, by and between Jon W. Howie and Center Cut Hospitality, Inc.
10.21**#   Equity Surrender and Release Agreement, dated May 26, 2011, by and between Jon W. Howie and LSF5 COI Holdings, LLC.
10.22**#   Offer Letter, dated May 11, 2010, by and between Edie A. Ames and Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC.
10.23**#   Executive Employment Agreement, dated February 7, 2011, by and between Edie A. Ames and Center Cut Hospitality, Inc.
10.24**#   Letter Agreement, dated February 7, 2011, by and between LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC, Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC and Edie A. Ames.
10.25#   Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group 2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan.
10.26**#   Employment Agreement, effective January 25, 2012, between William S. Martens, III and Center Cut Hospitality, Inc.
10.27**#   Employment Agreement, effective January 4, 2012, between Thomas G. Dritsas and Center Cut Hospitality, Inc.
10.28**   Asset Advisory Agreement, dated December 13, 2006, by and between Hudson Advisors, L.L.C. and Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc.
10.29   Termination Agreement, dated as of             , 2012 between Hudson Americas LLC, Center Cut Hospitality, Inc. and Lone Star Fund V (U.S.), L.P.
10.30   Transition Services Agreement, dated as of             , 2012 between Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc., Hudson Advisors LLC and Hudson Americas LLC.
21.1**   List of Subsidiaries of the Registrant.
23.1   Consent of Ernst & Young LLP.
23.2*   Consent of Gibson, Dunn & Crutcher LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1).
24.1**   Powers of Attorney.
99.1**   Consent to be named of Mark S. Mednansky.
99.2**   Consent to be named of Samuel D. Loughlin.
99.3**   Consent to be named of Norman J. Abdallah.
99.4**   Consent to be named of David B. Barr.
99.5**   Consent to be named of Jodi L. Cason.
99.6**   Consent to be named of Richard L. Davis.

 

II-6


Exhibit No.

 

Description

99.7**   Consent to be named of Melissa S. Hubbell.
99.8   Consent to be named of John R. Kinzer.

 

*  

To be filed by amendment.

** Previously Filed.
#  

Denotes management compensatory plan or arrangement.

 

II-7

Exhibit 3.1

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, INC.

(a Delaware corporation)

ARTICLE I

NAME

The name of the corporation is Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. (the “Corporation”).

ARTICLE II

AGENT

The address of the corporation’s registered office in the State of Delaware is 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington, Delaware 19801. The name of its registered agent at such address is The Corporation Trust Company.

ARTICLE III

PURPOSE

The purposes for which the Corporation is formed are to engage in any lawful act or activity for which corporations may be organized under the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (the “DGCL”).

ARTICLE IV

STOCK

Section 4.1 Authorized Stock . The aggregate number of shares which the Corporation shall have authority to issue is             , of which              shall be designated as Common Stock, no par value (the “Common Stock”), and              shall be designated as Preferred Stock, no par value (the “Preferred Stock”).

Section 4.2 Common Stock .

(a) Voting . Each holder of Common Stock, as such, shall be entitled to one vote for each share of Common Stock held of record by such holder on all matters on which stockholders generally are entitled to vote; provided , however , that, except as otherwise required by law, holders of Common Stock, as such, shall not be entitled to vote on any amendment to this Certificate of Incorporation (including any Certificate of Designations relating to any series of Preferred Stock) that relates solely to the terms of one or more outstanding series of Preferred Stock if the holders of such affected series are entitled, either separately or together with the holders of one or more other such series, to vote thereon pursuant to this Certificate of Incorporation (including any Certificate of Designations relating to any series of Preferred Stock) or pursuant to the DGCL.


(b) Dividends . Subject to the rights, if any, of the holders of any outstanding series of Preferred Stock, the holders of shares of Common Stock shall be entitled to receive dividends out of any funds of the Corporation legally available therefor when, as and if declared by the Board of Directors.

(c) Liquidation . Upon the dissolution, liquidation or winding up of the Corporation, subject to the rights, if any, of the holders of any outstanding series of Preferred Stock, the holders of shares of Common Stock shall be entitled to receive the assets of the Corporation available for distribution to its stockholders ratably in proportion to the number of shares held by them.

Section 4.3 Preferred Stock . Subject to limitations prescribed by law and the provisions of this Article IV, the Board of Directors is hereby authorized to provide by resolution for the issuance of the shares of Preferred Stock in one or more series, and to establish from time to time the number of shares to be included in each such series, and to fix the designation, powers, privileges, preferences, and relative participating, optional or other rights, if any, of the shares of each such series and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions thereof.

The authority of the Board with respect to each series shall include, but not be limited to, determination of the following:

(i) the number of shares constituting such series, including any increase or decrease in the number of shares of any such series (but not below the number of shares in any such series then outstanding), and the distinctive designation of such series;

(ii) the dividend rate on the shares of such series, if any, whether dividends shall be cumulative, and, if so, from which date or dates, and the relative rights of priority, if any, of payment of dividends on shares of such series;

(iii) whether the shares of such series shall have voting rights (including multiple or fractional votes per share) in addition to the voting rights provided by law, and, if so, the terms of such voting rights;

(iv) whether the shares of such series shall have conversion privileges, and, if so, the terms and conditions of such privileges, including provision for adjustment of the conversion rate in such events as the Board of Directors shall determine;

(v) whether or not the shares of such series shall be redeemable, and if so, the terms and conditions of such redemption, including the date or dates upon or after which they shall be redeemable, and the amount per share payable in case of redemption, which amount may vary under different conditions and at different redemption rates;

(vi) whether a sinking fund shall be provided for the redemption or purchase of shares of such series, and, if so, the terms and the amount of such sinking fund;

 

2


(vii) the rights of the shares of such series in the event of voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, and the relative rights of priority, if any, of payment of shares of such series; and

(viii) any other relative rights, preferences and limitations of such series.

ARTICLE V

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Section 5.1 Number . Except as otherwise provided for or fixed pursuant to the provisions of Article IV of this Certificate of Incorporation relating to the rights of holders of any series of Preferred Stock to elect additional directors in certain circumstances, the Board of Directors shall consist of not fewer than three nor more than 13 directors, the exact number to be determined from time to time by resolution adopted by affirmative vote of a majority of such directors then in office.

Section 5.2 Classification .

(a) The Board of Directors (other than those directors elected by the holders of any series of Preferred Stock provided for or fixed pursuant to the provisions of Article IV hereof (the “Preferred Stock Directors”)) shall be divided into three classes, as nearly equal in number as possible, designated Class I, Class II and Class III. Class I directors shall initially serve until the first annual meeting of stockholders following the effectiveness of this Section 5.2; Class II directors shall initially serve until the second annual meeting of stockholders following the effectiveness of this Section 5.2; and Class III directors shall initially serve until the third annual meeting of stockholders following the effectiveness of this Section 5.2. Commencing with the first annual meeting of stockholders following the effectiveness of this Section 5.2, directors of each class the term of which shall then expire shall be elected to hold office for a three-year term and until the election and qualification of their respective successors in office. In case of any increase or decrease, from time to time, in the number of directors (other than Preferred Stock Directors), the number of directors in each class shall be apportioned as nearly equal as possible.

(b) Subject to the rights of the holders of any one or more series of Preferred Stock then outstanding, newly created directorships resulting from any increase in the authorized number of directors or any vacancies in the Board of Directors resulting from death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal from office or other cause shall, unless otherwise provided by law, be filled solely by the affirmative vote of a majority of the remaining directors then in office, even though less than a quorum of the Board of Directors; provided , however , that so long as Lone Star Fund V (U.S.), L.P., a Delaware limited partnership, and its Affiliates (as defined in Section 11.5) (collectively, the “Lone Star Entities”) beneficially own, in the aggregate, at least 25% of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, any such newly created directorships or vacancies shall, unless otherwise provided by law, be filled solely by the affirmative vote of holders

 

3


of a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class. Any director so chosen shall hold office until the next election of the class for which such director shall have been chosen and until his successor shall be elected and qualified. No decrease in the authorized number of directors shall shorten the term of any incumbent director.

(c) Except for such additional directors, if any, as are elected by the holders of any series of Preferred Stock as provided for or fixed pursuant to the provisions of Article IV hereof, (i) prior to the date on which the Lone Star Entities cease to beneficially own, in the aggregate, a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, any director, or the entire Board of Directors, may be removed from office, with or without cause upon the affirmative vote of holders of a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class, and (ii) on and after the date on which the Lone Star Entities cease to beneficially own, in the aggregate, a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, any director, or the entire Board of Directors, may be removed from office, only for cause and only upon the affirmative vote of at least 66  2 / 3 % of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class.

(d) During any period when the holders of any series of Preferred Stock have the right to elect additional directors as provided for or fixed pursuant to the provisions of Article IV hereof, then upon commencement and for the duration of the period during which such right continues: (i) the then otherwise total authorized number of directors of the Corporation shall automatically be increased by such specified number of directors, and the holders of such Preferred Stock shall be entitled to elect the additional directors so provided for or fixed pursuant to said provisions and (ii) each such additional director shall serve until such director’s successor shall have been duly elected and qualified, or until such director’s right to hold such office terminates pursuant to said provisions, whichever occurs earlier, subject to his earlier death, disqualification, resignation or removal. Except as otherwise provided by the Board of Directors in the resolution or resolutions establishing such series, whenever the holders of any series of Preferred Stock having such right to elect additional directors are divested of such right pursuant to the provisions of such stock, the terms of office of all such additional directors elected by the holders of such stock, or elected to fill any vacancies resulting from the death, resignation, disqualification or removal of such additional directors, shall forthwith terminate and the total authorized number of directors of the Corporation shall be reduced accordingly.

Section 5.3 Powers . Except as otherwise expressly provided by the DGCL or this Certificate of Incorporation, the management of the business and the conduct of the affairs of the Corporation shall be vested in its Board of Directors.

 

4


Section 5.4 Election .

(a) Ballot Not Required . The directors of the Corporation need not be elected by written ballot unless the Bylaws of the Corporation so provide.

(b) Notice . Advance notice of stockholder nominations for the election of directors shall be given in the manner and to the extent provided in the Bylaws of the Corporation.

ARTICLE VI

STOCKHOLDER ACTION

Prior to the date on which the Lone Star Entities cease to beneficially own, in the aggregate, a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, any action required or permitted to be taken at any annual or special meeting of the stockholders of the Corporation may be taken without a meeting if a consent or consents in writing, setting forth the action so taken, are signed by the holders of outstanding stock having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares entitled to vote thereon were present and voted. On and after the date on which the Lone Star Entities cease to beneficially own, in the aggregate, a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, no action that is required or permitted to be taken by the stockholders of the Corporation at any annual or special meeting of stockholders may be effected by written consent of stockholders in lieu of a meeting of stockholders.

ARTICLE VII

SPECIAL MEETINGS OF STOCKHOLDERS

A special meeting of the stockholders of the Corporation may be called at any time only by the Board of Directors, or by the Chairman of the Board of Directors or the Chief Executive Officer with the concurrence of a majority of the Board of Directors. Only such business shall be conducted at a special meeting of stockholders as shall have been brought before the meeting pursuant to the Corporation’s notice of meeting.

ARTICLE VIII

EXISTENCE

The Corporation shall have perpetual existence.

ARTICLE IX

AMENDMENT

Section 9.1 Amendment of Certificate of Incorporation . The Corporation reserves the right to amend, alter, change or repeal any provision contained in this Certificate of Incorporation, in the manner now or hereafter prescribed by the laws of the State of Delaware, and all rights conferred herein are granted subject to this reservation;

 

5


provided , however , that in addition to any requirements of law and any other provision of this Certificate of Incorporation, and notwithstanding any other provision of this Certificate of Incorporation or any provision of law which might otherwise permit a lesser vote or no vote, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 66  2 / 3 % in voting power of the issued and outstanding stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class, shall be required to amend or repeal, or adopt any provision inconsistent with, any provision of this Certificate of Incorporation.

Section 9.2 Amendment of Bylaws . In furtherance and not in limitation of the powers conferred by the laws of the State of Delaware, the Board of Directors is expressly authorized to adopt, amend or repeal the Bylaws of the Corporation. In addition to any requirements of law and any other provision of this Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation, and notwithstanding any other provision of this Certificate of Incorporation, the Bylaws of the Corporation or any provision of law which might otherwise permit a lesser vote or no vote, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 66  2 / 3 % in voting power of the issued and outstanding stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class, shall be required for the stockholders to amend or repeal, or adopt any provision inconsistent with, any Bylaw of the Corporation.

ARTICLE X

LIABILITY OF DIRECTORS

Section 10.1 No Personal Liability . To the fullest extent permitted by the DGCL as the same exists or as may hereafter be amended, no director of the Corporation shall be personally liable to the Corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a director.

Section 10.2 Transactions Involving the Lone Star Entities . Any Affiliate of the Lone Star Entities who serves as a director or officer of the Corporation shall be deemed to have fully satisfied and fulfilled his or her fiduciary duties to the Corporation and its stockholders with respect to any contract or transaction between the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries, on the one hand, and one or more Lone Star Entities, on the other hand, if: (a) the material facts as to such Affiliate’s and the Lone Star Entities’ relationship to or interest in such contract or transaction are disclosed or are known to the Board of Directors or a committee thereof consisting solely of disinterested directors of the Corporation, and the Board of Directors or such committee in good faith authorizes such contract or transaction by (i) in the case of the Board of Directors, the affirmative vote of a majority of the disinterested directors on the Board of Directors, even though less than a quorum of the Board of Directors, or (ii) in the case of such committee, the affirmative vote of a majority of the members of such committee; (b) the material facts as to such Affiliate’s and the Lone Star Entities’ relationship to or interest in such contract or transaction are disclosed or are known to the stockholders of the Corporation entitled to vote thereon, and such contract or transaction is specifically approved in good faith by vote of the stockholders (excluding the Lone Star Entities and any stockholder that has a material financial interest in the contract or transaction); or (c) such contract or transaction is fair as to the Corporation as of the time it enters into such contract or transaction.

 

6


Section 10.3 Amendment or Repeal . Any amendment, alteration or repeal of this Article X that adversely affects any right of a director shall be prospective only and shall not limit or eliminate any such right with respect to any proceeding involving any occurrence or alleged occurrence of any action or omission to act that took place prior to such amendment or repeal.

ARTICLE XI

COMPETITION AND CORPORATE OPPORTUNITIES

Section 11.1 General . In recognition and anticipation that (a) certain directors, principals, officers, employees and/or other representatives of the Lone Star Entities may serve as directors or officers of the Corporation, (b) the Lone Star Entities and their respective Affiliates may now engage and may continue to engage in the same or similar activities or related lines of business as those in which the Corporation, directly or indirectly, may engage and/or other business activities that overlap with or compete with those in which the Corporation, directly or indirectly, may engage, and (c) members of the Board of Directors who are not employees of the Corporation (“Non-Employee Directors”) and their respective Affiliates may now engage and may continue to engage in the same or similar activities or related lines of business as those in which the Corporation, directly or indirectly, may engage and/or other business activities that overlap with or compete with those in which the Corporation, directly or indirectly, may engage, the provisions of this Article XI are set forth to regulate and define the conduct of certain affairs of the Corporation with respect to certain classes or categories of business opportunities as they may involve the Lone Star Entities, the Non-Employee Directors or their respective Affiliates and the powers, rights, duties and liabilities of the Corporation and its directors, officers and stockholders in connection therewith.

Section 11.2 No Duty to Refrain, Communicate or Offer . None of (a) any Lone Star Entity or any of its Affiliates or (b) any Non-Employee Director or his or her Affiliates (the Persons (as defined below) identified in (a) and (b) above being referred to, collectively, as “Identified Persons” and, individually, as an “Identified Person”) shall have any duty to refrain from directly or indirectly (i) engaging in a corporate opportunity in the same or similar business activities or lines of business in which the Corporation or any of its Affiliates now engages or proposes to engage or (ii) otherwise competing with the Corporation, and, to the fullest extent permitted by the DGCL, no Identified Person shall be liable to the Corporation or its stockholders for breach of any fiduciary duty solely by reason of the fact that such Identified Person engages in any such activities. The Corporation hereby renounces any interest or expectancy in, or in being offered an opportunity to participate in, any business opportunity which may be a corporate opportunity for an Identified Person and the Corporation or any of its Affiliates, except as provided in Section 11.3. In the event that any Identified Person acquires knowledge of a potential transaction or other business opportunity which may be a corporate opportunity for itself or himself and the Corporation or any of its Affiliates, such Identified Person shall have no duty to communicate or offer such transaction or other business opportunity to the Corporation or any of its Affiliates and, to the fullest extent permitted by the DGCL, shall not be liable to the Corporation or its stockholders for breach of any fiduciary duty as a stockholder, director of the Corporation solely by reason of the fact that such Identified Person pursues or acquires such corporate opportunity for itself or himself, or offers or directs such corporate opportunity to another Person.

 

7


Section 11.3 Corporate Opportunities Offered in Capacity as a Director of the Corporation . The Corporation does not renounce its interest in any corporate opportunity offered to any Non-Employee Director if such opportunity is expressly offered to such Person solely in his or her capacity as a director of the Corporation and the provisions of Section 11.2 shall not apply to any such corporate opportunity.

Section 11.4 Opportunities Not Deemed Corporate Opportunities . In addition to and notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Article XI, a corporate opportunity shall not be deemed to be a potential corporate opportunity for the Corporation if it is a business opportunity that the Corporation is not permitted to undertake under the terms of Article III or that the Corporation is not financially able or contractually permitted or legally able to undertake, or that is, from its nature, not in the line of the Corporation’s business or is of no practical advantage to it or that is one in which the Corporation has no interest or reasonable expectancy.

Section 11.5 Definitions . For purposes of this Certificate of Incorporation, (a) “Affiliate” shall mean (i) in respect of a Lone Star Entity, any Person that, (A) is directly or indirectly, controlled by such Lone Star Entity, controls such Lone Star Entity or is under common control with such Lone Star Entity or (B) is a principal, member, director, manager, partner, stockholder, officer, employee or other representative of any of the foregoing (other than the Corporation and any entity that is controlled by the Corporation), (ii) in respect of a Non-Employee Director, any Person that, directly or indirectly, is controlled by such Non-Employee Director (other than the Corporation and any entity that is controlled by the Corporation) and (iii) in respect of the Corporation, any Person that, directly or indirectly, is controlled by the Corporation, and (b) “Person” shall mean any individual, corporation, general or limited partnership, limited liability company, joint venture, trust, association or any other entity.

Section 11.6 Notice and Consent . To the fullest extent permitted by law, any Person purchasing or otherwise acquiring any interest in any shares of capital stock of the Corporation shall be deemed to have notice of and to have consented to the provisions of Article X and this Article XI.

ARTICLE XII

FORUM FOR ADJUDICATION OF DISPUTES

Unless the Corporation consents in writing to the selection of an alternative forum, the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware shall be the sole and exclusive forum for (i) any derivative action or proceeding brought on behalf of the Corporation, (ii) any action asserting a claim of breach of a fiduciary duty owed by any director, officer or other employee of the Corporation to the Corporation or the Corporation’s stockholders, (iii) any action asserting a claim arising pursuant to any provision of the DGCL, this Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation, or (iv) any other action asserting a claim governed by the internal affairs doctrine. Any person or entity purchasing or otherwise acquiring any interest in shares of capital stock of the Corporation shall be deemed to have notice of and consented to the provisions of this Article XII.

[The remainder of this page has been intentionally left blank.]

 

8


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned incorporator hereby acknowledges that the foregoing Certificate of Incorporation is his act and deed and that the facts stated herein are true.

Dated:                     , 2012

 

By:    

Name:

Title:

 

 

9

Exhibit 3.2

BYLAWS

OF

DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, INC.

(a Delaware corporation)

ARTICLE I

CORPORATE OFFICES

Section 1.1 Registered Office . The registered office of the Corporation shall be fixed in the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation.

Section 1.2 Other Offices . The Corporation may also have an office or offices, and keep the books and records of the Corporation, except as may otherwise be required by law, at such other place or places, either within or without the State of Delaware, as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine or the business of the Corporation may require.

ARTICLE II

MEETINGS OF STOCKHOLDERS

Section 2.1 Annual Meeting . The annual meeting of stockholders, for the election of directors to succeed those whose terms expire and for the transaction of such other business as may properly come before the meeting, shall be held at such place, if any, on such date, and at such time as may be determined by the Board of Directors.

Section 2.2 Special Meeting . A special meeting of the stockholders may be called at any time only by the Board of Directors, or by the Chairman of the Board of Directors or the Chief Executive Officer with the concurrence of a majority of the Board of Directors.

Section 2.3 Notice of Stockholders’ Meetings .

(a) Notice of the place, if any, date, and time of all meetings of the stockholders, the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to vote at the meeting (if such date is different from the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to notice of the meeting) and the means of remote communications, if any, by which stockholders and proxyholders may be deemed to be present in person and vote at such meeting, shall be given, not less than 10 nor more than 60 days before the date on which the meeting is to be held, to each stockholder entitled to vote at such meeting as of the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to notice of the meeting, except as otherwise provided herein or required by law. In the case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called also shall be set forth in the notice. Notice may be given personally, by mail or by electronic transmission in accordance with Section 232 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (the “DGCL”). If mailed, such notice shall be deemed given when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid,


directed to each stockholder at such stockholder’s address appearing on the books of the Corporation or given by the stockholder for such purpose. Notice by electronic transmission shall be deemed given as provided in Section 232 of the DGCL. An affidavit of the mailing or other means of giving any notice of any stockholders’ meeting, executed by the Secretary, Assistant Secretary or any transfer agent of the Corporation giving the notice, shall be prima facie evidence of the giving of such notice or report. Notice shall be deemed to have been given to all stockholders of record who share an address if notice is given in accordance with the “householding” rules set forth in Rule 14a-3(e) under the Exchange Act and Section 233 of the DGCL.

(b) When a meeting is adjourned to another time or place, notice need not be given of the adjourned meeting if the place, if any, date and time thereof, and the means of remote communications, if any, by which stockholders and proxyholders may be deemed to be present in person and vote at such adjourned meeting are announced at the meeting at which the adjournment is taken; provided , however , that if the date of any adjourned meeting is more than 30 days after the date for which the meeting was originally called, a notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at the meeting. If after the adjournment a new record date for stockholders entitled to vote is fixed for the adjourned meeting, the Board of Directors shall fix a new record date for notice of such adjourned meeting in accordance with Section 7.7(a) of these Bylaws, and shall give notice of the adjourned meeting to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at such adjourned meeting as of the record date for notice of such adjourned meeting.

(c) Notice of any meeting of stockholders may be waived in writing, either before or after the meeting, and to the extent permitted by law, will be waived by any stockholder by attendance thereat, in person or by proxy, except when the person objects at the beginning of the meeting to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened.

Section 2.4 Organization .

(a) Meetings of stockholders shall be presided over by the Chairman of the Board of Directors, if any, or in his or her absence by a person designated by the Board of Directors, or in the absence of a person so designated by the Board of Directors, by a Chairman chosen at the meeting by the holders of a majority in voting power of the stock entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy. The Secretary, or in his or her absence, an Assistant Secretary, or in the absence of the Secretary and all Assistant Secretaries, a person whom the Chairman of the meeting shall appoint, shall act as Secretary of the meeting and keep a record of the proceedings thereof.

(b) The Board of Directors shall be entitled to make such rules or regulations for the conduct of meetings of stockholders as it shall deem necessary, appropriate or convenient. Subject to such rules and regulations of the Board of Directors, if any, the Chairman of the meeting shall have the right and authority to prescribe such rules, regulations and procedures and to do all such acts as, in the judgment of such Chairman, are necessary, appropriate or convenient for the proper conduct of the meeting,

 

2


including, without limitation, establishing an agenda or order of business for the meeting, rules and procedures for maintaining order at the meeting and the safety of those present, limitations on participation in the meeting to stockholders of record of the Corporation, their duly authorized and constituted proxies and such other persons as the Chairman shall permit, restrictions on entry to the meeting after the time fixed for the commencement thereof, limitations on the time allotted to questions or comments by participants and regulation of the opening and closing of the polls for balloting and matters which are to be voted on by ballot.

Section 2.5 List of Stockholders . The officer who has charge of the stock ledger shall prepare and make, at least 10 days before every meeting of stockholders, a complete list of the stockholders entitled to vote at the meeting, provided , however , that if the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to vote is less than 10 days before the date of the meeting, the list shall reflect the stockholders entitled to vote as of the 10th day before the meeting date. Such list shall be arranged in alphabetical order and shall show the address of each stockholder and the number of shares registered in the name of each stockholder. Such list shall be open to the examination of any stockholder, for any purpose germane to the meeting at least 10 days prior to the meeting (a) on a reasonably accessible electronic network, provided that the information required to gain access to such list is provided with the notice of meeting or (b) during ordinary business hours at the principal place of business of the Corporation. If the meeting is to be held at a place, then a list of stockholders entitled to vote at the meeting shall be produced and kept at the time and place of the meeting during the whole time thereof and may be examined by any stockholder who is present. If the meeting is to be held solely by means of remote communication, then the list shall also be open to the examination of any stockholder during the whole time of the meeting on a reasonably accessible electronic network, and the information required to access such list shall be provided with the notice of the meeting. Except as otherwise provided by law, the stock ledger shall be the only evidence as to who are the stockholders entitled to examine the list of stockholders required by this Section 2.5 or to vote in person or by proxy at any meeting of stockholders.

Section 2.6 Quorum . At any meeting of stockholders, the holders of a majority in voting power of all issued and outstanding stock entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business; provided that where a separate vote by a class or series is required, the holders of a majority in voting power of all issued and outstanding stock of such class or series entitled to vote on such matter, present in person or represented by proxy, shall constitute a quorum entitled to take action with respect to such matter. If a quorum is not present or represented at any meeting of stockholders, then the Chairman of the meeting or the holders of a majority in voting power of the stock entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, shall have power to adjourn the meeting from time to time in accordance with Section 2.7, without notice other than announcement at the meeting and except as provided in Section 2.3(b), until a quorum is present or represented. If a quorum initially is present at any meeting of stockholders, the stockholders may continue to transact business until adjournment, notwithstanding the withdrawal of enough stockholders to leave less than a quorum, but if a quorum is not present at least initially, no business other than adjournment may be transacted.

 

3


Section 2.7 Adjourned Meeting . Any annual or special meeting of stockholders, whether or not a quorum is present, may be adjourned for any reason from time to time by either the Chairman of the meeting or the holders of a majority in voting power of the stock entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy. At any such adjourned meeting at which a quorum may be present, any business may be transacted that might have been transacted at the meeting as originally called.

Section 2.8 Voting .

(a) Except as otherwise provided by law or the Certificate of Incorporation, each holder of stock of the Corporation entitled to vote at any meeting of stockholders shall be entitled to one vote for each share of such stock held of record by such holder on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders of the Corporation.

(b) Except as otherwise provided by law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, at each meeting of stockholders at which a quorum is present, all corporate actions to be taken by vote of the stockholders shall be authorized by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority in voting power of the stock entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, and where a separate vote by class or series is required, if a quorum of such class or series is present, such act shall be authorized by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority in voting power of the stock of such class or series entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy.

Section 2.9 Proxies . Every person entitled to vote for directors, or on any other matter, shall have the right to do so either in person or by one or more agents authorized by a written proxy, which may be in the form of a telegram, cablegram or other means of electronic transmission, signed by the person and filed with the Secretary of the Corporation, but no such proxy shall be voted or acted upon after three years from its date, unless the proxy provides for a longer period. A proxy shall be deemed signed if the stockholder’s name is placed on the proxy by the stockholder or the stockholder’s attorney-in-fact. A duly executed proxy shall be irrevocable if it states that it is irrevocable and if, and only as long as, it is coupled with an interest sufficient in law to support an irrevocable power. A stockholder may revoke any proxy which is not irrevocable by attending the meeting and voting in person or by filing an instrument in writing revoking the proxy or by filing another duly executed proxy bearing a later date with the Secretary of the Corporation. A proxy is not revoked by the death or incapacity of the maker unless, before the vote is counted, written notice of such death or incapacity is received by the Corporation.

Section 2.10 Notice of Stockholder Business and Nominations .

(a) Annual Meeting .

(i) Nominations of persons for election to the Board of Directors and the proposal of business other than nominations to be considered by the stockholders may be made at an annual meeting of stockholders only (A) pursuant to the Corporation’s notice of meeting (or any supplement thereto),

 

4


(B) by or at the direction of the Board of Directors (or any committee thereof) or (C) by any stockholder of the Corporation who is a stockholder of record at the time the notice provided for in this Section 2.10(a) is delivered to the Secretary of the Corporation, who is entitled to vote at the meeting and who complies with the notice procedures set forth in this Section 2.10(a).

(ii) For nominations or other business to be properly brought before an annual meeting by a stockholder pursuant to clause (C) of the foregoing paragraph, the stockholder must have given timely notice thereof in writing to the Secretary of the Corporation and such business must be a proper subject for stockholder action. To be timely, a stockholder’s notice must be delivered to the Secretary at the principal executive offices of the Corporation not later than the close of business on the 90th day nor earlier than the close of business on the 120th day prior to the first anniversary of the preceding year’s annual meeting; provided , however , that in the event that the date of the annual meeting is more than 30 days before or more than 70 days after such anniversary date, notice by the stockholder to be timely must be so delivered not earlier than the close of business on the 120th day prior to such annual meeting and not later than the close of business on the later of the 90th day prior to such annual meeting or the 10th day following the date on which public announcement (as defined below) of the date of such meeting is first made by the Corporation. In no event shall the public announcement of an adjournment or postponement of an annual meeting commence a new time period (or extend any time period) for the giving of a stockholder’s notice as described above. Such stockholder’s notice shall set forth:

(A) as to each person whom the stockholder proposes to nominate for election or re-election as a director, (1) all information relating to such person that is required to be disclosed in solicitations of proxies for election of directors in an election contest, or is otherwise required, in each case pursuant to and in accordance with Regulation 14A under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), and (2) such person’s written consent to being named in the proxy statement as a nominee and to serving as a director if elected;

(B) as to any other business that the stockholder proposes to bring before the meeting, a brief description of the business desired to be brought before the meeting, the text of the proposal or business (including the text of any resolutions proposed for consideration and in the event that such business includes a proposal to amend the Bylaws of the Corporation, the language of the proposed amendment), the reasons for conducting such business at the meeting and any substantial interest (within the meaning of Item 5 of Schedule 14A under the Exchange Act) in such business of such stockholder and the beneficial owner (within the meaning of Section 13(d) of the Exchange Act), if any, on whose behalf the proposal is made;

 

5


(C) as to the stockholder giving the notice and the beneficial owner, if any, on whose behalf the nomination is made or the business is proposed:

(1) the name and address of such stockholder, as they appear on the Corporation’s books, and the name and address of such beneficial owner,

(2) the class and number of shares of capital stock of the Corporation which are owned of record by such stockholder and such beneficial owner as of the date of the notice, and a representation that the stockholder will notify the Corporation in writing within five business days after the record date for such meeting of the class and number of shares of capital stock of the Corporation owned of record by the stockholder and such beneficial owner as of the record date for the meeting (except as otherwise provided in Section 2.10(a)(iii) below), and

(3) a representation that the stockholder intends to appear in person or by proxy at the meeting to propose such nomination or business;

(D) as to the stockholder giving the notice or, if the notice is given on behalf of a beneficial owner on whose behalf the nomination is made or the business is proposed, as to such beneficial owner:

(1) the class and number of shares of capital stock of the Corporation which are beneficially owned (as defined below) by such stockholder or beneficial owner as of the date of the notice, and a representation that the stockholder will notify the Corporation in writing within five business days after the record date for such meeting of the class and number of shares of capital stock of the Corporation beneficially owned by such stockholder or beneficial owner as of the record date for the meeting (except as otherwise provided in Section 2.10(a)(iii) below),

(2) a description of any agreement, arrangement or understanding with respect to the nomination or other business between or among such stockholder or beneficial owner and any other person, including without limitation any agreements that would be required to be disclosed pursuant to Item 5 or Item 6 of Exchange Act Schedule 13D (regardless of whether the requirement to file a Schedule 13D is applicable to the stockholder or beneficial owner) and a representation that the stockholder will notify the Corporation in writing within five business days after the record date for such meeting of any such agreement, arrangement or understanding in effect as of the record date for the meeting (except as otherwise provided in Section 2.10(a)(iii) below),

 

6


(3) a description of any agreement, arrangement or understanding (including any derivative or short positions, profit interests, options, hedging transactions, and borrowed or loaned shares) that has been entered into as of the date of the stockholder’s notice by, or on behalf of, such stockholder or beneficial owner, the effect or intent of which is to mitigate loss, manage risk or benefit from changes in the share price of any class of the Corporation’s capital stock, or maintain, increase or decrease the voting power of the stockholder or beneficial owner with respect to shares of stock of the Corporation, and a representation that the stockholder will notify the Corporation in writing within five business days after the record date for such meeting of any such agreement, arrangement or understanding in effect as of the record date for the meeting (except as otherwise provided in Section 2.10(a)(iii) below), and

(4) a representation whether the stockholder or the beneficial owner, if any, will engage in a solicitation with respect to the nomination or business and, if so, the name of each participant (as defined in Item 4 of Schedule 14A under the Exchange Act) in such solicitation and whether such person intends or is part of a group which intends to deliver a proxy statement and/or form of proxy to holders of at least the percentage of the Corporation’s outstanding capital stock required to approve or adopt the business to be proposed (in person or by proxy) by the stockholder.

(iii) The Corporation may require any proposed nominee to furnish such other information as may reasonably be required by the Corporation to determine the eligibility of such proposed nominee to serve as a director of the Corporation, including information relevant to a determination whether such proposed nominee can be considered an independent director. Notwithstanding anything in Section 2.10(a)(ii) above to the contrary, if the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to vote at any meeting of stockholders is different from the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to notice of the meeting, a stockholder’s notice required by this Section 2.10(a) shall set forth a representation that the stockholder will notify the Corporation in writing within five business days after the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to vote at the meeting, or by the opening of business on the date of the meeting (whichever is earlier), of the information required under clauses (a)(ii)(C)(2) and (a)(ii)(D)(1)-(3) of this Section 2.10, and such information when provided to the Corporation shall be current as of the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to vote at the meeting.

 

7


(iv) This Section 2.10(a) shall not apply to a proposal proposed to be made by a stockholder if the stockholder has notified the Corporation of his or her intention to present the proposal at an annual or special meeting only pursuant to and in compliance with Rule 14a-8 under the Exchange Act and such proposal has been included in a proxy statement that has been prepared by the Corporation to solicit proxies for such meeting.

(b) Special Meeting . Only such business shall be conducted at a special meeting of stockholders as shall have been brought before the meeting pursuant to the Corporation’s notice of meeting. Nominations of persons for election to the Board of Directors may be made at a special meeting of stockholders at which directors are to be elected pursuant to the Corporation’s notice of meeting (i) by or at the direction of the Board of Directors (or any committee thereof) or (ii)  provided that the Board of Directors has determined that directors shall be elected at such meeting, by any stockholder of the Corporation who is a stockholder of record at the time the notice provided for in this Section 2.10(b) is delivered to the Secretary of the Corporation, who is entitled to vote at the meeting and upon such election and who complies with the notice procedures set forth in this Section 2.10. In the event the Corporation calls a special meeting of stockholders for the purpose of electing one or more directors to the Board of Directors, any such stockholder entitled to vote in such election of directors may nominate a person or persons (as the case may be) for election to such position(s) as specified in the Corporation’s notice of meeting, if the notice required by paragraph (a)(ii) of this Section 2.10 shall be delivered to the Secretary at the principal executive offices of the Corporation not earlier than the close of business on the 120th day prior to such special meeting and not later than the close of business on the later of the 90th day prior to such special meeting or the 10th day following the day on which public announcement is first made of the date of the special meeting and of the nominees proposed by the Board of Directors to be elected at such meeting. In no event shall the public announcement of an adjournment or postponement of a special meeting commence a new time period (or extend any time period) for the giving of a stockholder’s notice as described above.

(c) General .

(i) Except as otherwise provided by law, only such persons who are nominated in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section 2.10 shall be eligible to be elected at any meeting of stockholders of the Corporation to serve as directors and only such business shall be conducted at a meeting of stockholders as shall have been brought before the meeting in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section 2.10. The Chairman of the Board of Directors shall have the power and duty to determine whether a nomination or any business proposed to be brought before the meeting was made or proposed, as the case may be, in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section 2.10 (including whether the stockholder or beneficial owner, if any, on whose behalf the nomination or proposal is made solicited (or is part of a group which solicited) or did not so solicit, as the case may be, proxies in compliance with such stockholder’s representation as required by clause (a)(ii)(D)(4) of this Section 2.10). If any proposed nomination or business was not made or proposed in compliance with this

 

8


Section 2.10, then except as otherwise provided by law, the Chairman of the meeting shall have the power and duty to declare that such nomination shall be disregarded or that such proposed business shall not be transacted. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 2.10, unless otherwise required by law, if the stockholder does not provide the information required under clauses (a)(ii)(C)(2) and (a)(ii)(D)(1)-(3) of this Section 2.10 to the Corporation within the times frames specified herein, or if the stockholder (or a qualified representative of the stockholder) does not appear at the annual or special meeting of stockholders of the Corporation to present a nomination or proposed business, such nomination shall be disregarded and such proposed business shall not be transacted, notwithstanding that proxies in respect of such vote may have been received by the Corporation. For purposes of this Section 2.10, to be considered a qualified representative of the stockholder, a person must be a duly authorized officer, manager or partner of such stockholder or authorized by a writing executed by such stockholder (or a reliable reproduction or electronic transmission of the writing) delivered to the Corporation prior to the making of such nomination or proposal at such meeting by such stockholder stating that such person is authorized to act for such stockholder as proxy at the meeting of stockholders.

(ii) For purposes of this Section 2.10, a “public announcement” shall mean disclosure in a press release reported by the Dow Jones News Service, Associated Press or a comparable national news service or in a document publicly filed by the Corporation with the Securities and Exchange Commission pursuant to Sections 13, 14 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act. For purposes of clause (a)(ii)(D)(1) of this Section 2.10, shares shall be treated as “beneficially owned” by a person if the person beneficially owns such shares, directly or indirectly, for purposes of Section 13(d) of the Exchange Act and Regulations 13D and 13G thereunder or has or shares pursuant to any agreement, arrangement or understanding (whether or not in writing): (A) the right to acquire such shares (whether such right is exercisable immediately or only after the passage of time or the fulfillment of a condition or both), (B) the right to vote such shares, alone or in concert with others and/or (C) investment power with respect to such shares, including the power to dispose of, or to direct the disposition of, such shares.

(iii) Nothing in this Section 2.10 shall be deemed to affect any rights of the holders of any series of Preferred Stock to elect directors pursuant to any applicable provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation.

Section 2.11 Action by Written Consent .

(a) Prior to the date on which Lone Star Fund V (U.S.), L.P., a Delaware limited partnership, and its affiliates (collectively, the “Lone Star Entities”) cease to beneficially own, in the aggregate, a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, any action required or permitted to be taken at any annual or special meeting of the stockholders of the Corporation may be taken without a meeting if a consent or consents in writing, setting forth the action so taken, are signed by the holders

 

9


of outstanding stock having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares entitled to vote thereon were present and voted. On and after the date on which the Lone Star Entities cease to beneficially own, in the aggregate, a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, no action that is required or permitted to be taken by the stockholders of the Corporation at any annual or special meeting of stockholders may be effected by written consent of stockholders in lieu of a meeting of stockholders.

(b) To be effective, any written consent that is permitted pursuant to the Certificate of Incorporation and these Bylaws must be delivered to the Corporation by delivery to its registered office, its principal place of business or an officer or agent of the Corporation having custody of the books in which proceedings of meetings of stockholders are recorded. Delivery made to the Corporation’s registered office shall be by hand or by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested. Every written consent shall bear the date of signature of each stockholder who signs the consent and no written consent shall be effective to take the corporate action referred to therein unless, within 60 days of the earliest dated consent delivered in the manner required by this Section 2.11 to the Corporation, written consents signed by a sufficient number of holders to take action are delivered to the Corporation in accordance with this Section 2.11.

(c) Any electronic transmission consenting to an action to be taken and transmitted by a stockholder or proxyholder, or by a person or persons authorized to act for a stockholder or proxyholder, shall be deemed to be written, signed and dated for purposes of this Section 2.11, provided that any such electronic transmission sets forth or is delivered with information from which the Corporation can determine (i) that the electronic transmission was transmitted by the stockholder or proxyholder or by a person or persons authorized to act for the stockholder or proxyholder and (ii) the date on which such stockholder or proxyholder or authorized person or persons transmitted such electronic transmission. The date on which such electronic transmission is transmitted shall be deemed to be the date on which such consent was signed. Except to the extent and in the manner authorized by the Board of Directors, no consent given by electronic transmission shall be deemed to have been delivered until such consent is reproduced in paper form and until such paper form shall be delivered to the Corporation by delivery to its registered office, its principal place of business or an officer or agent of the Corporation having custody of the books in which proceedings of meetings of stockholders are recorded. Delivery made to the Corporation’s registered office shall be made by hand or by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested.

(d) Any copy, facsimile or other reliable reproduction of a consent in writing may be substituted or used in lieu of the original writing for any and all purposes for which the original writing could be used, provided that such copy, facsimile or other reproduction shall be a complete reproduction of the entire writing.

(e) Prompt notice of the taking of the corporate action without a meeting by less than unanimous written consent shall be given to those stockholders who have not consented in writing and who, if the action had been taken at a meeting, would

 

10


have been entitled to notice of the meeting if the record date for notice of such meeting had been the date that written consents signed by a sufficient number of stockholders to take the action were delivered to the Corporation in the manner required by this Section 2.11.

Section 2.12 Inspectors of Election . Before any meeting of stockholders, the Board of Directors shall appoint one or more inspectors of election to act at the meeting or its adjournment. If any person appointed as inspector fails to appear or fails or refuses to act, then the Chairman of the meeting may, and upon the request of any stockholder or a stockholder’s proxy shall, appoint a person to fill that vacancy. Inspectors need not be stockholders. No director or nominee for the office of director shall be appointed such an inspector.

Such inspectors shall:

(a) determine the number of shares outstanding and the voting power of each, the number of shares represented at the meeting, the existence of a quorum, and the authenticity, validity, and effect of proxies;

(b) receive votes, ballots or consents;

(c) hear and determine all challenges and questions in any way arising in connection with the right to vote;

(d) count and tabulate all votes or consents;

(e) determine when the polls shall close;

(f) determine the result; and

(g) do any other acts that may be proper to conduct the election or vote with fairness to all stockholders.

The inspectors of election shall perform their duties impartially, in good faith, to the best of their ability and as expeditiously as is practical. Any report or certificate made by the inspectors of election shall be prima facie evidence of the facts stated therein.

Section 2.13 Meetings by Remote Communications . The Board of Directors may, in its sole discretion, determine that a meeting of stockholders shall not be held at any place, but may instead be held solely by means of remote communication in accordance with Section 211(a)(2) of the DGCL. If authorized by the Board of Directors in its sole discretion, and subject to such guidelines and procedures as the Board of Directors may adopt, stockholders and proxyholders not physically present at a meeting of stockholders may, by means of remote communication (a) participate in a meeting of stockholders and (b) be deemed present in person and vote at a meeting of stockholders whether such meeting is to be held at a designated place or solely by means of remote communication, provided that (i) the Corporation shall implement reasonable measures to verify that each person deemed present and permitted to vote at the meeting by means of remote communication is a stockholder or proxyholder; (ii) the Corporation shall implement

 

11


reasonable measures to provide such stockholders and proxyholders a reasonable opportunity to participate in the meeting and to vote on matters submitted to the stockholders, including an opportunity to read or hear the proceedings of the meeting substantially concurrently with such proceedings; and (iii) if any stockholder or proxyholder votes or takes other action at the meeting by means of remote communication, a record of such vote or other action shall be maintained by the Corporation.

ARTICLE III

DIRECTORS

Section 3.1 Powers . Subject to the provisions of the DGCL and to any limitations in the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws relating to action required to be approved by the stockholders, the business and affairs of the Corporation shall be managed and shall be exercised by or under the direction of the Board of Directors. In addition to the powers and authorities these Bylaws expressly confer upon them, the Board of Directors may exercise all such powers of the Corporation and do all such lawful acts and things as are not by law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws required to be exercised or done by the stockholders.

Section 3.2 Number, Term of Office and Election . Subject to the limitations set forth in the Certificate of Incorporation, the Board of Directors shall consist of such of number of directors as determined from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors. With the exception of the first Board of Directors, which shall consist of the directors of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, in office immediately prior to its conversion into the Corporation, and except as provided in Section 3.3, directors shall be elected by a plurality of the votes cast at the stockholders’ annual meeting in each year. Directors need not be stockholders unless so required by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, wherein other qualifications for directors may be prescribed.

Section 3.3 Vacancies . Subject to the rights of the holders of any one or more series of Preferred Stock then outstanding, newly created directorships resulting from any increase in the authorized number of directors or any vacancies in the Board of Directors resulting from death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal from office or other cause shall, unless otherwise provided by law, be filled solely by the affirmative vote of a majority of the remaining directors then in office, even though less than a quorum; provided , however , that so long as the Lone Star Entities beneficially own, in the aggregate, at least 25% of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, any such newly created directorships or vacancies shall, unless otherwise provided by law, be filled solely by the affirmative vote of holders of a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class. Any director so chosen shall hold office until the next election of the class for which such director shall have been chosen and until his or her successor shall be elected and qualified. No decrease in the authorized number of directors shall shorten the term of any incumbent director.

 

12


Section 3.4 Resignations and Removal .

(a) Any director may resign at any time upon notice given in writing or by electronic transmission to the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board of Directors or the Secretary. Such resignation shall take effect at the time specified in such notice or, if the time be not specified, upon receipt thereof by the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board of Directors or the Secretary, as the case may be. Unless otherwise specified therein, the acceptance of such resignation shall not be necessary to make it effective.

(b) Except for such additional directors, if any, as are elected by the holders of any series of Preferred Stock as provided for or fixed pursuant to the provisions of Article IV of the Certificate of Incorporation, (i) prior to the date on which the Lone Star Entities cease to beneficially own, in the aggregate, a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, any director, or the entire Board of Directors, may be removed from office, with or without cause upon the affirmative vote of holders of a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class, and (ii) on and after the date on which the Lone Star Entities cease to beneficially own, in the aggregate, a majority of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, any director, or the entire Board of Directors, may be removed from office, only for cause and only upon the affirmative vote of at least 66  2 / 3 % of the total voting power of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class.

Section 3.5 Regular Meetings . Regular meetings of the Board of Directors shall be held at such place or places, on such date or dates and at such time or times, as shall have been established by the Board of Directors and publicized among all directors; provided that no fewer than one regular meeting per year shall be held. A notice of each regular meeting shall not be required.

Section 3.6 Special Meetings . Special meetings of the Board of Directors for any purpose or purposes may be called at any time by the Chairman of the Board of Directors, the Chief Executive Officer or a majority of the Board of Directors then in office. The person or persons authorized to call special meetings of the Board of Directors may fix the place and time of such meetings. Notice of each such meeting shall be given to each director, if by mail, addressed to such director as his or her residence or usual place of business, at least five days before the day on which such meeting is to be held, or shall be sent to such director at such place by telecopy, telegraph, electronic transmission or other form of recorded communication, or be delivered personally or by telephone, in each case at least 24 hours prior to the time set for such meeting. Notice of any meeting need not be given to director who shall, either before or after the meeting, submit a waiver of such notice or who shall attend such meeting without protesting, prior to or at its commencement, the lack of notice to such director. A notice of special meeting need not state the purpose of such meeting, and, unless indicated in the notice thereof, any and all business may be transacted at a special meeting.

 

13


Section 3.7 Participation in Meetings by Conference Telephone . Members of the Board of Directors, or of any committee thereof, may participate in a meeting of such Board of Directors or committee by means of conference telephone or other communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other, and such participation shall constitute presence in person at such meeting.

Section 3.8 Quorum . Except as otherwise provided by law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, a majority of the authorized number of directors shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business at any meeting of the Board of Directors, and the vote of a majority of the directors present at a duly held meeting at which a quorum is present shall be regarded as the act of the Board of Directors. The Chairman of the meeting or a majority of the directors present may adjourn the meeting to another time and place whether or not a quorum is present. At any adjourned meeting at which a quorum is present, any business may be transacted which might have been transacted at the meeting as originally called. If a quorum initially is present at any meeting of directors, the directors may continue to transact business, notwithstanding the withdrawal of enough directors to leave less than a quorum, upon resolution of at least a majority of the required quorum for that meeting prior to the loss of such quorum.

Section 3.9 Board of Directors Action by Written Consent Without a Meeting . Any action required or permitted to be taken by the Board of Directors may be taken without a meeting, provided that all members of the Board of Directors consent in writing or by electronic transmission to such action, and the writing or writings or electronic transmission or transmissions are filed with the minutes or proceedings of the Board of Directors. Such filing shall be in paper form if the minutes are maintained in paper form and shall be in electronic form if the minutes are maintained in electronic form. Such action by written consent shall have the same force and effect as a unanimous vote of the Board of Directors.

Section 3.10 Chairman of the Board . The Chairman of the Board shall preside at meetings of stockholders and directors and shall perform such other duties as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine. If the Chairman of the Board is not present at a meeting of the Board of Directors, another director chosen by the Board of Directors shall preside.

Section 3.11 Rules and Regulations . The Board of Directors shall adopt such rules and regulations not inconsistent with the provisions of law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws for the conduct of its meetings and management of the affairs of the Corporation as the Board of Directors shall deem proper.

Section 3.12 Fees and Compensation of Directors . Directors and members of committees may receive such compensation, if any, for their services and such reimbursement of expenses as may be fixed or determined by resolution of the Board of Directors.

 

14


Section 3.13 Emergency Bylaws . In the event of any emergency, disaster or catastrophe, as referred to in Section 110 of the DGCL, or other similar emergency condition, as a result of which a quorum of the Board of Directors or a standing committee of the Board of Directors cannot readily be convened for action, then the director or directors in attendance at the meeting shall constitute a quorum. Such director or directors in attendance may further take action to appoint one or more of themselves or other directors to membership on any standing or temporary committees of the Board of Directors as they shall deem necessary and appropriate.

ARTICLE IV

COMMITTEES

Section 4.1 Committees of the Board of Directors . The Board of Directors may, by resolution, designate one or more committees, including but not limited to an Executive Committee, an Audit Committee, a Compensation Committee and a Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee, each such committee to consist of one or more of the directors of the Corporation. The Board of Directors may designate one or more directors as alternate members of any committee to replace any absent or disqualified member at any meeting of the committee. In the absence or disqualification of a member of a committee, the member or members present at any meeting and not disqualified from voting, whether or not he, she or they constitute a quorum, may unanimously appoint another member of the Board of Directors to act at the meeting in the place of any such absent or disqualified member. Any such committee, to the extent provided in the resolution of the Board of Directors establishing such committee, shall have and may exercise all the powers and authority of the Board of Directors in the management of the business and affairs of the Corporation, and may authorize the seal of the Corporation to be affixed to all papers which may require it; but no such committee shall have the power or authority in reference to the following matters: (a) approving or adopting, or recommending to the stockholders, any action or matter (other than the election or removal of directors) expressly required by the DGCL to be submitted to stockholders for approval or (b) adopting, amending or repealing any bylaw of the Corporation. All committees of the Board of Directors shall keep minutes of their meetings and shall report their proceedings to the Board of Directors when requested or required by the Board of Directors.

Section 4.2 Meetings and Action of Committees . Any committee of the Board of Directors may adopt such rules and regulations not inconsistent with the provisions of law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws for the conduct of its meetings as such committee may deem proper.

ARTICLE V

OFFICERS

Section 5.1 Officers . The officers of the Corporation may consist of a Chief Executive Officer, a Chief Financial Officer, a President, one or more Vice Presidents, a Secretary, a Treasurer, a Controller and such other officers as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine, each of whom shall be elected by the Board of Directors, each to have such authority, functions or duties as set forth in these Bylaws or as

 

15


determined by the Board of Directors. Each officer shall be chosen by the Board of Directors and shall hold office for such term as may be prescribed by the Board of Directors and until such person’s successor shall have been duly chosen and qualified, or until such person’s earlier death, disqualification, resignation or removal. Any two of such offices may be held by the same person; provided , however , that no officer shall execute, acknowledge or verify any instrument in more than one capacity if such instrument is required by law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws to be executed, acknowledged or verified by two or more officers.

Section 5.2 Compensation . The salaries of the officers of the Corporation and the manner and time of the payment of such salaries shall be fixed and determined by the Board of Directors and may be altered by the Board of Directors from time to time as it deems appropriate, subject to the rights, if any, of such officers under any contract of employment.

Section 5.3 Removal, Resignation and Vacancies . Any officer of the Corporation may be removed, with or without cause, by the Board of Directors, without prejudice to the rights, if any, of such officer under any contract to which it is a party. Any officer may resign at any time upon written notice to the Corporation, without prejudice to the rights, if any, of the Corporation under any contract to which such officer is a party. If any vacancy occurs in any office of the Corporation, the Board of Directors may elect a successor to fill such vacancy for the remainder of the unexpired term and until a successor shall have been duly chosen and qualified.

Section 5.4 Chief Executive Officer . The Chief Executive Officer shall have general supervision and direction of the business and affairs of the Corporation, shall be responsible for corporate policy and strategy, and shall report directly to the Chairman of the Board of Directors. Unless otherwise provided in these Bylaws, all other officers of the Corporation shall report directly to the Chief Executive Officer or as otherwise determined by the Chief Executive Officer. The Chief Executive Officer shall, if present and in the absence of the Chairman of the Board of Directors, preside at meetings of the stockholders and of the Board of Directors.

Section 5.5 Chief Financial Officer . The Chief Financial Officer shall exercise all the powers and perform the duties of the office of the chief financial officer and in general have overall supervision of the financial operations of the Corporation. The Chief Financial Officer shall, when requested, counsel with and advise the other officers of the Corporation and shall perform such other duties as such officer may agree with the Chief Executive Officer or as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine.

Section 5.6 President . The President shall be the chief operating officer of the Corporation, with general responsibility for the management and control of the operations of the Corporation. The President shall have the power to affix the signature of the Corporation to all contracts that have been authorized by the Board of Directors or the Chief Executive Officer. The President shall, when requested, counsel with and advise the other officers of the Corporation and shall perform such other duties as such officer may agree with the Chief Executive Officer or as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine.

 

16


Section 5.7 Vice Presidents . The Vice President shall have such powers and duties as shall be prescribed by his or her superior officer or the Chief Executive Officer. A Vice President shall, when requested, counsel with and advise the other officers of the Corporation and shall perform such other duties as such officer may agree with the Chief Executive Officer or as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine.

Section 5.8 Treasurer . The Treasurer shall supervise and be responsible for all the funds and securities of the Corporation, the deposit of all moneys and other valuables to the credit of the Corporation in depositories of the Corporation, borrowings and compliance with the provisions of all indentures, agreements and instruments governing such borrowings to which the Corporation is a party, the disbursement of funds of the Corporation and the investment of its funds, and in general shall perform all of the duties incident to the office of the Treasurer. The Treasurer shall, when requested, counsel with and advise the other officers of the Corporation and shall perform such other duties as such officer may agree with the Chief Executive Officer or as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine.

Section 5.9 Controller . The Controller shall be the chief accounting officer of the Corporation. The Controller shall, when requested, counsel with any advise the other officers of the Corporation and shall perform such other duties as such officer may agree with the Chief Executive Officer or the Chief Financial Officer or as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine.

Section 5.10 Secretary . The powers and duties of the Secretary are: (i) to act as Secretary at all meetings of the Board of Directors, of the committees of the Board of Directors and of the stockholders and to record the proceedings of such meetings in a book or books to be kept for that purpose; (ii) to see that all notices required to be given by the Corporation are duly given and served; (iii) to act as custodian of the seal of the Corporation and affix the seal or cause it to be affixed to all certificates of stock of the Corporation and to all documents, the execution of which on behalf of the Corporation under its seal is duly authorized in accordance with the provisions of these Bylaws; (iv) to have charge of the books, records and papers of the Corporation and see that the reports, statements and other documents required by law to be kept and filed are properly kept and filed; and (v) to perform all of the duties incident to the office of Secretary. The Secretary shall, when requested, counsel with and advise the other officers of the Corporation and shall perform such other duties as such officer may agree with the Chief Executive Officer or as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine.

Section 5.11 Additional Matters . The Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer of the Corporation shall have the authority to designate employees of the Corporation to have the title of Vice President, Assistant Vice President, Assistant Treasurer or Assistant Secretary. Any employee so designated shall have the powers and duties determined by the officer making such designation. The persons upon whom such titles are conferred shall not be deemed officers of the Corporation unless elected by the Board of Directors.

 

17


Section 5.12 Checks; Drafts; Evidences of Indebtedness . From time to time, the Board of Directors shall determine by resolution which person or persons may sign or endorse all checks, drafts, other orders for payment of money, notes, bonds, debentures or other evidences of indebtedness that are issued in the name of or payable by the Corporation, and only the persons so authorized shall sign or endorse such instruments.

Section 5.13 Corporate Contracts and Instruments; How Executed . Except as otherwise provided in these Bylaws, the Board of Directors may authorize any officer or officers, or agent or agents, to enter into any contract or execute any instrument in the name of and on behalf of the Corporation. Such authority may be general or confined to specific instances. Unless so authorized or ratified by the Board of Directors or within the agency power of an officer, no officer, agent or employee shall have any power or authority to bind the Corporation by any contract or engagement or to pledge its credit or to render it liable for any purpose or for any amount.

Section 5.14 Action with Respect to Securities of Other Corporations . The Chief Executive Officer or any other officer of the Corporation authorized by the Board of Directors or the Chief Executive Officer is authorized to vote, represent, and exercise on behalf of the Corporation all rights incident to any and all shares of any other corporation or corporations standing in the name of the Corporation. The authority herein granted may be exercised either by such person directly or by any other person authorized to do so by proxy or power of attorney duly executed by the person having such authority.

ARTICLE VI

INDEMNIFICATION AND ADVANCEMENT OF EXPENSES

Section 6.1 Right to Indemnification . Each person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to, or was or is otherwise involved in, any action, suit, arbitration, alternative dispute mechanism, inquiry, judicial, administrative or legislative hearing, investigation or any other threatened, pending or completed proceeding, whether brought by or in the right of the Corporation or otherwise, including any and all appeals, whether of a civil, criminal, administrative, legislative, investigative or other nature (hereinafter a “proceeding”), by reason of the fact that he or she is or was a director or an officer of the Corporation or while a director or officer of the Corporation is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee, agent or trustee of another corporation or of a partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan (hereinafter an “indemnitee”), or by reason of anything done or not done by him or her in any such capacity, shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Corporation to the fullest extent authorized by the DGCL, as the same exists or may hereafter be amended, against all expense, liability and loss (including attorneys’ fees, judgments, fines, ERISA excise taxes or penalties and amounts paid in settlement by or on behalf of the indemnitee) actually and reasonably incurred by such indemnitee in connection therewith; provided , however , that, except as otherwise required by law or provided in Section 6.3 with respect to proceedings to enforce

 

18


rights under this Article VI, the Corporation shall indemnify any such indemnitee in connection with a proceeding, or part thereof, initiated by such indemnitee (including claims and counterclaims, whether such counterclaims are asserted by (i) such indemnitee, or (ii) the Corporation in a proceeding initiated by such indemnitee) only if such proceeding, or part thereof, was authorized or ratified by the Board of Directors.

Section 6.2 Right to Advancement of Expenses . In addition to the right to indemnification conferred in Section 6.1, an indemnitee shall, to the fullest extent not prohibited by law, also have the right to be paid by the Corporation the expenses (including attorneys’ fees) incurred in defending any proceeding with respect to which indemnification is required under Section 6.1 in advance of its final disposition (hereinafter an “advancement of expenses”); provided , however , that an advancement of expenses shall be made only upon delivery to the Corporation of an undertaking (hereinafter an “undertaking”), by or on behalf of such indemnitee, to repay all amounts so advanced if it shall ultimately be determined by final judicial decision of a court of competent jurisdiction from which there is no further right to appeal (hereinafter a “final adjudication”) that such indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified for such expenses under this Section 6.2 or otherwise.

Section 6.3 Right of Indemnitee to Bring Suit . If a request for indemnification under Section 6.1 is not paid in full by the Corporation within 60 days, or if a request for an advancement of expenses under Section 6.2 is not paid in full by the Corporation within 20 days, after a written request has been received by the Corporation, the indemnitee may at any time thereafter bring suit against the Corporation in a court of competent jurisdiction in the State of Delaware seeking an adjudication of entitlement to such indemnification or advancement of expenses. If successful in whole or in part in any such suit, or in a suit brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the indemnitee shall be entitled to be paid also the expense of prosecuting or defending such suit to the fullest extent permitted by law. In any suit brought by the indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification hereunder (but not in a suit brought by the indemnitee to enforce a right to an advancement of expenses) it shall be a defense that the indemnitee has not met any applicable standard of conduct for indemnification set forth in the DGCL. Further, in any suit brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the Corporation shall be entitled to recover such expenses upon a final adjudication that the indemnitee has not met any applicable standard of conduct for indemnification set forth in the DGCL. Neither the failure of the Corporation (including its directors who are not parties to such action, a committee of such directors, independent legal counsel, or its stockholders) to have made a determination prior to the commencement of such suit that indemnification of the indemnitee is proper in the circumstances because the indemnitee has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in the DGCL, nor an actual determination by the Corporation (including its directors who are not parties to such action, a committee of such directors, independent legal counsel, or its stockholders) that the indemnitee has not met such applicable standard of conduct, shall create a presumption that the indemnitee has not met the applicable standard of conduct or, in the case of such a suit brought by the indemnitee, be a defense to such suit. In any suit brought by the indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification or to an advancement of expenses

 

19


hereunder, or brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the burden of proving that the indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified, or to such advancement of expenses, under this Article VI or otherwise shall be on the Corporation.

Section 6.4 Non-Exclusivity of Rights . The rights to indemnification and to the advancement of expenses conferred in this Article VI shall not be exclusive of any other right which any person may have or hereafter acquire under any law, agreement, vote of stockholders or directors, provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws or otherwise.

Section 6.5 Insurance . The Corporation may maintain insurance, at its expense, to protect itself and any director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation or another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise against any expense, liability or loss, whether or not the Corporation would have the power to indemnify such person against such expense, liability or loss under the DGCL.

Section 6.6 Indemnification of Employees and Agents of the Corporation . The Corporation may, to the extent authorized from time to time, grant rights to indemnification and to the advancement of expenses to any employee or agent of the Corporation to the fullest extent of the provisions of this Article VI with respect to the indemnification and advancement of expenses of directors and officers of the Corporation.

Section 6.7 Nature of Rights . The rights conferred upon indemnitees in this Article VI shall be contract rights that shall vest at the time an individual becomes a director or officer of the Corporation and such rights shall continue as to an indemnitee who has ceased to be a director, officer or trustee and shall inure to the benefit of the indemnitee’s heirs, executors and administrators. Any amendment, alteration or repeal of this Article VI that adversely affects any right of an indemnitee or its successors shall be prospective only and shall not limit or eliminate any such right with respect to any proceeding involving any occurrence or alleged occurrence of any action or omission to act that took place prior to such amendment, alteration or repeal.

Section 6.8 Settlement of Claims . The Corporation shall not be liable to indemnify any indemnitee under this Article VI for any amounts paid in settlement of any proceeding effected without the Corporation’s written consent, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, or for any judicial award if the Corporation was not given a reasonable and timely opportunity, at its expense, to participate in the defense of such proceeding.

Section 6.9 Subrogation . In the event of payment under this Article VI, the Corporation shall be subrogated to the extent of such payment to all of the rights of recovery of the indemnitee, who shall execute all papers required and shall do everything that may be necessary to secure such rights, including the execution of such documents necessary to enable the Corporation effectively to bring suit to enforce such rights.

 

20


Section 6.10 Severability . If any provision or provisions of this Article VI shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable for any reason whatsoever, (a) the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions of this Article VI (including, without limitation, all portions of any paragraph of this Article VI containing any such provision held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that are not by themselves invalid, illegal or unenforceable) shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby, and (b) to the fullest extent possible, the provisions of this Article VI (including, without limitation, all portions of any paragraph of this Article VI containing any such provision held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that are not themselves invalid, illegal or unenforceable) shall be construed so as to give effect to the intent of the parties that the Corporation provide protection to the indemnitee to the fullest enforceable extent.

ARTICLE VII

CAPITAL STOCK

Section 7.1 Certificates of Stock . The shares of the Corporation shall be represented by certificates, provided that the Board of Directors may provide by resolution or resolutions that some or all of any or all classes or series of stock shall be uncertificated shares. Any such resolution shall not apply to shares represented by a certificate until such certificate is surrendered to the Corporation. Every holder of stock represented by certificates shall be entitled to have a certificate signed by or in the name of the Corporation by the Chairman or Vice Chairman of the Board of Directors, if any, or the President or a Vice President, and by the Treasurer or an Assistant Treasurer, or the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, of the Corporation certifying the number of shares owned by such holder in the Corporation. Any or all such signatures may be facsimiles. In case any officer, transfer agent or registrar who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon a certificate has ceased to be such officer, transfer agent or registrar before such certificate is issued, it may be issued by the Corporation with the same effect as if such person were such officer, transfer agent or registrar at the date of issue.

Section 7.2 Special Designation on Certificates . If the Corporation is authorized to issue more than one class of stock or more than one series of any class, then the powers, the designations, the preferences, and the relative, participating, optional or other special rights of each class of stock or series thereof and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions of such preferences and/or rights shall be set forth in full or summarized on the face or back of the certificate that the Corporation shall issue to represent such class or series of stock; provided , however , that, except as otherwise provided in Section 202 of the DGCL, in lieu of the foregoing requirements there may be set forth on the face or back of the certificate that the Corporation shall issue to represent such class or series of stock a statement that the Corporation will furnish without charge to each stockholder who so requests the powers, the designations, the preferences, and the relative, participating, optional or other special rights of each class of stock or series thereof and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions of such preferences and/or rights. Within a reasonable time after the issuance or transfer of uncertificated stock, the Corporation shall send to the registered owner thereof a written notice containing the information required to be set forth or stated on certificates pursuant to this Section 7.2 or Section 156, 202(a) or 218(a) of the DGCL or with respect to this Section 7.2 a statement that the Corporation

 

21


will furnish without charge to each stockholder who so requests the powers, the designations, the preferences, and the relative, participating, optional or other special rights of each class of stock or series thereof and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions of such preferences and/or rights. Except as otherwise expressly provided by law, the rights and obligations of the holders of uncertificated stock and the rights and obligations of the holders of certificates representing stock of the same class and series shall be identical.

Section 7.3 Transfers of Stock . Transfers of shares of stock of the Corporation shall be made only on the books of the Corporation upon authorization by the registered holder thereof or by such holder’s attorney thereunto authorized by a power of attorney duly executed and filed with the Secretary or a transfer agent for such stock, and if such shares are represented by a certificate, upon surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares properly endorsed or accompanied by a duly executed stock transfer power and the payment of any taxes thereon; provided , however , that the Corporation shall be entitled to recognize and enforce any lawful restriction on transfer.

Section 7.4 Lost Certificates . The Corporation may issue a new share certificate or new certificate for any other security in the place of any certificate theretofore issued by it, alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, and the Corporation may require the owner of the lost, stolen or destroyed certificate or the owner’s legal representative to give the Corporation a bond (or other adequate security) sufficient to indemnify it against any claim that may be made against it (including any expense or liability) on account of the alleged loss, theft or destruction of any such certificate or the issuance of such new certificate. The Board of Directors may adopt such other provisions and restrictions with reference to lost certificates, not inconsistent with applicable law, as it shall in its discretion deem appropriate.

Section 7.5 Addresses of Stockholders . Each stockholder shall designate to the Secretary an address at which notices of meetings and all other corporate notices may be served or mailed to such stockholder and, if any stockholder shall fail to so designate such an address, corporate notices may be served upon such stockholder by mail directed to the mailing address, if any, as the same appears in the stock ledger of the Corporation or at the last known mailing address of such stockholder.

Section 7.6 Registered Stockholders . The Corporation shall be entitled to recognize the exclusive right of a person registered on its books as the owner of shares to receive dividends, and to vote as such owner, and shall not be bound to recognize any equitable or other claim to or interest in such share or shares on the part of any other person, whether or not it shall have express or other notice thereof, except as otherwise provided by law.

Section 7.7 Record Date for Determining Stockholders .

(a) In order that the Corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to notice of any meeting of stockholders or any adjournment thereof, the Board of Directors may fix a record date, which record date shall not precede the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors, and which record

 

22


date shall, unless otherwise required by law, not be more than 60 nor less than 10 days before the date of such meeting. If the Board of Directors so fixes a date, such date shall also be the record date for determining the stockholders entitled to vote at such meeting unless the Board of Directors determines, at the time it fixes such record date, that a later date on or before the date of the meeting shall be the date for making such determination. If no record date is fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date for determining stockholders entitled to notice of and to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall be at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which notice is given, or, if notice is waived, at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which the meeting is held. A determination of stockholders of record entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall apply to any adjournment of the meeting; provided , however , that the Board of Directors may fix a new record date for determination of stockholders entitled to vote at the adjourned meeting, and in such case shall also fix as the record date for stockholders entitled to notice of such adjourned meeting the same or an earlier date as that fixed for determination of stockholders entitled to vote in accordance herewith at the adjourned meeting.

(b) In order that the Corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of any rights, or entitled to exercise any rights in respect of any change, conversion or exchange of stock or for the purpose of any other lawful action, the Board of Directors may fix a record date, which shall not be more than 60 days prior to such other action. If no such record date is fixed, the record date for determining stockholders for any such purpose shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution relating thereto.

(c) Subject to Section 2.11, (i) in order that the Corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to express consent to corporate action in writing without a meeting, the Board of Directors may fix a record date, which record date shall not precede the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors, and which record date shall not be more than 10 days after the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors and (ii) if no record date for determining stockholders entitled to express consent to corporate action in writing without a meeting is fixed by the Board of Directors, (A) when no prior action of the Board of Directors is required by law, the record date for such purpose shall be the first date on which a signed written consent setting forth the action taken or proposed to be taken is delivered to the Corporation in accordance with applicable law, and (B) if prior action by the Board of Directors is required by law, the record date for such purpose shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution taking such prior action.

Section 7.8 Regulations . The Board of Directors may make such additional rules and regulations as it may deem expedient concerning the issue, transfer and registration of shares of stock of the Corporation.

 

23


ARTICLE VIII

GENERAL MATTERS

Section 8.1 Fiscal Year . The fiscal year of the Corporation shall be fixed by resolution of the Board of Directors.

Section 8.2 Corporate Seal . The Board of Directors may provide a suitable seal, containing the name of the Corporation, which seal shall be in the charge of the Secretary. If and when so directed by the Board of Directors or a committee thereof, duplicates of the seal may be kept and used by the Treasurer or by an Assistant Secretary or Assistant Treasurer.

Section 8.3 Maintenance and Inspection of Records . The Corporation shall, either at its principal executive office or at such place or places as designated by the Board of Directors, keep a record of its stockholders listing their names and addresses and the number and class of shares held by each stockholder, a copy of these Bylaws as amended to date, accounting books and other records.

Section 8.4 Reliance Upon Books, Reports and Records . Each director and each member of any committee designated by the Board of Directors shall, in the performance of his or her duties, be fully protected in relying in good faith upon the books of account or other records of the Corporation and upon such information, opinions, reports or statements presented to the Corporation by any of its officers or employees, or committees of the Board of Directors so designated, or by any other person as to matters which such director or committee member reasonably believes are within such other person’s professional or expert competence and who has been selected with reasonable care by or on behalf of the Corporation.

Section 8.5 Subject to Law and Certificate of Incorporation . All powers, duties and responsibilities provided for in these Bylaws, whether or not explicitly so qualified, are qualified by the Certificate of Incorporation and applicable law.

ARTICLE IX

AMENDMENTS

Section 9.1 Amendments . In furtherance and not in limitation of the powers conferred by the laws of the State of Delaware, the Board of Directors is expressly authorized to adopt, amend or repeal these Bylaws. In addition to any requirements of law and any other provision of these Bylaws or the Certificate of Incorporation, and notwithstanding any other provision of these Bylaws, the Certificate of Incorporation or any provision of law which might otherwise permit a lesser vote or no vote, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 66  2 / 3 % in voting power of the issued and outstanding stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class, shall be required for the stockholders to amend or repeal, or adopt any provision inconsistent with, any provision of these Bylaws.

The foregoing Bylaws were adopted by the Board of Directors on                 , 2012.

 

24

Exhibit 4.2

REGISTRATION RIGHTS AGREEMENT

THIS REGISTRATION RIGHTS AGREEMENT (this “ Agreement ”) is made as of             , 2012 by and among Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), and LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC (the “ Original Holder ”).

RECITALS

A. The Original Holder has requested that it be granted certain registration rights with respect to the shares of the Company’s Common Stock (as defined below) held by the Original Holder as more fully set forth herein.

B. The Company has agreed to grant the Original Holder such registration rights as more fully set forth herein.

AGREEMENT

In consideration of the foregoing and the mutual covenants and agreements herein contained, and intending to be legally bound hereby, the parties agree as follows:

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

Section 1.1 Certain Definitions . As used in this Agreement, capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein shall have the meanings ascribed to them below:

Affiliate ” means, with respect to any specified Person, any other Person who or which, directly or indirectly, controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with such specified Person.

Business Day ” means any day that is not a Saturday, a Sunday or other day on which banks are required or authorized by law to be closed in The City of New York.

Common Stock ” means the common stock, no par value, of the Company, and any equity securities issued or issuable in exchange for or with respect to the Common Stock by way of a stock dividend, stock split or combination of shares or in connection with a reclassification, recapitalization, merger, consolidation or other reorganization or otherwise.

Common Stock Equivalent ” means all options, warrants and other securities convertible into, or exchangeable or exercisable for (at any time or upon the occurrence of any event or contingency and without regard to any vesting or other conditions to which such securities may be subject), Common Stock.

Exchange Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

FINRA ” means the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc.


Holder ” or “ Holders ” means the Original Holder and any Person who shall acquire and hold Registrable Securities in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

Issuer Free Writing Prospectus ” means an issuer free writing prospectus, as defined in Rule 433 under the Securities Act, relating to an offer of Registrable Securities.

Majority Participating Holders ” means Participating Holders holding more than 50% of the Registrable Securities proposed to be included in any offering of Registrable Securities by such Participating Holders pursuant to Section 2.1 or Section 2.2.

Person ” means any individual, corporation, partnership, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, syndicate, person, trust, association, organization or other entity or any governmental or regulatory body or other agency or authority or political subdivision thereof, including any successor, by merger or otherwise, of any of the foregoing.

Registrable Securities ” means (i) shares of Common Stock held by the Original Holder as of the date hereof, (ii) shares of Common Stock issued or issuable, directly or indirectly, in exchange for or with respect to the Common Stock referenced in clause (i) above and (iii) any other shares of Common Stock owned or hereafter acquired by the Original Holder. Any particular Registrable Securities shall cease to be Registrable Securities when (A) a registration statement with respect to the sale of such securities shall have been declared effective under the Securities Act and such securities shall have been disposed of in accordance with such registration statement, (B) such securities shall have been sold to the public pursuant to Rule 144 (or any successor provision) under the Securities Act or (C) such securities shall cease to be outstanding.

Registration Expenses ” means all fees and expenses incurred in connection with the Company’s performance of or compliance with the provisions of Article II, including, without limitation: (i) all registration, listing, qualification and filing fees (including FINRA filing fees); (ii) fees and expenses of compliance with state securities or “blue sky” laws (including counsel fees in connection with the preparation of a blue sky and legal investment survey and FINRA filings); (iii) printing and copying expenses; (iv) messenger and delivery expenses; (v) expenses incurred in connection with any road show; (vi) fees and disbursements of counsel for the Company; (vii) with respect to each registration, the fees and disbursements of one counsel for the selling Holder(s) selected by the Majority Participating Holders, in the case of a registration pursuant to Section 2.2; (viii) fees and disbursements of independent public accountants, including the expenses of any audit or “cold comfort” letter, and fees and expenses of other persons, including special experts, retained by the Company; (ix) underwriter fees, excluding discounts and commissions, and any other expenses which are customarily borne by the issuer or seller of securities in a public equity offering; and (x) all internal expenses of the Company (including all salaries and expenses of officers and employees performing legal or accounting duties).

SEC ” means the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Securities Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

 

2


ARTICLE II

REGISTRATION RIGHTS

Section 2.1 Demand Registrations .

(a) (i) Subject to Section 2.1(c), at any time or from time to time after the six-month anniversary of the first date on which the Company shall have effected the registration under the Securities Act of any shares of Common Stock, one or more Holders shall have the right to require the Company to file a registration statement under the Securities Act covering Registrable Securities with an aggregate value of $10,000,000 or greater (based on the market price of the Common Stock as of the date of the Demand Registration Request), by delivering a written request therefor to the Company specifying the number of Registrable Securities to be included in such registration by such Holders and the intended method of distribution thereof. All such requests by any Holder pursuant to this Section 2.1(a)(i) are referred to as “ Demand Registration Requests ,” the registrations so requested are referred to as “ Demand Registrations ” and the Holders making such demand for registration are referred to as the “ Initiating Holders .” As promptly as practicable, but no later than ten days after receipt of a Demand Registration Request, the Company shall give written notice (a “ Demand Exercise Notice ”) of such Demand Registration Request to all Holders of record of Registrable Securities.

(ii) The Company, subject to Sections 2.3 and 2.7, shall include in a Demand Registration (A) the Registrable Securities of the Initiating Holders and (B) the Registrable Securities of any other Holder of Registrable Securities that shall have made a written request to the Company within the time limits specified below for inclusion in such registration (together with the Initiating Holders, the “ Participating Holders ”). Any such request from the other Holders must be delivered to the Company within 15 days after the receipt of the Demand Exercise Notice and must specify the maximum number of Registrable Securities intended to be disposed of by such other Holders.

(iii) The Company, as expeditiously as possible but subject to Section 2.1(c), shall use its commercially reasonable efforts to effect such registration under the Securities Act of the Registrable Securities that the Company has been so requested to register for distribution in accordance with such intended method of distribution.

(b) Registrations under this Section 2.1 shall be on such appropriate registration form of the SEC for the disposition of such Registrable Securities in accordance with the intended method of disposition thereof, which form shall be selected by the Company and shall be reasonably acceptable to the Majority Participating Holders.

(c) The Demand Registration rights granted in Section 2.1(a) to the Holders are subject to the following limitations:

(i) the Company shall not be required to cause a registration pursuant to Section 2.1(a) to be filed within 90 days or to be declared effective within a period of 180 days after the effective date of any other registration statement of the Company filed pursuant to the Securities Act;

 

3


(ii) if, in the opinion of outside counsel to the Company, any registration of Registrable Securities would require disclosure of information not otherwise then required by law to be publicly disclosed and, in the good faith judgment of the board of directors of the Company, such disclosure is reasonably likely to adversely affect any material financing, acquisition, corporate reorganization or merger or other material transaction or event involving the Company or otherwise have a material adverse effect on the Company (a “ Valid Business Reason ”), the Company may postpone or withdraw a filing of a registration statement relating to a Demand Registration Request until such Valid Business Reason no longer exists, but in no event shall the Company avail itself of such right for more than 90 days, in the aggregate, in any period of 365 consecutive days (such period of postponement or withdrawal under this clause (ii), the “ Postponement Period ”); and the Company shall give notice of its determination to postpone or withdraw a registration statement and of the fact that the Valid Business Reason for such postponement or withdrawal no longer exists, in each case, promptly after the occurrence thereof; and

(iii) the Company shall not be obligated to effect more than five Demand Registrations under Section 2.1(a) for benefit of the Holders.

If the Company shall give any notice of postponement or withdrawal of any registration statement pursuant to clause (ii) above, the Company shall not register any equity security of the Company during the period of postponement or withdrawal. Each Holder of Registrable Securities agrees that, upon receipt of any notice from the Company that the Company has determined to withdraw any registration statement pursuant to clause (ii) above, such Holder will discontinue its disposition of Registrable Securities pursuant to such registration statement. If the Company shall have withdrawn or prematurely terminated a registration statement filed under Section 2.1(a)(i), the Company shall not be considered to have effected an effective registration for the purposes of this Agreement until the Company shall have filed a new registration statement covering the Registrable Securities covered by the withdrawn registration statement and such registration statement shall have been declared effective and shall not have been withdrawn. If the Company shall give any notice of withdrawal or postponement of a registration statement, at such time as the Valid Business Reason that caused such withdrawal or postponement no longer exists (but in no event more than 90 days after the date of the postponement or withdrawal), the Company shall use its commercially reasonable efforts to effect the registration under the Securities Act of the Registrable Securities covered by the withdrawn or postponed registration statement in accordance with this Section 2.1.

(d) The Company, subject to Sections 2.3 and 2.7, may elect to include in any registration statement and offering made pursuant to Section 2.1(a)(i), (i) authorized but unissued shares of Common Stock or shares of Common Stock held by the Company as treasury shares and (ii) any other shares of Common Stock that are requested to be included in such registration pursuant to the exercise of piggyback rights granted by the Company that are not inconsistent with the rights granted in, or otherwise conflict with the terms of, this Agreement (“ Additional Piggyback Rights ”); provided , however , that such inclusion shall be permitted only to the extent that it is pursuant to and subject to the terms of the underwriting agreement or arrangements, if any, entered into by the Participating Holders.

 

4


(e) A Holder may withdraw its Registrable Securities from a Demand Registration at any time. If all such Holders do so, the Company shall cease all efforts to secure registration and such registration nonetheless shall be deemed a Demand Registration for purposes of this Section 2.1 unless (i) the withdrawal is made following withdrawal or postponement of such registration by the Company pursuant to a Valid Business Reason as contemplated by Section 2.1(c), (ii) the withdrawal is based on the reasonable determination of the Holders who requested such registration that there has been, since the date of the Demand Registration Request, a material adverse change in the business or prospects of the Company or (iii) the Holders who requested such registration shall have paid or reimbursed the Company for all of the reasonable out-of-pocket fees and expenses incurred by the Company in connection with the withdrawn registration.

(f) A Demand Registration shall not be deemed to have been effected and shall not count as such (i) unless a registration statement with respect thereto has become effective and has remained effective for a period of at least 180 days or such shorter period during which all Registrable Securities covered by such Registration Statement have been sold or withdrawn, or, if such Registration Statement relates to an underwritten offering, such longer period as, in the opinion of counsel for the underwriter(s), is required by law for delivery of a prospectus in connection with the sale of Registrable Securities by an underwriter or dealer, (ii) if, after the registration statement with respect thereto has become effective, it becomes subject to any stop order, injunction or other order or requirement of the SEC or other governmental agency or court for any reason, (iii) if it is withdrawn by the Company pursuant to a Valid Business Reason as contemplated by Section 2.1(c) or (iv) if the conditions to closing specified in the purchase agreement or underwriting agreement entered into in connection with such Demand Registration are not satisfied, other than solely by reason of some act or omission of the Participating Holders.

(g) In connection with any Demand Registration, the Company may designate the lead managing underwriter in connection with such registration and each other managing underwriter for such registration, provided , that, in each case, each such underwriter is reasonably satisfactory to the Majority Participating Holders.

Section 2.2 Piggyback Registrations .

(a) If, at any time, the Company proposes or is required to register any of its equity securities under the Securities Act (other than pursuant to (i) registrations on such form or similar form(s) solely for registration of securities in connection with an employee benefit plan or dividend reinvestment plan or (ii) a Demand Registration under Section 2.1) on a registration statement on Form S-1 or Form S-3 or an equivalent general registration form then in effect, whether or not for its own account, the Company shall give prompt written notice of its intention to do so to each Holder of record of Registrable Securities. Upon the written request of any such Holder, made within 15 days following the receipt of any such written notice (which request shall specify the maximum number of Registrable Securities intended to be disposed of by such Holder and the intended method of distribution thereof), the Company, subject to Sections 2.2(b), 2.3 and 2.7, shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause all such Registrable Securities to be included in the registration statement with the securities that the Company at the time proposes to register to permit the sale or other disposition by the Holders in

 

5


accordance with the intended method of distribution thereof of the Registrable Securities to be so registered. No registration of Registrable Securities effected under this Section 2.2(a) shall relieve the Company of its obligations to effect Demand Registrations under Section 2.1.

(b) If, at any time after giving written notice of its intention to register any equity securities and prior to the effective date of the registration statement filed in connection with such registration, the Company shall determine for any reason not to register or to delay registration of such equity securities, the Company will give written notice of such determination to each Holder of record of Registrable Securities and (i) in the case of a determination not to register, shall be relieved of its obligation to register any Registrable Securities in connection with such abandoned registration, without prejudice, however, to the rights of Holders under Section 2.1 and (ii) in the case of a determination to delay such registration of its equity securities, shall be permitted to delay the registration of such Registrable Securities for the same period as the delay in registering such other equity securities.

(c) Any Holder shall have the right to withdraw its request for inclusion of its Registrable Securities in any registration statement pursuant to this Section 2.2 by giving written notice to the Company of its request to withdraw. Such request must be made in writing prior to the earlier of the execution of the underwriting agreement or the execution of the custody agreement with respect to such registration. Such withdrawal shall be irrevocable and, after making such withdrawal, a Holder shall no longer have any right to include Registrable Securities in the registration as to which such withdrawal was made.

Section 2.3 Priority in Registrations .

(a) If any requested registration made pursuant to Section 2.1 involves an underwritten offering and the lead managing underwriter of such offering (the “ Manager ”) shall advise the Company that, in its view, the number of securities requested to be included in such registration by the Holders of Registrable Securities or any other persons, including those shares of Common Stock requested by the Company to be included in such registration, exceeds the largest number (the “ Section 2.3(a) Sale Number ”) that can be sold in an orderly manner in such offering within a price range acceptable to the Majority Participating Holders, the Company shall use commercially reasonable efforts to include in such registration:

(i) first, all Registrable Securities requested to be included in such registration by the Holders thereof; provided , however , that, if the number of such Registrable Securities exceeds the Section 2.3(a) Sale Number, the number of such Registrable Securities (not to exceed the Section 2.3(a) Sale Number) to be included in such registration shall be allocated on a pro rata basis among all Holders requesting that Registrable Securities be included in such registration, based on the number of Registrable Securities then owned by each such Holder requesting inclusion in relation to the number of Registrable Securities owned by all Holders requesting inclusion;

(ii) second, to the extent that the number of securities to be included pursuant to clause (i) of this Section 2.3(a) is less than the Section 2.3(a) Sale Number, the remaining shares to be included in such registration shall be allocated on a pro rata basis among all holders requesting that securities be included in such registration pursuant to the exercise of

 

6


Additional Piggyback Rights (“ Piggyback Shares ”), based on the aggregate number of Piggyback Shares then owned by each holder requesting inclusion in relation to the aggregate number of Piggyback Shares owned by all holders requesting inclusion, up to the Section 2.3(a) Sale Number; and

(iii) third, to the extent that the number of securities to be included pursuant to clauses (i) and (ii) of this Section 2.3(a) is less than the Section 2.3(a) Sale Number, any securities that the Company proposes to register, up to the Section 2.3(a) Sale Number.

If, as a result of the proration provisions of this Section 2.3(a), any Holder shall not be entitled to include all Registrable Securities in a registration that such Holder has requested be included, such Holder may elect to withdraw its request to include Registrable Securities in such registration or may reduce the number requested to be included; provided , however , that (A) such request must be made in writing prior to the earlier of the execution of the underwriting agreement or the execution of the custody agreement with respect to such registration and (B) such withdrawal shall be irrevocable and, after making such withdrawal, such Holder shall no longer have any right to include Registrable Securities in the registration as to which such withdrawal was made.

(b) If any registration pursuant to Section 2.2 involves an underwritten offering that was proposed by the Company and the Manager shall advise the Company that, in its view, the number of securities requested to be included in such registration exceeds the number (the “ Section 2.3(b) Sale Number ”) that can be sold in an orderly manner in such registration within a price range acceptable to the Company, the Company shall include in such registration:

(i) first, all Common Stock that the Company proposes to register for its own account; and

(ii) second, to the extent that the number of securities to be included pursuant to clause (i) of this Section 2.3(b) is less than the Section 2.3(b) Sale Number, the remaining shares to be included in such registration shall be allocated on a pro rata basis among all holders requesting that Registrable Securities or Piggyback Shares be included in such registration pursuant to the exercise of piggyback rights pursuant to Section 2.2 of this Agreement or Additional Piggyback Rights, based on the aggregate number of Registrable Securities and Piggyback Shares then owned by each holder requesting inclusion in relation to the aggregate number of Registrable Securities and Piggyback Shares owned by all holders requesting inclusion, up to the Section 2.3(b) Sale Number.

(c) If any registration pursuant to Section 2.2 involves an underwritten offering that was proposed by holders of securities of the Company that have the right to require such registration pursuant to an agreement entered into by the Company in accordance with Section 3.4 (“ Additional Demand Rights ”) and the Manager shall advise the Company that, in its view, the number of securities requested to be included in such registration exceeds the number (the “ Section 2.3(c) Sale Number ”) that can be sold in an orderly manner in such registration within a price range acceptable to the Company, the Company shall include in such registration:

 

7


(i) first, all securities requested to be included in such registration by the holders of Additional Demand Rights (“ Additional Registrable Securities ”); provided , however , that, if the number of such Additional Registrable Securities exceeds the Section 2.3(c) Sale Number, the number of such Additional Registrable Securities (not to exceed the Section 2.3(c) Sale Number) to be included in such registration shall be allocated on a pro rata basis among all holders of Additional Registrable Securities requesting that Additional Registrable Securities be included in such registration, based on the number of Additional Registrable Securities then owned by each such holder requesting inclusion in relation to the number of Additional Registrable Securities owned by all of such holders requesting inclusion;

(ii) second, to the extent that the number of securities to be included pursuant to clause (i) of this Section 2.3(c) is less than the Section 2.3(c) Sale Number, any Common Stock that the Company proposes to register for its own account, up to the Section 2.3(c) Sale Number; and

(iii) third, to the extent that the number of securities to be included pursuant to clauses (i) and (ii) of this Section 2.3(c) is less than the Section 2.3(c) Sale Number, the remaining shares to be included in such registration shall be allocated on a pro rata basis among all holders requesting that Registrable Securities or Piggyback Shares be included in such registration pursuant to the exercise of piggyback rights pursuant to Section 2.2 or Additional Piggyback Rights, based on the aggregate number of Registrable Securities and Piggyback Shares then owned by each holder requesting inclusion in relation to the aggregate number of Registrable Securities and Piggyback Shares owned by all holders requesting inclusion, up to the Section 2.3(c) Sale Number.

Section 2.4 Registration Procedures . Whenever the Company is required by the provisions of this Agreement to use commercially reasonable efforts to effect or cause the registration of any Registrable Securities under the Securities Act as provided in this Agreement, the Company, as expeditiously as possible:

(a) shall prepare and file with the SEC the requisite registration statement, which shall comply as to form in all material respects with the requirements of the applicable form and shall include all financial statements required by the SEC to be filed therewith, and use commercially reasonable efforts to cause such registration statement to become and remain effective ( provided , however , that before filing a registration statement or prospectus or any amendments or supplements thereto, or comparable statements under securities or blue sky laws of any jurisdiction, or any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus related thereto, the Company will furnish to one counsel for the Holders participating in the planned offering (selected by the Majority Participating Holders) and the lead managing underwriter, if any, copies of all such documents proposed to be filed (including all exhibits thereto), which documents will be subject to the reasonable review and reasonable comment of such counsel, and the Company shall not file any registration statement or amendment thereto, any prospectus or supplement thereto or any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus related thereto to which the Majority Participating Holders or the underwriters, if any, shall reasonably object);

(b) shall prepare and file with the SEC such amendments and supplements to such registration statement and the prospectus used in connection therewith as may be necessary

 

8


to keep such registration statement effective for such period as any seller of Registrable Securities pursuant to such registration statement shall request and to comply with the provisions of the Securities Act with respect to the sale or other disposition of all Registrable Securities covered by such registration statement in accordance with the intended methods of disposition by the seller or sellers thereof set forth in such registration statement;

(c) shall furnish, without charge, to each seller of such Registrable Securities and each underwriter, if any, of the securities covered by such registration statement such number of copies of such registration statement, each amendment thereto, the prospectus included in such registration statement, each preliminary prospectus and each Issuer Free Writing Prospectus utilized in connection therewith, all in conformity with the requirements of the Securities Act, and such other documents as such seller and underwriter reasonably may request in order to facilitate the public sale or other disposition of the Registrable Securities owned by such seller, and shall consent to the use in accordance with all applicable law of each such registration statement, each amendment thereto, each such prospectus, preliminary prospectus or Issuer Free Writing Prospectus by each such seller of Registrable Securities and the underwriters, if any, in connection with the offering and sale of the Registrable Securities covered by such registration statement or prospectus;

(d) shall use commercially reasonable efforts to register or qualify the Registrable Securities covered by such registration statement under such other securities or “blue sky” laws of such jurisdictions as any sellers of Registrable Securities or any managing underwriter, if any, reasonably shall request, and do any and all other acts and things that may be reasonably necessary or advisable to enable such sellers or underwriter, if any, to consummate the disposition of the Registrable Securities in such jurisdictions, except that in no event shall the Company be required to qualify to do business as a foreign corporation in any jurisdiction where, but for the requirements of this Section 2.4(d), it would not be required to be so qualified, to subject itself to taxation in any such jurisdiction or to consent to general service of process in any such jurisdiction;

(e) shall promptly notify each Holder selling Registrable Securities covered by such registration statement and each managing underwriter, if any:

(i) when the registration statement, any pre-effective amendment, the prospectus or any prospectus supplement related thereto, any post-effective amendment to the registration statement or any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus has been filed and, with respect to the registration statement or any post-effective amendment, when the same has become effective;

(ii) of any request by the SEC or state securities authority for amendments or supplements to the registration statement or the prospectus related thereto or for additional information;

(iii) of the issuance by the SEC of any stop order suspending the effectiveness of the registration statement or the initiation of any proceedings for that purpose;

 

9


(iv) of the receipt by the Company of any notification with respect to the suspension of the qualification of any Registrable Securities for sale under the securities or blue sky laws of any jurisdiction or the initiation of any proceeding for such purpose;

(v) of the existence of any fact of which the Company becomes aware which results in the registration statement, the prospectus related thereto, any document incorporated therein by reference, any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus or the information conveyed to any purchaser at the time of sale to such purchaser containing an untrue statement of a material fact or omitting to state a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make any statement therein not misleading; and

(vi) if at any time the representations and warranties contemplated by any underwriting agreement, securities sale agreement, or other similar agreement, relating to the offering shall cease to be true and correct in all material respects;

and, if the notification relates to an event described in clause (v), the Company, subject to the provisions of Section 2.1(c), promptly shall prepare and file with the SEC, and furnish to each seller and each underwriter, if any, a reasonable number of copies of, a prospectus supplemented or amended so that, as thereafter delivered to the purchasers of such Registrable Securities, such prospectus shall not include an untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein in the light of the circumstances under which they were made not misleading;

(f) shall comply with all applicable rules and regulations of the SEC, and make generally available to its security holders, as soon as reasonably practicable after the effective date of the registration statement (and in any event within 90 days after the end of such 12 month period described hereafter), an earnings statement, which need not be audited, covering the period of at least 12 consecutive months beginning with the first day of the Company’s first calendar quarter after the effective date of the registration statement, which earnings statement shall satisfy the provisions of Section 11(a) of the Securities Act and Rule 158 thereunder;

(g) shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause all Registrable Securities covered by such registration statement to be authorized to be listed on a national securities exchange if shares of the particular class of Registrable Securities are at that time, or will be immediately following the offering, listed on such exchange;

(h) shall provide and cause to be maintained a transfer agent and registrar for all such Registrable Securities covered by such registration statement not later than the effective date of such registration statement;

(i) shall enter into such customary agreements (including, if applicable, an underwriting agreement) and take such other actions as the Majority Participating Holders shall reasonably request in order to expedite or facilitate the disposition of such Registrable Securities (it being understood that the Holders of the Registrable Securities that are to be distributed by any underwriters shall be parties to any such underwriting agreement and may, at their option, require that the Company make to and for the benefit of such Holders the representations,

 

10


warranties and covenants of the Company which are being made to and for the benefit of such underwriters);

(j) shall use commercially reasonable efforts to obtain an opinion from the Company’s counsel and a “cold comfort” letter from the Company’s independent public accountants in customary form and covering such matters as are customarily covered by such opinions and “cold comfort” letters delivered to underwriters in underwritten public offerings, which opinion and letter shall be reasonably satisfactory to the underwriter, if any;

(k) shall use commercially reasonable efforts to obtain the withdrawal of any order suspending the effectiveness of the registration statement;

(l) shall provide a CUSIP number for all Registrable Securities, not later than the effective date of the registration statement;

(m) shall make reasonably available its employees and personnel for participation in “road shows” and other marketing efforts and otherwise provide reasonable assistance to the underwriters, taking into account the needs of the Company’s businesses and the requirements of the marketing process, in the marketing of Registrable Securities in any underwritten offering;

(n) shall promptly prior to the filing of any document that is to be incorporated by reference into the registration statement or the prospectus, and prior to the filing of any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus, provide copies of such document to counsel for the selling holders of Registrable Securities and to each managing underwriter, if any, and make the Company’s representatives reasonably available for discussion of such document and make such changes in such document concerning the selling holders prior to the filing thereof as counsel for such selling holders or underwriters may reasonably request;

(o) shall cooperate with the sellers of Registrable Securities and the managing underwriter, if any, to facilitate the timely preparation and delivery of certificates not bearing any restrictive legends representing the Registrable Securities to be sold, and cause such Registrable Securities to be issued in such denominations and registered in such names in accordance with the underwriting agreement prior to any sale of Registrable Securities to the underwriters or, if not an underwritten offering, in accordance with the instructions of the sellers of Registrable Securities at least three Business Days prior to any sale of Registrable Securities and instruct any transfer agent and registrar of Registrable Securities to release any stop transfer orders in respect thereof;

(p) shall take all such other commercially reasonable actions as are necessary or advisable in order to expedite or facilitate the disposition of such Registrable Securities;

(q) shall not take any direct or indirect action prohibited by Regulation M under the Exchange Act; provided , however , that to the extent that any prohibition is applicable to the Company, the Company will take such action as is necessary to make any such prohibition inapplicable;

 

11


(r) shall cooperate with each seller of Registrable Securities and each underwriter or agent participating in the disposition of such Registrable Securities and their respective counsel in connection with any filings required to be made with FINRA; and

(s) shall take all reasonable action to ensure that any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus utilized in connection with any registration covered by Section 2.1 or 2.2 complies in all material respects with the Securities Act, is filed in accordance with the Securities Act to the extent required thereby, is retained in accordance with the Securities Act to the extent required thereby and, when taken together with the related prospectus, will not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements therein, in light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading.

The Company may require as a condition precedent to the Company’s obligations under this Section 2.4 that each seller of Registrable Securities as to which any registration is being effected furnish the Company such information in writing regarding such seller and the distribution of such Registrable Securities as the Company from time to time reasonably may request; provided , that such information is necessary for the Company to consummate such registration and shall be used only in connection with such registration. Each seller of Registrable Securities agrees that upon receipt of any notice from the Company under Section 2.4(e)(v), such seller will discontinue such seller’s disposition of Registrable Securities pursuant to the registration statement covering such Registrable Securities until such seller’s receipt of the copies of the supplemented or amended prospectus. In the event the Company shall give any such notice, the applicable period set forth in Section 2.4(b) shall be extended by the number of days during such period from and including the date of the giving of such notice to and including the date when each seller of any Registrable Securities covered by such registration statement shall have received the copies of the supplemented or amended prospectus. If any such registration statement or comparable statement under “blue sky” laws refers to any Holder by name or otherwise as the Holder of any securities of the Company, such Holder shall have the right to require (i) the insertion therein of language, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to such Holder and the Company, to the effect that the holding by such Holder of such securities is not to be construed as a recommendation by such Holder of the investment quality of the Company’s securities covered thereby and that such holding does not imply that such Holder will assist in meeting any future financial requirements of the Company or (ii) in the event that such reference to such Holder by name or otherwise is not in the judgment of the Company, as advised by counsel, required by the Securities Act or any similar federal statute or any state “blue sky” or securities law then in force, the deletion of the reference to such Holder.

Section 2.5 Automatic Shelf Registration Statements . To the extent the Company is a well-known seasoned issuer as defined in Rule 405 under the Securities Act (a “ WKSI ”) at the time any Demand Registration Request is submitted to the Company, and such Demand Registration Request requests that the Company file an automatic shelf registration statement as defined in Rule 405 under the Securities Act (an “ automatic shelf registration statement ”) on Form S-3, the Company shall file an automatic shelf registration statement that covers those Registrable Securities that are requested to be registered. The Company shall use commercially reasonable efforts to remain a WKSI and not become an ineligible issuer (as defined in Rule 405 under the Securities Act) during the period during which such automatic shelf registration statement is required to remain effective. If the Company does not pay the filing fee covering

 

12


the Registrable Securities at the time the automatic shelf registration statement is filed, the Company shall pay such fee at such time or times as the Registrable Securities are to be sold. If the automatic shelf registration statement has been outstanding for at least three years, at the end of the third year the Company shall refile a new automatic shelf registration statement covering the Registrable Securities. If at any time when the Company is required to re-evaluate its WKSI status, the Company determines that it is not a WKSI, the Company shall use commercially reasonable efforts to refile the shelf registration statement on Form S-3 and, if such form is not available, Form S-1 and keep such registration statement effective during the period during which such registration statement is required to be kept effective. If the Company files any shelf registration statement for the benefit of the holders of any of its securities other than the Holders, the Company shall include in such registration statement such disclosures as may be required by Rule 430B under the Securities Act, referring to the unnamed selling security holders in a generic manner, in order to ensure that the Holders may be added to such shelf registration statement at a later time through the filing of a prospectus supplement rather than a post-effective amendment.

Section 2.6 Registration Expenses .

(a) The Company shall pay all Registration Expenses (i) with respect to any Demand Registration whether or not it becomes effective or remains effective for the period contemplated by Section 2.4(b) and (ii) with respect to any registration effected under Section 2.2.

(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing, (i) the provisions of this Section 2.6 shall be deemed amended to the extent necessary to cause these expense provisions to comply with “blue sky” laws of each state in which the offering is made, (ii) in connection with any registration hereunder, each Holder of Registrable Securities being registered shall pay all underwriting discounts and commissions and any transfer taxes, if any, attributable to the sale of such Registrable Securities, pro rata with respect to payments of discounts and commissions in accordance with the number of shares sold in the offering by such Holder and (iii) the Company shall, in the case of all registrations under this Article II, be responsible for all its internal expenses.

Section 2.7 Underwritten Offerings .

(a) If requested by the underwriters for any underwritten offering by the Holders pursuant to a registration requested under Section 2.1, the Company shall enter into a customary underwriting agreement with the underwriters. Such underwriting agreement shall be satisfactory in form and substance to the Majority Participating Holders and shall contain such representations and warranties by, and such other agreements on the part of, the Company and such other terms as are generally prevailing in agreements of that type. Any Holder participating in the offering shall be a party to such underwriting agreement and, at its option, may require that any or all of the representations and warranties by, and the other agreements on the part of, the Company to and for the benefit of such underwriters also shall be made to and for the benefit of such Holder and that any or all of the conditions precedent to the obligations of such underwriters under such underwriting agreement be conditions precedent to the obligations of such Holder; provided , however , that the Company shall not be required to make any

 

13


representations or warranties with respect to written information specifically provided by a selling Holder for inclusion in the registration statement. No Holder shall be required to make any representations or warranties to or agreements with the Company or the underwriters other than representations, warranties or agreements regarding such Holder, its ownership of and title to the Registrable Securities and its intended method of distribution; and any liability of such Holder to any underwriter or other Person under such underwriting agreement shall be limited to liability arising from breach of its representations and warranties and shall be limited to an amount equal to the proceeds (net of expenses and underwriting discounts and commissions) that it derives from such registration.

(b) In the case of a registration pursuant to Section 2.2, if the Company shall have determined to enter into an underwriting agreement in connection therewith, any Registrable Securities to be included in such registration shall be subject to such underwriting agreement. Any Holder participating in such registration may, at its option, require that any or all of the representations and warranties by, and the other agreements on the part of, the Company to and for the benefit of such underwriters shall also be made to and for the benefit of such Holder and that any or all of the conditions precedent to the obligations of such underwriters under such underwriting agreement be conditions precedent to the obligations of such Holder. No Holder shall be required to make any representations or warranties to or agreements with the Company or the underwriters other than representations, warranties or agreements regarding such Holder, its ownership of and title to the Registrable Securities and its intended method of distribution; and any liability of such Holder to any underwriter or other Person under such underwriting agreement shall be limited to liability arising from breach of its representations and warranties and shall be limited to an amount equal to the proceeds (net of expenses and underwriting discounts and commissions) that it derives from such registration.

(c) In the case of any registration under Section 2.1 pursuant to an underwritten offering, or, in the case of a registration under Section 2.2, if the Company has determined to enter into an underwriting agreement in connection therewith, all securities to be included in such registration shall be subject to an underwriting agreement and no Person may participate in such registration unless such Person agrees to sell such Person’s securities on the basis provided therein and, subject to the provisions of this Section 2.7, completes and executes all reasonable questionnaires, and other documents, including custody agreements and powers of attorney, that must be executed in connection therewith, and provides such other information to the Company or the underwriter as may be necessary to register such Person’s securities.

Section 2.8 Holdback Agreements .

(a) Each seller of Registrable Securities agrees, to the extent requested in writing by a managing underwriter, if any, of any registration effected pursuant to Section 2.1, not to sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of, including any sale pursuant to Rule 144 under the Securities Act, any Common Stock, or any other equity security of the Company or any security convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for any equity security of the Company other than as part of such underwritten public offering during the time period reasonably requested by the managing underwriter, not to exceed 90 days.

 

14


(b) The Company agrees that, if it shall previously have received a request for registration pursuant to Section 2.1 or 2.2, and if such previous registration shall not have been withdrawn or abandoned, it shall not sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any Common Stock, or any other equity security of the Company or any security convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for any equity security of the Company (other than as part of such underwritten public offering, a registration on Form S-4 or Form S-8 or any successor or similar form which is then in effect or upon the conversion, exchange or exercise of any then outstanding Common Stock Equivalent), until a period of 180 days shall have elapsed from the effective date of such previous registration; and the Company shall so provide in any registration rights agreements hereafter entered into with respect to any of its securities.

Section 2.9 No Required Sale . Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to create an independent obligation on the part of any Holder to sell any Registrable Securities pursuant to any effective registration statement.

Section 2.10 Indemnification .

(a) In the event of any registration of any securities of the Company under the Securities Act pursuant to this Article II, the Company will, and hereby agrees to, indemnify and hold harmless, to the fullest extent permitted by law, each Holder of Registrable Securities, its directors, officers, fiduciaries, employees, agents, Affiliates, consultants, representatives, general and limited partners, stockholders, successors, assigns (and the directors, officers, employees and stockholders thereof), and each other Person, if any, who controls such Holder within the meaning of the Securities Act, from and against any and all losses, claims, damages or liabilities, joint or several, actions or proceedings (whether commenced or threatened) and expenses (including reasonable fees of counsel and any amounts paid in any settlement effected with the Company’s consent, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed) to which each such indemnified party may become subject under the Securities Act or otherwise in respect thereof (collectively, “ Losses ”), insofar as such Losses arise out of or are based upon any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or omission or alleged omission to state a material fact necessary to be stated or necessary in order to make the statements, in light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading, in any registration statement under which such securities were registered under the Securities Act, or amendment thereof or supplement thereto, or in any preliminary, final or summary prospectus or any amendment or supplement thereto, together with the documents incorporated by reference therein, or any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus utilized in connection therewith, and the Company will reimburse any such indemnified party for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred by such indemnified party in connection with investigating or defending any such Loss as such expenses are incurred; provided , however , that the Company shall not be liable to any such indemnified party in any such case to the extent such Loss arises out of or is based upon any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or omission or alleged omission of a material fact made in such registration statement or amendment thereof or supplement thereto or in any such prospectus or any preliminary, final or summary prospectus or Issuer Free Writing Prospectus in reliance upon and in conformity with written information furnished to the Company by or on behalf of such indemnified party specifically for use therein. Such indemnity and reimbursement of expenses shall remain in full force and effect regardless of any investigation made by or on behalf of such indemnified party and shall survive the transfer of such securities by such Holder.

 

15


(b) Each Holder of Registrable Securities that are included in the securities as to which any registration under Section 2.1 or 2.2 is being effected shall, severally and not jointly, indemnify and hold harmless (in the same manner and to the same extent as set forth in paragraph (a) of this Section 2.10), to the fullest extent permitted by law, the Company, its officers and directors, each Person controlling the Company within the meaning of the Securities Act and all other prospective sellers and their respective directors, officers, fiduciaries, employees, agents, Affiliates, consultants, representatives, general and limited partners, stockholders, successors, assigns and respective controlling Persons with respect to any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of any material fact in, or omission or alleged omission of any material fact from, such registration statement, any preliminary, final or summary prospectus contained therein, or any amendment or supplement thereto, or any Issuer Free Writing Prospectus utilized in connection therewith, if such statement or alleged statement or omission or alleged omission was made in reliance upon and in conformity with written information furnished to the Company or its representatives by or on behalf of such Holder specifically for use therein and reimburse such indemnified party for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred in connection with investigating or defending any such Loss as such expenses are incurred; provided , however , that the aggregate amount that any such Holder shall be required to pay pursuant to this Section 2.10 shall in no case be greater than the amount of the net proceeds received by such Holder upon the sale of the Registrable Securities pursuant to the registration statement giving rise to such claim. Such indemnity and reimbursement of expenses shall remain in full force and effect regardless of any investigation made by or on behalf of such indemnified party and shall survive the transfer of such securities by such Holder.

(c) Any Person entitled to indemnification under this Agreement promptly shall notify the indemnifying party in writing of the commencement of any action or proceeding with respect to which a claim for indemnification may be made pursuant to this Section 2.10, but the failure of any such Person to provide such notice shall not relieve the indemnifying party of its obligations under the preceding paragraphs of this Section 2.10, except to the extent the indemnifying party is materially prejudiced thereby and shall not relieve the indemnifying party from any liability that it may have to any such Person otherwise than under this Article II. In case any action or proceeding is brought against an indemnified party and it shall notify the indemnifying party of the commencement thereof, the indemnifying party shall be entitled to participate therein and, unless in the reasonable opinion of outside counsel to the indemnified party a conflict of interest between such indemnified and indemnifying parties may exist in respect of such claim, to assume the defense thereof jointly with any other indemnifying party similarly notified, to the extent that it chooses, with counsel reasonably satisfactory to such indemnified party, and after notice from the indemnifying party to such indemnified party that it so chooses, the indemnifying party shall not be liable to such indemnified party for any legal or other expenses subsequently incurred by such indemnified party in connection with the defense thereof other than reasonable costs of investigation; provided , however , that (i) if the indemnifying party fails to take reasonable steps necessary to defend diligently the action or proceeding within 20 days after receiving notice from such indemnified party, (ii) if such indemnified party who is a defendant in any action or proceeding that is also brought against the indemnifying party reasonably shall have concluded that there may be one or more legal defenses available to such indemnified party that are not available to the indemnifying party or (iii) if representation of both parties by the same counsel is otherwise inappropriate under applicable standards of professional conduct, then, in any such case, the indemnified party shall

 

16


have the right to assume or continue its own defense as set forth above (but with no more than one firm of counsel for all indemnified parties in each jurisdiction, except to the extent any indemnified party or parties reasonably shall have concluded that there may be legal defenses available to such party or parties that are not available to the other indemnified parties or to the extent representation of all indemnified parties by the same counsel is otherwise inappropriate under applicable standards of professional conduct) and the indemnifying party shall be liable for any expenses therefor. Without the written consent of the indemnified party, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, no indemnifying party shall effect the settlement or compromise of, or consent to the entry of any judgment with respect to, any pending or threatened action or claim in respect of which indemnification or contribution may be sought hereunder, whether or not the indemnified party is an actual or potential party to such action or claim, unless such settlement, compromise or judgment (A) includes an unconditional release of the indemnified party from all liability arising out of such action or claim and (B) does not include a statement as to or an admission of fault, culpability or a failure to act, by or on behalf of any indemnified party.

(d) If for any reason the foregoing indemnity is unavailable or is insufficient to hold harmless an indemnified party under Section 2.10(a), (b) or (c), then each indemnifying party shall contribute to the amount paid or payable by such indemnified party as a result of any Loss in such proportion as is appropriate to reflect the relative fault of the indemnifying party, on the one hand, and the indemnified party, on the other hand, with respect to such offering of securities. The relative fault shall be determined by reference to, among other things, whether the untrue or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or the omission or alleged omission to state a material fact relates to information supplied by the indemnifying party or the indemnified party and the parties’ relative intent, knowledge, access to information and opportunity to correct or prevent such untrue statement or omission. If, however, the allocation provided in the second preceding sentence is not permitted by applicable law, then each indemnifying party shall contribute to the amount paid or payable by such indemnified party in such proportion as is appropriate to reflect not only such relative faults but also the relative benefits of the indemnifying party and the indemnified party as well as any other relevant equitable considerations. The parties hereto agree that it would not be just and equitable if contributions pursuant to this Section 2.10(d) were to be determined by pro rata allocation or by any other method of allocation which does not take account of the equitable considerations referred to in the preceding sentences of this Section 2.10(d). The amount paid or payable in respect of any Loss shall be deemed to include any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred by such indemnified party in connection with investigating or defending any such Loss. No Person guilty of fraudulent misrepresentation within the meaning of Section 11(f) of the Securities Act shall be entitled to contribution from any Person who was not guilty of such fraudulent misrepresentation. Notwithstanding anything in this Section 2.10(d) to the contrary, no indemnifying party other than the Company shall be required pursuant to this Section 2.10(d) to contribute any amount in excess of the net proceeds received by such indemnifying party from the sale of Registrable Securities in the offering to which the losses, claims, damages or liabilities of the indemnified parties relate, less the amount of any indemnification payment made by such indemnifying party pursuant to Sections 2.10(b) and (c).

(e) The indemnity and contribution agreements contained herein shall be in addition to any other rights to indemnification or contribution which any indemnified party may

 

17


have pursuant to law or contract and shall remain operative and in full force and effect regardless of any investigation made or omitted by or on behalf of any indemnified party and shall survive the transfer of the Registrable Securities by any such party.

(f) The indemnification and contribution required by this Section 2.10 shall be made by periodic payments of the amount thereof during the course of the investigation or defense, as and when bills are received or expense, loss, damage or liability is incurred.

ARTICLE III

GENERAL

Section 3.1 Adjustments Affecting Registrable Securities . The Company shall not effect or permit to occur any combination or subdivision of shares of Common Stock that would adversely affect the ability of any Holder of any Registrable Securities to include such Registrable Securities in any registration contemplated by this Agreement or the marketability of such Registrable Securities in any such registration. The Company will take all reasonable steps necessary to effect a subdivision of shares if in the reasonable judgment of (a) the Majority Participating Holders or (b) the managing underwriter for the offering in respect of such Demand Registration Request, such subdivision would enhance the marketability of the Registrable Securities. Each Holder shall vote all of its shares of capital stock in a manner, and to take all other actions necessary, to permit the Company to carry out the intent of the preceding sentence including, without limitation, voting in favor of an amendment to the Company’s certificate of incorporation in order to increase the number of authorized shares of capital stock of the Company.

Section 3.2 Rule 144 . The Company covenants that (a) upon such time as it becomes, and so long as it remains, subject to the reporting provisions of the Exchange Act, it will timely file the reports required to be filed by it under the Securities Act or the Exchange Act or, if it is not required to file such reports, upon the request of any Holder it shall make publicly available other information so long as necessary to permit sales of such Registrable Securities in compliance with Rule 144 under the Securities Act and (b) it will take such further action as any Holder of Registrable Securities reasonably may request, all to the extent required from time to time to enable such Holder to sell Registrable Securities without registration under the Securities Act within the limitation of the exemptions provided by Rule 144 under the Securities Act, as such Rule may be amended from time to time, or any similar rule or regulation hereafter adopted by the SEC. Upon the request of any Holder of Registrable Securities, the Company will deliver to such Holder a written statement as to whether it has complied with such requirements.

Section 3.3 Nominees for Beneficial Owners . If Registrable Securities are held by a nominee for the beneficial owner thereof, the beneficial owner thereof may, at its option, be treated as the Holder of such Registrable Securities for purposes of any request or other action by any Holder or Holders of Registrable Securities pursuant to this Agreement or any determination of any number or percentage of shares constituting Registrable Securities held by any Holder or Holders of Registrable Securities contemplated by this Agreement; provided , that the Company shall have received assurances reasonably satisfactory to it of such beneficial ownership.

 

18


Section 3.4 No Inconsistent Agreements . The rights granted to the Holders of Registrable Securities hereunder do not in any way conflict with and are not inconsistent with any other agreements to which the Company is a party or by which it is bound. Without the prior written consent of Holders of a majority of the then outstanding Registrable Securities, the Company will not enter into any agreement with respect to its securities that is inconsistent with the rights granted in this Agreement or otherwise conflicts with the provisions hereof or provides terms and conditions that are more favorable to, or less restrictive on, the other party thereto than the terms and conditions contained in this Agreement are to the Holders, other than any lock-up agreement with the underwriters in connection with any registered offering effected hereunder, pursuant to which the Company shall agree not to register for sale, and the Company shall agree not to sell or otherwise dispose of, Common Stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for Common Stock, for a specified period following the registered offering. If the Company enters into any other registration rights agreement with respect to any of its securities that contains terms that are more favorable to, or less restrictive on, the other party thereto than the terms and conditions contained in this Agreement are to the Holders, the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall immediately be deemed to have been amended without further action by the Company or any of the Holders of Registrable Securities so that the Holders shall each be entitled to the benefit of any such more favorable or less restrictive terms or conditions.

ARTICLE IV

MISCELLANEOUS

Section 4.1 Amendment and Waiver .

(a) Any provision of this Agreement may be amended or waived if, and only if, such amendment or waiver is in writing and is signed, in the case of an amendment, by the Company and a majority in interest of the Holders or, in the case of a waiver, by the party or parties against whom the waiver is to be effective, in an instrument specifically designated as an amendment or waiver hereto; provided , however , that waiver by the Holders shall require the consent of a majority in interest of the Holders.

(b) No failure or delay of any party in exercising any right or remedy hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any such right or power, or any abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such right or power, or any course of conduct, preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right or power. The rights and remedies of the parties hereunder are cumulative and are not exclusive of any rights or remedies which they would otherwise have hereunder.

Section 4.2 Notices . All notices and other communications hereunder shall be in writing and shall be deemed duly given (a) on the date of delivery if delivered personally, or if by facsimile, upon written confirmation of receipt by facsimile, e-mail or otherwise, (b) on the first Business Day following the date of dispatch if delivered utilizing a next-day service by a recognized next-day courier or (c) on the earlier of confirmed receipt or the fifth Business Day following the date of mailing if delivered by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid. All notices hereunder shall be delivered to the addresses set forth below, or

 

19


pursuant to such other instructions as may be designated in writing by the party to receive such notice:

(i) if to any Holder other than the Original Holder, to its last known address appearing on the books of the Company maintained for such purpose, and if to the Original Holder, to:

LSF5 Wagon Holdings, LLC

2711 N. Haskell Avenue, Suite 1700

Dallas, Texas 75204

Attention: Legal Department

Facsimile: (214) 515-6924

(ii) if to the Company, to:

Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC

930 S. Kimball Avenue, Suite 100

Southlake, Texas 76092

Attention: Chief Financial Officer

Facsimile: (817) 601-3438

or such other address as the Company or the Original Holder shall have specified to the other party in writing in accordance with this Section 4.2.

Section 4.3 Interpretation . When a reference is made in this Agreement to a Section or Article, such reference shall be to a Section or Article of this Agreement unless otherwise indicated. The headings contained in this Agreement are for convenience of reference purposes only and shall not affect in any way the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement. All words used in this Agreement will be construed to be of such gender or number as the circumstances require. The word “including” and words of similar import when used in this Agreement will mean “including, without limitation,” unless otherwise specified. Each of the parties hereto acknowledges that it has been represented by counsel in connection with this Agreement and the transactions contemplated by this Agreement. Accordingly, any rule of law or any legal decision that would require interpretation of any claimed ambiguities in this Agreement against the drafting party has no application and is expressly waived.

Section 4.4 Entire Agreement . This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement, and supersede all prior written agreements, arrangements, communications and understandings and all prior and contemporaneous oral agreements, arrangements, communications and understandings between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and thereof.

Section 4.5 No Third-Party Beneficiaries . Except as provided in Section 2.10, nothing in this Agreement, express or implied, is intended to or shall confer upon any Person other than the parties and their respective successors and permitted assigns any legal or equitable right, benefit or remedy of any nature under or by reason of this Agreement.

Section 4.6 Governing Law . This Agreement and all disputes or controversies arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby shall be governed

 

20


by, and construed in accordance with, the internal laws of the State of Delaware, without regard to the laws of any other jurisdiction that might be applied because of the conflicts of laws principles of the State of Delaware.

Section 4.7 Submission to Jurisdiction . Each of the parties irrevocably agrees that any legal action or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement brought by any other party or its successors or assigns shall be brought and determined in any Delaware State or federal court, and each of the parties hereby irrevocably submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of the aforesaid courts for itself and with respect to its property, generally and unconditionally, with regard to any such action or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the transactions contemplated hereby. Each of the parties agrees not to commence any action, suit or proceeding relating thereto except in the courts described above in Delaware, other than actions in any court of competent jurisdiction to enforce any judgment, decree or award rendered by any such court in Delaware as described herein. Each of the parties further agrees that notice as provided herein shall constitute sufficient service of process and the parties further waive any argument that such service is insufficient. Each of the parties hereby irrevocably and unconditionally waives, and agrees not to assert, by way of motion or as a defense, counterclaim or otherwise, in any action or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby, (a) any claim that it is not personally subject to the jurisdiction of the courts in Delaware as described herein for any reason, (b) that it or its property is exempt or immune from jurisdiction of any such court or from any legal process commenced in such courts (whether through service of notice, attachment prior to judgment, attachment in aid of execution of judgment, execution of judgment or otherwise) and (c) that (i) the suit, action or proceeding in any such court is brought in an inconvenient forum, (ii) the venue of such suit, action or proceeding is improper or (iii) this Agreement, or the subject matter hereof, may not be enforced in or by such courts.

Section 4.8 Assignment; Successors . This Agreement will be binding upon, inure to the benefit of, and be enforceable by, the parties and their respective successors and assigns. If any Person shall acquire Registrable Securities from any Holder in any manner, whether by operation of law or otherwise, such Person shall promptly notify the Company and such Registrable Securities acquired from such Holder shall be held subject to all of the terms of this Agreement, and by taking and holding such Registrable Securities such Person shall be entitled to receive the benefits of and be conclusively deemed to have agreed to be bound by and to perform all of the terms and provisions of this Agreement. Any such successor or assign shall agree in writing to acquire and hold the Registrable Securities acquired from such Holder subject to all of the terms hereof.

Section 4.9 Enforcement . The parties agree that irreparable damage would occur in the event that any of the provisions of this Agreement were not performed in accordance with their specific terms or were otherwise breached. Accordingly, each of the parties shall be entitled to specific performance of the terms hereof, including an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of this Agreement and to enforce specifically the terms and provisions of this Agreement in any Delaware State or federal court, this being in addition to any other remedy to which such party is entitled at law or in equity. Each of the parties hereby further waives (a) any defense in any action for specific performance that a remedy at law would be adequate and (b) any requirement under any law to post security as a prerequisite to obtaining equitable relief.

 

21


Section 4.10 Severability . Whenever possible, each provision or portion of any provision of this Agreement shall be interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law, but if any provision or portion of any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect under any applicable law or rule in any jurisdiction, such invalidity, illegality or unenforceability shall not affect any other provision or portion of any provision in such jurisdiction, and this Agreement shall be reformed, construed and enforced in such jurisdiction as if such invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision or portion of any provision had never been contained herein.

Section 4.11 Waiver of Jury Trial . EACH OF THE PARTIES TO THIS AGREEMENT HEREBY IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ALL RIGHT TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY ACTION, PROCEEDING OR COUNTERCLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED HEREBY.

Section 4.12 Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, all of which shall be considered one and the same instrument and shall become effective when one or more counterparts have been signed by each of the parties and delivered to the other parties.

Section 4.13 Facsimile Signature . This Agreement may be executed by facsimile signature and a facsimile signature shall constitute an original for all purposes.

Section 4.14 Time of Essence . Time is of the essence with regard to all dates and time periods set forth or referred to in this Agreement.

[The remainder of this page is intentionally left blank.]

 

22


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, INC.
By:    
 

Name:

Title:

 

 

LSF5 WAGON HOLDINGS, LLC
By:    
 

Name:

Title:

Exhibit 10.3

INDEMNIFICATION AGREEMENT

This Indemnification Agreement (this “ Agreement ”) is entered into as of , 20 (the “ Effective Date ”) by and between Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), and                      (the “ Indemnitee ”).

RECITALS

WHEREAS, the Board of Directors has determined that the inability to attract and retain qualified persons as directors and officers is detrimental to the best interests of the Company’s stockholders and that the Company should act to assure such persons that there shall be adequate certainty of protection through insurance and indemnification against risks of claims and actions against them arising out of their service to and activities on behalf of the Company;

WHEREAS, the Company has adopted provisions in its Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws providing for indemnification and advancement of expenses of its directors and officers to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, and the Company wishes to clarify and enhance the rights and obligations of the Company and Indemnitee with respect to indemnification and advancement of expenses;

WHEREAS, in order to induce and encourage highly experienced and capable persons such as Indemnitee to serve and continue to serve as directors and officers of the Company and in any other capacity with respect to the Company, and to otherwise promote the desirable end that such persons shall resist what they consider unjustified lawsuits and claims made against them in connection with the good faith performance of their duties to the Company, with the knowledge that certain costs, judgments, penalties, fines, liabilities and expenses incurred by them in their defense of such litigation are to be borne by the Company and they shall receive the maximum protection against such risks and liabilities as may be afforded by law, the Board of Directors of the Company has determined that the following Agreement is reasonable and prudent to promote and ensure the best interests of the Company and its stockholders; and

WHEREAS, the Company desires to have Indemnitee continue to serve as a director or officer of the Company and in such other capacity with respect to the Company as the Company may request, as the case may be, free from undue concern for unpredictable, inappropriate or unreasonable legal risks and personal liabilities by reason of Indemnitee acting in good faith in the performance of Indemnitee’s duty to the Company; and Indemnitee desires to continue so to serve the Company, provided, and on the express condition, that he or she is furnished with the protections set forth hereinafter.


AGREEMENT

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of Indemnitee’s continued service as a director or officer of the Company, the parties hereto agree as follows:

1. Service by Indemnitee . Indemnitee shall serve and/or continue to serve as a director or officer of the Company faithfully and to the best of Indemnitee’s ability so long as Indemnitee is duly elected or appointed and until such time as Indemnitee’s successor is elected and qualified or the Indemnitee dies, is removed as permitted by law or tenders a resignation in writing.

2. Indemnification and Advancement of Expenses . The Company shall indemnify and hold harmless Indemnitee, and shall pay to Indemnitee in advance of the final disposition of any Proceeding all Expenses incurred by Indemnitee in defending any such Proceeding, to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law in effect on the date of this Agreement or as such law may from time to time be amended (but, in the case of any such amendment, only to the extent that such amendment permits the Company to provide broader rights than said law permitted the Company to provide prior to such amendment), on the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement. Without diminishing the scope of the rights provided by this Section, the rights of Indemnitee to indemnification and advancement of Expenses provided hereunder shall include but shall not be limited to those rights hereinafter set forth, except that no indemnification or advancement of Expenses shall be paid to Indemnitee:

(a) to the extent expressly prohibited by law or the Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws of the Company;

(b) for and to the extent that payment is actually made to Indemnitee under a valid and collectible insurance policy or under a valid and enforceable indemnity clause, provision of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws, or agreement of the Company or any other company or other enterprise where Indemnitee is or was serving at the request of the Company (and Indemnitee shall reimburse the Company for any amounts paid by the Company and subsequently so recovered by the Indemnitee); or

(c) in connection with an action, suit or proceeding, or part thereof initiated by Indemnitee (including claims and counterclaims, whether such counterclaims are asserted by Indemnitee or the Company, in an action, suit or proceeding initiated by Indemnitee), except a judicial proceeding or arbitration pursuant to Section 10 to enforce rights under this Agreement, unless the action, suit or proceeding (or part thereof) was authorized or ratified by the Board of Directors of the Company; or


(d) with respect to any Proceeding brought by or on behalf of the Company against Indemnitee that is authorized by the Board of Directors of the Company, except as provided in Sections 4, 5 and 6 below.

3. Action or Proceedings Other than an Action by or in the Right of the Company . Except as limited by Section 2 above, Indemnitee shall be entitled to the indemnification rights provided in this Section if Indemnitee was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to, or was otherwise involved in, any Proceeding (other than an action by or in the right of the Company, to which Section 4 below shall apply) by reason of the fact that Indemnitee is or was a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company or while a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company, is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of another corporation or a partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan); or by reason of anything done or not done by Indemnitee in any such capacity. Pursuant to this Section, Indemnitee shall be indemnified against all expense, liability, and loss (including, judgments, penalties, fines, ERISA excise taxes, amounts paid in settlement by or on behalf of Indemnitee and Expenses, actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee in connection with such Proceeding, if Indemnitee acted in good faith and in a manner Indemnitee reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Company, and with respect to any criminal Proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful.

4. Indemnity in Proceedings by or in the Right of the Company . Except as limited by Section 2 above, Indemnitee shall be entitled to the indemnification rights provided in this Section if Indemnitee was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to, or was otherwise involved in, any Proceeding brought by or in the right of the Company to procure a judgment in its favor by reason of the fact that Indemnitee is or was a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company or while a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company, is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of another corporation or of a partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan); or by reason of anything done or not done by Indemnitee in any such capacity. Pursuant to this Section, Indemnitee shall be indemnified against all expense, liability and loss (including judgments, penalties, fines, ERISA excise taxes , amounts paid in settlement by or on behalf of Indemnitee and Expenses), actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee in connection with such Proceeding if Indemnitee acted in good faith and in a manner Indemnitee reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Company; provided, however, that no such indemnification shall be made in respect of any claim, issue, or matter as to which Delaware law expressly prohibits such indemnification by reason of any adjudication of liability of Indemnitee to the Company, unless and only to the extent that a court of competent jurisdiction shall determine upon application that, despite the adjudication of liability but in view of all the circumstances of the case, Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification for such expense, liability or loss as such court shall deem proper.


5. Indemnification for Costs, Charges and Expenses of Successful Party . Notwithstanding the limitations of Sections 2(c), 2(d), 3 and 4 above, to the extent that Indemnitee has been successful, on the merits or otherwise, in whole or in part, in defense of any Proceeding or in defense of any claim, issue or matter therein, including, without limitation, the dismissal of any action without prejudice, or if it is ultimately determined, after all appeals by a court of competent jurisdiction, that Indemnitee is otherwise entitled to be indemnified against Expenses, Indemnitee shall be indemnified against all Expenses actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee in connection therewith.

6. Partial Indemnification . If Indemnitee is entitled under any provision of this Agreement to indemnification by the Company for some or a portion of the expense, liability and loss (including judgments, penalties, fines, ERISA excise taxes, amounts paid in settlement by or on behalf of Indemnitee and Expenses), actually and reasonably incurred in connection with any Proceeding, or in connection with any judicial proceeding or arbitration pursuant to Section 10 to enforce rights under this Agreement, but not, however, for all of the total amount thereof, the Company shall nevertheless indemnify Indemnitee for the portion of such expense, liability or loss actually and reasonably incurred to which Indemnitee is entitled.

7. Indemnification for Expenses of a Witness . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, to the maximum extent permitted by the Delaware law, Indemnitee shall be entitled to indemnification against all Expenses actually and reasonably incurred or suffered by Indemnitee or on Indemnitee’s behalf if Indemnitee appears as a witness or otherwise incurs legal expenses as a result of or related to Indemnitee’s service as a director or officer of the Company, in any threatened, pending or completed action, suit, arbitration, alternative dispute mechanism, inquiry, judicial, administrative or legislative hearing, investigation or any other threatened, pending or contemplated proceeding, whether of a civil, criminal, administrative, investigative, legislative or other nature, to which Indemnitee neither is, nor is threatened to be made, a party (in which case, the indemnification rights set forth in Sections 2, 3 and 4 shall apply).

8. Determination of Entitlement to Indemnification . To receive indemnification under this Agreement, Indemnitee shall submit a written request to the Secretary of the Company. Such request shall include documentation or information that is necessary for such determination and which is reasonably available to Indemnitee. Upon written request by Indemnitee for indemnification pursuant to Sections 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 the entitlement of Indemnitee to indemnification, to the extent not provided pursuant to the terms of this Agreement, shall be determined by the following person or persons who shall be empowered to make such determination: (a) the Board of Directors of the Company by a majority vote of Disinterested Directors, whether or not such majority constitutes a quorum; (b) a committee of Disinterested Directors designated by a majority vote of such directors, whether or not such majority constitutes a quorum; (c) if there are no Disinterested Directors, or if the Disinterested Directors so direct, by Independent Counsel


in a written opinion to the Board of Directors, a copy of which shall be delivered to Indemnitee; (d) the stockholders of the Company; or (e) in the event that a Change in Control has occurred, by Independent Counsel in a written opinion to the Board of Directors, a copy of which shall be delivered to Indemnitee. Such Independent Counsel shall be selected by the Board of Directors and approved by Indemnitee, except that in the event that a Change in Control has occurred, Independent Counsel shall be selected by Indemnitee. Upon failure of the Board of Directors so to select such Independent Counsel or upon failure of Indemnitee so to approve (or so to select, in the event that a Change in Control has occurred), such Independent Counsel shall be selected upon application to a court of competent jurisdiction. The determination of entitlement to indemnification shall be made and, unless a contrary determination is made, such indemnification shall be paid in fully by the Company not later than 60 calendar days after receipt by the Company of a written request for indemnification. Any amounts incurred by Indemnitee in connection with a request for indemnification or payment of Expenses hereunder, under any other agreement, any provision of the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws or any directors’ and officers’ liability insurance, shall be borne by the Company. The Company hereby indemnifies Indemnitee for any such amounts and agrees to hold Indemnitee harmless therefrom irrespective of the outcome of the determination of Indemnitee’s entitlement to indemnification. If the person making such determination shall determine that Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification as to part (but not all) of the application for indemnification, such person shall reasonably prorate such partial indemnification among the claims, issues or matters at issue at the time of the determination.

9. Presumptions and Effect of Certain Proceedings . The Secretary of the Company shall, promptly upon receipt of Indemnitee’s written request for indemnification, advise in writing the Board of Directors or such other person or persons empowered to make the determination as provided in Section 8 that Indemnitee has made such request for indemnification. Upon making such request for indemnification, Indemnitee shall be presumed to be entitled to indemnification hereunder and the Company shall have the burden of proof in making any determination contrary to such presumption. If the person or persons so empowered to make such determination shall have failed to make the requested determination with respect to indemnification within 30 calendar days after receipt by the Secretary of Company of such request, a requisite determination of entitlement to indemnification shall be deemed to have been made and Indemnitee shall be absolutely entitled to such indemnification, absent actual fraud in the request for indemnification. The termination of any Proceeding described in Sections 3 or 4 by judgment, order, settlement or conviction, or upon a plea of nolo contendere or its equivalent, shall not, of itself: (a) create a presumption that Indemnitee did not act in good faith and in a manner Indemnitee reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Company, or, with respect to any criminal Proceeding, that Indemnitee had reasonable cause to believe that Indemnitee’s conduct was unlawful; or (b) otherwise adversely affect the rights of Indemnitee to indemnification except as may be provided herein.


10. Remedies of Indemnitee in Cases of Determination Not to Indemnify or to Advance Expenses; Right to Bring Suit . In the event that a determination is made that Indemnitee is not entitled to indemnification hereunder or if payment has not been timely made following a determination of entitlement to indemnification pursuant to Sections 8 and 9, or if an advancement of Expenses are not timely paid pursuant to Section 15, Indemnitee may at any time thereafter bring suit against the Company in a court of competent jurisdiction in the State of Delaware seeking an adjudication of entitlement to such indemnification or advancement of Expenses. Alternatively, Indemnitee at Indemnitee’s option may seek an award in an arbitration to be conducted by a single arbitrator in the State of Delaware pursuant to the rules of the American Arbitration Association, such award to be made within 60 calendar days following the filing of the demand for arbitration. The Company shall not oppose Indemnitee’s right to seek any such adjudication or award in arbitration or any other claim. In any suit or arbitration brought by Indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification hereunder (but not in a suit or arbitration brought by the Indemnitee to enforce a right to an advancement of Expenses), it shall be a defense that the Indemnitee did not act in good faith and in a manner Indemnitee reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Company and, with respect to any criminal Proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful. Further, in any suit brought by the Company to recover an advancement of Expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the Company shall be entitled to recover such Expenses upon a final judicial decision of a court of competent jurisdiction from which there is no further right to appeal that the Indemnitee has not met the standard of conduct described above. Neither the failure of the Company (including the Disinterested Directors, a committee of Disinterested Directors, Independent Counsel or its stockholders) to have made a determination prior to the commencement of such suit or arbitration that indemnification of Indemnitee is proper in the circumstances because Indemnitee has met the standard of conduct described above, nor an actual determination by the Company (including the Disinterested Directors, a committee of Disinterested Directors, Independent Counsel or its stockholders) that Indemnitee has not met the standard of conduct described above shall create a presumption that Indemnitee has not met the standard of conduct described above, or, in the case of such a suit brought by Indemnitee, be a defense to such suit. In any suit brought by Indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification or to an advancement of Expenses hereunder, or brought by the Company to recover an advancement of Expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the burden of proving that the Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified, or to such advancement of expenses, under this Section 10 or otherwise shall be on the Company. The determination in any such judicial proceeding or arbitration shall be made de novo and Indemnitee shall not be prejudiced by reason of a determination (if so made) pursuant to Sections 8 or 9 that Indemnitee is not entitled to indemnification. If a determination is made or deemed to have been made pursuant to the terms of Section 8 or 9 that Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification, the Company shall be bound by such determination and is precluded from asserting that such determination has not been made or that the procedure by which such determination was made is not valid, binding and enforceable. The Company further agrees to stipulate in any such court or before any such arbitrator that the Company is bound by all the provisions of this Agreement and is precluded from making any assertions to the contrary. If the court or arbitrator shall determine that Indemnitee is


entitled to any indemnification or payment of Expenses hereunder, the Company shall pay all Expenses actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee in connection with such adjudication or award in arbitration (including, but not limited to, any appellate proceedings) to the fullest extent permitted by law, and in any suit brought by the Company to recover an advancement of Expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the Company shall pay all Expenses actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee in connection with such suit to the extent Indemnitee has been successful, on the merits or otherwise, in whole or in part, in defense of such suit, to the fullest extent permitted by law.

11. Non-Exclusivity of Rights . The rights to indemnification and advancement of Expenses provided by this Agreement shall not be deemed exclusive of any other rights to which Indemnitee may now or in the future be entitled under any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or Bylaws of the Company, vote of stockholders or Disinterested Directors, provision of applicable law, agreement or otherwise.

12. Expenses to Enforce Agreement . In the event that Indemnitee is subject to or intervenes in any action, suit or proceeding in which the validity or enforceability of this Agreement is at issue or seeks an adjudication or award in arbitration to enforce Indemnitee’s rights under, or to recover damages for breach of, this Agreement, Indemnitee, if Indemnitee prevails in whole or in part in such action, suit or proceeding, shall be entitled to recover from the Company and shall be indemnified by the Company against any Expenses actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee in connection therewith.

13. Continuation of Indemnity . All agreements and obligations of the Company contained herein shall continue during the period Indemnitee is a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company or is serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of another corporation or a partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan) and shall continue thereafter with respect to any possible claims based on the fact that Indemnitee was a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of the Company or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee, agent or fiduciary of another corporation or of a partnership, joint venture trust or other enterprise, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan). This Agreement shall be binding upon all successors and assigns of the Company (including any transferee of all or substantially all of its assets and any successor by merger or operation of law) and shall inure to the benefit of Indemnitee’s heirs, executors and administrators.

14. Notification and Defense of Proceeding . Promptly after receipt by Indemnitee of notice of any Proceeding, Indemnitee shall, if a request for indemnification or an advancement of Expenses in respect thereof is to be made against the Company


under this Agreement, notify the Company in writing of the commencement thereof; but the omission so to notify the Company shall not relieve it from any liability that it may have to Indemnitee. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, with respect to any such Proceeding of which Indemnitee notifies the Company:

(a) The Company shall be entitled to participate therein at its own expense;

(b) Except as otherwise provided in this Section 14(b), to the extent that it may wish, the Company, jointly with any other indemnifying party similarly notified, shall be entitled to assume the defense thereof, with counsel satisfactory to Indemnitee, upon affirmation by the Company of its indemnification obligations hereunder. After notice from the Company to Indemnitee of its election so to assume the defense thereof, the Company shall not be liable to Indemnitee under this Agreement for any expenses of counsel subsequently incurred by Indemnitee in connection with the defense thereof except as otherwise provided below. Indemnitee shall have the right to employ Indemnitee’s own counsel in such Proceeding, but the fees and expenses of such counsel incurred after notice from the Company of its assumption of the defense thereof shall be at the expense of Indemnitee unless (i) the employment of counsel by Indemnitee has been authorized by the Company, (ii) Indemnitee shall have reasonably concluded that there may be a conflict of interest between the Company and Indemnitee in the conduct of the defense of such Proceeding, or (iii) the Company shall not within 60 calendar days of receipt of notice from Indemnitee in fact have employed counsel to assume the defense of the Proceeding, in each of which cases the fees and expenses of Indemnitee’s counsel shall be at the expense of the Company. The Company shall not be entitled to assume the defense of any Proceeding brought by or on behalf of the Company or as to which Indemnitee shall have made the conclusion provided for in (ii) above; and

(c) The Company shall not be liable to indemnify Indemnitee under this Agreement for any amounts paid in settlement of any Proceeding effected without the Company’s written consent, or for any judicial or arbitral award if the Company was not given an opportunity, in accordance with this Section 14, to participate in the defense of such Proceeding. The Company shall not settle any Proceeding in any manner that would impose any financial obligation, penalty or limitation on or disclosure obligation with respect to Indemnitee without Indemnitee’s written consent. Neither the Company nor Indemnitee shall unreasonably withhold its consent to any proposed settlement.

15. Advancement of Expenses . All Expenses incurred by Indemnitee in defending any Proceeding described in Sections 3 or 4 in advance of the final disposition of such Proceeding shall be paid by the Company at the request of Indemnitee. To receive an advancement of Expenses under this Agreement, Indemnitee shall submit a written request to the Secretary of the Company. Such request shall reasonably evidence the


Expenses incurred by Indemnitee and shall include or be accompanied by an undertaking, by or on behalf of Indemnitee, to reimburse such amounts if it is finally adjudicated, after all appeals by a court of competent jurisdiction, that Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified against such Expenses by the Company as provided by this Agreement or otherwise. Indemnitee’s undertaking to reimburse any such amounts is not required to be secured. Each such advancement of Expenses shall be made within 20 calendar days after the receipt by the Secretary of the Company of such written request. Indemnitee’s entitlement to Expenses under this Agreement shall include those incurred in connection with any action, suit or proceeding by Indemnitee seeking an adjudication or award in arbitration pursuant to Section 10 of this Agreement (including the enforcement of this provision) to the extent the court or arbitrator shall determine that Indemnitee is entitled to an advancement of Expenses hereunder.

16. Separability; Prior Indemnification Agreements . If any provision or provisions of this Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable for any reason whatsoever (a) the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions of this Agreement (including without limitation, all portions of any paragraphs of this Agreement containing any such provision held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that are not by themselves invalid, illegal or unenforceable) shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby, and (b) to the fullest extent possible, the provisions of this Agreement (including, without limitation, all portions of any paragraph of this Agreement containing any such provision held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that are not themselves invalid, illegal or unenforceable) shall be construed so as to give effect to the intent of the parties that the Company provide protection to Indemnitee to the fullest enforceable extent. This Agreement shall supersede and replace any prior indemnification agreements entered into by and between the Company and Indemnitee and any such prior agreements shall be terminated upon execution of this Agreement. In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between this Agreement and the provisions of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws of the Company, such provisions of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws of the Company shall govern, except in respect of any indemnity obligation herein which is more favorable to the Indemnitee than the applicable provisions of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws, in which case the more favorable provision shall govern.

17. Headings; References; Pronouns . The headings of the sections of this Agreement are inserted for convenience only and shall not be deemed to constitute part of this Agreement or to affect the construction thereof. References herein to section numbers are to sections of this Agreement. All pronouns and any variations thereof shall be deemed to refer to the masculine, feminine, neuter, singular or plural as appropriate.

18. Definitions . For purposes of this Agreement:

(a) A “ Change in Control ” will be deemed to have occurred if the individuals who, as of the Effective Date, constitute the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the


Board of Directors; provided , however , that any individual becoming a director subsequent to such effective date whose election, or nomination for election by the stockholders of the Company, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to the election or removal of directors or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a person other than the Board of Directors.

(b) “ Disinterested Director ” means a director of the Company who is not or was not a party to the Proceeding in respect of which indemnification is being sought by the Indemnitee.

(c) “ Expenses ” includes, without limitation, expenses incurred in connection with the defense or settlement of any action, suit, arbitration, alternative dispute mechanism, inquiry, judicial, administrative, or legislative hearing, investigation, or any other threatened, pending, or completed proceeding, whether brought by or in the right of the Company or otherwise, including any and all appeals, whether of a civil, criminal, administrative, legislative, investigative, or other nature, attorneys’ fees, witness fees and expenses, fees and expenses of accountants and other advisors, retainers and disbursements and advances thereon, the premium, security for, and other costs relating to any bond (including cost bonds, appraisal bonds, or their equivalents), and any expenses of establishing a right to indemnification or advancement under Sections 8, 10, 12, and 15 hereof, but shall not include the amount of judgments, fines, ERISA excise taxes, or penalties actually levied against the Indemnitee, or any amounts paid in settlement by or on behalf of the Indemnitee.

(d) “ Independent Counsel ” means a law firm or a member of a law firm that neither is presently nor in the past five years has been retained to represent (i) the Company or the Indemnitee in any matter material to either such party or (ii) any other party to the Proceeding giving rise to a request for indemnification hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the term “Independent Counsel” shall not include any person who, under the applicable standards of professional conduct then prevailing, would have a conflict of interest in representing either the Company or the Indemnitee in an action to determine the Indemnitee’s right to indemnification under this Agreement.

(e) “ Proceeding ” means any action, suit, arbitration, alternative dispute mechanism, inquiry, judicial, administrative, or legislative hearing, investigation, or any other threatened, pending, or completed proceeding, whether brought by or in the right of the Company or otherwise, including any and all appeals, whether of a civil, criminal, administrative, legislative, investigative, or other nature, to which


the Indemnitee was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party or is otherwise involved in by reason of the fact that the Indemnitee is or was a director, officer, employee, agent, or trustee of the Company or while a director, officer, employee, agent, or trustee of the Company is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee, agent, or trustee of another corporation or of a partnership, joint venture, trust, or other enterprise, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan, or by reason of anything done or not done by the Indemnitee in any such capacity, whether or not the Indemnitee is serving in such capacity at the time any expense, liability, or loss is incurred for which indemnification or advancement can be provided under this Agreement.

19. Other Provisions .

(a) This Agreement and all disputes or controversies arising out of or related to this Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the internal laws of the State of Delaware, without regard to the laws of any other jurisdiction that might be applied because of conflicts of laws principles of the State of Delaware.

(b) This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, all of which shall be considered one and the same instrument and shall become effective when one or more counterparts have been signed by each of the parties and delivered to the other party.

(c) This Agreement shall not be deemed an employment contract between the Company and any Indemnitee who is an officer of the Company, and, if the Indemnitee is an officer of the Company, the Indemnitee specifically acknowledges that the Indemnitee may be discharged at any time for any reason, with or without cause, and with or without severance compensation, except as may be otherwise provided in a separate written contract between the Indemnitee and the Company.

(d) In the event of payment under this Agreement, the Company shall be subrogated to the extent of such payment to all of the rights of recovery of the Indemnitee, who shall execute all papers required and shall do everything that may be necessary to secure such rights, including the execution of such documents necessary to enable the Company effectively to bring suit to enforce such rights.

(e) This Agreement may not be amended, modified, or supplemented in any manner, whether by course of conduct or otherwise, except by an instrument in writing specifically designated as an amendment hereto, signed on behalf of each party. No failure or delay of either party in exercising any right or remedy


hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, and no single or partial exercise of any such right or power, or any abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such right or power, or any course of conduct, shall preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right or power.

[The remainder of this page is intentionally left blank.]


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on and as of the day and year first above written.

 

Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc.
By    

 

Indemnitee
   

Exhibit 10.25

DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP

2012 LONG-TERM INCENTIVE PLAN

1. Purpose

The purpose of the Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group 2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan (the “Plan”) is to advance the interests of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc. and its subsidiaries and controlled affiliates by stimulating the efforts of employees, officers, non-employee directors and other service providers, in each case who are selected to be participants, by heightening the desire of such persons to continue working toward and contributing to the success and progress of the Company. The Plan provides for the grant of Incentive and Nonqualified Stock Options, Stock Appreciation Rights, Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units, any of which may be performance-based, and for Incentive Bonuses, which may be paid in cash or stock or a combination thereof, as determined by the Administrator.

2. Definitions

As used in the Plan, the following terms shall have the meanings set forth below:

(a) “Administrator” means the Administrator of the Plan in accordance with Section 18.

(b) “Award” means an Incentive Stock Option, Nonqualified Stock Option, Stock Appreciation Right, Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Unit or Incentive Bonus granted to a Participant pursuant to the provisions of the Plan, any of which the Administrator may structure to qualify in whole or in part as a Performance Award.

(c) “Award Agreement” means a written or electronic agreement or other instrument as may be approved from time to time by the Administrator implementing the grant of each Award. An Agreement may be in the form of an agreement to be executed by both the Participant and the Company (or an authorized representative of the Company) or certificates, notices or similar instruments as approved by the Administrator.

(d) “Board” means the board of directors of the Company.

(e) “Cause” means, unless otherwise set forth in an Award Agreement or other written agreement between the Company and the applicable Participant, a finding by the Administrator that a Participant, before or after his Termination of Employment (i) committed fraud, embezzlement, theft, felony or an act of dishonesty in the course of his employment by the Company or an affiliate which conduct damaged the Company or an affiliate or (ii) disclosed trade secrets of the Company or an affiliate. The findings and decision of the Administrator with respect to such matter, including those regarding the acts of the Participant and the damage done to the Company, will be final for all purposes. No decision of the Administrator, however, will affect the finality of the discharge of the individual by the Company or an affiliate.

(f) “Change in Control” means (i) there shall be consummated (A) any consolidation or merger of Company in which Company is not the continuing or surviving corporation or pursuant to which shares of Company’s common stock would be converted into cash, securities

 

1


or other property, other than a merger of Company where a majority of the board of directors of the surviving corporation are persons who were directors of Company immediately prior to the merger or were elected as directors, or nominated for election as director, by a vote of at least two-thirds of the directors then still in office who were directors of Company immediately prior to the merger, or (B) any sale, lease, exchange or transfer (in one transaction or a series of related transactions) of all or substantially all of the assets of Company, or (ii) the stockholders of Company shall approve any plan or proposal for the liquidation or dissolution of Company, or (iii) (A) any “person” (as such term is used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934), other than Company or a Subsidiary thereof or any employee benefit plan sponsored by Company or a Subsidiary thereof, shall become the beneficial owner (within the meaning of Rule 13c-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) of securities of Company representing thirty-five percent (35%) or more of the combined voting power of Company’s then outstanding securities ordinarily (and apart from rights accruing in special circumstances) having the right to vote in the election of directors, as a result of a tender or exchange offer, open market purchases, privately negotiated purchases or otherwise, and (B) at any time during a period of one-year thereafter, individuals who immediately prior to the beginning of such period constituted the Board shall cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority thereof, unless election or the nomination by the Board for election by Company’s stockholders of each new director during such period was approved by a vote of at least two-thirds of the directors then still in office who were directors at the beginning of such period.

(g) “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time, and the rulings and regulations issues thereunder.

(h) “Company” means Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc., a Delaware corporation.

(i) “Controlling Stockholder” means, to the extent any such Person exists, a stockholder of the Company which controls, directly or indirectly, more than 50% of the issued and outstanding common stock of the Company.

(j) “Disability” means, as determined by the Administrator in its discretion exercised in good faith, a physical or mental condition of a Participant that would entitle him or her to payment of disability income payments under the Company’s long-term disability insurance policy or plan for employees as then in effect; or in the event that a Participant is not covered, for whatever reason under the Company’s long-term disability insurance policy or plan for employees or in the event the Company does not maintain such a long-term disability insurance policy, “Disability” means a permanent and total disability as defined in section 22(e)(3) of the Code. A determination of Disability may be made by a physician selected or approved by the Administrator and, in this respect, Participants shall submit to an examination by such physician upon request by the Administrator.

(k) “Exchange Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended from time to time, or any successor Act thereto.

(l) “Fair Market Value” means, as of any given date, the closing sales price on such date during normal trading hours (or, if there are no reported sales on such date, on the last date prior to such date on which there were sales) of the Shares on the New York Stock Exchange or,

 

2


if not listed on such exchange, on any other national securities exchange on which the Shares are listed or on an inter-dealer quotation system, in any case, as reported in such source as the Administrator shall select. If there is no regular public trading market for the Shares, the Fair Market Value of the Shares shall be determined by the Administrator in good faith and in compliance with Section 409A of the Code.

(m) “Incentive Bonus” means a bonus opportunity awarded under Section 9 pursuant to which a Participant may become entitled to receive an amount based on satisfaction of such performance criteria as are specified in the Award Agreement.

(n) “Incentive Stock Option” means a stock option that is intended to qualify as an “incentive stock option” within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.

(o) “Nonemployee Director” means each person who is, or is elected to be, a member of the Board and who is not an employee of the Company or any Subsidiary; provided, however, that no such person who is employed on a full-time basis by the Controlling Stockholder or any affiliate of, or service provider to, the Controlling Stockholder may be deemed to be a Nonemployee Director hereunder.

(p) “Nonqualified Stock Option” means a stock option that is not intended to qualify as an “incentive stock option” within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.

(q) “Option” means an Incentive Stock Option and/or a Nonqualified Stock Option granted pursuant to Section 6 of the Plan.

(r) “Participant” means any individual described in Section 3 to whom Awards have been granted from time to time by the Administrator and any authorized transferee of such individual.

(s) “Performance Award” means an Award, the grant, issuance, retention, vesting or settlement of which is subject to satisfaction of one or more performance criteria pursuant to Section 13.

(t) “Person” shall have the meaning ascribed to such term in Section 3(a)(9) of the Exchange Act and used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) thereof, including a “group” as defined in Section 13(d).

(u) “Plan” means the Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group 2012 Long-Term Incentive Plan as set forth herein and as amended from time to time.

(v) “Qualifying Performance Criteria” has the meaning set forth in Section 13(b).

(w) “Restricted Stock” means Shares granted pursuant to Section 8 of the Plan.

(x) “Restricted Stock Unit” means an Award granted to a Participant pursuant to Section 8 pursuant to which Shares or cash in lieu thereof may be issued in the future.

 

3


(y) “Retirement” means, unless otherwise set forth in an Award Agreement or other written agreement between the Company and the applicable Participant, (i) for employees: retirement from active employment with the Company and its Subsidiaries: (A) at or after age 55 with 5 years of service recognized by the Company or (B) at or after age 50 with 80 points (with points meaning the sum of the Participant’s age and years of service recognized by the Company at the time of retirement). The determination of the Administrator as to an individual’s Retirement shall be conclusive on all parties, and (ii) for Nonemployee Directors: retirement from active service with the Company after having served as a Nonemployee Director for at least an aggregate of three full years (excluding any service while a full-time employee of the Company).

(z) “Share” means a share of the Company’s common stock, no par value (or such other par value as may be designated by act of the Company’s stockholders), subject to adjustment as provided in Section 12.

(aa) “Stock Appreciation Right” means a right granted pursuant to Section 7 of the Plan that entitles the Participant to receive, in cash or Shares or a combination thereof, as determined by the Administrator, value equal to or otherwise based on the excess of (i) the Fair Market Value of a specified number of Shares at the time of exercise over (ii) the exercise price of the right, as established by the Administrator on the date of grant.

(bb) “Subsidiary” means any corporation (other than the Company) in an unbroken chain of corporations beginning with the Company where each of the corporations in the unbroken chain other than the last corporation owns stock possessing at least 50 percent or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock in one of the other corporations in the chain, and if specifically determined by the Administrator in the context other than with respect to Incentive Stock Options, may include an entity in which the Company has a significant ownership interest or that is directly or indirectly controlled by the Company.

(cc) “Substitute Awards” means Awards granted or Shares issued by the Company in assumption of, or in substitution or exchange for, awards previously granted, or the right or obligation to make future awards, by a company acquired by the Company or any Subsidiary or with which the Company or any Subsidiary combines.

(dd) “Termination of Employment” means ceasing to serve as an employee of the Company and its Subsidiaries or, with respect to a Nonemployee Director or other service provider, ceasing to serve as such for the Company, except that with respect to all or any Awards held by a Participant (i) the Administrator may determine that a leave of absence or employment on a less than full-time basis is considered a “Termination of Employment,” (ii) the Administrator may determine that a transition of employment to service with a partnership, joint venture or corporation not meeting the requirements of a Subsidiary in which the Company or a Subsidiary is a party is not considered a “Termination of Employment,” (iii) service as a member of the Board shall constitute continued employment with respect to Awards granted to a Participant while he or she served as an employee and (iv) service as an employee of the Company or a Subsidiary shall constitute continued employment with respect to Awards granted to a Participant while he or she served as a member of the Board or other service provider. The Administrator shall determine whether any corporate transaction, such as a sale or spin-off of a

 

4


division or subsidiary that employs a Participant, shall be deemed to result in a Termination of Employment with the Company and its Subsidiaries for purposes of any affected Participant’s Awards, and the Administrator’s decision shall be final and binding.

3. Eligibility

Any person who is a current or prospective officer or employee (including any director who is also an employee, in his or her capacity as such) or other service provider of the Company or of any Subsidiary shall be eligible for selection by the Administrator for the grant of Awards hereunder. To the extent provided by Section 5(d), any Nonemployee Director shall be eligible for the grant of Awards hereunder as determined by the Administrator. Options intending to qualify as Incentive Stock Options may only be granted to employees of the Company or any Subsidiary within the meaning of the Code, as selected by the Administrator.

4. Effective Date and Termination of Plan

This Plan was adopted by the Board on                     , 2012, and will become effective upon approval by the Company’s stockholders (the “Effective Date”), which approval must be obtained within twelve (12) months of the adoption of this Plan by the Board. The Plan shall remain available for the grant of Awards until the tenth (10th) anniversary of the date of Board approval of the Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Plan may be terminated at such earlier time as the Board may determine. Termination of the Plan will not affect the rights and obligations of the Participants and the Company arising under Awards theretofore granted and then in effect.

5. Shares Subject to the Plan and to Awards

(a) Aggregate Limits . The aggregate number of Shares issuable pursuant to all Awards under this Plan shall not exceed                     . The aggregate number of Shares available for grant under this Plan and the number of Shares subject to outstanding Awards shall be subject to adjustment as provided in Section 12. The Shares issued pursuant to Awards granted under this Plan may be shares that are authorized and unissued or shares that were reacquired by the Company, including shares purchased in the open market.

(b) Issuance of Shares . For purposes of Section 5(a), the aggregate number of Shares issued under this Plan at any time shall equal only the number of Shares actually issued upon exercise or settlement of an Award under this Plan. In addition, Shares subject to an Award under this Plan shall not count as shares issued under this Plan if such shares are: (i) shares that were subject to a stock-settled Stock Appreciation Right and were not issued upon the net settlement or net exercise of such Stock Appreciation Right, (ii) shares used to pay the exercise price of an Option, or (iii) shares delivered to or withheld by the Company to pay the withholding taxes related to an Award. In addition, Shares subject to Awards that have been canceled, expired or forfeited and shares subject to Awards settled in cash shall not count as shares issued under this Plan.

(c) Tax Code Limits . Upon the expiration of the reliance period relating to the exemption for corporations that become publicly held, as specified in Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), the aggregate number of Shares subject to Awards granted under this Plan

 

5


during any calendar year to any one Participant shall not exceed                     , which number shall be calculated and adjusted pursuant to Section 12 only to the extent that such calculation or adjustment will not affect the status of any Award intended to qualify as “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code but which number shall not count any tandem SARs (as defined in Section 7). The aggregate number of Shares that may be issued pursuant to the exercise of Incentive Stock Options granted under this Plan shall not exceed                     , which number shall be calculated and adjusted pursuant to Section 12 only to the extent that such calculation or adjustment will not affect the status of any option intended to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option under Section 422 of the Code. Upon the expiration of the reliance period relating to the exemption for corporations that become publicly held, as specified in Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), the maximum cash amount payable pursuant to that portion of an Incentive Bonus earned for any 12-month period to any Participant under this Plan that is intended to satisfy the requirements for “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code shall not exceed $10,000,000.

(d) Substitute Awards. Substitute Awards shall not reduce the Shares authorized for issuance under the Plan or authorized for grant to a Participant in any calendar year. Additionally, in the event that a company acquired by the Company or any Subsidiary, or with which the Company or any Subsidiary combines, has shares available under a pre-existing plan approved by stockholders and not adopted in contemplation of such acquisition or combination, the shares available for grant pursuant to the terms of such pre-existing plan (as adjusted, to the extent appropriate, using the exchange ratio or other adjustment or valuation ratio or formula used in such acquisition or combination to determine the consideration payable to the holders of common stock of the entities party to such acquisition or combination) may be used for Awards under the Plan and shall not reduce the Shares authorized for issuance under the Plan; provided that Awards using such available shares shall not be made after the date awards or grants could have been made under the terms of the pre-existing plan, absent the acquisition or combination, and shall only be made to individuals who were employees, directors or other service providers of such acquired or combined company before such acquisition or combination.

6. Options

(a) Option Awards . Options may be granted at any time and from time to time prior to the termination of the Plan to Participants as determined by the Administrator. No Participant shall have any rights as a stockholder with respect to any Shares subject to Option hereunder until said Shares have been issued. Each Option shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement. Options granted pursuant to the Plan need not be identical but each Option must contain and be subject to the terms and conditions set forth below.

(b) Price . The Administrator will establish the exercise price per Share under each Option, which, in no event will be less than the Fair Market Value of the Shares on the date of grant; provided, however, that the exercise price per Share with respect to an Option that is granted in connection with a merger or other acquisition as a substitute or replacement award for options held by optionees of the acquired entity may be less than 100% of the market price of the Shares on the date such Option is granted if such exercise price is based on a formula set forth in the terms of the options held by such optionees or in the terms of the agreement providing for such merger or other acquisition. The exercise price of any Option may be paid in Shares, cash

 

6


or a combination thereof, as determined by the Administrator, including an irrevocable commitment by a broker to pay over such amount from a sale of the Shares issuable under an Option, the delivery of previously owned Shares and withholding of Shares otherwise deliverable upon exercise.

(c) No Repricing without Stockholder Approval . Other than in connection with a change in the Company’s capitalization (as described in Section 12), at any time when the exercise price of an Option is above the Fair Market Value of a Share, the Company shall not, without stockholder approval, (i) reduce the exercise price of such Option, (ii) exchange such Option for cash, another Award or a new Option or Stock Appreciation Right with a lower exercise or base price or (iii) otherwise reprice such Option.

(d) Provisions Applicable to Options . The date on which Options become exercisable shall be determined at the sole discretion of the Administrator and set forth in an Award Agreement. The Administrator shall establish the term of each Option, which in no case shall exceed a period of ten (10) years from the date of grant.

(e) Termination of Employment : Unless an Option earlier expires upon the expiration date established pursuant to Section 6(d), upon the Participant’s Termination of Employment, his or her rights to exercise an Option then held shall be only as follows, unless the Administrator specifies otherwise (either in an Award Agreement or otherwise):

(i) General . In general, any portion of any Option that is not vested as of the date of a Participant’s Termination of Employment shall be forfeited and returned to the Company; provided, however, that the Administrator may, in its sole discretion, in the event of a Participant’s retirement or involuntary Termination of Employment as the result of a reduction in force program (as approved by the Administrator in its sole discretion), provide for accelerated vesting of unvested Options upon such terms and the Administrator deems advisable (either in an Award Agreement or otherwise).

(ii) Death . Upon the death of a Participant while in the employ of the Company or any Subsidiary or while serving as a member of the Board, the Participant’s Options then held shall be exercisable by his or her estate, heir or beneficiary at any time during the period ending on the earlier of the date that is one (1) year after the date of the Participant’s death or the date the Option would otherwise terminate, but only to the extent that the Options are exercisable as of that date. Any and all Options that are not exercised during such period shall terminate as of the end of such period.

If a Participant should die following his or her Termination of Employment, any Options that remain outstanding on the date of the Participant’s death shall be exercisable by his or her estate, heir or beneficiary at any time during the period ending on the earlier of the date that is one (1) year after the date of the Participant’s death or the date the Option would otherwise terminate, but only to the extent that the Option was exercisable as of the Participant’s death. Any and all of the deceased Participant’s Options that are not exercised during such period shall terminate as of the end of such period. A Participant’s estate shall mean his or her legal representative or other person who so acquires the right to exercise the Option by bequest or inheritance or by reason of the death of the Participant.

 

7


(iii) Disability . Upon Termination of Employment as a result of the Participant’s Disability, the Participant’s Options then held shall be exercisable during the period ending on the earlier of the date that is one (1) year after the date of Participant’s Termination of Employment or the date the Option would otherwise terminate, but only to the extent that the Options are exercisable as of that date. Any and all Options that are not exercised during such period shall terminate as of the end of such period.

(iv) Retirement . Upon the Participant’s Termination of Employment by reason of his or her Retirement, the Participant’s Options then held shall be exercisable during the period ending on the earlier of the date that is three (3) years after the date of the Participant’s Termination of Employment or the expiration date of such Option, but only to the extent that the Options are exercisable as of the date of the Participant’s Termination of Employment. Any and all Options that are not exercised during such period shall terminate as of the end of such period.

(v) Cause . Upon the date of a Participant’s Termination of Employment for Cause, any Option that is unexercised prior to the date of the Participant’s Termination of Employment shall terminate as of such date.

(vi) Other Reasons . Upon the date of a Participant’s Termination of Employment for any reason other than those stated above in Sections 6(e)(i), (e)(ii), (e)(iii), (e)(iv) and (e)(v) or as described in Section 15, the Participant’s Options then held shall be exercisable during the period ending on the earlier of the date that is three (3) months after the date of the Participant’s Termination of Employment or the expiration date of such Option, but only to the extent that the Options are exercisable as of the date of the Participant’s Termination of Employment. Any and all Options that are not exercised during such period shall terminate as of the end of such period.

(f) Incentive Stock Options . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section 6, in the case of the grant of an Option intending to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option: (i) if the Participant owns stock possessing more than 10 percent of the combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company (a “10% Shareholder”), the exercise price of such Option must be at least 110 percent of the Fair Market Value of the Shares on the date of grant and the Option must expire within a period of not more than five (5) years from the date of grant, and (ii) Termination of Employment will occur when the person to whom an Award was granted ceases to be an employee (as determined in accordance with Section 3401(c) of the Code and the regulations promulgated thereunder) of the Company and its Subsidiaries. Notwithstanding anything in this Section 6 to the contrary, options designated as Incentive Stock Options shall not be eligible for treatment under the Code as Incentive Stock Options (and will be deemed to be Nonqualified Stock Options) to the extent that either (a) the aggregate Fair Market Value of Shares (determined as of the time of grant) with respect to which such Options are exercisable for the first time by the Participant during any calendar year (under all plans of the Company and any Subsidiary) exceeds $100,000, taking Options into account in the order in which they were

 

8


granted, or (b) such Options otherwise remain exercisable but are not exercised within three (3) months of Termination of Employment (or such other period of time provided in Section 422 of the Code).

7. Stock Appreciation Rights

Stock Appreciation Rights may be granted to Participants from time to time either in tandem with or as a component of other Awards granted under the Plan (“tandem SARs”) or not in conjunction with other Awards (“freestanding SARs”) and may, but need not, relate to a specific Option granted under Section 6. The provisions of Stock Appreciation Rights need not be the same with respect to each grant or each recipient. Any Stock Appreciation Right granted in tandem with an Award may be granted at the same time such Award is granted or at any time thereafter before exercise or expiration of such Award. All freestanding SARs shall be granted subject to the same terms and conditions applicable to Options as set forth in Section 6 and all tandem SARs shall have the same exercise price, vesting, exercisability, forfeiture and termination provisions as the Award to which they relate. Subject to the provisions of Section 6 and the immediately preceding sentence, the Administrator may impose such other conditions or restrictions on any Stock Appreciation Right as it shall deem appropriate. Stock Appreciation Rights may be settled in Shares, cash or a combination thereof, as determined by the Administrator and set forth in the applicable Award Agreement. Other than in connection with a change in the Company’s capitalization (as described in Section 12), at any time when the exercise price of a Stock Appreciation Right is above the Fair Market Value of a Share, the Company shall not, without stockholder approval, (i) reduce the exercise or base price of such Stock Appreciation Right, (ii) exchange such Stock Appreciation Right for cash, another Award or a new Option or Stock Appreciation Right with a lower exercise or base price or (iii) otherwise reprice such Stock Appreciation Right.

8. Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units

(a) Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Unit Awards . Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units may be granted at any time and from time to time prior to the termination of the Plan to Participants as determined by the Administrator. Restricted Stock is an award of Shares, the grant, issuance, retention, vesting and/or transferability of which is subject during specified periods of time to such conditions (including continued employment or performance conditions) and terms as the Administrator deems appropriate. Restricted Stock Units are Awards denominated in units of Shares under which the issuance of Shares is subject to such conditions (including continued employment or performance conditions) and terms as the Administrator deems appropriate. Each grant of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement. Unless determined otherwise by the Administrator, each Restricted Stock Unit will be equal to one Share and will entitle a Participant to either the issuance of Shares or payment of an amount of cash determined with reference to the value of Shares. To the extent determined by the Administrator, Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units may be satisfied or settled in Shares, cash or a combination thereof. Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units granted pursuant to the Plan need not be identical but each grant of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units must contain and be subject to the terms and conditions set forth below.

 

9


(b) Contents of Agreement . Each Award Agreement shall contain provisions regarding (i) the number of Shares or Restricted Stock Units subject to such Award or a formula for determining such number, (ii) the purchase price of the Shares, if any, and the means of payment, (iii) the performance criteria, if any, and level of achievement versus these criteria that shall determine the number of Shares or Restricted Stock Units granted, issued, retainable and/or vested, (iv) such terms and conditions on the grant, issuance, vesting and/or forfeiture of the Shares or Restricted Stock Units as may be determined from time to time by the Administrator, (v) the term of the performance period, if any, as to which performance will be measured for determining the number of such Shares or Restricted Stock Units, and (vi) restrictions on the transferability of the Shares or Restricted Stock Units. Shares issued under a Restricted Stock Award may be issued in the name of the Participant and held by the Participant or held by the Company, in each case as the Administrator may provide.

(c) Vesting and Performance Criteria . The grant, issuance, retention, vesting and/or settlement of shares of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units will occur when and in such installments as the Administrator determines or under criteria the Administrator establishes, which may include Qualifying Performance Criteria. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, the performance criteria for any Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Unit that is intended to satisfy the requirements for “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code will be a measure based on one or more Qualifying Performance Criteria selected by the Administrator and specified when the Award is granted.

(d) Termination of Employment : Upon the Participant’s Termination of Employment, his or her rights to unvested Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units then held shall be only as follows, unless the Administrator specifies otherwise (either in an Award Agreement or otherwise):

(i) Death, Disability, Retirement . In the event of a Participant’s Termination of Employment by reason of his or her death, Disability, or Retirement, any portion of any Award of Restricted Stock and/or Restricted Stock Units that is not vested as of the date of a Participant’s Termination of Employment shall immediately be forfeited by the Participant; provided, however, that the Administrator may, in its sole discretion, provide for accelerated vesting of unvested Restricted Stock and/or Restricted Stock Units upon such terms and the Administrator deems advisable (either in an Award Agreement or otherwise).

(ii) Other Reasons . In the event of a Participant’s Termination of Employment for any reason other than those stated above in Section 8(d)(i), any portion of any Award of Restricted Stock and/or Restricted Stock Units that is not vested as of the date of a Participant’s Termination of Employment shall immediately be forfeited by the Participant; provided, however, that the Administrator may, in its sole discretion, other than in the event of a Termination of Employment for Cause and in a manner consistent with the requirements of Section 8(c), provide for accelerated vesting of unvested Restricted Stock and/or Restricted Stock Units upon such terms and the Administrator deems advisable (either in an Award Agreement or otherwise).

 

10


(iii) Performance Awards . Notwithstanding anything in this Section 8(d) to the contrary, with respect to any Performance Award granted pursuant to this Section 8, in the event a Participant’s Termination of Employment by reason of his or her death, Disability, Retirement, or involuntary Termination of Employment by the Company without Cause during a performance period (and, unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, in the case of a termination by the Company without Cause, at least twelve (12) months after the beginning of the performance), the Participant shall receive a prorated payout of the Performance Award. The prorated payout shall be determined by the Administrator, in its sole discretion, and shall be based upon the length of time that the Participant held the Performance Award during the performance period and the Company’s actual results during the performance period as compared to the performance criteria to which the Performance Award is subject.

(e) Discretionary Adjustments and Limits . Subject to the limits imposed under Section 162(m) of the Code for Awards that are intended to qualify as “performance-based compensation,” notwithstanding the satisfaction of any performance goals, the number of Shares granted, issued, retainable and/or vested under an Award of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units on account of either financial performance or personal performance evaluations may, to the extent specified in the Award Agreement, be reduced, but not increased, by the Administrator on the basis of such further considerations as the Administrator shall determine.

(f) Voting Rights . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, Participants holding shares of Restricted Stock granted hereunder may exercise full voting rights with respect to those shares during the period of restriction. Participants shall have no voting rights with respect to Shares underlying Restricted Stock Units unless and until such Shares are reflected as issued and outstanding shares on the Company’s stock ledger.

(g) Dividends and Distributions . Participants in whose name an Award of Restricted Stock and/or Restricted Stock Units is granted shall be entitled to receive all dividends and other distributions paid with respect to the Shares underlying such Award, unless determined otherwise by the Administrator. The Administrator will determine whether any such dividends or distributions will be automatically reinvested in additional Shares or will be payable in cash; provided that such additional Shares and/or cash shall subject to the same restrictions and vesting conditions as the Award with respect to which they were distributed. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in no event shall dividends or dividend equivalents be currently payable with respect to unvested or unearned Performance Awards.

9. Incentive Bonuses

(a) General . Each Incentive Bonus Award will confer upon the Participant the opportunity to earn a future payment tied to the level of achievement with respect to one or more performance criteria established for a performance period of not less than one year.

(b) Incentive Bonus Document . The terms of any Incentive Bonus will be set forth in an Award Agreement or other written document establishing the terms and conditions of the Award. Each such Award Agreement or other written document shall contain provisions regarding (i) the threshold, target and maximum amount payable to the Participant as an

 

11


Incentive Bonus, (ii) the performance criteria and level of achievement versus these criteria that shall determine the amount of such payment, (iii) the term of the performance period as to which performance shall be measured for determining the amount of any payment, (iv) the timing of any payment earned by virtue of performance, (v) restrictions on the alienation or transfer of the Incentive Bonus prior to actual payment, (vi) forfeiture provisions and (vii) such further terms and conditions, in each case not inconsistent with this Plan as may be determined from time to time by the Administrator.

(c) Performance Criteria . The Administrator shall establish the performance criteria and level of achievement versus these criteria that shall determine the threshold, target and maximum amount payable under an Incentive Bonus, which criteria may be based on financial performance and/or personal performance evaluations. The Administrator may specify the percentage of the target Incentive Bonus that is intended to satisfy the requirements for “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, upon the expiration of the reliance period relating to the exemption for corporations that become publicly held, as specified in Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), the performance criteria for any portion of an Incentive Bonus that is intended by the Administrator to satisfy the requirements for “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code shall be a measure based on one or more Qualifying Performance Criteria selected by the Administrator and specified at the time the Incentive Bonus is granted. Upon the expiration of the reliance period relating to the exemption for corporations that become publicly held, as specified in Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), the Administrator shall certify the extent to which any Qualifying Performance Criteria has been satisfied, and the amount payable as a result thereof, prior to payment of any Incentive Bonus that is intended to satisfy the requirements for “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code.

(d) Timing and Form of Payment . The Administrator shall determine the timing of payment of any Incentive Bonus. Payment of the amount due under an Incentive Bonus may be made in cash or in Shares, as determined by the Administrator. The Administrator may provide for or, subject to such terms and conditions as the Administrator may specify, may permit a Participant to elect for the payment of any Incentive Bonus to be deferred to a specified date or event.

(e) Discretionary Adjustments . Notwithstanding satisfaction of any performance goals the amount paid under an Incentive Bonus on account of either financial performance or personal performance evaluations may, to the extent specified in the Award Agreement or other written document establishing the terms and conditions of the Award, be reduced or increased by the Administrator on the basis of such further considerations as the Administrator shall determine; provided, however, that upon the expiration of the reliance period relating to the exemption for corporations that become publicly held, as specified in Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), with respect to Awards that are intended to qualify as “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code, the Administrator shall not have the discretion to increase the amount paid under an Incentive Bonus.

 

12


10. Deferral of Gains

The Administrator may, in an Award Agreement or otherwise, provide for the deferred delivery of Shares upon settlement, vesting or other events with respect to Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units, or in payment or satisfaction of an Incentive Bonus. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in no event will any deferral of the delivery of Shares or any other payment with respect to any Award be allowed if the Administrator determines, in its sole discretion, that the deferral would result in the imposition of the additional tax under Section 409A(a)(1)(B) of the Code. No Award shall provide for deferral of compensation that does not comply with Section 409A of the Code, unless the Board, at the time of grant, specifically provides that the Award is not intended to comply with Section 409A of the Code. The Company shall have no liability to a Participant, or any other party, if an Award that is intended to be exempt from, or compliant with, Section 409A of the Code is not so exempt or compliant or for any action taken by the Board.

11. Conditions and Restrictions Upon Securities Subject to Awards

The Administrator may provide that the Shares issued upon exercise of an Option or Stock Appreciation Right or otherwise subject to or issued under an Award shall be subject to such further agreements, restrictions, conditions or limitations as the Administrator in its discretion may specify prior to the exercise of such Option or Stock Appreciation Right or the grant, vesting or settlement of such Award, including without limitation, conditions on vesting or transferability, forfeiture or repurchase provisions and method of payment for the Shares issued upon exercise, vesting or settlement of such Award (including the actual or constructive surrender of Shares already owned by the Participant) or payment of taxes arising in connection with an Award. Without limiting the foregoing, such restrictions may address the timing and manner of any resales by the Participant or other subsequent transfers by the Participant of any Shares issued under an Award, including without limitation (i) restrictions under an insider trading policy or pursuant to applicable law, (ii) restrictions designed to delay and/or coordinate the timing and manner of sales by Participant and holders of other Company equity compensation arrangements, (iii) restrictions in connection with any underwritten public offering by the Company of the Company’s securities pursuant to an effective registration statement filed under the Securities Act of 1933, (iv) restrictions as to the use of a specified brokerage firm for such resales or other transfers, and (v) provisions requiring Shares to be sold on the open market or to the Company in order to satisfy tax withholding or other obligations.

12. Adjustment of and Changes in the Stock

The number and kind of Shares available for issuance under this Plan (including under any Awards then outstanding), and the number and kind of Shares subject to the individual limits set forth in Section 5 of this Plan, shall be equitably adjusted by the Administrator as it determines appropriate to reflect any reorganization, reclassification, combination of shares, stock split, reverse stock split, spin-off, dividend or distribution of securities, property or cash (other than regular, quarterly cash dividends), or any other event or transaction that affects the number or kind of Shares of the Company outstanding. Such adjustment shall be designed to comply with Sections 409A and 424 of the Code or, except as otherwise expressly provided in Section 5(c) of this Plan, may be designed to treat the Shares available under the Plan and subject

 

13


to Awards as if they were all outstanding on the record date for such event or transaction or to increase the number of such Shares to reflect a deemed reinvestment in Shares of the amount distributed to the Company’s securityholders. The terms of any outstanding Award shall also be equitably adjusted by the Administrator as to price, number or kind of Shares subject to such Award, vesting, and other terms to reflect the foregoing events, which adjustments need not be uniform as between different Awards or different types of Awards.

In the event there shall be any other change in the number or kind of outstanding Shares, or any stock or other securities into which such Shares shall have been changed, or for which it shall have been exchanged, by reason of a Change in Control, other merger, consolidation or otherwise, then the Administrator shall, in its sole discretion, determine the appropriate and equitable adjustment, if any, to be effected.

No right to purchase fractional shares shall result from any adjustment in Awards pursuant to this Section 12. In case of any such adjustment, the Shares subject to the Award shall be rounded down to the nearest whole share. The Company shall notify Participants holding Awards subject to any adjustments pursuant to this Section 12 of such adjustment, but (whether or not notice is given) such adjustment shall be effective and binding for all purposes of the Plan.

Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Award Agreement or another contract, including an employment agreement, or under the terms of a transaction constituting a Change in Control, the Administrator may provide that any or all of the following shall occur upon a Participant’s Termination of Employment within twenty-four (24) months following a Change in Control: (a) in the case of an Option or Stock Appreciation Right, the Participant shall have the ability to exercise any portion of the Option or Stock Appreciation Right not previously exercisable, (b) in the case of a Performance Award or Incentive Bonus, the Participant shall have the right to receive a payment equal to the target amount payable or, if greater, a payment based on performance through a date determined by the Administrator prior to the Change in Control, and (c) in the case of Shares issued in payment of an Incentive Bonus, and/or in the case of outstanding Restricted Stock and/or Restricted Stock Units, all conditions to the grant, issuance, retention, vesting or transferability of, or any other restrictions applicable to, such Award shall immediately lapse. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Change in Control in which the acquiring or surviving company in the transaction does not assume or continue outstanding Awards upon the Change in Control, immediately prior to the Change in Control, all Awards that are not assumed or continued shall be treated as follows effective immediately prior to the Change in Control: (a) in the case of an Option or Stock Appreciation Right, the Participant shall have the ability to exercise such Option or Stock Appreciation Right, including any portion of the Option or Stock Appreciation Right not previously exercisable, (b) in the case of a Performance Award or Incentive Bonus, the Participant shall have the right to receive a payment equal to the target amount payable or, if greater, a payment based on performance through a date determined by the Administrator prior to the Change in Control, and (c) in the case of Shares issued in payment of an Incentive Bonus, and/or in the case of outstanding Restricted Stock and/or Restricted Stock Units, all conditions to the grant, issuance, retention, vesting or transferability of, or any other restrictions applicable to, such Award shall immediately lapse.

 

14


13. Qualifying Performance-Based Compensation

(a) General . The Administrator may establish performance criteria and level of achievement versus such criteria that shall determine the number of Shares, units, or cash to be granted, retained, vested, issued or issuable under or in settlement of or the amount payable pursuant to an Award, which criteria may be based on Qualifying Performance Criteria or other standards of financial performance and/or personal performance evaluations. A Performance Award may be identified as “Performance Share”, “Performance Equity”, “Performance Unit” or other such term as chosen by the Administrator. In addition, the Administrator may specify that an Award or a portion of an Award is intended to satisfy the requirements for “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code, provided that upon the expiration of the reliance period relating to the exemption for corporations that become publicly held, as specified in Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), the performance criteria for such Award or portion of an Award that is intended by the Administrator to satisfy the requirements for “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code shall be a measure based on one or more Qualifying Performance Criteria selected by the Administrator and specified at the time the Award is granted. Upon the expiration of the reliance period relating to the exemption for corporations that become publicly held, as specified in Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), the Administrator shall certify the extent to which any Qualifying Performance Criteria has been satisfied, and the amount payable as a result thereof, prior to payment, settlement or vesting of any Award that is intended to satisfy the requirements for “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code. Notwithstanding satisfaction of any performance goals, the number of Shares issued under or the amount paid under an award may, to the extent specified in the Award Agreement, be modified, but upon the expiration of the reliance period relating to the exemption for corporations that become publicly held, as specified in Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), may only be reduced, but not increased, by the Administrator on the basis of such further considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion shall determine.

(b) Qualifying Performance Criteria . For purposes of this Plan, the term “Qualifying Performance Criteria” shall mean any one or more of the following performance criteria, or derivations of such performance criteria, either individually, alternatively or in any combination, applied to either the Company as a whole or to a business unit or Subsidiary, either individually, alternatively or in any combination, and measured either annually or cumulatively over a period of years, on an absolute basis or relative to a pre-established target, to previous years’ results or to a designated comparison group, in each case as specified by the Administrator: (i) cash flow (before or after dividends), (ii) earning or earnings per share (including earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization), (iii) stock price, (iv) return on equity, (v) total stockholder return, (vi) return on capital or investment (including return on total capital, return on invested capital, or return on investment), (vii) return on assets or net assets, (viii) market capitalization, (ix) economic value added, (x) debt leverage (debt to capital), (xi) revenue, (xii) income or net income, (xiii) operating income, (xiv) operating profit or net operating profit, (xv) operating margin or profit margin, (xvi) return on operating revenue, (xvii) cash from operations, (xviii) operating ratio, (xix) operating revenue, (xx) NSR and/or total backlog, (xxi) days sales outstanding, (xxii) customer service, (xxiii) operational safety, reliability and/or efficiency; (xxiv) environmental incidents. To the extent consistent with Section 162(m) of the Code, the Administrator (A) shall appropriately adjust any evaluation of performance under a Qualifying Performance Criteria to eliminate the effects of charges for restructurings, discontinued

 

15


operations, extraordinary items and all items of gain, loss or expense determined to be extraordinary or unusual in nature or related to the acquisition or disposal of a segment of a business or related to a change in accounting principle all as determined in accordance with applicable accounting provisions, as well as the cumulative effect of accounting changes, in each case as determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles or identified in the Company’s financial statements or notes to the financial statements, and (B) may appropriately adjust any evaluation of performance under a Qualifying Performance Criteria to exclude any of the following events that occurs during a performance period: (i) asset write-downs, (ii) litigation, claims, judgments or settlements, (iii) the effect of changes in tax law or other such laws or provisions affecting reported results, (iv) accruals for reorganization and restructuring programs and (v) accruals of any amounts for payment under this Plan or any other compensation arrangement maintained by the Company.

14. Transferability

Each Award may not be sold, transferred, pledged, assigned, or otherwise alienated or hypothecated by a Participant other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution, and each Option or Stock Appreciation Right shall be exercisable only by the Participant during his or her lifetime. Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent permitted by the Administrator, the person to whom an Award is initially granted (the “Grantee”) may transfer an Award to any “family member” of the Grantee (as such term is defined in Section 1(a)(5) of the General Instructions to Form S-8 under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (“Form S-8”)), to trusts solely for the benefit of such family members and to partnerships in which such family members and/or trusts are the only partners; provided that, (i) as a condition thereof, the transferor and the transferee must execute a written agreement containing such terms as specified by the Administrator, and (ii) the transfer is pursuant to a gift or a domestic relations order to the extent permitted under the General Instructions to Form S-8. Except to the extent specified otherwise in the agreement the Administrator provides for the Grantee and transferee to execute, all vesting, exercisability and forfeiture provisions that are conditioned on the Grantee’s continued employment or service shall continue to be determined with reference to the Grantee’s employment or service (and not to the status of the transferee) after any transfer of an Award pursuant to this Section 14, and the responsibility to pay any taxes in connection with an Award shall remain with the Grantee notwithstanding any transfer other than by will or intestate succession.

15. Suspension or Termination of Awards

Except as otherwise provided by the Administrator, if at any time (including after a notice of exercise has been delivered or an award has vested) the Chief Executive Officer or any other person designated by the Administrator (each such person, an “Authorized Officer”) reasonably believes that a Participant may have committed an Act of Misconduct as described in this Section 15, the Authorized Officer, Administrator or the Board may suspend the Participant’s rights to exercise any Option, to vest in an Award, and/or to receive payment for or receive Shares in settlement of an Award pending a determination of whether an Act of Misconduct has been committed.

 

16


If the Administrator or an Authorized Officer determines a Participant has committed an act of embezzlement, fraud, dishonesty, nonpayment of any obligation owed to the Company or any Subsidiary, breach of fiduciary duty, violation of Company ethics policy or code of conduct, or deliberate disregard of the Company or Subsidiary rules resulting in loss, damage or injury to the Company or any Subsidiary, or if a Participant makes an unauthorized disclosure of any Company or Subsidiary trade secret or confidential information, solicits any employee or service provider to leave the employ or cease providing services to the Company or any Subsidiary, breaches any intellectual property or assignment of inventions covenant, engages in any conduct constituting unfair competition, breaches any non-competition agreement, induces any Company or Subsidiary customer to breach a contract with the Company or any Subsidiary or to cease doing business with the Company or any Subsidiary, or induces any principal for whom the Company or any Subsidiary acts as agent to terminate such agency relationship (any of the foregoing acts, an “Act of Misconduct”), then except as otherwise provided by the Administrator, (i) neither the Participant nor his or her estate nor transferee shall be entitled to exercise any Option or Stock Appreciation Right whatsoever, vest in or have the restrictions on an Award lapse, or otherwise receive payment of an Award, (ii) the Participant will forfeit all outstanding Awards and (iii) the Participant may be required, at the Administrator’s sole discretion, to return and/or repay to the Company any then unvested Shares previously issued under the Plan. In making such determination, the Administrator or an Authorized Officer shall give the Participant an opportunity to appear and present evidence on his or her behalf at a hearing before the Administrator or its designee or an opportunity to submit written comments, documents, information and arguments to be considered by the Administrator.

16. Compliance with Laws and Regulations

This Plan, the grant, issuance, vesting, exercise and settlement of Awards thereunder, and the obligation of the Company to sell, issue or deliver Shares under such Awards, shall be subject to all applicable foreign, federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations, stock exchange rules and regulations, and to such approvals by any governmental or regulatory agency as may be required. The Company shall not be required to register in a Participant’s name or deliver any Shares prior to the completion of any registration or qualification of such shares under any foreign, federal, state or local law or any ruling or regulation of any government body which the Administrator shall determine to be necessary or advisable. To the extent the Company is unable to or the Administrator deems it infeasible to obtain authority from any regulatory body having jurisdiction, which authority is deemed by the Company’s counsel to be necessary to the lawful issuance and sale of any Shares hereunder, the Company and its Subsidiaries shall be relieved of any liability with respect to the failure to issue or sell such Shares as to which such requisite authority shall not have been obtained. No Option shall be exercisable and no Shares shall be issued and/or transferable under any other Award unless a registration statement with respect to the Shares underlying such Option is effective and current or the Company has determined that such registration is unnecessary.

In the event an Award is granted to or held by a Participant who is employed or providing services outside the United States, the Administrator may, in its sole discretion, modify the provisions of the Plan or of such Award as they pertain to such individual to comply with applicable foreign law or to recognize differences in local law, currency or tax policy. The Administrator may also impose conditions on the grant, issuance, exercise, vesting, settlement or retention of Awards in order to comply with such foreign law and/or to minimize the Company’s obligations with respect to tax equalization for Participants employed outside their home country.

 

17


17. Withholding

To the extent required by applicable federal, state, local or foreign law, a Participant shall be required to satisfy, in a manner satisfactory to the Company, any withholding tax obligations that arise by reason of an Option exercise, the vesting of or settlement of an Award, an election pursuant to Section 83(b) of the Code or otherwise with respect to an Award. To the extent a Participant makes an election under Section 83(b) of the Code, within ten days of filing such election with the Internal Revenue Service, the Participant must notify the Company in writing of such election. The Company and its Subsidiaries shall not be required to issue Shares, make any payment or to recognize the transfer or disposition of Shares until all withholding tax obligations are satisfied. The Administrator may provide for or permit these obligations to be satisfied through the mandatory or elective sale of Shares and/or by having the Company withhold a portion of the Shares that otherwise would be issued to him or her upon exercise of the Option or the vesting or settlement of an Award, or by tendering Shares previously acquired. In addition, the Company shall be entitled to deduct from other compensation payable to each Participant any withholding tax obligations that arise in connection with an Award or require the Participant to pay such sums directly to the Company in cash or by check.

18. Administration of the Plan

(a) Administrator of the Plan . The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator who shall be the Compensation Committee of the Board or, in the absence of a Compensation Committee, the Board itself. Any power of the Administrator may also be exercised by the Board, except to the extent that the grant or exercise of such authority would cause any Award or transaction to become subject to (or lose an exemption under) the short-swing profit recovery provisions of Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 or cause an Award designated as a Performance Award not to qualify for treatment as performance-based compensation under Section 162(m) of the Code. To the extent that any permitted action taken by the Board conflicts with action taken by the Administrator, the Board action shall control. The Compensation Committee may by resolution authorize one or more officers of the Company to perform any or all things that the Administrator is authorized and empowered to do or perform under the Plan, and for all purposes under this Plan, such officer or officers shall be treated as the Administrator; provided, however, that the resolution so authorizing such officer or officers shall specify the total number of Awards (if any) such officer or officers may award pursuant to such delegated authority. No such officer shall designate himself or herself as a recipient of any Awards granted under authority delegated to such officer. In addition, the Compensation Committee may delegate any or all aspects of the day-to-day administration of the Plan to one or more officers or employees of the Company or any Subsidiary, and/or to one or more agents.

(b) Powers of Administrator . Subject to the express provisions of this Plan, the Administrator shall be authorized and empowered to do all things that it determines to be necessary or appropriate in connection with the administration of this Plan, including, without limitation: (i) to prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations relating to this Plan and to define terms not otherwise defined herein; (ii) to determine which persons are Participants, to

 

18


which of such Participants, if any, Awards shall be granted hereunder and the timing of any such Awards; (iii) to grant Awards to Participants and determine the terms and conditions thereof, including the number of Shares subject to Awards and the exercise or purchase price of such Shares and the circumstances under which Awards become exercisable or vested or are forfeited or expire, which terms may but need not be conditioned upon the passage of time, continued employment, the satisfaction of performance criteria, the occurrence of certain events, or other factors; (iv) to establish and verify the extent of satisfaction of any performance goals or other conditions applicable to the grant, issuance, exercisability, vesting and/or ability to retain any Award; (v) to prescribe and amend the terms of the agreements or other documents evidencing Awards made under this Plan (which need not be identical) and the terms of or form of any document or notice required to be delivered to the Company by Participants under this Plan; (vi) to determine whether, and the extent to which, adjustments are required pursuant to Section 12; (vii) to interpret and construe this Plan, any rules and regulations under this Plan and the terms and conditions of any Award granted hereunder, and to make exceptions to any such provisions if the Administrator, in good faith, determines that it is necessary to do so in light of extraordinary circumstances and for the benefit of the Company; (viii) to approve corrections in the documentation or administration of any Award; and (ix) to make all other determinations deemed necessary or advisable for the administration of this Plan. The Administrator may, in its sole and absolute discretion, without amendment to the Plan, waive or amend the operation of Plan provisions respecting exercise after Termination of Employment or service to the Company or an affiliate and, except as otherwise provided herein, adjust any of the terms of any Award.

(c) Determinations by the Administrator . All decisions, determinations and interpretations by the Administrator regarding the Plan, any rules and regulations under the Plan and the terms and conditions of or operation of any Award granted hereunder, shall be final and binding on all Participants, beneficiaries, heirs, assigns or other persons holding or claiming rights under the Plan or any Award. The Administrator shall consider such factors as it deems relevant, in its sole and absolute discretion, to making such decisions, determinations and interpretations including, without limitation, the recommendations or advice of any officer or other employee of the Company and such attorneys, consultants and accountants as it may select.

(d) Subsidiary Awards . In the case of a grant of an Award to any Participant employed by a Subsidiary, such grant may, if the Administrator so directs, be implemented by the Company issuing Shares to the Subsidiary, for such lawful consideration as the Administrator may determine, upon the condition or understanding that the Subsidiary will transfer the Shares to the Participant in accordance with the terms of the Award specified by the Administrator pursuant to the provisions of the Plan. Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, such Award may be issued by and in the name of the Subsidiary and shall be deemed granted on such date as the Administrator shall determine.

19. Amendment of the Plan or Awards

The Board may amend, alter or discontinue this Plan and the Administrator may amend, or alter any agreement or other document evidencing an Award made under this Plan but, except as provided pursuant to the provisions of Section 12, no such amendment shall, without the approval of the stockholders of the Company amend the Plan in any manner requiring stockholder approval by law or under the New York Stock Exchange listing requirements.

 

19


No amendment or alteration to the Plan or an Award or Award Agreement shall be made which would impair the rights of the holder of an Award, without such holder’s consent, provided that no such consent shall be required if the Administrator determines in its sole discretion and prior to the date of any Change in Control that such amendment or alteration either is required or advisable in order for the Company, the Plan or the Award to satisfy any law or regulation or to meet the requirements of or avoid adverse financial accounting consequences under any accounting standard.

20. No Liability of Company

The Company and any Subsidiary or affiliate which is in existence or hereafter comes into existence shall not be liable to a Participant or any other person as to: (i) the non-issuance or sale of Shares as to which the Company has been unable to obtain from any regulatory body having jurisdiction the authority deemed by the Company’s counsel to be necessary to the lawful issuance and sale of any Shares hereunder; and (ii) any tax consequence expected, but not realized, by any Participant or other person due to the receipt, exercise or settlement of any Award granted hereunder.

21. Non-Exclusivity of Plan

Neither the adoption of this Plan by the Board nor the submission of this Plan to the stockholders of the Company for approval shall be construed as creating any limitations on the power of the Board or the Administrator to adopt such other incentive arrangements as either may deem desirable, including without limitation, an arrangement not intended to qualify under Section 162(m) of the Code, and such arrangements may be either generally applicable or applicable only in specific cases.

22. Governing Law

This Plan and any agreements or other documents hereunder shall be interpreted and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas to the extent not preempted by federal law. Any reference in this Plan or in the agreement or other document evidencing any Awards to a provision of law or to a rule or regulation shall be deemed to include any successor law, rule or regulation of similar effect or applicability.

23. No Right to Employment, Reelection or Continued Service

Nothing in this Plan or an Award Agreement shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company, its Subsidiaries and/or its affiliates to terminate any Participant’s employment, service on the Board or service for the Company at any time or for any reason not prohibited by law, nor shall this Plan or an Award itself confer upon any Participant any right to continue his or her employment or service for any specified period of time. Neither an Award nor any benefits arising under this Plan shall constitute an employment contract with the Company, any Subsidiary and/or its affiliates. Subject to Sections 4 and 19, this Plan and the benefits hereunder may be terminated at any time in the sole and exclusive discretion of the Board without giving rise to any liability on the part of the Company, its Subsidiaries and/or its affiliates.

 

20


24. Unfunded Plan

The Plan is intended to be an unfunded plan. Participants are and shall at all times be general creditors of the Company with respect to their Awards. If the Administrator or the Company chooses to set aside funds in a trust or otherwise for the payment of Awards under the Plan, such funds shall at all times be subject to the claims of the creditors of the Company in the event of its bankruptcy or insolvency.

25. Section 409A

It is intended that any Options, Stock Appreciation Rights, and Restricted Stock issued pursuant to this Plan and any Award Agreement shall not constitute “deferrals of compensation” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code and, as a result, shall not be subject to the requirements of Section 409A of the Code. It is further intended that any Restricted Stock Units and Incentive Bonuses issued pursuant to this Plan and any Award Agreement or other written document establishing the terms and conditions of the Award (which may or may not constitute “deferrals of compensation,” depending on the terms of each Award) shall avoid any “plan failures” within the meaning of Section 409A(a)(1) of the Code. The Plan and each Award Agreement or other written document establishing the terms and conditions of an Award is to be interpreted and administered in a manner consistent with these intentions. However, no guarantee or commitment is made that the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other written document establishing the terms and conditions of an Award shall be administered in accordance with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code, with respect to amounts that are subject to such requirements, or that the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other written document establishing the terms and conditions of an Award shall be administered in a manner that avoids the application of Section 409A of the Code, with respect to amounts that are not subject to such requirements.

26. Required Delay in Payment on Account of a Separation from Service

Notwithstanding any other provision in this Plan, any Award Agreement or any other written document establishing the terms and conditions of an Award, if any Award recipient is a “specified employee,” as defined in Treasury Regulations Section 1.409A-1(i), as of the date of his or her “Separation from Service” (as defined in authoritative IRS guidance under Section 409A of the Code), then, to the extent required by Treasury Regulations Section 1.409A-3(i)(2), any payment made to the Award recipient on account of his or her Separation from Service shall not be made before a date that is six months after the date of his or her Separation from Service. The Administrator may elect any of the methods of applying this rule that are permitted under Treasury Regulations section 1.409A-3(i)(2)(ii).

 

21

Exhibit 10.29

TERMINATION AGREEMENT

THIS TERMINATION AGREEMENT, dated as of                     , 2012 (this “ Agreement ”), between HUDSON AMERICAS LLC (“ Manager ”), a Delaware limited liability company and successor in interest to Hudson Advisors, L.L.C., a Texas limited liability company (the “ Former Manager ”), CENTER CUT HOSPITALITY, INC., a Delaware corporation formerly known as Lone Star Steakhouse & Saloon, Inc. (“ Owner ”), and LONE STAR FUND V (U.S.), L.P., a Delaware limited partnership (the “ Fund ”), is entered into with respect to that certain Asset Advisory Agreement, dated as of December 13, 2006 (the “ Advisory Agreement ”) by and between the Former Manager, Owner and, for purposes of Section 7(a) thereof, the Fund.

RECITALS

WHEREAS, the Former Manager assigned its interest in the Advisory Agreement to the Manager effective as of January 1, 2009, and Owner consented to such assignment.

WHEREAS, it is expected that the parent entity of Owner (“ Parent ”) will effect an initial public offering of Parent’s common stock pursuant to a registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “ Contemplated Offering ”).

WHEREAS, in connection with the Contemplated Offering, the parties desire to terminate the Advisory Agreement upon the terms set forth herein.

AGREEMENT

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual promises contained herein and for good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties agree as follows:

1. Termination of Advisory Agreement . The Advisory Agreement is hereby terminated effective as of the closing of Contemplated Offering (the “ Effective Time ”). In connection with such termination, the parties hereto acknowledge and agree that:

(a) Manager shall have no further obligation to Owner to perform or to cause to be performed any of the services specified in Sections 1, 2 or 6 of the Advisory Agreement.

(b) Owner shall have no further obligation to Manager to pay any amount, whether accruing in the past, currently owing or payable in the future, in respect of activities conducted by Manager and/or its affiliates pursuant to the Advisory Agreement, except for fees and expenses due and owing as of the Effective Time, provided that Owner is provided with an invoice for such fees and expenses on or before the date that is thirty (30) days following the Effective Time.

(C) The provisions of Sections 7(b), 7(c), 8, 10, 11, 15, 16, 17, 20, 22, 24 and 25 of the Advisory Agreement shall survive the termination thereof and all other provisions of the Advisory Agreement shall terminate and be of no further force or effect as of the Effective Time.

2. Consideration . In consideration for the termination of the Advisory Agreement, Owner shall pay or cause to be paid to Manager or its designee an amount equal to Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000) by wire transfer of immediately available funds no later than two business days following the closing of the Contemplated Offering.


3. Miscellaneous Provisions .

(a) Further Action . Each party agrees to execute and deliver such additional documents and to take such additional actions as may be necessary or appropriate to effect the provisions of this Agreement and all transactions contemplated hereby.

(b) Applicable Law . This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas.

(c) No Prior Assignment of Rights . Each of the parties represents and warrants that it has not heretofore assigned or transferred, or purported to have assigned or transferred, to any unaffiliated firm, corporation or person whatsoever, any liability or obligation herein released and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the other party against any liability or obligation based on, arising out of or in connection with any such transfer or assignment or purported transfer or assignment.

(d) Entire Agreement . This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior written or oral understanding or agreements between the parties.

(e) Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all of which shall constitute but one agreement.

[REMAINDER OF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.]

 

2


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned have executed this Agreement as of the date first set forth above.

 

HUDSON AMERICAS LLC
By:        
 

Name:

Title:

 

CENTER CUT HOSPITALITY, INC.
By:        
 

Name:

Title:

 

LONE STAR FUND V (U.S.), L.P.

 

By:   Lone Star Partners V, L.P., its general partner

 

By:   Lone Star Management Co. V, Ltd., its general partner

By:        
 

Name: Marc L. Lipshy

Title: Vice President

 

3

Exhibit 10.30

TRANSITION SERVICES AGREEMENT

THIS TRANSITION SERVICES AGREEMENT (this “ Agreement ”) is made as of                     , 2012 by and among Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (the “ Company ”), Hudson Advisors LLC (“ HAL ”), a Texas limited liability company and Hudson Americas LLC (“ HAM ”), a Delaware limited liability company (together with HAL, “ Hudson ”).

RECITALS

A. It is expected that the Company will effect an initial public offering pursuant to a registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “ Contemplated Offering ”).

B. Prior to the Contemplated Offering, each of HAM and HAL (each, along with any other Affiliate that may be identified in the future, a “ Provider ”) provided certain general and administrative services for the benefit of the Company and its Affiliates (each, a “ Recipient ”) pursuant to an Asset Advisory Agreement (the “ Asset Advisory Agreement ”) that will be terminated in connection with the Contemplated Offering and otherwise.

C. In order to provide the Company and its subsidiaries with a reasonable opportunity following the Contemplated Offering to develop or replace certain of such services, Hudson is willing to continue to provide, and to cause the other Providers to provide, certain services to the Recipients, subject to the terms of this Agreement.

AGREEMENT

In consideration of the foregoing and the mutual covenants and agreements herein contained, and intending to be legally bound hereby, the parties agree as follows:

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

Section 1.1 Certain Definitions . As used in this Agreement, capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein shall have the meanings ascribed to them below:

Affiliate ” means, with respect to any specified person, any other person who or which, directly or indirectly, controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with such specified person.

Confidential Information ” relating to a person means any information about the business, operations, personnel, clients and affairs of such person, whether oral, written, electronic or otherwise, regardless of the form in which it is provided or maintained and regardless of who it was prepared by (together with any notes, analyses, compilations, studies, interpretations or other documents prepared by such person or its Representative which contain or otherwise reflect such information), other than information that (i) is publicly available prior to the date of this Agreement or hereafter becomes publicly available without any violation of


this Agreement or applicable law on the part of the Receiving Party or any of its Representatives; (ii) becomes available to the Receiving Party from a person other than a Disclosing Party and its Representatives who is not subject to any legally binding obligation to keep such information confidential; or (iii) is independently developed by the Receiving Party or its Representatives without any violation of this Agreement on the part of the Receiving Party or any of its Representatives.

Representative ” of a person means any Affiliate, manager, partner, principal, director, officer, employee, agent, consultant, accountant, auditor, financial advisor, attorney or other representative of such person.

ARTICLE II

SERVICES

Section 2.1 Services; Scope .

(a) Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, Hudson shall provide, and cause the other Providers to provide, to the Recipients, during the period commencing on the date of this Agreement and ending on the date determined pursuant to Article IV, those services that are specified in Schedule A hereto (the “ Services ”). The Providers shall use commercially reasonable efforts to provide the Services with a quality, nature and timeliness substantially equivalent to the similar services historically provided by the Providers before the date hereof, unless otherwise specified in this Agreement. All Services shall be for the sole use and benefit of the applicable Recipients. If during the Term (i) the parties determine that a service provided by the Providers to the Recipients prior to the date hereof is not included in Schedule A hereto (each such service, an “ Omitted Service ”), or (ii) Hudson determines that the provision of the Services hereunder would result in additional costs to the Providers that represent a material increase relative to the costs of operation of the Services included in Schedule A, then the addition of such Omitted Services to Schedule A hereto, on the one hand, and/or the adjustment of the Service Charges, on the other, shall be negotiated in good faith between the parties to this Agreement. Changes to the Services or the Service Charges shall be subject to mutual written agreement on the terms of performance of such Omitted Service and/or the amount of the Service Charges, and all agreed upon Omitted Services shall be deemed to be a Service hereunder.

(b) Throughout the Term, (i) each Provider and each Recipient of any Service shall cooperate with one another and use its good faith and commercially reasonable efforts to effect the efficient and timely provision and receipt of such Service and (ii) each Recipient shall use its good faith and commercially reasonable efforts to transition away from and wind down its use of the Services.

Section 2.2 Disclaimer of Warranties . NO PROVIDER MAKES ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THE SERVICES OR OTHER DELIVERABLES PROVIDED BY IT HEREUNDER.

 

2


Section 2.3 Compliance with Law . Each party shall comply, and shall not prevent or hinder the other party from complying, in all material respects, with all applicable laws and contractual requirements. Notwithstanding this Section 2.3 or anything to the contrary elsewhere in this Agreement, each party acknowledges and agrees that it is solely and exclusively responsible for complying with all applicable laws and contractual or other obligations that apply to such party and that the other parties shall in no event be liable for any violations or noncompliance with any such laws by such party.

ARTICLE III

SERVICE CHARGES

Section 3.1 Service Charges . The Services to be provided by any Provider hereunder shall be charged to the Company (such charges, the “ Service Charges ”) in accordance with Schedule A hereto.

Section 3.2 Invoicing and Payment . The Providers shall deliver one or more invoices to the Company for all Services provided to the Recipients on a monthly basis in arrears for the Service Charges due to the Providers under this Agreement . The Providers may deliver a single invoice aggregating the Services provided by all Providers for such month or an individual invoice on behalf of each Provider covering the Services provided by such Provider for such month. The Company shall pay the uncontested amount of each such invoice delivered to it by wire transfer or check to Hudson or its designees within 30 days after the date of such invoice(s) as instructed by Hudson in writing . Along with each invoice, the Providers shall deliver to the Company a schedule showing a calculation in reasonable detail of the Service Charges for the month reflected in such invoice . The Company shall be entitled to receive such supporting information as it may reasonably request in order to enable the Company to confirm the calculation of Services Charges . Unless the Company objects to the Service Charges set forth in an invoice in writing (each, a “ Dispute Notice ”) to Hudson within 10 days of the later of the receipt of the invoice and any additional information it has requested to confirm the calculation of Service Charges, the Service Charges reflected in such invoice shall be deemed to be the Service Charges hereunder for such month and all amounts with respect thereto shall be due and payable as set forth herein.

Section 3.3 Payment Disputes . If the Company delivers a Dispute Notice in good faith within 10 days following the later of the receipt of the schedule showing the calculation and any additional information it has requested to understand or confirm the calculation in accordance with Section 3.2 (the date on which the Company gives written notice to Hudson of its objection referred to herein as the “ Dispute Notice Date ”), the Company may withhold payment of any amount subject to the dispute noted in the Dispute Notice; provided , however , that (a) the Company shall continue to pay all undisputed amounts in accordance with the terms hereof and (b) Hudson shall continue to perform its obligations hereunder. Each party shall nominate a representative to address the dispute and such representatives shall convene as promptly as possible, and in no event more than 10 days after the Dispute Notice Date, to attempt to resolve the dispute as promptly as possible. Each party shall provide full supporting documentation concerning any disputed amount as promptly as possible and in no event later than 30 days after the Dispute Notice Date. If the dispute is not resolved to the mutual satisfaction of the parties within 40 days after the Dispute Notice Date, the disputed amount shall

 

3


be determined by an accounting firm mutually acceptable to the parties hereto, the costs of which shall be borne by the non-prevailing party. Such accounting firm’s determination of the Service Charges shall be final for all purposes hereunder, non-appealable and binding on the parties hereto.

Section 3.4 Taxes . The Service Charges do not include any taxes. Any taxes required to be paid by any Provider in connection with the performance of Services, other than taxes based on the income of such Provider, will be reimbursed by the Company in accordance with Article V, and such reimbursement shall be in addition to the Services Charges required to be paid by the Company as set forth in Schedule A hereto.

ARTICLE IV

TERM; TERMINATION

Section 4.1 Term of Agreement . This Agreement shall commence immediately upon the consummation of the Contemplated Offering and shall terminate (the period of time between the date hereof and the date of such termination, the “ Term ”) upon the earliest to occur of (a) the last date that any Service set forth in Schedule A is to be provided, if any, (b) the date on which the last Service provided hereunder has been terminated in accordance with Section 4.2, (c) the mutual written agreement of the parties to terminate this Agreement and (d) December 31, 2014.

Section 4.2 Termination of Services . Each Service set forth in Schedule A shall be provided as set forth opposite such Service in Schedule A; provided , that prior to the expiration of such duration:

(a) Hudson shall terminate the provision of any particular Service provided hereunder if the Company provides at least 10 days prior written notice to Hudson to terminate such Service, for any reason or no reason;

(b) either party may terminate the provision of any particular Service provided hereunder if the parties are unable to agree on an amendment to the Service Charges with respect to such Service following an event described in Section 2.1(a);

(c) either party may terminate any particular Service in the event of a material breach by the other party of any term or condition of this Agreement or any provision with regard to that particular Service and the breaching party does not cure such breach within 10 days after being given notice of the breach, it being understood that the failure by the Company to make any payment hereunder shall be deemed to be a material breach hereof; and

(d) the parties hereto may mutually agree in writing to terminate any particular Service.

If the effective date of the termination of any particular Service is a day other than at the end of a billing period and the Services Charges for such service accrue on a per-day, per-week or per-month basis (rather than on an hourly basis as such Service is provided), the Service Charge associated with such Service shall be prorated for the portion of the applicable billing period that such Service was provided.

 

4


Section 4.3 Effect of Termination .

(a) Upon expiration of the Term, this Agreement shall terminate, except that (i) in the event of any termination with respect to one or more, but less than all, Services, this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect with respect to any Services not terminated hereby and (ii) in any event, all of the provisions of this Agreement shall survive any termination and shall continue in full force and effect, other than Article II (Services) (excepting therefrom Sections 2.2 (Disclaimer of Warranties) and 2.3 (Compliance with Law), which shall survive).

(b) Upon termination of any particular Service pursuant to this Agreement, the Provider of the terminated Service shall have no further obligation to provide the terminated Service, and the Company shall not have any obligation to pay any Service Charges relating to such terminated Service; provided , however , that the Company shall remain obligated to pay the Service Charges owed and payable in respect of the terminated Service for the period prior to the effective date of termination of such Service.

ARTICLE V

INDEMNITY; LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

Section 5.1 Indemnification . Each Recipient shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the applicable Provider and its Affiliates and the respective Representatives, successors and assigns of each of the foregoing from and against any and all losses, damages, liabilities, deficiencies, claims, interest, awards, judgments, penalties, costs and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees, costs and other out-of-pocket expenses incurred in investigating, preparing or defending the foregoing) (collectively, “ Losses ”) incurred, sustained, or suffered by any of the foregoing (or asserted against any of the foregoing by a third party with respect to claims, which if true, would be subject to indemnification hereunder) as a result of, arising out of, relating to, or comprised of:

(a) any breach of this Agreement;

(b) any reasonable out-of-pocket third party costs incurred in connection with the provision of Services; or

(c) any other claim by any third party relating to the provision of any Services by the Providers, other than claims resulting from a Provider’s fraud, willful misconduct or gross negligence.

Section 5.2 Limitation on Liability . To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, no Provider shall be liable for any Losses resulting from such Provider’s (or any other Provider’s) provision of Services hereunder, except to the extent that any such Losses are attributable to the fraud, willful misconduct or gross negligence of such Provider.

ARTICLE VI

MISCELLANEOUS

Section 6.1 Relationship of the Parties . The relationship between the parties established under this Agreement is that of independent contractors and no party (or any of such party’s employees or independent contractors) is an employee, agent, partner, or joint venturer of or with the other.

 

5


Section 6.2 Confidential Information .

(a) If, during the course of performance of this Agreement, Confidential Information pertaining to any Provider or any Recipient, as applicable, on the one hand (a “ Disclosing Party ”), is furnished or otherwise made available to any Recipient or any Provider, as applicable, on the other hand (a “ Receiving Party ”), or any of such Receiving Party’s Representatives, the Receiving Party shall, and shall instruct its Representatives, to (i) maintain the Confidential Information in confidence using at least the same degree of care as it employs in maintaining the confidentiality of its own confidential information, but always using at least a reasonable degree of care, including, without limitation, maintaining appropriate physical, electronic and procedural safeguards to store, dispose of (if applicable) and secure the Confidential Information to ensure the security and confidentiality of the Confidential Information and to protect against any threats or hazards to the security or integrity of the Confidential Information and against any unauthorized access, use, disclosure, alteration, loss or destruction of the Confidential Information that could result in material harm to the Disclosing Party; and (ii) limit the use and disclosure of the Confidential Information solely for purposes of the Receiving Party’s or its Affiliates’ obligations, benefits or rights under this Agreement, except, in either case, for disclosures required by law; provided , however , that, to the extent permitted by applicable law, the Receiving Party shall provide the Disclosing Party with prompt written notice of such requirement so that the Disclosing Party may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy and/or waive such Receiving Party’s compliance with this Section 6.2, and that, if such protective order or other remedy is not obtained or the Disclosing Party waives compliance with this Section 6.2, the Receiving Party shall furnish only that portion of the Confidential Information that is required to be disclosed, in the opinion of the Receiving Party’s counsel, and the Receiving Party shall exercise reasonable efforts to obtain a protective order or other reliable assurance that confidential treatment will be accorded the Confidential Information.

(b) Upon the earlier of a request by a Disclosing Party or the termination of this Agreement in accordance with Article IV, each Receiving Party shall promptly return or destroy all Confidential Information of the Disclosing Party and copies thereof; provided , however , that (i) one copy of Confidential Information may be retained by the Receiving Party, subject to the confidentiality provisions herein, to the extent required to comply with legal or regulatory requirements or internal policies or guidelines of the Receiving Party, and (ii) the Receiving Party shall not be required to delete or return Confidential Information to the extent that it is “backed-up” on electronic information management and communication systems or servers . An authorized representative of the Receiving Party shall confirm in writing to the Disclosing Party compliance with its obligation set forth in the immediately preceding sentence.

Section 6.3 Amendment and Waiver .

(a) Any provision of this Agreement may be amended or waived if, and only if, such amendment or waiver is in writing and is signed by the party or parties against whom the amendment or waiver is to be effective, in an instrument specifically designated as an amendment or waiver hereto.

 

6


(b) No failure or delay of any party in exercising any right or remedy hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any such right or power, or any abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such right or power, or any course of conduct, preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right or power. The rights and remedies of the parties hereunder are cumulative and are not exclusive of any rights or remedies which they would otherwise have hereunder.

Section 6.4 Further Assurances . Each party hereto covenants and agrees that, without any additional consideration, it shall execute and deliver any further legal instruments and perform any acts that are or may become reasonably necessary to effectuate this Agreement.

Section 6.5 Notices . All notices and other communications hereunder shall be in writing and shall be deemed duly given (a) on the date of delivery if delivered personally, or if by facsimile, upon written confirmation of receipt by facsimile, e-mail or otherwise, (b) on the first business day following the date of dispatch if delivered utilizing a next-day service by a recognized next-day courier or (c) on the earlier of confirmed receipt or the fifth business day following the date of mailing if delivered by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid. All notices hereunder shall be delivered to the addresses set forth below, or pursuant to such other instructions as may be designated in writing by the party to receive such notice:

 

  (i) if to Hudson, to:

Hudson Americas LLC

Hudson Advisors LLC

2711 N. Haskell Avenue, Suite 1800

Dallas, Texas 75204

Attention: Legal Department

Facsimile: (214) 515-6924

 

  (ii) if to the Company, to:

Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC

930 S. Kimball Avenue, Suite 100

Southlake, Texas 76092

Attention: Chief Financial Officer

Facsimile: (817) 601-3438

or such other address as Hudson or the Company shall have specified to the other party in writing in accordance with this Section 6.5.

Section 6.6 Interpretation . When a reference is made in this Agreement to a Section or Article, such reference shall be to a Section or Article of this Agreement unless otherwise indicated. The headings contained in this Agreement are for convenience of reference purposes only and shall not affect in any way the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement. All words

 

7


used in this Agreement will be construed to be of such gender or number as the circumstances require. The word “including” and words of similar import when used in this Agreement will mean “including, without limitation,” unless otherwise specified. Each of the parties hereto acknowledges that it has been represented by counsel in connection with this Agreement and the transactions contemplated by this Agreement. Accordingly, any rule of law or any legal decision that would require interpretation of any claimed ambiguities in this Agreement against the drafting party has no application and is expressly waived.

Section 6.7 Entire Agreement . This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement, and supersedes all prior written agreements, arrangements, communications and understandings and all prior and contemporaneous oral agreements, arrangements, communications and understandings between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and thereof, including, without limitation, the Asset Advisory Agreement.

Section 6.8 Governing Law . This Agreement and all disputes or controversies arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the internal laws of the State of Texas, without regard to the laws of any other jurisdiction that might be applied because of the conflicts of laws principles of the State of Texas.

Section 6.9 Submission to Jurisdiction . Each of the parties irrevocably agrees that any legal action or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement brought by any other party or its successors or assigns shall be brought and determined in any Texas State or federal court, and each of the parties hereby irrevocably submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of the aforesaid courts for itself and with respect to its property, generally and unconditionally, with regard to any such action or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the transactions contemplated hereby. Each of the parties agrees not to commence any action, suit or proceeding relating thereto except in the courts described above in Texas, other than actions in any court of competent jurisdiction to enforce any judgment, decree or award rendered by any such court in Texas as described herein. Each of the parties further agrees that notice as provided herein shall constitute sufficient service of process and the parties further waive any argument that such service is insufficient. Each of the parties hereby irrevocably and unconditionally waives, and agrees not to assert, by way of motion or as a defense, counterclaim or otherwise, in any action or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby, (a) any claim that it is not personally subject to the jurisdiction of the courts in Texas as described herein for any reason, (b) that it or its property is exempt or immune from jurisdiction of any such court or from any legal process commenced in such courts (whether through service of notice, attachment prior to judgment, attachment in aid of execution of judgment, execution of judgment or otherwise) and (c) that (i) the suit, action or proceeding in any such court is brought in an inconvenient forum, (ii) the venue of such suit, action or proceeding is improper or (iii) this Agreement, or the subject matter hereof, may not be enforced in or by such courts.

Section 6.10 Assignment; Successors . Neither this Agreement nor any of the rights, interests, or obligations under this Agreement may be assigned or delegated, in whole or in part, by operation of law or otherwise, by either party without the prior written consent of the other party, and any such assignment without such prior written consent will be null and void. Subject to the preceding sentence, this Agreement will be binding upon, inure to the benefit of, and be enforceable by, the parties and their respective successors and assigns.

 

8


Section 6.11 Enforcement . The parties agree that irreparable damage would occur in the event that any of the provisions of this Agreement were not performed in accordance with their specific terms or were otherwise breached. Accordingly, each of the parties shall be entitled to specific performance of the terms hereof, including an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of this Agreement and to enforce specifically the terms and provisions of this Agreement in any Texas State or federal court, this being in addition to any other remedy to which such party is entitled at law or in equity. Each of the parties hereby further waives (a) any defense in any action for specific performance that a remedy at law would be adequate and (b) any requirement under any law to post security as a prerequisite to obtaining equitable relief.

Section 6.12 Severability . Whenever possible, each provision or portion of any provision of this Agreement shall be interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law, but if any provision or portion of any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect under any applicable law or rule in any jurisdiction, such invalidity, illegality or unenforceability shall not affect any other provision or portion of any provision in such jurisdiction, and this Agreement shall be reformed, construed and enforced in such jurisdiction as if such invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision or portion of any provision had never been contained herein.

Section 6.13 Waiver of Jury Trial . EACH OF THE PARTIES TO THIS AGREEMENT HEREBY IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ALL RIGHT TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY ACTION, PROCEEDING OR COUNTERCLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED HEREBY.

Section 6.14 Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, all of which shall be considered one and the same instrument and shall become effective when one or more counterparts have been signed by each of the parties and delivered to the other parties.

Section 6.15 Facsimile Signature . This Agreement may be executed by facsimile signature and a facsimile signature shall constitute an original for all purposes.

Section 6.16 Time of Essence . Time is of the essence with regard to all dates and time periods set forth or referred to in this Agreement.

[The remainder of this page is intentionally left blank.]

 

9


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

HUDSON AMERICAS LLC
By:    
  Name:
  Title:
HUDSON ADVISORS LLC
By:    
  Name:
  Title:
DEL FRISCO’S RESTAURANT GROUP, INC.
By:    
  Name:
  Title:


SCHEDULE A

 

Provider

  

Service Description

  

Term (if any)

  

Service Charges

Hudson Americas LLC

   Legal    None   

$500 per hour per attorney;

$100 per hour per legal assistant

Hudson Advisors LLC

   Insurance management    None    $200 per hour per professional

Hudson Advisors LLC

   Benefits administration    None    $200 per hour per professional

Exhibit 23.1

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

We consent to the reference to our firm under the caption “Experts” and to the use of our reports dated April 16, 2012 (except for the adoption of ASU 2011-05 as discussed in Note 2, as to which the date is May 17, 2012), in Amendment No. 3 to the Registration Statement (form S-1 No. 333-179141) and related Prospectus of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, LLC for the registration of shares of its common stock.

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP

Dallas, Texas

June 11, 2012

EXHIBIT 99.8

CONSENT TO BE NAMED

I hereby confirm my consent to being named as a person who will become a director of Del Frisco’s Restaurant Group, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”) in the Registration Statement on Form S-1, including any all amendments and post-effective amendments thereto and any amendments filed under Rule 462(b) increasing the number of shares for which registration is sought (collectively, the “ Registration Statement ”), relating to the proposed initial public offering of common stock of the Company. This consent may be filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement.

DATED: May 30, 2012

 

/s/ John R. Kinzer        
(Signature)